REPORTS 
 
 ON THE 
 
 TOTAL SOLAR KOLIPSE 
 
 F AUGUST 1, 1869. 
 
 S; NAVAL OBSEBVATORY 
 
 G01MODOREB.F. SANDS U.S;N. 
 
 SBPERIHTENDBINT. 
 
rmitg of 
 
 No. 
 
 Division . 
 
 Range 
 Shelf. 
 
 Received 7?M4^?ff... . 1 87; 
 
REPORTS 
 
 ON 
 
 OBSERVATIONS OF THE TOTAL ECLIPSE OF THE SUN, 
 
 U GUST 7, 1869 
 
 CONDUCTED UNDER THE DIRECTION OF 
 
 COMMODORE B. F. SANDS, U. S. N 
 
 SUPERINTENDENT OF THE U. S. NAVAL OBSERVATORY, WASHINGTON, 1). C. 
 
 WASHINGTON. 
 
 GOVERNMENT FEINTING OFFICE. 
 1870. 
 

 IN THE SENATE OP THE UNITED STATES, 
 
 February 8, 187U. 
 
 Kesolceil, (the Souse concurring therein,) That there be printed one thousand extra copies of the report made by the 
 officers of the United States Naval Observatory of the total eclipse of the sun of August seven, eighteen hundred and 
 sixty-nine, for the use of the Senate, two thousand extra copies for the use of the House of Representatives, and five 
 hundred copies for distribution among scientific bodies and individuals by the Superintendent of the United States 
 Naval Observatory. 
 
 Attest: GEO. C. GORHAM. Secretary. 
 
 Ix THE HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES OF THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 J/uj/ 12, 1870. 
 
 Retained, That the House concur in the foregoing resolution of the Senate to print one thousand extra copies of tin; 
 report of the officers of the United States Naval Observatory upon the total eclipse of the sun on the seventh of August, 
 eighteen hundred and sixty-nine, for the use of the Senate, two thousand copies for the use of the House of Representa- 
 tives, and five hundred copies for distribution by the United States Naval Observatory. 
 
 Attest: I-;\VD. McPHEHSON, Clerk. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Report of Commodore B. F. SANDS, U. S. N 3 
 
 Report of Professor SIMON NEWCOMB, U. S. N., on observations of the eclipse, &c., made at Des Moiiies, Iowa, and 
 other places : 
 
 General report , 6 
 
 Description of instruments 7 
 
 Phenomena at first contact 8 
 
 Plan of search for intra-mcrciirial planets 8 
 
 Phenomena of totality 9 
 
 APPENDIX A. Comparisons of chronometers 11 
 
 B. C. Telegraphic comparison of chronometer with Kessels clock beats 11 
 
 1). Observations for local time, 12 
 
 K. Times of phases, deduced from the observations, and compared with the tabular times 13 
 
 F. Observations of the duration of totality and of other phenomena, by amateur observers 15 
 
 I. Near the northern limit 16 
 
 II. Near the southern limit 20 
 
 III. At points too far within the shadow to be used in fixing its limits 22 
 
 Report of Professor AVu.i.iAM HAKKNESS, U. S N., on observations of the eclipse, &c., made at Des Moines, Iowa: 
 
 Introductory 25 
 
 Site of temporary observatory 25 
 
 Description of temporary observatory 25 
 
 Description of instruments : 
 
 Photographic telescope 26 
 
 Forty-three-inch telescope 26 
 
 Spectroscope 27 
 
 Polariscopes 30 
 
 Six-inch sextant 30 
 
 Mercurial artificial horizon 31 
 
 Other instruments and apparatus 32 
 
 General remarks on observations for time and latitude 32 
 
 Observations for time 33 
 
 Observations for latitude 37 
 
 Telegraphic determination of longitude ; 40 
 
 Triangnlatioii connecting the various temporary observatories 49 
 
 Geographical position of the Court-house Dome 58 
 
 Height of the different stations above the sea 58 
 
 Miscellaneous work during the eclipse : 59 
 
 Spectroscope observations 60 
 
 Identification of bright lines 03 
 
 Physical constitution of the corona 04 
 
 Physical constitution of red prominences 66 
 
 Kesults of spectroscope observations 66 
 
 Scale of tints 67 
 
 Conclusion 1 67 
 
 SCHEDULE A. Record of observat ions for time at Des Moines 68 
 
 B. Record of observations for latitude at Des Moines 84 
 
 C. Record of observations for time at Washington 96 
 
IV TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 Report of Professor J. R. EASTMAN, U. 8. N., ou observations of the eclipse, &r., made at Des Moiiies, Iowa : 
 
 List of instruments 99 
 
 Description of instrument!) : 
 
 Telescope 99 
 
 Actinometer 99 
 
 Photometer 100 
 
 Barometer and thermometers r 101 
 
 Chronometers 101 
 
 Position of instruments 101 
 
 Meteorological observations before and after August 7 , , . 102 
 
 Observations on the 7th : 
 
 State of the weather , '. 103 
 
 Phenomena before totality 104 
 
 Phenomena during totality : 
 
 Corona 104 
 
 Protuberances 105 
 
 Amount of light 106 
 
 Observations with the actinoineter, photometer, and solar thermometer 107 
 
 Phenomena after totality 107 
 
 Performance of actiuometer and photometer 108 
 
 Performauce of chronometers 108 
 
 Time , 109 
 
 TABLE I. Barometer before aud after August 7 110 
 
 II. Dry thermometer before and after August 7 110 
 
 III. Wet thermometer before and after August 7 Ill 
 
 IV. Solar thermometer before and after August 7 Ill 
 
 V. Weather before and after August 7 112 
 
 VI. Extreme temperature and rain before and after August 7 114 
 
 VII. Mean results from tables I to IV, inclusive 114 
 
 VIII. Results from observations with tlie actinometer July 29 aud August 4 . . 115 
 
 IX. Results from observations with the photometer July 29 115 
 
 X. Actinometer observations August 7 116 
 
 XI. Photometer observations August 7 118 
 
 XII. Results from photometer observations August 7 119 
 
 XIII. Meteorological observations August 7 120 
 
 Report of Brevet Major EDWARD CUBTIS, Assistant Surgeon U. 8. A., ou photographic observations of the eclipse 
 made at Dos Moines, Iowa. (Communicated by the Surgeon General U. S. A.) 
 
 I. Synopsis of operations 123 
 
 II. The telescope 124 
 
 III. The observatory 127 
 
 IV. Preliminary experiments : 
 
 1. Determination of the chemical focus 127 
 
 2. Selection of photographic formulse 128 
 
 3. Estimation of length of exposures 129 
 
 4. Plan of operations for the eclipse 131 
 
 V. The eclipse -132 
 
 VI. The photographs and their teachings : 
 
 1. Photographs of the partial phases 135 
 
 2. Photographs of the totality 142 
 
 VII. Concluding suggestions '. 151 
 
 SCHEDULE A. Record of negatives 157 
 
 B. Table showing the relative actinic force of the sun at different altitudes 160 
 
 C. List of articles forming the equipment of the photographic expedition 162 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. -v 
 
 Page. 
 
 Report of Mr. J. HOMKU LANK on observations of the eclipse made at Des Moiues, Iowa 165 
 
 Report of Mr. W. 8. GII.MAX. Jr., on observations of the eclipse made at St. Paul Junction, Plymouth County, 
 Iowa : 
 
 Description of station : 
 
 Description of instruments 173 
 
 Weather during the eclipse 174 
 
 The eclipse first contact 174 
 
 Spots on the sun 175 
 
 Appearance of the solar surface 175 
 
 Approach of the total phase 175 
 
 Minute crescent near the sun 176 
 
 Totality 176 
 
 The corona - 180 
 
 Minute object seen near the sun 180 
 
 Planets and stars visible 181 
 
 The third contact 181 
 
 The last contact 181 
 
 SCHEDULE A- Meteorological record 183 
 
 B. Comparisons of chronometer for time 183 
 
 Times of contact, and of disappearance and reappearance of solar spots 185 
 
 Report of Mr. F. W. BAHDWKLL, Aid United States Naval Observatory, on observations of the eclipse made at 
 
 Bristol, Tennessee 189 
 
 Report of Brevet Brigadier General AI.HKKT J. MYER, Chief Signal officer U. S. A., on observations of the eclipse 
 
 made on White Top Mountain, near Abingdon, Virginia 193 
 
 Report of Professor ASAPII HALL, U. S. N., on observations of the eclipse made near Plover Bay, Siberia: 
 
 Introduction 199 
 
 Account of the eclipse y 200 
 
 Description of the eclipse by Mr. Rogers 201 
 
 Mr. Very's letter 202 
 
 Commander Franklin's letter 202 
 
 Results of the observations of the eclipse 203 
 
 Determination of time, latitude, and longitude 203 
 
 Latitude of Illionliouk 211 
 
 Latitude of Duutze Head 211 
 
 Longitude of Dnntze Head 212 
 
 Errors of sextant 212 
 
 Magnetic observations 213 
 
 Values of magnetic force 216 
 
 Observations of the barometer and thermometer , 217 
 
LIST OF PLATES. 
 
 PLATE I. View of the temporary observatory at Des Moiues, occupied by Professors Harknesg and Eastmau, and 
 
 Dr. Curtis. 
 
 II. Ground plan of the above. 
 AA. Observing rooiu. 
 
 a. Door. 
 
 666. Shelves. 
 
 c. Table. 
 
 i?. Professor Eastuiau's telescope. 
 f. Professor Harkness's telescope. 
 /. The equatorial for photography. 
 ;/. Tripod stand for chronometer. 
 B. Photographic dark-room. 
 hh. Doors. 
 
 ii. Dumb-waiters for passing plate-holders in and out of dark-room. 
 kli. Windows, closed by shutters. 
 III. Shelves. 
 
 i. Trough of water, holding the baths for negatives. 
 . Trough with grooved sides for fixing-bath. 
 o. Sink, composed of a wash-tub with India rubber waste-pipe. 
 p. Barrel of water, with pipe and stop-cock projecting through wall of dark-room. 
 
 III. Triangulatiou connecting tlie various temporary observatories at Des Moines in August, 1869. 
 
 IV. Spectroscope used by Professor Harkness. 
 
 V. Spectra of the corona and red prominences, observed by Professor Harkness. 
 VI. Curves showing the readings of the barometer and thermometer, by Professor Eastmau. 
 VII. Curves shoiying the readings of the wet bulb and sun thermometers, by Professor Eastmau. 
 VIII. Curves showing the readings of the actinoineter and photometer, by Professor Eastmau. 
 IX. Colored drawings of the totally eclipsed sun as seem at Des iloines, by Professor Eastman. 
 X. Fac-simile of Dr. Curtis's first photograph of the totally eclipsed sun at Des Moines. 
 XI. Fac-simile of Dr. Curtis's second photograph of the totally eclipsed sun at Des Moiues. 
 XII. Colored drawing of the totally eclipsed sun as seen at St. Paul Junction, Plymouth County, Iowa, by 
 Mr. Oilman. 
 
REPORT 
 
 COMMODORE B. F. SANDS, U. S. N. 
 
REPORT OF COMMODORE B. l\ SANDS, U. S. 
 
 UNITED STATES NAVAL OBSERVATORY, 
 
 Washington, October L'U, 1809. 
 
 SlE: In order that the Naval Observatory should perform ils part in the observations of the 
 eclipse of the 7th of August, of this year, and take its proper share of duty on this interesting- occa- 
 sion, which has engaged the attention of all astronomers, 1 early took measures towards organizing 
 parties of officers from this observatory, to be stationed for that purpose at suitable localities upon 
 the path of totality. 
 
 It was desirable to have a party as far to the northward and westward as possible, but the 
 uncertainty of the weather in those northern regions of our own possessions caused me to hesitate 
 about detailing one of our own officers for so long a journey, with doubts of success and consequent 
 loss of his services here; but at the suggestion of Professor Cottin, in charge of the United States 
 Nautical Almanac, that Plover Hay, on the western side of P>ehring Strait, would possibly give a 
 better chance for good observations, and Professor Asaph Hall, United States Navy, of this observa- 
 tory, volunteering for the duty, he was, at my request, ordered by the department to proceed to San 
 Francisco, whence one of onr naval vessels would take his party to such station at Bchring Strait 
 as he might select . 
 
 Mr. Joseph A. liogers, of the Ilydrographic OtUce, was detailed to accompany him. They sailed 
 from New York on the 21st of May, and arrived at the station selected in ample time; were fully 
 prepared, and with every encouragement for most interesting results, when, unfortunately for entire 
 success, the contingency occurred which 1 so much feared, and the observation of the eclipse was 
 not so perfect as we desired, on account of partial obscuration, at intervals, by clouds, from just 
 before the ingress till after the egress. The very interesting report of Professor Hall will tell its own 
 tale. Valuable results were obtained, so that the expedition was not altogether futile. 
 
 Professors Simon Newcomb, William Hark ness, and J. K. Eastman, United States Navy, were 
 ordered by the department, at my request, to proceed to DCS Moines, Iowa, and select such stations 
 within one hundred miles of that locality as should be most suitable for their separate duties. Pro- 
 fessor Newcomb to observe the corona and search for intra -mercurial planetoids, according to his 
 suggestion in a paper in Silliman's Journal for May last ; Professor llarkness with his spectroscope 
 for spectra] analysis, and Professor Eastman for meteorological observations. 
 
 Surgeon General J. K. Barnes, United States Army, entered with great interest into onr plans, 
 and kindly detailed Assistant Surgeon Brevet Major Edward ( 'nrtis, United States Army, an officer 
 skilled in photography, and assistants, to accompany the observatory party. for the purpose of pho- 
 tographing the totality and various phases of the eclipse. 
 
 Vice- Admiral Porter kindly loaned the large equatorial telescope of the Naval Academy for the 
 purpose, and a small temporary observatory was erected in our grounds here, where Dr. Curtis 
 passed several weeks in practice and preparation for his interesting work, and he has been rewarded 
 for his labor by photographs which can scarcely be excelled. The observatory not having an instru- 
 ment ready for reading off the photographs obtained, that work wilJ be put in hand at once as soon 
 as the instrument is made, and the results will be published immediately. 
 
 Upon their arrival at DCS Moines all these ollicers selected that locality as the best for their 
 several observations; Professors llarkness and Eastman, and Dr. Curtis, uniting and erecting one 
 observatory, and Professor Newcomb occupy ing another in a different part of the city for his observa- 
 tions. 
 
 Mr. V. W. Bawlwell, "Aid," was sent to Bristol, Tennessee, for additional observations upon 
 the corona, leaving on duty at the observatory only Prqiessor Yarnall and Aids Doolittle and Frisby. 
 
4 REPORT OF COMMODORE SANDS. 
 
 I addressed circular letters to the postmasters on tbe path of totality to interest intelligent 
 observers and forward their results to this observatory, and the newspapers generally published 
 our instructions to observers. From these reports \ve reap a good harvest of information, which, 
 although not purely scientific, has been discussed at the observatory and embodied in the report of 
 Professor Newcomb. 
 
 To do full justice to these officers (army and navy) of the observatory parties engaged in these 
 observations, and the object for which they were undertaken, I cannot do better than submit their 
 able reports in full, with accompanying plates and illustrations. 
 
 I have been favored with most intelligent and interesting reports from private scieniilic parties, 
 which I append to this communication. One of them is from Mr. W. S. Oilman, jr., of New York, 
 who has a small observatory at the Palisades, and lias passed his leisure hours in the study of 
 astronomy, making a specialty of solar physics, and who, at his own expense, witli several assistants, 
 went to Iowa to observe the eclipse. It is to be regretted that he could not himself, consistently 
 with his plan of operations, have observed with his large-power telescope the " star" and "crescent" 
 reported by his assistants, who were not experts as he was. The others are from .Mr. J. Homer 
 Lane, of this city, a gentleman who accompanied the Coast Survey party of Professor Hilgard to 
 Des Moines, and from Brevet Brigadier Oeueral A. J. Myer, chief signal officer United States Army, 
 accompanied by Colonel W. Wiuthrop, United States Army, who had a fine position on the summit 
 of White Top Mountain, near Abingdon, Virginia. 
 
 We are greatly indebted to Mr. William Orton, president of the Western Union Telegraph ( '0111- 
 pany, and Mr. Charles A. Tinker, general manager of the same company, for the free use of their 
 telegraph wires on the evening of the eclipse, and certain hours for several days previously, for the 
 exchange of time-signals bet ween the stations and our observatory here ; and also to .Mr. M. Marean, 
 telegraph operator of the same company, who attended night and day at the observatory to receive 
 and send communications. 
 
 Our acknowledgments are also due to the many amateur observers on the line of totality who 
 took the trouble to send us their observations, from which we have gleaned much information that 
 is serviceable in our reports. 
 
 I have the honor to be, very respectfully, your obedient servant, 
 
 B. F. SANDS, 
 Commodore, Superintendent. 
 Hon. GEO. M. KOBESON, 
 
 Secretary of the Navy, Washington 
 
REP OIR T 
 
 PROFESSOR SIMON NEWCOMB, U. S. N 
 
REPORT OF PROFESSOR NEWCOMB, U. S. N. 
 
 UNITED STATES NAVAL OBSERVATORY, 
 
 Washington, September 20, 1809. 
 
 SIR : I liave the honor to present the following report of my observations on the total eclipse 
 of August 7th last. 
 
 In obedience to the orders of the department and of yourself, I left Washington on July 28th, 
 and arrived in Des Moines on the 31st. I took with me the following instruments : 
 
 The observatory comet-seeker, of four inches aperture, equatorially mounted. 
 
 The object-glass of the transit circle, aperture eight and one-half inches, focal length twelve 
 feet one inch. 
 
 The object-glass of the refraction circle, aperture six inches, focal length about nine feet. 
 
 A Gambey sextant from the Hydrographic Office, reading to ten seconds of arc, with artificial 
 horizon. 
 
 Mean-time chronometer, Negus No. 12S 1 . 
 
 On my arrival I found the temporary wooden mounting for the extra object-glasses, which you 
 had directed Professor Harkness to have made, quite ready for me. They were of the following 
 construction : Two pieces of 8" by 8" timber were firmly set in the ground to the depth of three feet, 
 the distance between them being twenty-seven inches. A strong frame, of two-inch stuff, twenty- 
 seven inches long, passed between them, turning on a horizontal axis. Through the center of this 
 frame passed the substitute for the telescope tube, consisting of a box twelve inches square and 
 twelve feet long, blackened on the inside and open at both ends. The object-glass was fastened into 
 one end, the eye-piece into the other. It turned in the frame on an axis at right angles to the other 
 axis, but admitting of a motion of only about twenty-five degrees on each side. Connecting rods 
 pass from near the bottom of each post to near the eye-end of the telescope, where they could be 
 clamped with a button, and the telescope thus be fixed in any required position. 
 
 If 1 had the eclipse to observe over again I should try to make the mounting an equatorial one, 
 by pointing the axis of the frame towards the pole. 
 
 After an examination of different localities I selected as my observing station a point in the 
 yard of the county court-house, near the Coast Survey longitude station. It is nearly a mile south, 
 and nearly 1 s west of Professor Harkness's observatory. 
 
 From data obtained privately from other parties, I concluded that the position of my station 
 was very nearly as follows : 
 
 Latitude 41 35' 4" 
 
 West longitude from Washington I 1 ' G m 17 8 .0; 
 
 a result which I do not think can be in error by as much as 2" in latitude, or 1 s in longitude. 
 
 The occupation of a station near my lodgings and near workshops, stores, &c., saved much 
 trouble and expense. It is just to state that it was only through official courtesies rendered by the 
 following gentlemen that 1 was enabled successfully to occupy a station so convenient, namely, his 
 honor J. II. Hatch, mayor of Des Moines, his honor J. li. Miller, judge of the county court, and 
 Hoyt Sherman, esq. 
 
 A position was chosen, such that the gable end of the court-house could be used in mounting 
 the screens. A horizontal arm was made to project several feet to the north of the roof. On this 
 arm were mounted three circular screens of 15, 18, and 21 inches diameter, in such a position that 
 they would just hide the sun from points near the south end of my observatory during the total 
 eclipse. Their diameters as measured with a sextant from the observatory were respectively 33', 
 
8 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR NEWCOMB. 
 
 39', and 46', the largest one being farthest out. The comet-seeker was mounted near the south end 
 of the observatory, so that the outer screen could be made to hide the corona by sliding it out. Xext 
 to the north was the transit-circle glass, and then the inch glass. The observatory consisted only 
 of four walls of rough boards to protect the observers against intrusion and the instruments from 
 the wind. 
 
 In mounting the instruments I was altogether without assistance except that of the carpenter 
 and of occasional volunteers, curious to see the inside of our walls. On Thursday, however, I pro- 
 cured through Professor Safford the assistance of Mr. Armstrong, a student in the University of 
 Chicago, whose zeal and alacrity rendered his services very valuable. I also, as authorized by you. 
 tendered the use of my wooden telescopes to Professor John Fraser, president of the University of 
 Kansas, and Mr. J. II. Lane, of Washington, the former taking the transit glass, the latter that of 
 the refraction circle. I requested them to make their reports directly to yon. Mr. Armstrong beat 
 the seconds at the chronometer, counting every tenth one aloud. 
 
 During the two days preceding the eclipse the heavens were covered with clouds, brought on 
 by an east wind, and on Friday there was inist enough to make the ground in our iuclosure too 
 muddy for convenience. On Saturday morning the clouds cleared away, leaving a dense haze. This 
 haze grew thinner in the course of the day, but did not entirely vanish. 
 
 In observing the contacts 1 used the comet-seeker with an aperture 
 reduced to one inch, a power of 40, and a yellow shade. As thus seen, 
 the definition of the limb was very fine. The eye-piece was furnished 
 with four coarse black bands, arranged as in the margin, with a pair 
 of fine spider lines between them. Turning the ocular twenty degrees 
 from the position in which the sun traveled along the wire, the point 
 of the liinb where the first contact was to take place was parallel to 
 one set of wires, and I thus knew exactly where to look. 
 
 At chronometer time 
 
 I saw the minutest visible notch exactly at the expected point of contact. For two or three seconds 
 I was in some doubt whether it was really the moon's limb ; but in three seconds more the limb first 
 above and then below the notch began to assume the sharp, rough character peculiar to the moon's 
 limb, and left no doubt on the subject. As the first part of the moon which impinged on the sun 
 was a quite prominent mountain, I think the time 
 
 9 h 5G"' 3 8 .5 
 
 may be taken as the time at first contact of the general contour of the moon with that of the sun, 
 as it resulted from my observation. But the observation at 2 s .O was very precise and satisfactory. 
 In about five minutes from the commencement I placed one set of wires parallel to the line of 
 cusps, and noted the moment at which the line of cusps extended between the internal edges of the 
 other thick wires. This took place at chronometer time 
 
 10 h I- 1 31 s 
 an observation of which I felt sure within a second. 
 
 The space thus measured by the cusps was soon afterward determined by transits of the sun's 
 limb over it. 
 
 Coming now to the preparations for total phase, I remark that the main object I kept in view 
 was to determine whether there was anything at all visible outside the usually assigned limits of 
 the corona, and yet so near the sun as to be invisible at other times. More especially was it determ- 
 ined to search in the neighborhood of the sun for an immense group of very minute intra-inercurial 
 planets, the existence of which had been rendered so probable by the researches of Le Verrier on 
 the motion of Mercury. In making this search my plan was to set two of the telescopes the 8" 
 and 4" in known directions, by pointing each of them on the sun at some definite moment, ten or 
 fifteen minutes before the commencement of totality, and immediately after the latter phase to make 
 a map of any objects that might be seen in either field of view ; then to move the telescope into dif- 
 ferent positions and count the objects in each field of view. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OP AUGUST 7, J869. 9 
 
 After thus sotting- the telescopes, and removing the caps and colored glasses, I got into a 
 nearly dark box, requesting President Fraser to call when he saw the sunlight was just about to 
 disappear. 
 
 A minute or two before the advent of darkness a crowd of people who had taken their position 
 on the roof of the court-house greeted the progress of the phenomenon with loud and prolonged 
 cheering, rendering me quite uneasy for our time observations. But I think they grew quite silent 
 before the sun had entirely disappeared, and did not renew their cheers on its reappearance. 
 
 I emerged from the box a few seconds before total darkness, but did not look up until Professor 
 Fraser had given me the word. I then took a single glance at the corona through two thicknesses 
 of green glass. I then attempted to hide the corona behind the outer and the larger of the screens, 
 and thought I had done so, but after the total phase had passed I was convinced that I had mis- 
 taken the moon itself for the screen. Though I knew theoretically that the sky in the direction of 
 the moon ought to seem darker than that outside of the corona, I was wholly unprepared for so 
 strong an illusion of a black globe hanging in mid-air. The corona itself was far less bright than 
 I had anticipated. I then looked most carefully along the direction of the ecliptic to ascertain 
 whether then; was ;in,v appearance of a blush of light extending out in that direction, but I could 
 not perceive the faintest trace of any. 
 
 I next went in succession to the two telescopes, but not an object was visible in either. I then 
 swept somewhat at random, but near the ecliptic with the comet-seeker, without finding anything. 
 As any isolated object I might find would not only be incapable of certain identification, bat would 
 fail to fulfill the condition of accounting tor the motion of the perihelion of Mercury, I could only 
 regard further search as useless, and therefore proceeded to the study of the corona. But 1 first 
 took a general view of the phenomenon through the comet-seeker, with the full aperture and no 
 screen. Nearly or quite the entire corona was then visible at a single view. As thus seen, I regret 
 that I can describe it with no more accuracy than as an effulgence which, while not at all dazzling 
 to the eye, was yet glorious beyond description. An immense protuberance on the upper side of 
 the inverted corona attracted my attention. During the hurried inspection 1 made of it, the follow- 
 ing points were noticed : 
 
 1. It did not seem materially brighter than the corona; it could be viewed directly without the 
 eye being at all dazzled. 
 
 2. The large predominance of red in its color was so evident and so strongly marked that I 
 could not entertain a doubt of its reality. The tint was a most beautiful pink. 
 
 .'5. Its structure was not uniform, nor did the protuberance bear the slightest resemblance to a 
 name. It looked like an immense pile of cumulus clouds, illuminated by a white and red sun, and 
 thus exhibiting different shades of color as the light from the one sun or the other chanced to pre- 
 dominate at different points. 
 
 Leaving the telescope, I returned to naked-eye observations. Looking directly at the corona, 
 there was no actual appearance of striation, but it seemed to be of a jagged outline, extending out 
 into four sharp points, nearly in the horizontal and vertical direction, while midway between these 
 points the serrated edge hardly seemed to extend beyond the body of the moon. The greatest dis- 
 tance to which the extreme points seemed to extend did not exceed a semi-diameter of the moon, 
 and there was nothing like long rays of light extending out in any direction whatever. When I 
 turned my head, the points did not seem to turn with it. Still, I experienced a singular difficulty 
 iu judging accurately either of the number or direction of the jagged points, or of the extent to 
 which they might be optical illusions, produced by the differences in the height and brilliancy of 
 different parts of the corona. 
 
 The green glass, however, settled the latter question. Seen through this medium the corona 
 consisted simply of four or five prominences, extending around the moon, smooth 
 in their outline, shading off by imperceptible gradations and rising to different 
 heights, the greatest height not exceeding four or five minutes. The accom- 
 panying sketch gives a general idea of the impression produced by the view 
 through the colored glass, but must not be taken as a drawing of the actual phe- 
 nomenon. I have no doubt that the serrated appearance of the corona and the 
 pointed rays, were purely optical results of the irregular heights of the prominences. A fish-tail 
 
 2* 
 
10 REPORT OF PROFESSOR NEWCOMB. 
 
 gas-light, seen against a dark ground at a distance of fifty yards or more, presents to my eye a simi- 
 lar appearance. 
 
 I observed the end of totality with the naked eye at 
 
 11" 1"' 2G* 
 
 chronometer time. Mr. Armstrong had continued the counting and beating of the chronometer 
 seconds through the entire period of totality, without once raising his eyes from the chronometer. 
 The reappearance of sunlight was preceded by a general illumination of the atmosphere, commenc- 
 ing three or four seconds before the actual blazing forth of the sun. 
 
 Two or three minutes before the end of the eclipse, at [ll h 57'"] -.'! s chronometer time,* the 
 chord of cusps measured a space between one fine middle wire, and an edge of one parallel coarse 
 wire which had been found to be passed over by the sun in 27 S .1.5, a mean of four observations. 
 
 The last contact I observed at 1 1 1 ' .~>S'" i>4 s .5. 
 
 The outline of the moon was quite smooth and regular near the point of last contact. 
 
 Accompanying this report are the following papers, which I respectfully request may be con- 
 sidered as forming part of it : 
 
 A. Comparisons of my chronometer witli those of other parties engaged in observations of precision. 
 
 The comparisons were made in order to have as many connections as possible with the work of 
 other independent observers. 
 
 B. Comparisons of chronometer with the (vessels clock at Washington on the evening (if the eclipse. 
 
 the clock sending its beats by telegraph. 
 
 C. A similar comparison made by sending signals to Washington contemporaneously with certain 
 
 beats of the chronometer. The signals are fouud on the chronograph sheet of August 7. 
 
 D. Observations with a (lambey sextant to obtain the error of the chronometer on local time. 
 
 E. Times of the phases concluded from my observations, anil compared with those computed from 
 
 the tables. 
 
 F. Summary of observations for the duration of totality at various points near the limits of the 
 
 shadow, made in pursuance of the circular of instructions sent out by you, and collected from 
 
 the reports placed in my hands. 
 
 On these observations I beg leave, to remark that both their number and apparent precision 
 exceed what we had reason to expect. One of my fears in proposing the plan was that we should 
 have manufactured observations sent us, but there are none that I can detect as such. The dis- 
 cordance between the number made near the northern and southern limits is much to be regretted. 
 Those made will, however, I conceive, suffice to fix an apparent relative co-ordinate of the sun and 
 moon within a small fraction of a second of arc. 
 
 This report having been long delayed by illness, it may not be improper to state that I have in 
 the mean time carefully avoided acquiring any knowledge of the descriptions of other witnesses of 
 the eclipse which could affect my impressions of the optical portion of the phenomena. 
 
 Very respectfully, your obedient servant, 
 
 SIMON NEWCOMB, 
 
 Professor Mathematics, U. 8. N. 
 Commodore B. F. SANDS, U. S. N., 
 
 Superintendent of U. 8. Naval Observatory. 
 
 "The hours and minutes are assumed, not having been observed. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 11 
 
 A. Comparisons of cltninoim -ti-r \i'i/nn li'Sl iritli other chronometers at Des Moines. 
 
 Date. 
 
 Face of Ne- 
 gns 12*1. 
 
 Face of chro- 
 nometer. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Possessor of chro- 
 nometer. 
 
 1869. 
 
 
 
 
 
 July 31.2 
 
 9 7 59. 3 
 
 9 11 
 
 Negus 1300 . 
 
 Professor Harkuess. 
 
 
 9 9 50. 4 
 
 9 15 
 
 Negus 1319 . 
 
 Professor llarkuess. 
 
 Aug. 0.9 
 
 4 32 40.0 
 
 4 37 50 
 
 Negus 1319 ' . 
 
 Professor llarkuess. 
 
 1.9 
 
 4 44 49.11 
 
 4 50 
 
 Negus 1319 . 
 
 Professor llarkness. 
 
 4.0 
 
 9 22 40 
 
 9 27 52. 4 
 
 Negus 1319 . Professor llarkuess. 
 
 
 {2 2 50 
 
 7 50 54.8"| 
 
 
 
 
 
 Karr, in. t., ^ 
 
 Mr. E. Qoodfeliow, 
 
 6.8 
 
 2 3 5 
 
 7 51 10. 5 I 
 
 
 
 
 2 3 16 
 
 7 21. 2 j 
 
 (pocket.) ) 
 
 1'. S. Coast Survey. 
 
 7.0 
 
 ( 7 34 30 
 t 7 35 5 
 
 2 37 59.0^ 
 2 38 34. 5 > 
 
 Chronometer } 
 watch. ) 
 
 Mr. White. 
 
 7.2 
 
 t 16 20 
 
 7 20 7.2) 
 
 Chronometer f 
 
 Mr. White. 
 
 
 < 17 
 
 7 20 47. $ 
 
 watch. ii 
 
 7.2 
 
 11 51 30.5 
 
 4 50. 
 
 Fletcher 1?0r 
 
 Mr. J. E. Hilgarcl. 
 
 7.4 
 
 3 28 49. 5 
 
 6 22 40 
 
 Kessels 12*7 
 
 Mr. J. E. Hilganl. 
 
 7. 1 
 
 4 10 2.5 
 
 740 
 
 Kessels 12*7 Mr. J. E. Ililganl. 
 
 B. CoiHiHirixoHx ofXcyux 1 -> s l iritli A'c.v.s-r/.v <-lo<-k hciilx, tin xcntfroiu Waxhi at/ton Inj teleffraph^on Aug. 7.3. 
 Double beats, marking beginnings of minute, were received at 
 
 /I. HI. S, 
 
 "2 L'4 43.9 
 
 11 25 43.7 
 
 12 L>f> 43.5 
 2 27 43.4 
 2 31 42.7 
 
 It. 
 
 Coincidences of beats at 
 
 m. 
 
 2 2G 
 
 30 
 
 50: 
 0. 
 
 C. Times of reception of 5 -second signals at Washington, sent from De,t Moines in coincidence irith 
 
 certain beats of chronometer Negus 1281. . 
 
 Mean 
 
 Correction of clock 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 ft. 
 
 m. 
 
 8. 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 50 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 25 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 9 
 
 0.0 
 
 Time by Kessels clock. 
 
 ft. 
 
 i. a. 
 
 19 
 
 8 13.7 
 
 
 18.7 
 
 
 23.fi 
 
 
 9 13.8 
 
 
 18.8 
 
 
 23.8 
 
 
 28.8 
 
 
 38.9 
 
 
 43.9 
 
 
 48.8 
 
 
 53.9 
 
 
 10 19.1, 
 
 
 24.0 
 
 19 
 
 9 23.83 
 
 27.17 
 
12 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR NEWCOMB, 
 
 D. Double altitudes of the sun's limb, observed tcith Gambey se.rtant by reflection from mercury, at 
 the Court-house, Den Moines, tcith readings of sextant for tangency of limbs of sun, to give inilc.r 
 error, and the concluded results of the observations. 
 
 READINUS lot! INDEX KliROIi. 
 
 Date. 
 
 Off limb. 
 
 On limb. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 
 O ' " 
 
 c / // 
 
 
 Aug. 2. 
 
 359 27 50 
 
 32 
 
 
 
 359 28 15 
 
 31 30 
 
 Before observing altitude*. 
 
 4.2 
 
 359 28 10 
 
 31 10 
 
 After observing altitudes. 
 
 6.9 
 
 359 27 50 
 359 27 30 
 
 31 5 ) 
 
 o 30 r,o } 
 
 After observing altitudes, 
 
 7.9 
 
 359 28 10 
 359 28 10 
 
 31 25 I 
 31 5 J 
 
 After observing altitudes. 
 
 8.2 
 
 359 27 30 
 359 27 30 
 
 30 40 ? 
 30 45 $ 
 
 After observing altitudes. 
 
 Date. 
 
 Time by 
 chronometer. 
 
 Reading of 
 sextant for 
 double alt. 
 
 Sun's 
 limb. 
 
 Chronometer 
 fast of appa- 
 rent time. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 1869. 
 
 /I. m. . 
 
 o / // 
 
 
 It. III. 8. 
 
 
 Aug. 3. 8 
 
 1 29 42.0 
 
 49 24 35 
 
 U. 
 
 6 18 52.5 
 
 Adopted index cor. -f 10". 
 
 
 31 27.0 
 
 50 3 30 
 
 U. 
 
 53.0 
 
 It. HI. X. 
 
 
 33 20. 5 
 
 50 45 55 
 
 U. 
 
 52.9 
 
 Mean 6 18 52. 4 
 
 
 34 56! 5 
 
 51 21 45 
 
 U. 
 
 52.9 
 
 Eq. of time .... 5 47. 5 
 
 
 36 14.5 
 
 50 48 5 
 
 L. 
 
 52. 1 
 
 Mean time error ... 6 13 4. 9 
 
 
 37 17.0 
 
 51 11 25 
 
 L. 
 
 51.7 
 
 
 
 38 30.5 
 
 51 38 40 
 
 L. 
 
 52.7 
 
 
 
 39 21. 
 
 51 57 55 
 
 L. 
 
 51.5 
 
 
 Aug. 4. 2 
 
 10 38 41.7 
 
 59 9 20 
 
 L. 
 
 6 18 47.7 
 
 Adopted index cor. -)- 14". 
 
 
 40 35.5 
 
 58 27 5 
 
 L. 
 
 48.1 
 
 It. in. 8. 
 
 
 42 10. 5 
 
 58 54 15 
 
 \\ 
 
 46. 5 
 
 Mean 6 18 47.8 
 
 
 43 19. 5 
 
 58 29 
 
 u! 
 
 48. 1 
 
 KII time - 5 45.5 
 
 
 44 39! 5 
 
 57 59 10 
 
 u. 
 
 48! 3 
 
 Mian time error ... 6 13 2.3 
 
 
 46 15.0 
 
 56 23 30 
 
 L. 
 
 (56. 5) 
 
 Probably T. limb, with a mistake of 1 
 
 
 47 43.0 
 
 56 50 50 
 
 U. 
 
 48.8 
 
 iu the record. The corrected error is 
 
 
 49 33.5 
 
 56 9 20 
 
 U. 
 
 47.9 
 
 then 6 h 18 m 47". 9. 
 
 
 
 50 54. 5 
 
 55 38 45 
 
 U. 
 
 46.9 
 
 
 Aug. 6. 9 
 
 3 42 48. 
 
 95 48 
 
 L. 
 
 6 18 29. 6 
 
 Adopted index cor. -|- 42". 
 
 
 44 47.2 
 
 96 28 5 
 
 L. 
 
 30.0 
 
 h. m. . 
 
 
 45 46. 5 
 
 96 48 
 
 L. 
 
 30. 1 
 
 Mean ... 6 18 29. 9 
 
 
 46 58. 
 
 97 12 30 
 
 L. 
 
 28 
 
 Eq time - - . 5 27. 9 
 
 
 48 35! 
 
 97 44 40 
 
 L. 
 
 29! 
 
 Mean time error ... 6 13 2. 
 
 
 50 40. 
 
 99 28 50 
 
 U. 
 
 30.8 
 
 
 
 51 35.5 
 
 99 47 35 
 
 U. 
 
 29.9 
 
 
 
 52 37. 
 
 100 7 45 
 
 U. 
 
 30.6 
 
 
 
 53 31.2 
 
 100 25 30 
 
 U. 
 
 31.2 
 
 
 
 54 43.0 
 
 100 49 30 
 
 U. 
 
 29.7 
 
 
 Aug. 7. 9 
 
 2 59 4. 5 
 
 80 9 35 
 
 L. 
 
 6 18 22. 5 
 
 Adopted index cor. + 18". 
 
 
 3 53. 7 
 
 80 49 
 
 L. 
 
 21.5 
 
 A. H. S. 
 
 
 2 Tfi 1 
 
 81 26 2 
 
 L. 
 
 21.2 
 
 Mean 6 18 22. 2 
 
 
 - " '. O 
 
 4. 5.5 
 
 81 57 35 
 
 L! 
 
 22 6 
 
 Eq. time 5 20. 7 
 
 
 5 49! 7 
 
 82 34 50 
 
 L. 
 
 22.2 
 
 Mean time error ... 6131.5 
 
 
 7 56.7 
 
 84 23 15 
 
 u. 
 
 23.2 
 
 
 
 9 11.6 
 
 84 49 55 
 
 U. 
 
 22.8 
 
 
 
 12 21.5 
 
 85 57 30 
 
 U. 
 
 22.7 
 
 
 
 13 31.5 
 
 86 22 41 
 
 U. 
 
 21.5 
 
 
 
 14 26.5 
 
 86 41 50 
 
 U. 
 
 22.2 
 
 
 Aug. 8. 2 
 
 10 16 32. 
 
 66 50 50 
 
 U. 
 
 6 18 16.6 
 
 Adopted index cor. + 54". 
 
 
 17 51.5 
 
 66 21 40 
 
 U. 
 
 17.5 
 
 /i. m. 8. 
 
 
 MI fi u 
 
 65 54 40 
 
 U. 
 
 20. 1 
 
 Mean '. 6 18 17.5 
 
 
 A*7 U. O 
 
 20 49. 5 
 
 65 15 25 
 
 u' 
 
 16 6 
 
 Eq time 5 18. 3 
 
 
 22 o!s 
 
 64 55 
 
 u! 
 
 ie!i 
 
 Mean time error ... 6 12 59. 2 
 
 
 23 48.5 
 
 63 5 55 
 
 L. 
 
 17.0 
 
 
 
 24 57.0 
 
 62 40 55 
 
 L. 
 
 17.7 
 
 
 
 25 50. 
 
 62 21 5 
 
 L. 
 
 17.8 
 
 
 
 26 49.5 
 
 61 59 10 
 
 L. 
 
 18.0 
 
 
 
 27 49.7 
 
 61 36 40 
 
 L. 
 
 18.0 
 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OP AUGUST 7, 1869. 13 
 
 E. Times of jiltftxt'x ili'ilmnl J'nun ulixir rut ions, and compari'il ir'itli the tabular times. 
 
 From the preceding exhibit (D) it will be seeu that the general rate of the chronometer is about 
 (i iS .s per day, losing. Also, there are two days on which altitudes were observed both iu the fore- 
 noou and afternoon, namely, August 4 and August 8. Correcting the observed errors for rate of the 
 chronometer, it seems the forenoon errors exceed the'afternoon errors by the following amounts : 
 
 8. 
 
 August 4, 2.3 
 8, 2.1 
 
 Mean 2.2 
 
 This difference probably arises from eccentricity of the sextant, leading to the observed alti- 
 tudes being constantly too great. In the absence of any certain knowledge of its law we shall divide 
 the effect equally between the observed errors by applying I'M to the forenoon errors and + 1.M 
 to the afternoon errors to obtain the concluded error. Thus the following errors are obtained : 
 
 7l. m. K. 
 
 August 4.0, G 1.3 3.6 
 6.9, 0.9 
 
 8.0, 0.4 
 
 They give for the error on local time on the afternoon and evening of August 8 : 
 
 G" 13"' s . 7. 
 
 The error of the chronometer on Washington time may be obtained with great precision from 
 the data in Kxhibits B and ('. From .15 we find, knowing the longitude to be about I 1 ' G 1 " 17 s , and 
 the Washington clock to be 27 s fast of sidereal time : 
 
 /i. m. s. It. HI. s. 
 
 2 30 chron. = 18 30 17, Kessels clock. 
 
 = 18 29 49.8, Washington sidereal time. 
 
 = 10 2 15.8, Washington mean time. 
 Whence chronometer fast of Washington time: 
 
 .V' G 1 " 44".2. 
 Again, from C we find 
 
 /i. in. s. It. in. s. 
 
 3 9 chrou. = 19 9 23.8, Kessels clock. 
 
 = 19 8 56.6, Washington sidereal time. 
 = 10 2 16.2, Washington mean time. 
 Whence chronometer fast of Washington time: 
 
 5" G"' 43 S .8. 
 
 The difference of O s .4 or 8 .43 when the second decimal of seconds is included, is attributable 
 to the time of transmission of the galvanic current through two thousand four hundred miles of 
 wire, to armature time, and personal error of the observer in sending signal. 
 
 The concluded error of chronometer on Washington mean time is therefore, 
 
 5" G m 44 8 .0. 
 
 Comparing this result with the error of chronometer on local time, we have for the longitude 
 of Des Moines Court-house : 
 
 I 1 ' G m 1G S .7. . 
 
 The, definitive error on local lime will be obtained by applying to the Washington time the 
 longitude resulting from the combination of my own determinations with those of Professor I lark- 
 ness. The geodetic difference of longitude between the Court-house and Professor Harkness's 
 observatory is O s .7.* The longitude of the latter, resulting from his observations, being I' 1 G'" I 6 s . I . 
 gives for that of the Court-house I 1 ' G 1 " 1G S .8. This result is the mean of five observations. This 
 * It may be deduced from the <lat:i of these reports that from the comparison of chronometers, made on August 4, 
 will result the difference 0".6. 
 
14 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR KEWCOMB. 
 
 differs only O s .l from my single determination on August 7, and will therefore be adopted. We 
 have, therefore, for the error of chronometer in local time : 
 
 6 1 ' 13'" 8 .8. 
 
 Applying these corrections to the observed times of the three phases, we have the following 
 results, which are compared with those computed from the data of the American Ephemeris : 
 
 
 
 Local time. 
 
 Washington 
 
 time. 
 
 Ccllnp. 
 
 time. 
 
 Error of 
 
 (allies. 
 
 Error in 
 arc. 
 
 
 It. III. 8. 
 
 7i. m. H, 
 
 . 
 
 8, 
 
 ii 
 
 First contact . . . 
 
 3 43 -2. 1 
 
 4 49 1'J. 5 
 
 7.0 
 
 ]>..-> 
 
 6.0 
 
 End of totality . . 
 
 4 48 25.2 
 
 5 54 2.0 
 
 31.6 
 
 10. 1 
 
 5.4 
 
 Last contact . 
 
 5 45 23.7 
 
 6 51 40.5 
 
 32.7 
 
 7.8 
 
 4.4 
 
 Besides these phases we have two measured chords, oue just after the beginning of the eclipse, 
 the other just before the end. The observations may be expressed as follows: at 10 b l m 31 s chro- 
 nometer, the length of the chord was equal to the space passed over by the sun by its diurnal motion 
 in 54 8 .55. At [ll h ] [57 m ] 23 8 it was equal to the space passed over in 27 S .15. 
 
 These observations were reduced in the following way : represent by s the half-length of the 
 measured chord, put r and r' for the apparent semi-diameters of the sun and moon as seen by the 
 observer, and D for the apparent distance of their centers. Then 
 
 D = Vr^^f z + Vr'* s 2 
 or, if we put 
 
 * 
 
 sm a = - 
 r 
 
 sin a'= 
 
 r' 
 
 we have 
 
 D = ' COS a -4- r' COS a' 
 
 This is the distance deduced from observations. The distance was calculated from the tables 
 for the same absolute time by applying the parallax in right ascension and declination to the geo- 
 metric co-ordinates. Thus was found 
 
 Greenwich 
 
 Observed 
 
 Tabular 
 
 Krriir of 
 
 time. 
 
 distance. 
 
 distance. 
 
 tables. 
 
 7i. m. s. 
 
 / // 
 
 / // 
 
 // 
 
 9 57 19.0 
 
 . 
 
 32 23.3 
 
 . 
 
 10 2 59.0 
 
 29 37.3 
 
 29 39.3 
 
 + 2.0 
 
 11 58 51.0 
 
 31 38. 3 
 
 31 47. \ 
 
 + 8.8 
 
 The two errors ought to have opposite signs, so that there is a discrepancy of nearly 11" in the 
 results. There appears, therefore, to be some abnormal error in the data which 1 cannot account 
 for, as the observations were carefully made, and seemed to me. very reliable. No correction has 
 been applied for the effect of refraction. At the actual altitudes of the sun it would be quite small. 
 and would tend to increase the discrepancy. 
 
 The first of the above times is that of the first contact as computed from the data of the Amer- 
 ican Ephemeris. The distance of centers was computed to see whether it would agree with the sum 
 of the semi-diameters. The difference is 0".3. 
 
 Using only contacts, and neglecting the effect of the possible error of the moon's latitude, which 
 is probably small, we have the following results for the relative errors of the lunar and solar tables : 
 
 Peirce's 3) Hansen's too great by 5".3. 
 Hanseu's 3> Le terrier's too great by 2". 7. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OP AUGUST 7, 1869. 15 
 
 The last result is deduced from the fact that in the British Nautical Almanac the moon's longi- 
 tude is l".fl less, and (lie sun's 1".0 greater than in the American Ephemeris: 
 
 F. Obtterrtttionx oftlic <litrli<i of totality and of other phenomena made by amateur observers. 
 
 Most of these observations were made iu pursuance of a request accompanying a circular of 
 instructions of which the, following is a copy : 
 
 IXSTIUX TIOXS mi! mi: OHSFU\ \TION OF THE TOTAL ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869, HY OBSEHVEKS WITHOUT TELESCOPES 
 
 NEAR THE LIMITS OF TOTALITY. 
 
 The following information is desired by the United States Naval Observatory, namely: The duration of total eclipse 
 at raritiH* jilitn 1 * iiliinii tlie liuf of totality, situated between one and ten miles from its limit*. 
 
 To obtain this information the observatory invites the co-operation of intelligent citizeus residing near the limits, 
 and the following instructions are prepared tor the use of those who will co-operate: 
 
 Imtti'iiments. The only indispensable instrument is a good watch, provided with asecond hand, and having a white 
 face. The minute hand should be carefully set, so as to_be on an exact minute when the second hand is at GO". This 
 being done it is no matter how tar wrong the watch may be. A good auxiliary w ill be a common spy-glass lashed to a 
 round post, so as to be steady enough to give an easy view of the sun. To lessen the brilliancy of the sun, cover the 
 object-glass witli a cap having a round hole, three-fourths of an inch iu diameter, cut in its centre. The spy-glass will 
 be worse than useless unless one is accustomed to its use, and has it fastened so as to be steady. A smoked glass should 
 also be prepared, but a part ol' the. glass should be very lightly smoked. 
 
 .tmoigrincnls fur iilm-i-ratimi. Each observation should be made by a party of three persons. Only one instrument 
 of each kind, watch, glass, Ac., is needed by a party. A station should be selected where they win be free from all 
 interruption, either in the open air or at an open window facing west. One, at least, of the party must have a pencil 
 and note-book in baud to record the time. 
 
 The obserratiou. When the visible part of the sun is reduced to the narrowest crescent, the holder of the watch, 
 keeping his eye on the face, will begin to count the seconds aloud ;* the holder of the smoked glass, with or without the 
 spy-glass, will watch for the hist ray of true sunlight, being careful to look through the brightest part of the glass the 
 eye will bear without inconvenience ; and the third observer, if there be one, will look for the disappearance of sunlight 
 with the naked eye, and stand ready with pencil and paper to record the time. When the last speck of the sun has 
 disappeared, the. observer with the glass will call "time," and the exact second at which the call was given must be 
 immediately written down. The minute, also, must be carefully noted and recorded. 
 
 The observers will then await the return of sunlight, the count of the seconds being kept up, if the face of the 
 watch can be seen, which it probably can if held so that the light of the "corona" shall fall upon it. The duration of 
 total eclipse will generally fall between ball' a minute and a minute and a half, depending on the position of the observer. 
 The first Hash of true sunlight will seem to burst out suddenly, and the minute and second of its appearance must be 
 recorded with the same care as the lime of disappearance. The difference of the two times gives the duration of totality. 
 
 XlH-riiil iireciiiiliiin*. Iii .judging the beginning of totality, there is danger of error from two sources. The first is 
 that the sun's crescent may become so narrow as to become invisible through the smoked glass, if it be too dark, several 
 seconds before it is really all covered, and thus the observer may call "time" too soon. Such a mistake maybe detected 
 and corrected by the (bird observer looking on with the naked eye, if the following circumstance be attended to : 
 
 Tin lii'i/iiiniiiii <>f total eclipse in marked Iii/ a i'<ry rapid increase in the darkness, caused ly the advent of lite, moon's shadow. 
 If, then, the darkness increases more rapidly after '-time" is called than it did before, time was called too soon, and must 
 
 be repeated. 
 
 The other danger is of the opposite kind, and should be equally avoided. It is that the light of the brilliant rose- 
 colored protuberances which surround the dark body of the moon during the total eclipse may be mistaken for sunlight, 
 and thus the critical moment be suffered to pass. In this case each observer must determine separately as to the exact 
 second at which it ceased to grow darker, and if they agree within one or two seconds, the time thus judged may be 
 supposed correct, and each one's estimate may be written down separately. 
 
 The observer with the smoked glass will be most liable to the first of these mistakes ; the naked-eye observer to 
 the last. 
 
 The return of sunlight will also be preceded by a reddish glow on the border of the dark moon, which must not be 
 mistaken for the sun. Indeed, if the observers be near the edge of the shadow, it is probable that this red glow, which 
 comes from the hydrogen atmosphere of the sun, may bo visible during the whole time of totality. 
 
 All the recorded times, with an estimate of the uncertainties to which the observers think they were liable, and a 
 statement of the place where made, giving distance in miles and direction from the court-house, if it be a county town, 
 and from the railroad station, if a railroad pass through, should be immediately certified by the signatures of all three 
 observers, and forwarded to the Naval Observatory, Washington. 
 
 It is particularly requested that each party send oft" its report before comparing notes with any other party ; also, 
 that the original pencil record, however imperfect, accompany the report. All will be carefully preserved in the 
 archives of the observatory for the use of astronomers. 
 
 Statements of which the following are abstracts were received in reply to the circular. In 
 
 * It would be well for the observers of each party to practice beforehand the counting, calling, and recording. 
 
16 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR NEWCOMB. 
 
 explanation of these it is to be remarked that many of the positions are referred to the public land 
 surveys, which afford the means of determining the geodetic difference of longitude between any 
 two points nearly east and west of each other, and the difference of latitude between points north 
 and south of each other, with considerable precision. 
 
 The longitudes and latitudes of some points in Iowa have been determined from Colton's large 
 sectional map of that State. The positions of Des Moines, Hock Island, and other stat ions, are as 
 follows : 
 
 
 Position 011 map. 
 
 Known positions. 
 
 Corrections. 
 
 ,, . . 
 
 
 
 
 
 # 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 t 
 
 A 
 
 
 o / 
 
 O ' 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 , 
 
 DesMoiiies, (C. H.) . 
 
 41 35.0 
 
 16 40.3 
 
 41 35.0 
 
 1C 34. 2 
 
 0.0 
 
 - 6.1 
 
 Rock Island . . . 
 
 41 29.8 
 
 is 37. 9 
 
 41 30.6 
 
 16 31. H 
 
 + 0. H 
 
 - 6.1 
 
 Marion 
 
 42 1. 5 
 
 14 39.6 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mechanicsville . . 
 
 41 53.0 
 
 14 12.8 
 
 
 
 
 
 Red Oak .... 
 
 41 ,11.0 
 
 14 12.8 
 
 
 
 
 
 The adopted positions of the last three places are found by applying the systematic corrections 
 thus deduced. 
 
 In Illinois the same method could not be applied owing to the enormous errors with which the 
 degrees of longitude are affected on Colton's map. The positions of a few points near Rock Island 
 are, however, fixed by measurement along the lines of the public surveys as laid down on the map. 
 The adopted position of llock Island is from Colonel Graham's report of 1859. 
 
 When the letters S. H. follow the names of the observers, it indicates that they seem to be 
 signed in the same handwriting. 
 
 The word "Original" signifies that the original pencil record of the observations was forwarded, 
 and that the limes given are an exact transcript therefrom. 
 
 I. OBSERVATIONS NEAR THE NORTHERN LIMIT. 
 
 MARION, IOWA. Latitude 42 2'.1; longitude 11 33'.5. 
 
 First station. Court-house cupola, 22i chains south, and 2i chains east of the comers of town- 
 ships 83 and 84, range and 7 west, 5 p. m. 
 
 Observers. G. A. Gray, county surveyor; J. W. McClellan, ,T. G. Hayzlett. 
 Instrument. Engineer's transit, ap. 1 J inch ; power 20. 
 
 Beginning of eclipse 
 Beginning of totality 
 End of totality 
 End of eclipse 
 Duration of totality 
 Error of watch not given, and probably unknown. 
 
 ) 
 
 m. s. 
 
 3 4G 50 
 
 4 48 15 
 
 4 49 18 ^ Original. 
 
 5 45 7 
 
 1 3 
 
 Observations of meteoric appearances, and 
 
 of contact with spots, accompany the report. Observers express confidence in the precision of their 
 observations. 
 
 Second xtiition. One-sixteenth mile north of court-house, and one-fourth mile north of depot. 
 Observers. E. M. Smith, M. D., Samuel W. Durham, J. W. McElhenny. 
 
 h. m. n. 
 
 Total phase " on," (naked eye) 4 53 4 ~) 
 
 Total phase " on," called 4 53 5 > Original. 
 
 Total phase " off " - 4 54 19) 
 
 Obseivers think the time called was one second " slow," and so give the duration l m l.V. 
 Third station. Near northwest corner of township 83, range 6 west. 5 p. m. 
 Observers. E. L. Samson, James B. Graves, George W. Holmes. 
 Instruments. Field-glass, smoked glass, four-second watch. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1809. 
 
 17 
 
 Ml. 
 
 55 
 
 57 
 1 
 
 52 
 11 
 19 
 
 Original, but the last sec- 
 onds are changed from 
 15 to 11. 
 
 Commencement of total eclipse - 4 
 
 End of total eclipse 4 
 
 Duration of totality 
 >l We think our observations are very nearly correct." 
 MEOHANTCSVILLE, IOWA. Latitude 41 53'.6 ; longitude 14 6'.7. 
 Station. Eighty-five rods northwest from Chicago and Northwestern railroad depot. 
 Observer*. Homer S. Bradshaw, John F. Golding, P. E. Bradshaw. S. H. 
 
 Original. 
 
 Time called by both observers 
 Time called by naked-eye observer 
 Duration of totality 
 KED OAK, IOWA. Latitude 41 51'.5 ; longitude 14 6'.7. 
 
 Station. Section 1, township 81 north, range 3 west of 5th P. M., two miles due south of Stan- 
 wood, O7i Chicago and Northwestern railroad. 
 
 Observers. Samuel Yule, (with spy-glass,) E. B. Cousins, (naked eye,) G. F. McClelland, (smoked 
 glass,) M. L. Simmons, (watch.) 
 
 7i. 
 
 Beginning of totality, spy-glass 4 
 
 Beginning of totality, naked eye 4 
 
 Beginning of totality, smoked glass - 4 
 
 End of totality, spy-glass 4 
 
 End of totality, naked eye 4 
 
 End of totality, smoked glass 4 
 
 Duration of totality 
 BOCK ISLAND, ILL Latitude 41 31'.5 ; longitude 13 31'.5. 
 First station. Near United States arsenal, on the west end of Eock Island. 
 Observations made by two parties are communicated by Brevet Brigadier General T. J. Bod- 
 man, United States Army. 
 
 0&se>TtT.v. Captain and Brevet Major F. H. Parker, Captain Clifton Comly, Lieutenant Henry 
 Metcalf, all of the Ordnance Department, United States Army. 
 Instruments. Watch and smoked glasses. 
 
 in. 
 50 
 
 no 
 
 50 
 51 
 51 
 51 
 1 
 
 44 
 43 
 42 
 
 48 
 47 
 46 
 4 3 
 
 Original. 
 
 in. 
 
 58 
 
 1 
 
 57 
 1 
 
 48 
 3 
 
 20 
 33 
 17 
 
 Original. 
 
 First contact 3 
 
 All obscure 5 
 
 First light 5 
 
 Last contact - 5 
 
 Duration of total phase 
 Watch 9 s fast. 
 
 Three other times of last contact were recorded, beginning at 5 1 ' 55 40 s , which the observers 
 attributed to the fatigue of their eyes. They agree that the latest recorded time was the true one. 
 Observers. Captain Morris Schaff, Brevet Captain M. S. Poland, and Lieutenant W. P. Butler, 
 Ordnance Department, United States Army. 
 Instruments. Not stated. 
 
 
 By telescope. 
 
 By the eye. 
 
 
 /I. Ml. H. 
 
 A. TO. S. 
 
 Meau solar local time of beginning of eclipse . 
 
 3 58 29 
 
 3 58 29 
 
 Mean solar local time of beginning of totality 
 
 4 59 47 
 
 4 59 44 
 
 Meau solar local time of ending of totality 
 
 514 
 
 5 1 4 
 
 Mean solar local time of ending of eclipse . . . 
 
 5 57 7 ' 5 57 7 
 
 Duration of totality 
 
 1 17 
 
 1 20 
 
 3 
 
18 REPORT OF PROFESSOR NEWCOMB. 
 
 Second station. Near court-house, on fractional quarter section 35 of township 18 north of base- 
 Hue, and range 2 west of 4th P. M. 
 
 Observers. Marcus B. Osborn, John E. Humes, John F. Corker. 
 
 (The results of the observations are withheld for explanations from the observers.) 
 
 COLONA, ILL. Latitude 41 29'.S; longitude 13 IX'.O. 
 
 Station. House of Mr. Bell, one-third mile northwest of the 13th mile-post east from Rock 
 Island, on the Chicago, Rock Island and Pacific railroad, and at the northwest corner of northeast 
 quarter of section 11, township 17 north, range 1 east. 
 
 Observers. Mr. and Mrs. James Bell, Rev. and Mrs. S. H. \Veed. 
 
 Instruments. Elgin watch, and smoked glass. 
 
 Duration of total phase, 0'" 59 s (17 m 35 s 1G"> 30 s .) 
 
 Original record not sent, but the description of the observations and phenomena is sufficiently 
 minute, precise, and satisfactory to inspire confidence in the observations. 
 
 GENESEO, ILL. Latitude 41 27'.4 ; longitude 13 G'.4. 
 
 First station.* One hundred feet south of passenger depot of Chicago, Rock Island and Pacific 
 railroad. 
 
 Observers. L. C. Campbell, notary public; J. F. Dresser, banker; John Reiter, dentist; C. E. 
 Parker, merchant; F. Stein, jeweler. 
 
 ll. II). S. 
 
 First appearance - 4 6 00 "J 
 
 Commencement of totality 5 8 23 
 
 Close of totality 5 8 56J 
 
 Disappeared (5 5 30 
 
 .Duration of totality 33J 
 
 Original. 
 
 Second station. About four miles south of Geneseo; or, accurately, the northwest corner of 
 section 8, township 1C north, range 3 east of 4th P. M. Latitude 41 24'.i; longitude 13 S'.O. 
 Observers. E. C. Moderwell, W. C. Brown, M. 1)., John Smith. 
 
 Duration of totality, 5S S 2 s (2' 29 s ) 1"' 31 s . 
 Original record not forwarded. 
 
 LACON, ILL. Doctor and Mrs. George Davis give a duration of 2 minutes seconds, but are 
 iiot certain of its correctness. It must be incorrect, as Lacon is very nearly on the limit. 
 
 CHKNOA, ILL. Station. Near southeast corner of section 2, township 2fi, range 4. 
 Observers. C. S. Elder, M. D. (The others have not signed.) 
 Duration of totality, .">9.J- S ll s = 48i s . (Original.) 
 
 EL PA.SO, ILL. Station. 1,!S5 feet east and 41G feet north from railroad station. 
 
 Observers. Joseph 11. Moore, W. R. Torrey, G. L. Gibson. 
 
 Instruments. Watch, smoked glass, and achromatic telescope lashed firmly to a round post. 
 
 /). Ml. 8. 
 
 Beginning of eclipse 4 10 30 ^j 
 
 Beginning of totality - - - 5 10 30 [ 
 
 Knd of totality 5 12 28 f Chlca S *''' 
 
 End of eclipse 9 30 J 
 
 Original record not forwarded. 
 
 GRIDLEY, ILL. Station. One-half mile north of station-house, and in the center of section 4, 
 township 2G north, range 3 east of 3d P. M. 
 
 Observers. Two parties of three in each. Observations communicated by W. II. Boris, who 
 says the two parties agreed perfectly, so they deem it unnecessary to send separate reports. 
 Duration of totality, 5 h I" 1 5 s 5 h = l 5 s . 
 Original record not forwarded. 
 
 * The next party refer to this station, and give its position as near center of section 21, township 17 north, range 3 
 east of 4th P. M. The longitude and latitude have been deduced from this statement. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 19 
 
 PAXTON, ILL. First station. One thousand feet south 15 east from court-house. 
 
 Observers. II. J. Howe and W. H. Pells, observers ; E. T. Glasener, time-counter ; John M. 
 Ilanley and Lewis K. Jones, tally-keepers. 
 
 Duration of totality, 20' 30 s 20 2 s = 28 s . (Original.) 
 
 Second station. Three-fourths mile southeast of court-house. 
 
 Obsen-ers. Professor T. N. Hasselquist, A. E. Corwin, Rev. J. S. Harkey, - , stu- 
 
 dent. (S. H.) 
 
 DANVILLE, ILL. First station. Three-fourths mile southeast of court-house. 
 Observers. Warren Dunbar, (eye,) J. G. English, (time,) J. C. Winslow, (glass.) 
 
 /I. HI. 8. 
 
 Time of beginning -- 4 14 15 J 
 
 Time of beginning of totality 5 13 
 
 Time of end of totality - 5 14 6 
 
 Time of eud of eel i] isc 6 5 20 } Apparently original. 
 
 Naked eye 
 
 Time of beginning 5 12 54 
 
 Time of ending 5 14 6 3 
 
 All these agree that the naked eye observer called "time" too soon, so that the duration of 
 totality was I 1 " (i s . t 
 
 Second station. Near center of section 8, township 19 north, range 11 west of 2d P. M. 
 Observers. VV. T. Cunningham, Win. P. Chandler, Theo. Lemon. 
 
 h. m. 8. 
 
 Eclipse commenced 4 15 30 ) 
 
 Time called for 5 16 10 ! Q 
 
 Time called for second time 5 17 21 | 
 
 Duration of total phase 1 11 J 
 
 COLUMBUS, IND. First station. Two and three-fourths miles west of Columbus. 
 Observers. Rev. N. S. Dickey, L. VV. Comstock, Albert T. Beck. 
 Duration of totality, l m 4 s . (No original record.) 
 Second station. Not given. 
 Observer. Doctor (leo. <i. Rabb. 
 Duration of totality, I" 1 .'!0 S . (No original record.) 
 Third station. One mile north of court-house. 
 Observer. Professor A. H. Graham. 
 Duration of totality, l m 19 s . (No original record.) 
 FRANKLIN, IND. Station. Near court-house. 
 Observers. Ke\ '. J. B. Morey, Professor F. W. Brown, Professor J. S. Houghain, W. T. Stott. 
 
 h. in. s. 
 
 Beginning 5 25 58 First call 2 9 too soon. 
 
 5 26 True call. 
 
 Kuding ~> 26 37 
 
 EDINBURG, INU. station. Three hundred yards north of railroad station. 
 Observer. Rev. John B. Logan, without'assistance. 
 Instruments. Watch and smoked glass. 
 
 /I. HI. . 
 
 First appearance on northwest part of sun - 4 10 
 
 Total darkness, lasting 40 seconds 5 12 ! Qri iual recol . d . 
 
 Sun began to appear ; streaks still appear ; 
 
 darker than bright moonlight - 5 12 40 J 
 
20 REPORT OF PROFESSOR NEWCOMB. 
 
 MOUNT VERNON, IND. Slation. Masonic Hall. From the section lines it is deduced that the 
 station is 1.074 statute mile east, aud 13.8 statute miles south, of a point of New Harmony, the posi- 
 tion of which was determined by the Coast Survey in 1848, as follows: latitude, 38 7' 50"; longi- 
 tude, 5" 51> 20 s . 
 
 Observers. Aaron Baker, C. E., S. H. Pearse, M. D., S. Milner. 
 
 Instrument. Engineer's transit aperture, : f in.; power, 10. 
 
 It. m. *. 
 
 Beginning of eclipse 4 25 27 } 
 
 Beginning of total phase 5 24 7!l I 
 
 Ending of total phase - 5 20 55 ( ( 
 
 Ending of eclipse 21 58 I 
 
 Duration of totality 1 30 
 CARLISLE, KY. Station. Not given. 
 Observers. E. C. H. Willoughby, Dr. W. W. Fritts, Charles Boynton. 
 
 37 i 
 20 J 
 
 ' Original. 
 
 Totality lasted 1 43 
 
 At the beginning of obscuration one observer called " time " two seconds earlier than the other. 
 The last call was adopted. 
 
 FRANKLINTON, K. C. Station. One hundred and sixty yards west of railroad depot. 
 
 Observers. George W. Neal, A. M., C. W. Conway, Calvin Pritchard, Robert N". Winston. 
 
 Instruments. Spy-glass, smoked glass, and racer's watch, with long second hand. 
 Total eclipse lasted 03 seconds, per spy-glass observer. 
 Total eclipse lasted 01 seconds, per naked-eye observer. 
 
 (No original record.) 
 
 WILSON, WILSON COUNTY, N. C. Station. Not given. 
 
 Observers. Jno. W. Dunham, Jno. McBride, Robert S. Husk, J. A. Fugua, Eev. A. A. Bentou. 
 
 Instruments. Camera obscura and smoked glass. 
 
 The original record is sent, by which it appears that the three first observers agreed upon 
 G 1 ' 27 s as the time of beginning of total phase, and the two first each observed O 1 ' I 111 51 s as that 
 of ending; but, in the record, the commencements by D. and H. seem to be altered to agree with 
 McB. H. "noticed the obscuration as total in the-glass, and removed it before calling;" but no 
 reason is given for the change of D.'s observations from 22 s to 27 s . 
 
 II. STATIONS NEAR THE SOUTHERN LIMIT. 
 
 HANNIBAL, Mu. First station. House of Eev. Jno. Leighton. 
 
 Observers. Eev. Juo. Leighton, G. H. Shields, W. B. Fiero. The latter does not sign the report. 
 
 Instrument. Thirty-inch spy-glass. 
 
 /I. HI. *. 
 
 Commenced, (observer with glass) 5 1 10 ") 
 
 Commenced, (observer with naked eye) ' 5 1 10 I . 
 
 Ended, (observer with glass) 5 3 10 i 
 
 Ended, (observer with naked eye) 5 3 8 J 
 
 The seconds of ending both seem to have been corrected or twice recorded. 
 Second station. 1,208 feet north 29 west from railroad depot. 
 Observers. H. M. Sutnner, C. E., F. B. Lockliug, C. E., E. L. Corthell, C. E., G. H. Williams. 
 
 ll. III. S. 
 
 Total phase begins, (through glass) 5 8 52 "| 
 
 Total phase ends, (through glass) - 5 10 49 I _. f . . 
 
 Total phase begins, (naked eye) 5 10 49 f 
 
 Total phase ends, (naked eye) 5 10 49 J 
 
 The observers give the first observation, 5'' 8 m 52 3 , as the true time of beginning. The third is 
 probably 2'" wrong, through inadvertence in recording. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 21 
 
 BOWLING GREEN, Mo. Fii-xt station. Court-house 
 
 Observers. 3. W. Basyc, Melville Smith, Albeit Cluster, Mrs. L. E. Basyp. (S. H.) 
 
 /I. 111. 8. 
 
 Total eclipse begins 4 51 41 | 
 
 Continued 51 j 
 
 In the accompaaying report the end is given at 4 1 ' 40 32 s , and a duration of 51 seconds thence 
 deduced. 
 
 Second station. Residence of Augustus C. Sheldon, 50 rods south of court-house. 
 
 Observers. Augustus C. Sheldon, Nellie H. Sheldon, W. P. Lawry. 
 
 The observers sign a certificate that they made particular observation of the duration of the 
 total eclipse, and found it to be forty-six (40) seconds. No original record forwarded. 
 
 ALTON,' ILL. Station. Near quarter-section corner on the line between sections 33 and 34, 
 
 township (i north, of range 10 west of 3d P. M. 
 Observers. T. M. Long, county surveyor. 
 Instrument. Transit compass, with telescope attached. 
 
 h. )/i. 
 
 Beginning of eclipse 4 1,3 
 
 Total obscuration 5 11 
 
 Return of light 5 llf 
 
 Ending of eclipse 7i 
 ~No original record forwarded. 
 
 CARLYLK, ILL. Station. 1,100 feet south of west of court-house, and 1,100 feet north of west 
 of the depot, on the Ohio and Mississippi railroad. 
 
 Observers. Zophar Case, .lames Harkley, William A. Robinson. 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 Commencement of obscured light of sun 4 15 3 
 
 Total obscuration 5 15 39 
 
 First sunlight 517 6 
 
 Disappearance of any obscuration of sun 11 50 
 
 Duration of totality 1 '21 
 No original record, but the report is duly certified. 
 
 HENDERSON, KY. /Station. P>ank of Ohio River, four squares from court-house. 
 Observers. T. H. Crosby, C. E., P..L. Blacknell, president Ghent College. (S. H.) 
 Instrument. Engineer's transit, with telescope of 1^ inch aperture and 13 inches long. 
 
 h. m. . 
 
 Beginning of total eclipse 5 22 30 i 
 
 End of total eclipse 5 24 I On S lual - 
 
 OAKLAND STATION, KY. First station. Oakland Station, on the Louisville and Nashville rail- 
 road, 11.3 miles north 00 east from Bowling Green. 
 
 Observers. John E. Young-love, Jno. J. Ililburn, Lieutenant W. 1. Reise, C. R. Edwards. 
 
 Beginning of total phase, (to. s. t. of Bowling /,. ,. 8 . 
 Green) 5 24 30 
 
 End of total phase 5 24 33 
 
 Duration, three seconds. 
 No original record sent. 
 
 "The beginning of total phase was very accurately taken, both observers giving the same 
 instant, but we deem it proper to acknowledge our doubt as to the exact time of ending. We had 
 expected a total phase of some 20 or 30 seconds, and were so much surprised at the sudden reap 
 pearance of the sun that we may have allowed the critical moment to pass unobserved." 
 
22 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR NEWCOMB. 
 
 Second station. One-fourth mile southwest of Oakland Station, 11 miles from Bowling Green. 
 Observers. J. A. Timmons, A. M.; J. L. Donaldson, A. B.; J. M. Youn glove, A. B. 
 Instruments. Smoked glass and opera glass. 
 
 Beginning of totality 
 
 End of totality 
 
 End of eclipse 
 
 Duration of total phase, about 
 
 7l. Ml. S. 
 
 .> 23 45 ") 
 
 5 23 47 
 
 fi 18 28 
 
 2 j 
 
 > Original. 
 
 "With the naked eye totality was iiot plainly visible; the corona appeared to be not quite 
 perfect, and many mistook the reflection from the sun to be the sun itself, thereby causing the 
 belief of non-totality. 
 
 " The stars were plainly visible with jthe naked eye." 
 
 The watch was compared with a meridian mark at Bowling Green. 
 
 On the 7th it stood 
 Ou the 8th it stood 
 
 /i. m. 8. 
 
 12 5 28 
 12 5 19 
 
 BURKSVILLE, KY. First station. Not given. 
 
 Observers. V*. G. Hunter, M. D.; J. W. Williams, clerk circuit court ; L. A. WaggeuerJ clerk 
 county court; Scott Walker, attorney at law. 
 
 Duration of total eclipse, 1"' 16 s . 
 
 The original record is forwarded, but is not clear. The duration seems to have been counted 
 from the moment of obscuration, independently of the absolute time. 
 
 Second station. Not given. 
 
 Observers. B. M. Alexander, with two others who do not sign the report. 
 
 Total eclipse began 37 minutes past 5, and lasted 1 "' 2S S , which is considered only approxi- 
 mately true. 
 
 III. DURATIONS OBSERVED AT POINTS TOO FAR WITHIN THE SHADOW TO BE t'SED IN FIXING ITS 
 
 LIMITS. 
 
 These observations being valuable principally as atlbrding data for judging of the general 
 Accuracy of extemporized observers, it is deemed unnecessary to give more than I he observed dura- 
 tion and the name of thp person by whom it is communicated. 
 
 Place. 
 
 Lat. 
 
 Long. 
 
 Duration. 
 
 
 Communicated by 
 
 Remarks, 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 m. . 
 
 
 
 Midway, Ky - - - - 
 
 . 
 
 7 
 
 2 24 
 
 Ensign David N. Bell, U. S. N . 
 
 One mile north of railroad sta- 
 
 Tayloraville, N. C . . 
 
 . 
 
 4 
 
 2 15 
 
 A. C. bo.vd <! nl. 
 
 tion. 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 i 17 
 
 J. A. McDonald i'l nl. 
 
 
 Davidson College . . 
 
 . 
 
 3 
 
 2 8 
 
 Professor!'. Phillips - 
 
 Two other observations gave 
 
 River View . 
 
 . 
 
 3 
 
 2 20 
 
 M. I!ald\vin 1 1 nl. 
 
 2 fl 8 and 2 m 10 B , of which the 
 
 
 
 :', 
 
 2 25 
 
 .John A. Raiiisrv. 
 
 lirst is doubtful. 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 2 35 
 
 \V. 11. 1,'obbins. 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 2 13 
 
 F. C. Robbins. 
 
 
 Chanel Hill .... 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 5 
 
 James J!. Mason (/ ul. 
 
 
 Kalcigh 
 
 - - 
 
 1 
 
 1 58 
 
 'William Primrose </ ill. . . 
 
 Mean of two observations. 
 
REPORT 
 
 PROCESSOR WILLIAM HAROESS, U. S 
 
REPORT OF PROFESSOR WILLIAM BARENESS, U. S. N. 
 
 UNITED STATES NAVAL OBSERVATORY, 
 
 Washington, October 1, 18G9. 
 
 SIR : I have the honor to submit the following report in relation to the astronomical and spec- 
 troscopic observations made by me in connection with the expedition sent out to Iowa, by this 
 Observatory, for the purpose of observing the total solar eclipse of the 7th of August last. 
 
 INTRODUCTORY. 
 
 Onr instruments and apparatus were delivered to Adams Express Company on Saturday, July 
 ;?, to be forwarded to Des Moines, in the State of Iowa ; and the party left Washington on the even- 
 ing of the following Monday. At that time, owing to the absence, of any exact determination of 
 the positions of the towns and villages near t he ecu I nil line of the eclipse, we had not decided defi- 
 nitely what station we would occupy, but it seemed probable that the most favorable point would be 
 Mitchellville, a small village, situated on the Chicago, Rock Island and Pacific railroad, whose bear- 
 ing from Des Moines is north 05 east, and its distance 13.2 miles. About noon on Saturday, July 
 10, we reached Des Moines, and upon going to the, hotel I met Mr. E. P. Austin, of the Unite*? 
 States Coast Survey, who was engaged in obtaining the geographical position of the city. His 
 observations were not then finished, but they showed that it was not more than eleven or twelve 
 miles to the southwest of the central line of the eclipse. The duration of the totality there would, 
 therefore, be less than two seconds shorter than on the central line itself, and as a city of sixteen 
 thousand inhabitants necessarily offered many facilities which we could not expect in a small vil- 
 lage, we at once decided to remain in Des Moines. 
 
 SITE OF TEMPORARY OBSERVATORY. 
 
 Saturday afternoon and the following Monday were spent in selecting a site for our observa- 
 tory, and as we were to the southwest of the central line of the eclipse we confined our reconnais- 
 sance to the northeastern part of the city. The spot which seemed, in all respects, the most desir- 
 able is situated on the northwest corner of Second and Short streets. It is a high piece of vacant 
 ground on the west bank of the Des Moines River, with a horizon almost entirely devoid of obstruc- 
 tions, and, as the city is not built up so far north, there is no travel, and it is perfectly free from 
 that great enemy of photography, dust. There is also a well of water near, which we thought A 
 decided advantage, but upon trial, afterwards, it proved to be useless for photographic purposes. 
 I ascertained that this land belonged to Mrs. Sytha .1. Hall, and thai her agent in the city was Mr. 
 J. M. Ballinger. On Tuesday morning I called upon him and, after stating the case to him, he said 
 that he was sure Mrs. Hall would be very glad to have us place our observatory there, and we had 
 his permission to do so. No charge was made for the use of the land, and our thanks are due to 
 him and Mrs. Hall for their kindness in the matter. 
 
 THE TEMPORARY OBSERVATORY. 
 
 On the afternoon of July 13 I called upon Mr. F. T. Nelson, a builder whom I can confidently 
 recommend, and made arrangements with him to erect our temporary observatory. He set some 
 of his men to work at it next morning, intending to have it finished in two or three days, but before 
 noon the weather changed and a series of thunder-storms set in which lasted, -with short intermix 
 
 4* 
 
26 REPORT OF PROFESSOR ITARKNESS. 
 
 sions, lor the next five days. The men managed to do some work between the storms, but their 
 progress \v;is necessarily slow, and it was the afternoon of July 20 before the building was finished. 
 As soon as the carpenters were done we sent to the express office for our instruments and appa- 
 ratus, and by six o'clock that evening the boxes containing them were all safely stored in the 
 observatory. 
 
 Plate I is a general view of the building from a photograph by Mr. E. J. Ward, and Plate II 
 is a plan of it drawn to a scale of one-quarter of an inch to a foot. It was thirty-two feet long by 
 sixteen feet wide, constructed of rough pine boards, and so placed that Ihe ridge of its roof ran 
 almost exactly north and south ; the longest sides of the building facing respectively to the east 
 and west. The eaves of the roof were 8.5 feet above the ground, and the boarding on the sides of 
 the building was horizontal, that on the east side being continued quite up to the roof, while that 
 on the west side was only carried to the height of five feet above the ground, except for a space of 
 seven feet at the north end of the building, where it was carried quite up to the roof. This space, 
 seven feet in length and sixteen feet in width, was partitioned off and inclosed as a dark room for 
 photographic purposes. A complete description of it, and all its arrangements, will be found in 
 Dr. Curtis's report. The seven and three-quarter inch telescope was mounted exactly in the cen- 
 tral line of the building, that is, eight feet from either side, and, in order to permit its use from 
 the western horizon quite up to the zenith, the ridge of the roof, which was sixteen feet above the 
 ground, was placed two feet to the east of the central line. All the space on the east side of the 
 ridge pole, and eight feet of the north end of that on the west side, (sufficient to cover the photo- 
 graphic dark room,) was roofed over with boards. The remaining space, twenty five feet in length, 
 on the west side of the ridge pole, was covered with canvas (furnished by the United States Arm\ 
 Medical Museum) which, at the cave, passed over a movable horizontal rail, and thence down to 
 the board side of the building, which, as before stated, was here only five feet high. When the 
 telescopes were in use this canvas roof was rolled up like an awning, and the horizontal rail was 
 removed, thus affording a perfectly unobstructed view of all that portion of the heavens traversed 
 by the sun between noon and sunset. The north and south ends of the building were covered with 
 boards placed vertically, and the door for entrance was situated in the south end. Suitable open- 
 ings for ventilation were placed in the gables near the roof. With the exception of those in t lie- 
 dark room, there were no windows, the light coming in through the canvas roof being sufficient for 
 all purposes. 
 
 The ground upon which the observatory stood is clay, and as it is well known that clay sprin- 
 kled with powdered lime soon produces a very hard surface, I thought that a sufficiently durable 
 floor might be obtained in that way. Upon trial, however, it was found that the constant walking 
 on it gave rise to such a quantity of dust as would have rendered it utterly impossible to take good 
 photographs, and J was obliged to have a floor of planed boards put down. Owing to the irregu- 
 larity of the^round the southern part of this floor was laid five and one-quarter inches higher than 
 the northern, thus making a step between the two, as shown on the plan. 
 
 By Thursday, July 22, the large telescope was mounted, and on the following day a photograph 
 of the sun was made, and some observations for time and latitude were taken. The equatorial 
 adjustments of the large telescope were completed on July 24, and from that time till August !) pho- 
 tographs were taken and observations made every day when the weather pennitted. 
 
 THE INSTEUMENTS EMPLOYED. 
 
 An Achromatic Telescope of seven and three-quarters inches clear aperture, equatorially mounted 
 and provided with a driving clock and divided circles, belonging to the United States Naval Acad- 
 emy, was kindly lent to the observatory by Vice- Admiral I). I). Porter, to be used for photograph- 
 ing the eclipse. The necessary alterations to fit it for that purpose were made under my supervision, 
 and much credit is due to Mr. W. F. Gardner, the instrument-maker attached to the Observatory, 
 for the interest he took in pushing the work forward to completion in the very limited time at our 
 disposal. As this instrument was used almost solely by Dr. Curtis, it is unnecessary to enter into 
 details respecting it here. A full description of it will be found in his report. 
 
 The remaining instruments in this list are all my own private property. 
 
 An Achromatic Telescope of 43.58 inches focal length, and 3.01 inches clear aperture, made by 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, ldt>9. ~27 
 
 Alvan Clark and Sons, of Cambridgport, Massachusetts. This instrument, which is a remarkably 
 fine oiie, is provided with a terrestrial eye-piece magnifying 29.1 diameters, and with Huygenian 
 eye-pieces magnifying respectively 34.5, 05.5, and l.Ti.4 diameters. It is equatorially mounted on 
 a very firm, portable tripod stand, which can be adjusted to any latitude, except very low ones, and 
 has a slow motion by which it may be moved through a few degrees in azimuth. The polar and 
 declination axes are both provided with clamp screws, but there are neither divided circles nor tan- 
 gent screws. 
 
 Its finder has a focal length of <S.O!I inches, and a clear aperture of 0.08 inches, and is provided 
 with two eye-pieces: a direct one magnifying 10.0 diameters, and a diagonal one magnifying 0.2 
 diameters. Each of these eye-pieces has a Held of view 3 20' in diameter. The finder is firmly 
 fastened to the telescope tube, and is not capable of any adjustment whatever. It originally car- 
 ried in its field of view a pair of thick cross-wires, whose position was so near correct that when a 
 star was brought to their intersection it was always visible in the field of view of the telescope, even 
 with the highest eye-piece. When I decided to use the telescope for spectroscopic work, it became 
 necessary to have more delicate means of pointing. I therefore had the thick cross- wires removed, 
 and a common sewing needle, whose point can be placed and fastened in any part of the field of 
 view, inserted in their place. It is easily adjusted, and has proved very satisfactory ; the image of 
 the object to be observed being readily brought upon the slit of the spectroscope by bringing its 
 image in the finder just into contact with the point of the needle. 
 
 A Sinr/lc-prixm ttyectroscope. This instrument was originally made by P. Desaga, of Heidelberg, 
 and was intended to be used only for chemical purposes, but J have had great alterations and addi- 
 tions made in almost all its details, so that it can now be employed with equal facility for either 
 chemical or astronomical purposes. It is shown, arranged for astronomical observation and attached 
 to the telescope, in Plate IV. It consists of a central brass box, which contains the prism, and from 
 which radiate three tubes of unequal sizes. In order to connect the instrument to the telescope, 
 the end of the largest of these tubes is slipped into an adapter, and fastened there by means of a 
 clamp screw, not shown in the plate. Inside of, and concentric with, this large tube is a smaller 
 one, carrying at the end which terminates in the prism box an achromatic collimating leus, and at 
 its other extremity, in the principal focus of the collimating lens, a slit, the width of which can be 
 varied at pleasure by means of a screw motion. The principle upon which this slit is constructed 
 will be easily understood by examining the diagram, Fig. 1, where a and b are Fig. 1. 
 
 the two jaws of the slit, which are constantly pressed together by the springs 
 shown at their ends ; c is-a wedge-shaped piece of brass, lying above the jaws, 
 and having a rectangular opening in its center to permit the light to pass to 
 them. This wedge can be -moved lengthwise by means of a screw; and two 
 pins, one inserted in each jaw, rest against its sides. When the wedge is 
 moved downward it presses against these pins and causes the jaws to open ; 
 when it is moved upward it releases the pins and the springs press the jaws closer together. The 
 jaws always open or close equally on each side of the slit, so that the position of the middle point 
 bet ween them is constant. This is a matter of some importance, because generally the thickness of 
 a line in the spectrum is precisely equal to the angular opening of the slit, and if the slit were to 
 open from one side only, the lines in the spectrum would widen upon one side only, thus shifting 
 the absolute position of their centers. Another of the tubes radiating from the prism box is a 
 small achromatic telescope, the eye-piece of which is provided with a number of shade glasses of 
 different colors, any one of which may be used to protect the eye when viewing the solar spectrum. 
 The remaining tube which radiates from the prism box contains, at the end which terminates in the 
 box, an achromatic collimatiug lens, and at its other end, in the principal focus of the collimating 
 lens, a very finely graduated photographed scale of equal parts. 
 
 The action of the instrument is as follows: Having been attached to the sliding tube at the 
 eye end of the forty-three inch telescope, that tube is moved out or in, by means of its rack work, 
 until the slit of the spectroscope is placed precisely in the principal focus of the object glass. Then 
 the sliding tube is firmly clamped, and the telescope being directed to any object, the spectrum of 
 which it is desired to examine, the image of that object is made to fall within the jaws of the slit. 
 The rays of light, after passing through the slit, fall upon its collimatiug lens and are rendered per- 
 fectly parallel. Then impinging upon the prism, they sutler refraction and dispersion in their pas- 
 
2B REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 sage through it, and finally, reaching the object glass of the small telescope, the ra,vs of each degree 
 of refrangibility are brought to a separate focus by it, and arc seen spread out into a spectrum when 
 viewed through its eye-piece. The rays of light proceeding from the photographed scale are ren 
 dered parallel by its colliinating lens; then falling upon the second face of the prism, are reflected 
 from it to the object glass of the small telescope, and, passing through it, are brought to a focus 
 and form an image of the scale precisely at the. same spot where the rays from the slit form the 
 spectrum. Therefore, on looking into the small telescope the spectrum and the scale are seen 
 together, and it serves as a micrometer to measure the position of the lines in the spectrum. 
 
 The scale is furnished with an adjusting screw, by means of which its fiftieth division can be 
 made to coincide accurately with the sodium line. How to illuminate the scale properly in all posi- 
 tions of the large telescope was a problem which cost me much thought, but I finally succeeded in 
 devising the following arrangement, which has proved quite satisfactory : The tube which carries 
 the scale and its collimating lens is embraced by a clamp, which can be fixed in any required posi- 
 tion, and from which extends a long curved arm projecting some distance beyond the plane .of the 
 scale. At the end of this arm is a brass ball pierced with a socket, the produced axis of which 
 passes through, and is at right angles to, the produced axis of the tube which carries the scale and 
 its collimating lens. Tn this socket is an axis which carries a bent arm, in one extremity of which 
 a lantern swings suspended between two points, and in the other extremity a rod (which is in the 
 produced axis of the socket in the ball) slides back and forward, carrying at its end a reflector 
 inclined at an angle of forty : five degrees to the rod. Now, let the position of the spectroscope be 
 what it will, the clamp can be loosened and turned on the lube which carries the scale until the 
 axis of the socket in the ball is horizontal. Then the lantern can be placed vertically by moving it 
 on its pivots, and, if necessary, turning in its socket the axis which carries the bent arm. Such 
 being the state of affairs, the light from the lantern will intersect, at right angles, the produced 
 axis of the tube which carries the scale, and by placing the inclined reflector in the proper position 
 it will be thrown directly down that tube, and on looking into the small telescope the scale will be 
 seen properly illuminated. The lantern itself is of the form devised by 3Ir. Joseph A. Rogers, of 
 the Hydrographic Office, and is fitted to burn a fluid composed of four volumes of alcohol mixed 
 with one volume of spirits of turpentine. 
 
 The adapter, by which the spectroscope is attached to the telescope, has a motion of revolution 
 around its axis, by means of which the slit of the spectroscope can be placed at any desired angle 
 with a circle of right ascension, and then it can be firmly fixed there by a clamp-scre\v which is pro- 
 vided for that purpose. There is also a hole in the side of the adapter which permits light to fall 
 on a small equilateral prism placed over one half the length of the slit of the spectroscope, thus fur- 
 nishing the means of comparing the spectrum of the object to which the telescope is directed with 
 that of any known chemical element. 
 
 The following are the constants relating to this instrument : 
 
 Small telescope: 
 
 Focal distance of object glass 6.55 inches. 
 
 Clear aperture of object, glass O.Si; inch. 
 
 Diameter of field of view 5 ">'' 
 
 .Magnifying power 5.71 diameters. 
 
 Collimating lens for slit : 
 
 Focal distance ""'-' inches. 
 
 Clear aperture 0.82 inch. 
 
 Collimating lens for scale : 
 
 Focal distance 1-'^ inches. 
 
 Clear aperture 0.82 inch. 
 
 Prism : 
 
 Refracting angle M 8' 
 
 Minimum deviation of line D 47 44' 
 
 Refractive index 
 Density - 3.532 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 29 
 
 In order to give breadth to the spectrum of a star, there is a plano-convex cylindrical lens, 0.65 
 of an inch square, with ;i t'oeal length of 11.5 inches, which can be inserted in the adapter. 
 
 The micrometer scale is photographed on glass in such a manner as to show bright lines on a 
 dark ground. It has tour hundred and twenty-one divisions to an inch, whence there results as the 
 value of a single division 0.002370 of an inch. 
 
 Upon a careful examination the graduation proved to be not perfectly regular, and the follow- 
 ing table is therefore inserted, which gives the distance from the zero point to each tenth division, 
 as determined from measures made with the mural circle: 
 
 Division. 
 
 Angular distant r. 
 
 1 
 
 Division. 
 
 Angular distance. 
 
 
 o , 
 
 
 o / // 
 
 
 
 
 
 110 
 
 3 35 32 
 
 10 
 
 19 30 
 
 120 3 55 10 
 
 20 
 
 39 13 
 
 130 : 4 14 42 
 
 30 
 
 58 48 
 
 140 
 
 4 34 25 
 
 40 
 
 1 18 20 
 
 150 
 
 4 53 59 
 
 50 
 
 1 3? 15 
 
 160 
 
 5 13 21 
 
 60 
 
 1 57 '.'7 
 
 170 
 
 5 32 51 
 
 70 
 
 2 HI .->:; 
 
 180 
 
 5 52 28 
 
 80 
 
 2 36 17 
 
 190 
 
 6 11 56 
 
 90 
 
 2 55 55 
 
 200 
 
 6 31 19 
 
 100 
 
 3 lo :'.() 
 
 
 
 The mean value of one division is, therefore, 
 
 1' 57" A 
 and the corrections necessary to free the scale from the effect of irregularity of division are as follows: 
 
 Division. 
 
 Correction. 
 
 Division. 
 
 Correction. 
 
 Division. 
 
 Correct ion. 
 
 
 
 H 
 II 
 
 70 
 
 + 5 
 
 140 
 
 - 29 
 
 10 
 
 + 4 
 
 80 
 
 + 15 
 
 150 
 
 - 29 
 
 20 
 
 5 
 
 90 
 
 + H 
 
 160 
 
 - 17 
 
 so 
 
 6 
 
 100 
 
 + 4 
 
 170 
 
 - 13 
 
 40 
 
 - 4 
 
 110 
 
 - 18 
 
 180 
 
 - 16 
 
 50 
 
 + 5 
 
 120 
 
 22 
 
 190 
 
 - 10 
 
 60 
 
 3 
 
 130 
 
 20 
 
 200 
 
 + 1 
 
 In order to render the scale of this instrument comparable with those of others, we have the 
 data contained in the following table, the first column of which gives the designation of the line in 
 the spectrum ; the second column the scale-reading of this instrument; the third column the read- 
 ing of Kirchhoff's scale; and the fourth column the wave length expressed in millionth a of a mil- 
 limeter. The readings given for the line D correspond to the mean of the two sodium lines, and 
 those given for 6 correspond to the mean of the three magnesium lines, giving double weight to the 
 least refrangible line. Beyond the line G- the readings given in the column belonging to Kirch- 
 hoff's scale are those of Angstrom's and Thalen's continuation of Kirchhoff's map : 
 
 Lino. 
 
 Scalr II. 
 
 Si-ale K. 
 
 Wave trust li. 
 
 Line. 
 
 Scale H. 
 
 Seal,: K. 
 
 \\"n\e length. 
 
 a 
 
 26.9 
 
 503 
 
 
 1> 
 
 71.5 
 
 1643 
 
 518.1 
 
 B 
 
 31.5 
 
 sea 
 
 687.5 
 
 F 
 
 84.8 
 
 2080 
 
 4*6. :, 
 
 C 
 
 36.2 
 
 694 
 
 656. 8 
 
 G 
 
 117.8 
 
 2855 
 
 431.0 
 
 D 
 
 50.0 
 
 1005 
 
 589.7 
 
 H, 
 
 146.5 
 
 8778 
 
 397.2 
 
 E 
 
 67. 9 
 
 1524 
 
 527.4 
 
 H, 
 
 150.5 
 
 3882 
 
 393. (i 
 
30 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNF.SS. 
 
 By means of a graphical interpolation I have obtained from these data the reading of Kirch - 
 hoif's scale, and the wave length, for every fifth division of the scale of my instrument, as given in 
 the following table : 
 
 Scale H. 
 
 Scale K. 
 
 Wave length. 
 
 Scale H. 
 
 Scale K. 
 
 Wave length. 
 
 25 
 
 462 
 
 . 
 
 95 
 
 2335 
 
 467. 2 
 
 30 
 
 560 
 
 700.0 
 
 100 
 
 2445 
 
 168,3 
 
 35 
 
 665 
 
 664.2 
 
 105 
 
 2560 
 
 449.9 
 
 40 
 
 772 
 
 636.2 
 
 110 
 
 2675 
 
 442. 1 
 
 -45 
 
 885 
 
 611.8 
 
 115 
 
 2788 
 
 l:;i. - 
 
 50 
 
 1005 
 
 589.8 
 
 120 
 
 2925 
 
 428.0 
 
 55 
 
 1135 
 
 569.8 
 
 125 
 
 3095 
 
 i2i.; 
 
 60 
 
 1278 
 
 551.8 
 
 130 
 
 3262 
 
 415. r> 
 
 65 
 
 1432 
 
 535.8 
 
 135 
 
 :; 1 K 
 
 409. 7 
 
 70 
 
 1595 
 
 521. 4 
 
 140 
 
 3590 
 
 404.2 
 
 75 
 
 1760 
 
 508.5 
 
 145 
 
 3735 
 
 399.0 
 
 80 
 
 1920 
 
 497.0 
 
 150 
 
 3868 
 
 394.1 
 
 85 
 
 20&5 
 
 486.5 
 
 166 
 
 3896 
 
 389.5. 
 
 90 
 
 2218 
 
 476.6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Under favorable conditions this spectroscope will show the line I) in the solar spectrum dis- 
 tinctly double. 
 
 An Arago Polar iscope, consisting of a plate of quartz cut perpendicularly to the axis, and a 
 double-image prism, giving images of complementary colors when polarized light is present. 
 
 A Savart Polariscope, consisting of a plate of quartz cut obliquely to the axis, and a plate of 
 tourmaline, giving Savart's bands when polarized light is present. 
 
 A Sextant, made by Stackpole& Brother, of New York, from my own designs, marked No. 937, 
 of six inches radius, divided on platina, and reading to ten seconds, having a telescope of 5.32 inches 
 focus and 0.89 inch clear aperture, provided with eye-pieces magnifying respectively 2.75, 5.66, and 
 8.88 diameters. Attached to the index bar is a finding-level, which proved a very great coin e 
 nience and saved much time and trouble. 
 
 If we let E represent the correction necessary to free any measured angle, u>, from the eft'ect of 
 eccentricity of the sextant, and () represent the reading of the point oil the arc where the divisions 
 of the limb and vernier coincided when the angle u> was measured, then 
 
 E = 2 e . sin (<o). cos [a + (<)] 
 
 and e being constants which must be determined from the measurement of known angles. The 
 quantity a is the angle included by the two lines passing, respectively, from the center of the divided 
 arc to the zero .point on the limb, and from the center of the divided arc to the center on which the 
 index bar turns. For the quantity e we have 
 
 2b 
 
 II. sin 1" 
 
 in which b is the distance from the center of the divided arc to the center on which the index bar 
 turns, and K is the radius of the divided arc. 
 
 After my return from Ues Moines, from the measurement of seventeen known angles, included 
 between the limits 34 22' and 112 20', I found, by the method of least squares, for the sextant 
 under consideration 
 
 = 114 4 
 
 2e= 62".5 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7. 1869. 
 
 31 
 
 and by moans of the formula given above I have computed from these values the following table 
 of the corrections which must be applied to angles measured with this instrument in order to free 
 them from the effects of eccentricity. 
 
 lit 
 
 E 
 
 " 
 
 E 
 
 6) 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 II 
 
 o 
 
 II 
 
 O 
 
 II 
 
 
 
 0.0 
 
 60 
 
 + S.I 
 
 100 
 
 + 19.9 
 
 10 
 
 + 1.2 
 
 60 
 
 + 10.2 
 
 110 
 
 + 22. G 
 
 20 
 
 + 2.0 
 
 70 
 
 + 12. 5 
 
 120 
 
 + 25.3 
 
 30 
 
 + 4.3 
 
 80 ! + 14. 9 
 
 130 
 
 + 28.0 
 
 40 
 
 + (5.1 
 
 90 
 
 + 17.4 
 
 140 
 
 + 30. 8 
 
 A Mercurial Artificial ll<>r!:oit. marked Ha. 1, having a folding roof, and an iron trough, three 
 inches wide by five inches long. 
 
 If ( is the double altitude of an object seen in au artificial horizon ; /* the index of refraction of 
 the glass composing the roof of the horizon; x a constant peculiar to the roof which is employed 
 and which must be determined from observations made for that .purpose ; then, assuming /i = 1.514, 
 the correction necessary to free any observed angle from the error introduced by a prismatic form 
 of one or both of the glasses composing the roof of the horizon will be given by the expression 
 
 ' ( 
 
 1 
 
 /"" sin 2 (45 --~ 
 "cos (450 4 w ) 
 
 The value of the co eflicient of /., for values of < ranging between 30 and 15(1, is given in the, 
 following table : 
 
 u 
 
 
 u 
 
 <j 
 
 
 u 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 30 
 
 0. fi502 
 
 ISO 
 
 55 
 
 0.5559 
 
 125 
 
 35 
 
 . <;,'.->:> 
 
 145 
 
 60 
 
 .5444 
 
 120 
 
 40 
 
 . f.04l 
 
 140 
 
 70 
 
 . 5273 
 
 110 
 
 45 
 
 . 5855 
 
 135 
 
 80 
 
 . 5173 
 
 100 
 
 BO 
 
 . 5C.95 
 
 130 
 
 90 
 
 . 5140 
 
 90 
 
 From three sets ;>f observations of Polaris reflected, made with the mural circle belonging to 
 this Observatory, and the horizon Ha. 1, each set consisting of five readings of the micrometer 
 with-the side A of the horizon roof next the observer, and live readings with the side B next the 
 observer, I found that when the side A was next the observer the star appeared too high by the fol- 
 lowing quantities: 
 
 0".285 
 .207 
 .21!) 
 
 .Mean = 0.237 
 
 As the double altitude of Polaris at the time of observation was 80 34', the co-efficient of; 
 was 0.5171. Hence we have: 
 
32 
 
 REPORT OP PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 The corrections to be applied to double altitudes measured with this horizon, for Tallies of 
 between 30 and 150, are therefore as follows : 
 
 tf 
 
 C'orr. 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 COIT. 
 
 u 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 // 
 
 tj 
 
 30 
 
 0.30 
 
 150 
 
 70 
 
 0.24 
 
 110 
 
 40 
 
 .28 
 
 140 
 
 80 
 
 .24 
 
 100 
 
 50 
 
 .20 
 
 130 
 
 90 
 
 0.24 
 
 90 
 
 CO 
 
 0.25 
 
 120 
 
 
 
 
 These corrections are to be subtracted from double altitudes measured with the side A of the 
 roof next the observer, and added to double altitudes measured with the side B next the observer. 
 However, they will never change the resulting single altitude by more than 0".15, and, as that is a 
 quantity utterly unappreciable with a sextant, this roof may be considered as perfect. 
 
 A Pocket Sextant, made by Stackpole and Brother, of New York, marked No. .'546, having an arc 
 of two and a quarter inches radius, and reading to single minutes. 
 
 A Black Glass Artificial Horizon, four inches long by three inches wide, provided with a very sen- 
 sitive level, and an inclined plane with black glass surfaces which can be set on the horizon for the 
 purpose of measuring zenith distances ranging between seventy and one hundred and thirty degrees. 
 
 A Prismatic Compass, having colored glasses for the purpose of observing the sun, and a needle 
 three inches long, carrying a metal circle three inches in diameter, divided to single degrees. 
 
 A Small Reflecting Lerel. 
 
 A Pocket Compass. 
 
 A Fifty-foot Chesterman''s Metallic Tape Measure, which had been carefully tested, by means of 
 an eighteen-inch steel standard rule, and found to be correct. 
 
 A Binocular Field Glass, magnifying 5.50 diameters and having a Held of view of 2 50'. 
 
 A Pocket Achromatic Telescope, having an object glass made by Alvan Clark and Sons, of 9.99 
 inches focus and 1.09 inches clear aperture, with a terrestrial eye-piece magnifying 19.2 diameters 
 and a field of view of 1 48'; provided with a screw clip for holding it steadily while observing. 
 
 A Set of Three Colored Glasses, mounted in a horn frame for the pocket. 
 
 A Pocket Thermometer. 
 
 A Rain Gauge, having a receiving surface 2.788 inches in diameter, and a glass measure for the 
 same, holding half an inch of rain and graduated to each 0.005 of an inch. 
 
 A Break-circuit Telegraph Key. 
 
 A Set of Drawing Instrument's. 
 
 We had with us, for the use of the party, three mean-time box chronometers, made by T. S. and 
 ,T. 1). Negus, of New York, a full account of which will be found in Professor Eastman's report. 
 
 I had also the following articles: American Nautical Almanac, and supplement, for 1869; 
 Chauvenet's Astronomy ; Loomis's Practical Astronomy ; Chauvenef s Trigonometry ; Four-figure 
 Logarithms ; Bowditch's Useful Tables ; Bremiker's Six-figure Logarithms ; Crelle's Multiplication 
 Table ; Star Maps ; scale of tints with which to compare the colors of the protuberances around the 
 sun during the totality; blank forms for latitude and time observations; blanks for spectroscope 
 observations. 
 
 GENERAL REMARKS ON THE OBSERVATIONS FOR TIME AND LATITUDE. 
 
 The observations for time and latitude were all made by me, assisted either by Professor East- 
 man or Dr. Curtis, one of whom always noted the time at a given signal, and then recorded the 
 observation. Under the circumstances, I considered that method as accurate, and certainly much 
 more convenient, than it would have been for me to have taken up the beat of the chronometer and 
 noted the time myself. The instruments employed were the sextant Stackpole and Brother, No. 937, 
 with a magnifying power of 8.88 diameters on the telescope ; the mercurial artificial horizon Ha. 1 ; 
 and the mean-time chronometer T. S. and J. D. Negus, No. 1319. At night the index correction of 
 the sextant was determined by observing the coincidence of the direct and reflected image of a star; 
 in the day-time it was determined by measuring the diameter of the sun both on and off the arc. 
 In order to avoid reading tbe vernier backward on the arc of excess, which always involves risk 
 
1809. 33 
 
 of error, tin- zero of Mio graduation was taken at a point live degrees oft' the are. Thus an angle 
 recorded as 4 li.V 50" was really 34' 10" oft' the are. This applies only to angles measured on the 
 arc of excess for the' purpose of determining index corrections. 
 
 The refractions have, been computed by means of Hessel's formula, sometimes using the tallies 
 given in the appendix to the Washington observations for 1845, and sometimes those given in 
 Loomis's Practical Astronomy ; from which latter book all reductions to the meridian have also 
 been taken. Itight ascensions, declinations, parallaxes, semi-diameters, and all other elements of 
 the lieavenh bodies which were required in the reductions, have been taken from the American 
 Nautical Almanac. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS FOE TIME. 
 
 All observations for time have been made on the sun in the following manner : Suppose the sun 
 to be rising. The index of the sextant was set at an angle a little greater than the. double, altitude 
 of the upper limb ; the angle chosen being always at some whole degree, or else at some 15', 30', or 
 45', on the graduated are. Then, looking through the telescope of the sextant into the artificial 
 horizon, the two images of the sun were seen separated, but approaching each other, and the instant 
 when the two limbs came into contact was noted. The index was then set forward fifteen minutes, 
 and the same process repeated; after whicJi it was again set forward lift ecu minutes more, and the 
 same process repeated a third time; thus giving three, observed contacts of the upper limbs. The 
 roof of the artificial horizon was next reversed, and the index of the sextant set back to its first 
 reading. Then, looking through the telescope of the sextant into the artificial horizon, the two 
 images were seen overlapping, but separating, and the instant of last contact of the two limbs was 
 noted. The index was then set forward fifteen minutes, and the same process repeated ; after which 
 it was again set forward fifteen minutes more, and the same process repeated a third time; thus 
 giving three observed contacts of the lower limbs respectively at precisely the same altitudes as the 
 corresponding ones of the upper limbs. If the sun was falling, instead of rising, then the same 
 observations were made, but their order was reversed. The advantage gained by observing in this 
 manner is that all correction for semi-diameter is avoided, all errors arising from a prismatic form 
 of the glasses in the roof of the artificial horizon are eliminated, and even for a very accurate reduc- 
 tion there is needed only a single computation of the refraction. 
 
 The reduction of observations for time has been effected by means of the following formula 1 : 
 
 a 
 
 > 
 
 r + p i. s 
 
 sin 
 
 = A/ 8 " 1 (^ rt ) ' cos ^ ' s c <p . cosec d 
 
 In which 
 
 T = mean of observed chronometer times. 
 
 {2 = mean of observed double altitudes. 
 
 01 = correction for index error, eccentricity, &c. 
 
 r = refraction. 
 
 p = parallax. 
 
 it = semi-diameter. 
 
 a = the geocentric altitude of the center of the object observed. 
 
 d = polar distance of object observed, measured from the elevated pole. 
 
 y = latitude of place where observation is made. 
 tf = hour angle, at the pole, of the object observed. 
 
 T== equation of time. 
 <Zt= correction of the chronometer to reduce the reading of its face to local mean time. 
 
 Appended is a specimen of the form upon which the observations were recorded and reduced. 
 
 Most of it will be sufficiently intelligible without any explanation. Under the head, "Index cor- 
 
 rection, &c.," the columns "On arc" and "Off arc" are used when the index correction is deter 
 
 mined from the sun ; that headed " Coincidence of images" when it is determined by observing a star. 
 
 5* 
 
34 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 With some instruments it is possible that the measures of the sun's diameter made on and off the 
 arc may require correction for eccentricity. In such a case the correction is inserted on the line 
 "Eccentricity," and by adding it to \ (<' <) the true index correction is obt-ained. The quanti- 
 ties r h <7, B, F, and 'Art. Hor., are all functions of, and vary with, the measured angle to which the 
 index correction is to be applied. (In this example 84 -t.5f.) r t is the correction for want of paral- 
 lelism between the line of sight of the telescope and the plane of the sextant; a is the correction 
 for a prismatic form of the index glass; E is the correction for eccentricity, a table of which for this 
 instrument is given on page 31 ; F is the correction for a change of index error dependent upon the 
 position in which the sextant is held, or in other words, for flexure; Art. Hor. is the correction for 
 want of parallelism in the surfaces of the glass composing the roof of the horizon ; a table of its 
 values for the horizon Ha. 1 is given on page 32, but when, as in the present case, half the observa- 
 tions have been taken with the roof in one position, and the other half with it reversed, the error 
 eliminates itself and the correction is zero. 
 
 Observations for 
 
 SMioii, DCS Moiiies, Iowa 
 
 Instrument, Sextant - 
 
 Artfticial Horizon 
 
 Chronometer 
 
 Observer, Wm. Harkness - 
 
 Time. 
 
 Date, August 1, 
 M<u'l; t >lr <( />Vo., No. 937. 
 Folding Mercurial, Ha. 1 
 T. & & J. D. Nfym, So. 1319. 
 Object, S'i<n. 
 
 
 Double Altitude. 
 
 Limb 
 
 observed. 
 
 jj 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 
 o in 
 85 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 h. in. *. 
 9 30 8. 5 
 
 
 84 45 
 
 U 
 
 U 
 
 30 .M..-> 
 
 
 84 30 
 
 u 
 
 11 
 
 31 33. 6 
 
 
 85 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 33 5. 
 
 
 84 45 
 
 tt 
 
 " 
 
 33 47. 1 
 
 Sums. 
 Means. 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 Q 
 
 84 30 
 
 " 
 
 u 
 
 34 29. 4 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 13 55.1 
 
 84 45 0. 
 4- 2 31. 1 
 
 
 
 9 32 19.2 
 
 Thermometer 74.0 
 
 84 47 31. 1 
 
 in 
 
 42 23 45. 5 
 
 Barometer 29. 7(i 
 
 Retraction. 
 
 59. 5 
 
 At, Thor. 
 
 Parallax. 
 
 -f- 6.3 
 
 
 Semi-diam. 
 
 
 
 
 42 22 52. 
 
 d 
 
 73 44 59. 
 
 
 2S 
 S 
 
 41 35 :!. 
 
 
 157 43 27 
 
 78 51 44 
 
 S 
 
 S6 28 52 
 
 o i a 
 -f Hi 15 0.6 
 
 Declination of object 
 
 Polar distance of object 73 44 59.4 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1309. 
 
 35 
 
 Ottfeot 
 
 Index Correction, &c. 
 
 On are = u 
 
 Off arc = u' 
 
 Coincidence of 
 Images. 
 
 Sums. 
 Means. 
 
 w' <j 
 i (u' u) 
 Eccentricity 
 Index Corr. 
 ;; anil c 
 E 
 F 
 Art. Hor. 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 t it 
 
 20 :so 
 
 25 
 25 
 
 O ' " 
 
 4 20 5 
 
 5 
 
 / // 
 
 80 
 
 10 
 
 
 29 26. 7 
 33 511. 7 
 
 4 20 3. 3 
 
 
 Sin (S a) 
 CosS 
 Sec <j> 
 Cosec d 
 Sin* i H 
 Sin | II 
 
 Logarithms. 
 
 + 4 :',<). o 
 
 9.774194 
 9. 285937 
 .126171 
 . 017707 
 
 + 2 15. 
 0.0 
 
 + 2 15. 
 0.0 
 + 10.1 
 0.0 
 0.0 
 
 9. 204009 
 
 9. 602004 
 
 / 
 
 li. m. s. 
 3 8 36.0 
 
 + 5 2f>.2 
 
 + 2 31.1 
 
 Local Apparent Time 
 
 
 
 
 314 2. 2 
 9 32 19.2 
 
 Time liy Clironoinetei 
 
 Chronometer t'asf nf 1 
 Longitude west of \Vi 
 
 Chronometer fast of- \ 
 These oliscrvatk 
 
 0. 38 of an inch inn* 
 from index error. 
 
 
 ocal Mean Time 
 
 6 18 17. 
 1 6 16. 
 
 Washington Mean T 
 us were made after 
 
 t In 1 subtracted t'rni 
 
 
 5 12 1. 
 
 
 noon. 
 n tin' rending of the barometer to free it 
 
 The observations for time are given in detail in Schedule A, appended to this report, but for 
 con vcn fence of reference the following .abstract of them is inserted here. The column headed 
 " Mean" is the menu of the forenoon and the afternoon observations, and is taken to be the error of 
 the chronometer at noon. In cases where (here is only one set of observations in the forenoon, and 
 two sets in the afternoon, in taking- the mean 1 have given the morning observations double weight, 
 because there seems to be a constant difference between them and the afternoon ones. 
 
36 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 Chronometer T. 8. & J. D. Negus No. 1,319, fast of Dot Mo! in* 
 
 time, by obxercutiou. 
 
 Date. 
 
 A.M. P.M. 
 
 Menu. 
 
 1,'nily 
 rate. 
 
 Hourly 
 rate. 
 
 
 /I. Wl. *. 
 
 8. 
 
 /i. in. . 
 
 -. 
 
 8. 
 
 July 93 
 
 6 18 8. 4 
 
 7.4 
 
 6 18 8.0 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 
 7.9 
 
 
 - 0. 47 
 
 0. 020 
 
 24 
 
 8.9 
 
 
 
 
 
 26 
 
 9.8 
 
 8.9 
 
 9.4 
 
 
 
 27 
 
 10.6 
 
 . . 
 
 . 
 
 1.05 
 
 .044 
 
 27 
 
 10.8 
 
 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 12.3 
 
 10.7 
 
 11.5 
 
 . 
 
 
 28 
 
 
 10.9 
 
 
 0.50 
 
 .021 
 
 29 
 
 1-2.4 
 
 11.8 
 
 12.0 
 
 
 
 29 
 
 
 11-. 6 
 
 . 
 
 0.20 
 
 .008 
 
 30 
 
 12.0 
 
 12.6 
 
 12.2 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 12.5 
 
 11.9 
 
 . 
 
 1.40 
 
 .058 
 
 31 
 
 13.8 
 
 13.3 
 
 13. 6 
 
 
 
 31 
 
 13.9 
 
 13.6 
 
 
 0.45 
 
 .019 
 
 Aug. 4 
 
 15.1 
 
 15. 7 
 
 15.4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 0. 63 
 
 0. 026 
 
 7 
 
 17.2 
 
 17.0 
 
 17.3 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 17.9 
 
 17.0 
 
 . 
 
 + 0.20 
 
 +0. 008 
 
 8 
 
 6 18 16.9 
 
 17.2 
 
 6 1 17. 1 
 
 
 
 As the time is of very great importance on the day of the eclipse, I have obtained the chronom- 
 eter error employed on that occasion, as follows : The telegraphic comparison made at Des Moines 
 on the evening of August 7, 1869, between my mean-time chronometer, T. S. and J. 1). Negus No. 
 1319, and the Kesscls sidereal clock at Washington, gave 
 
 31, 4 m 55.30, Negus = 19 h O m O s .O, Kessels. 
 Then we have 
 
 h. HI. 8. 
 
 Time by face of Kessels 19 0.00 
 
 Kessels fast - - 
 
 27.16 
 
 Washington sidereal time 
 Sidereal time of mean moon 
 
 Sidereal interval 
 Acceleration on mean time 
 
 Washington mean time 
 
 Time occupied by passage of signal from Washington to Des Moines 
 
 Des Moines west of Washington 
 
 Des Moines mean time 
 Time by Negus, 1:519 
 
 Negus i:;i!, fast 
 I (ate from noon 
 
 Negus 1."I9, last at noon - 
 
 At the time of the eclipse this chronometer was therefore 
 
 Qb 18"' 17 8 .2fast 
 
 18 59 32.84 
 
 9 
 
 1.50 
 
 9 54 31.34 
 
 1 37.40 
 
 9 52 53.94 
 
 + 0.21 
 
 16 10.09 
 
 8 46 38.06 
 
 3 4 55.: !0 
 
 6 18 17.24 
 0.10 
 
 6 18 17.14 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 18C.9. 37 
 
 of DCS .Monies mean time. I have thought it best to determine its error in this way because by so 
 doing it is niiiile to depend upon seventeen sets of time observations, instead of upon four sets, as 
 would he tin 1 ease if the observations of August 7 only were used. For an explanation of the rate 
 employed for this chronometer, and the error of tbe Kessels clock, see pages 42 and 43. 
 
 OIJSKItVATIONS FOK LATITUDE. 
 
 Circum-meridian altitudes of the. sun for latitude were observed as follows: Three double alti- 
 tudes of one litnli were taken, and then the roof of the artificial horizon was reversed, and three 
 double altitudes of the other limb observed. Thus the semi-diameter of the sun, and all errors 
 depending upon any imperfection of the roof of the artiticial horizon, were eliminated. It is perhaps 
 scarcely necessary to add that the time was noted and recorded at the instaut of observing each 
 double altitude. ( 'ireum -meridian altitudes of stars were observed in the same way as those of tbe 
 sun, except that the coincidence of images was taken instead of the contact of limbs. 
 
 The reduction of the observations for latitude Las been effected by means of the following 
 formula- : 
 
 * -JT- 
 
 ]_ ] ~ 80400 J 
 f 1 T 
 
 fc = ,)T ;K 
 
 SliKIO 
 
 Log. i = 0.00237. 
 When the sun is observed with a mean-time chronometer, 
 
 , COS if. COS" 
 A :=^ tC - 
 
 Sill *| 
 
 When a star is observed with a mean-time chronometer, 
 
 . . COS y. COS 
 
 A = KI. 
 
 sin Ci 
 
 B A- 1 , col :, 
 
 2 sin 2 i t 
 
 m= . , - 
 sin I" 
 
 siiiT /7 ~ 
 
 fi = + >' p is A m + B n 
 
 <p=^ + o 
 
 In which 
 
 fl = niean of observed double altitudes. 
 = correction for index error, eccentricity, &c. 
 r = refraction. 
 jj = parallax. 
 a semi-diameter. 
 
 <5T==rate of chronometer in twenty-four hours, positive when the chronometer is losing. 
 (5E=the increase of the equation of time in twenty -fom boors ; the equation of time being regarded 
 
 as positive \\hen it is to be added to apparent time. 
 * = hour angle of the object observed. 
 
38 
 
 KEPOET OF PROFESSOR IIARKNESS. 
 
 <J = declination of the object observed; north declinations being' taken positive. For a culmina- 
 tion below the pole, it must be measured from the equator through the zenith to the object : 
 that is, it is equal to 180 S. 
 C = observed zenith distance of object, which is to be taken as positive when the object is south 
 
 of the zenith. 
 
 , = true geocentric zenith distance of the object at the time of its culmination. 
 y = latitude of the place of observation. 
 
 Appended is a specimen of the form upon which the observations were recorded and reduced. 
 That part of it relating to the index correction is precisely the same as in the case of the time 
 observations, and the remainder of it will be sufficiently intelligible, without any explanation. 
 
 Observations for Latitude. 
 
 Station, DCS Moines, Iowa Date, July I'l, 1869. 
 
 Instrument, Sextant - Mackjmlc it Jiro., Xo. 937. 
 
 Artificial Horizon Foldiiu/ Mercurial, Ha. 1. 
 
 Chronometer T. fl. & J. D. XMJUK No. 1319. 
 
 Observer, Wm. Hardness - Object, Sun. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Double Altitude. 
 
 * 
 
 t. 
 
 in. a. 
 
 /). m. X. 
 
 6 7-51.5 
 
 C J " 
 
 136 17 45 
 
 111. X. 
 
 16 29. 4 
 
 533.6 0.7 
 
 8 32.0 20 10 
 
 15 4H. 11 
 
 I'.in. ii .6 
 
 9 9.5 22 20 
 
 IT, 11.4 
 
 45-,>. 9 . 5 
 
 JO 11.3 135 23 10 
 
 14 9. 6 
 
 393. 6 . 4 
 
 1(1 55.3 
 
 25 10 
 
 13 ;.';-,.(; 
 
 :;.-,:',. 9 . 3 
 
 12 7. 
 
 29 30 
 
 l-> 1 ::.'.> 
 
 29::. 7 .2 
 
 58 .IH.Ci 18 5 
 
 Sums. 
 
 251Ki; 2.7 
 
 (i "9 47.8 
 
 i:;r> r>3 0.8 
 + 2 50. 5 
 
 Mriins. 
 
 119..- 0.45 
 
 Index Corr., &e. 
 Q 
 
 to 
 
 90 Q = ? 
 
 Thermometer, 86.0 
 
 Barometer. 
 
 At, Ther. 
 
 135 55 51.3 
 
 67 57 55. 6 
 
 22 2 4.4 
 
 Kefraction 
 
 + 21.7 
 
 
 Parallax 
 
 3.2 
 
 
 Semi-diameter 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 AI 
 
 - 13 14.5 
 
 
 B 
 fi 
 
 + 4.0 
 
 
 21 49. 12. 
 
 <! 
 
 
 + 19 46 24. 
 
 
 /I. Ml. K. 
 = 12 6 12.0 
 
 6 18 8.9 
 
 = (;>.) -jo. 9 
 
 41 35 36. 
 
 Time of culmination 
 
 
 
 Chronometer lime 01 
 
 
 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 Index Correction, &c. 
 
 Oli.jrrl. Oil air (J 
 
 Otf arc = w' 
 
 Ciiinciilciico of 
 Image's. 
 
 / // 
 2l "> 
 
 O ' " 
 
 i ><; ii 
 
 / // 
 
 in 20 
 
 
 in 
 sum*. 2."-. 
 
 Means. '."I 8.3 
 33 r>0.0 
 u' u + 4 -11.7 
 
 in 
 
 
 30. 
 
 
 4 i I". l 
 
 . 
 
 Sin M 
 Ar. Conij). 
 
 Logarithms. 
 
 9. 5703 
 
 H "'-<>) 4- 2 20.8 
 
 0.4297 
 
 l.c i rntricity. 0.0 
 
 Cos <p 
 
 9. H?3- 
 
 Index ( 'HIT. -f 1 20. f 
 
 ( 'i.- c 
 
 n.;i7:{(i 
 
 ^ anil T 0. 
 
 fc 
 
 
 K + 29.7 
 F 0. 
 
 i 
 A 
 
 
 0. 2771 
 
 Art. lli.r. 0.0 
 
 >"o 
 A/ 
 
 2. 62:> 
 2. SMI01 
 
 Imlrx Corr., &c. + a r,0. r> 
 
 
 A- 
 
 0.6542 
 
 
 Ciil fi 
 
 0. :!!I74 
 
 
 H 3 
 
 B/^ 
 
 '.1. <i. r >32 
 
 0.6048 
 
 
 Ii. in. . 
 II 12.0 
 
 1 (5 16. 
 
 AsMiinnl l,oiif{itii(lf west of Washington 
 BKMAK 
 
 
 KS. 
 
 Observations tor latitude iimde on Polaris when at a considerable distance from the meridian 
 have been reduced by means of the formula 
 
 <P = Ji p. cos t + i p 2 . sin 1". sin 2 1. tan 
 In which 
 
 i2 = mean of observed double altitudes. 
 i = correction for index error, eccentricity, &c. 
 r = refraction. 
 
 jj=polar distance of the star, expressed in seconds of arc. 
 t=.= honr angle of the star. 
 
40 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNE8S. 
 
 The observations for latitude are given in detail in Schedule. ]>, appended to this report, but 
 for convenience of reference the following abstract of them is inserted here: 
 
 Observations for Latitude of Temporary Ohxerratory. 
 
 Date. 
 
 Object. 
 
 I.;M it Ililr. 
 
 1869. 
 
 
 ' II 
 
 July 23 
 
 Sllll 
 
 41 :ir. .':, 
 
 23 
 
 Sun 
 
 84 
 
 24 
 
 Sun 
 
 36 
 
 25 
 
 Sun ....... 
 
 29 
 
 26 
 
 Sun 
 
 411 
 
 27 
 
 Sim 
 
 29 
 
 28 
 
 Sun 
 
 42 
 
 28 
 
 Sun 
 
 35 
 
 29 
 
 Sun 
 
 35 
 
 29 
 
 Sun 
 
 33 
 
 29 
 
 
 37 
 
 29 
 
 
 :) 
 
 30 
 
 Sun 
 
 :;<; 
 
 30 
 
 Sun 
 
 34 
 
 30 
 
 Polaris 
 
 40 
 
 31 
 
 Sun 
 
 II 
 
 31 
 
 Sim 
 
 :!'.) 
 
 Ann 2 
 
 Sun 
 
 41 
 
 2 
 
 Sim 
 
 41 
 
 2 
 
 a Onliiuchi .... 
 
 33 
 
 2 
 
 Polaris 
 
 26 
 
 2 
 
 a Aqnilip 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 <i Sngittarii .... 
 
 48 
 
 Rejecting the observation of a Aquihe made on August 2, the mean of all the observations of 
 the sun and south stars gives for the latitude 
 
 41 35' 35".7 i 0".94 
 And the mean of the observations of Polaris gives 
 
 410 35/ 37.o 1 3".95 
 
 As these two results differ from each other by a quantity less than their probable error, they afford 
 no evidence that they are affected by any constant errors. 1 have therefore taken as the iinal result 
 of the observations their general mean, which is 
 
 41 35' 3f>".9 i 0".t>3 
 
 TELEGRAPHIC DETERMINATION OF LONGITUDE. 
 
 The plan adopted for- the determination of the difference of longitude was to allow the observers 
 at Washington and Des Moines to determine their respective local times in whatever manner 
 was most convenient, and then to compare these times by means of the electric telegraph. For that 
 purpose it was necessary to have the use of the wires of the Western Union Telegraph Company, 
 and our thanks are due to William Orton, esq., the president of that company, for his liberality in 
 granting them to us free of all expense. We are also under obligations to the following named gen 
 tleinen: to Mr. Charles A. Tinker, manager of the Western Union lines in Washington, and to the 
 gentlemen having charge of the wires in Chicago, whose names I am ignorant of, for making the 
 general arrangements necessary to give a continuous line of wire from Washington to Des Moines. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THK ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 41 
 
 To Mr. M. Marcan, chief operator in tin- Washington office, for coming up to the observatory every 
 evening and assisting' in the management of the, wires during the exchange of signals. To Mr. 
 Monroe A. Smith, manager of the telegraph otlice at Des MoinevS, for assistance and facilities ren- 
 dered to me there ; and to the various gentlemen, whose names I do not know, who had charge of 
 the repeaters at Philadelphia, Pittsburg, C'restline, Chicago, Keokuk, and Davenport, during the 
 exchange of signals. 
 
 The signals employed in determining the difference of longitude were made by breaking a gal- 
 vanic circuit ; a method which 1 prefer because- the magnets used in telegraphing are much more 
 certain to open promptly when the circuit is broken than they are to close promptly when it is 
 re-established. This is true of a circuit including only a single magnet, but it applies with far 
 greater force when, as in the present case, the distance is so very great that it is necessary to 
 divide it into a number of shorter circuits and to use repeaters to transmit the signals from one 
 circuit to the other. The apparatus employed at the observatory in Washington, both for sending 
 and receiving signals, is entirely automatic, and is fully described in my report on the determina- 
 tion of the longitude of the city of Havana, Cuba. That used at Des Moines consisted of a break 
 circuit key, which I carried with me, and the usual receiving magnet and sounder; the armature 
 of I lie magnet of the sounder being so adjusted as to make its back stroke much louder than its for- 
 ward one. 
 
 At Washington, the pendulum of the Kessels sidereal clock broke the circuit for somewhat less 
 than one-tenth of a second every time it passed the central point of its arc; thus making a break 
 once every second. Halfway between the clock break corresponding to seconds and that corre- 
 sponding to 1 second, an extra break was interpolated by means of a key worked by hand; thus 
 marking the beginning of each minute by a double break. These signals, after passing through 
 the various intermediate repeaters, finally arrived at lies Moines and were made audible by the 
 sounder there. Sitting beside it, and keeping my eye upon the mean-time chronometer, I waited 
 until the back stroke of the armature of the sounder coincided with the beat of the chronometer. 
 When that occurred I noted the time; and also the time of the arrival of the next following double 
 beat of the Washington clock. Five such coincidences were observed on each night when signals 
 were exchanged, and at their conclusion the Washington operator told me the hour and minute 
 corresponding to the last double beat of his clock. The following record of signals received at Des 
 Moines. from Washington, on the evening of August 7, 1809, is given as a specimen of such work : 
 
 Cdiiicidc-nc;' of brcak.s with Nuxt following 
 
 limits of chronometer. double break. 
 
 It. in. . . 
 
 2 30 18.0 01. 
 
 33 10.5 00..-, 
 
 30 18.0 00.0 
 
 39 10.5 59.5 
 
 42 18.0 59.0 = IS" 38'" O s .O, Washington clock. 
 
 Now, as the double breaks correspond to the seconds of the Washington clock, if we add 00 
 to the observed seconds of the time of coincidence of beats, and then subtract from the sum the sec 
 onds of the time of the next following double beat, the remainder will be the seconds indicated by 
 the face of the Washington clock at the time of the coincidence of beats. Thus, for the first coin- 
 cidence recorded above, (JO" + 18 s .O 01 s .O = 17 s .O. The last recorded coincidence and double beat 
 give, not only the seconds of the Washington clock, but the hour and minute also; thus furnishing 
 the means of supplying the hour and minute to each of the other coincidences. Proceeding in that 
 manner with the record given above, we obtain 
 
 Chronometer. Washington clock. 
 
 h. m. . It. in. s. 
 
 2 30 18.0 18 25 17.0 
 
 33 10.5 28 10.0 
 
 30 18.0 31 18.0 
 
 39 10.5 34 17.0 
 
 42 18.0 37 ' 19.0 
 
 6* 
 
42 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 These are the desired comparisons of the clock and chronometer, obtained at DCS Moines. In 
 order to eliminate the time occupied in the transmission of the signals, it was necessary that a .sim- 
 ilar set of comparisons should be obtained at Washington. For that purpose, as soon as the com- 
 parisons at Des Moines were finished, the otliccr at Washington put his clock out of the main cir- 
 cuit, and arranged his chronograph so that while it recorded the beats of his clock it would also 
 record along with them the signals sent from DCS Moines. Then, placing my hand above, but not 
 in contact with, the break-circuit key, 1 beat seconds with my linger, in coincidence with the beats 
 of my chronometer, touching the key at every beat, but only pressing it hard enough to break tin- 
 circuit at the beats corresponding to 0, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 0, &c., &<., seconds. 
 Thus breaks were transmitted to Washington, and recorded upon the chronograph, at regular inter- 
 vals of five seconds, and the beginning of each minute was marked by a double break. Finally, 
 after a sufficient number of such signals had been sent, 1 telegraphed to Washington the hour and 
 minute indicated by my chronometer at the last double break. The following record of the breaks 
 received at Washington from Des Moines, read from the chronograph sheets of the evening of 
 August 7. 1809, is inserted as a specimen of such work. 
 
 Each comparison consists of nine signals; namely, all those occurring at intervals of live sec- 
 onds between 40 seconds of one minute and 20 seconds of the next following minute, by the face of 
 the chronometer. As the chronograph has but a single pen, by which both the clock beats and the 
 signals are recorded, in order to avoid inaccuracy in reading off the sheets, no use is made of sig- 
 nals which occur very iiear the time of coincidence of beats of the clock and chronometer. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 h. m. a. 
 2 49 0.0 
 
 Washington 
 
 clock. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 
 *.40 
 
 
 
 .40 
 
 
 
 .50 
 
 
 A. m. 
 
 .45 
 
 A. TO. 9. 
 
 18 44 
 
 2.43 
 
 2 50 0.0 
 
 
 .40 
 
 
 
 .50 
 
 
 
 .55 
 
 
 
 .50 
 
 
 \V:isliingioii 
 
 clock. 
 
 Chronometer. Washington clock. 
 
 
 a. 
 
 8. 
 
 
 .55 
 
 .70 
 
 ' 
 
 .60 
 
 .SO 
 
 
 .(iO 
 
 .85 
 
 li. m. 
 
 .60 
 
 //. m. 8. A. m. .80 
 
 18 45 
 
 2.05 
 
 2 51 0.0 18 46 2.SO 
 
 
 .70 
 
 .88 
 
 
 .85 
 
 .80 
 
 
 .70 
 
 .88 
 
 
 .70 
 
 .90 
 
 Taking the means we get 
 
 Chronometer. 
 li. m. s. 
 2 49 0.0 
 
 50 0.0 
 
 51 0.0 
 
 Washington clock. 
 
 /I. Ml. K. 
 
 18 44 2.46 
 
 45 2.66 
 
 46 2.82 
 
 which are the desired comparisons of the clock and chronometer, obtained at Washington. 
 
 As our temporary observatory at Des Moines was more than three-quarters of a mile from the 
 telegraph office, in order to guard against the introduction of any error into the longitude, by the 
 chronometer tripping while it was being carried from one place to the other, 1 always compared it 
 with the mean-time chronometer T. S. <S: J. I). Negus No. 1300, immediately before starting for the 
 telegraph office, and again immediately after returning from it. 1 always walked from one place 
 to the other, and carried the chronometer in my hand, so as to subject it to as little motion as pos 
 sible. 
 
 The observations for time at Washington are given in full in Schedule (', appended to this report. 
 They were made with the east transit instrument, by Professor M. Yarnall, U. S. N., who has also 
 reduced them and furnished me with the clock errors which I have employed. The error of the 
 chronometer Negus 1319, on Des Moines mean time, during the exchange of longitude signals on 
 the evenings of July 26, 29, 30, and 31, has been obtained from the hourly rate and error at noon 
 given for that chronometer on these days respectively in the table on page 36. For the evening of 
 August 7 the error has beeu found as follows: From July 23 to August 7 the time observations 
 show that the chronometer was steadily gaining ; while the observations of August 8 show that 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 43 
 
 during the twenty -four hours preceding tin- noon of tlmt day it lost two-tenths of a second. The 
 question arises whether the change of rate took place before or after the exchange of longitude 
 signals on August 7. To answer that question we have the following comparisons of chronometers : 
 
 
 \rj;iis lliOO. Negus 1H19. 
 
 1869. 
 
 ft. 
 
 in. 
 
 s. 
 
 ft. 
 
 in. 
 
 8 
 
 
 August 7 
 
 : 
 
 6 
 
 0.0 
 
 = :! 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 12 
 
 57 
 
 0.0 
 
 = 12 
 
 59 
 
 8 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 16 
 
 8 
 
 0.0 
 
 = 16 
 
 10 
 
 8.7 
 
 8 
 
 6 
 
 38 
 
 II. 
 
 = 6 
 
 40 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 As the longitude signals were exchanged between 14 h 30 m and lu h O m , by the face of Negus 
 1319, these comparisons seem to indicate that the change of rate took place afterwards. The 
 observations make Negus 1319 
 
 C 1 ' 18m 17 S .3 fast 
 
 at noon of August 7, and for the preceding ten days it gained on aw average 0.58 of a second per 
 day. Hence, its error at the time the signals were exchanged would be 6 h 18 m 17 S .50. I have pre- 
 ferred to use a slightly less value, and have, adopted 
 
 G 1 ' 18'" 17".4 fast. 
 
 Throughout the following record of the exchange of signals, the error of the Kessels clock is 
 given on Washington sidereal time, and the error of the chronometer Negus 1319 on mean time at 
 our temporary observatory in Des Moincs. 
 
 On account of the great distance between the two cities, it was impossible to transmit tele- 
 graphic signals directly from Washington to DCS Moines; therefore the line was broken up into a 
 number of circuits of moderate length, and the signals transmitted from one circuit to the other by 
 means of automatic repeaters; the arrangement of which depended upon the electrical condition of 
 the wires, and the exigencies of the business of the telegraph company, and was varied from night 
 to night; the particular arrangement made use of on each night being stated in the record of that 
 night's work. The number of statute miles of wire, exclusive of the wire in the magnets, the kind 
 of repeaters, and the amount of battery used on each circuit that was employed, were as follows: 
 
 Washington to Philadelphia, 138 miles. Thirty drove cups at, Washington. A Hix repeater 
 and thirty drove cups at Philadelphia. 
 
 I'hilailelphia to rittstburg, 355 miles. A Hix repeater and fifty Grove cups at Philadelphia. A 
 Hix repeater and sixty-five drove cups at Pittsburg. 
 
 Fittxlmrg 1<> Crcxtliiic, 189 miles. A Hix repeater and sixty-five Grove cups at Pittsburg. A 
 Hix repeater and seventy-five Grove cups at Crestline. 
 
 Crestline to Chicago, 270 miles. A Hix repeater and seventy-five Grove cups at Crestline. A 
 Hix repeater and sixty Grove cups at Chicago. 
 
 Pittsburg to Chicago, 408 miles. A Hix repeater and sixty-five Grove cups at Pittsburg. A Hix 
 repeater and sixty Grove cups at Chicago. 
 
 Chicago to KcoJmk, 251 miles. A Hix repeater and sixty Grove cups at Chicago. A button 
 repeater and two hundred and fifty cups of Hill's battery at Keokuk. 
 
 Keoltulc to Des Moines, 101 miles. A button repeater and two hundred and fifty cups of Hill's 
 battery at Keokuk. Ninety cups of Hill's battery at Des Moines. 
 
 Chicago to Davenport, 183 miles. A Hix repeater and sixty Grove cups at Chicago. A button 
 repeater and sixty-five Grove cups at Davenport. 
 
 Davenport to Des Moines, 174 miles. A button repeater and sixty-five Grove cups aj Daven- 
 port. Ninety cups of Hill's battery at Des Moines. 
 
 Hill's battery is a modification of Darnell's, each cup consisting of a glass jar, about seven 
 
44 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 inches high and six inches in diameter, with a sheet of copper placed in the bottom, and a disk of 
 zinc, perforated in the center, suspended horizontally about five and a half inches above the copper. 
 Each of these plates has a surface of about twenty-eight square inches, and has attached to it a 
 gutta-percha covered copper wire, which forms one pole, of the battery. The jar is tilled with a solu- 
 tion of sulphate of zinc, after which a few crystals of sulphate of copper are dropped in through the 
 orifice in the /inc, and lie on the copper plate. If the liquid is not agitated the copper plate will 
 lie in a solution of sulphate of copper, and the zinc plate in a solution of sulphate of zinc, so long as 
 the specific gravity of the latter is less than 36 li. The porous cell, used in Daniell's battery, is 
 therefore dispensed with. For telegraphic purposes seventy cups of Hill's battery are considered 
 equal to forty-three cups of Grove. 
 
 The difference between a Hix and button repeater is, that, when a llix repeater is properly 
 adjusted, signals can be sent through it with equal facility in either direction ; while if signals are 
 being sent through a button repeater in one direction, before they can be sent in the opposite direc- 
 tion an attendant must change the connections of the wires. This is done by means of a switch, or 
 button ; hence the name, " button repeater." In the case of all repeaters, signals going in one direc- 
 tion pass through a different set of magnets from those going in the opposite direction; therefore 
 there never can be any security that in any given case the signals going in opposite directions occu- 
 pied the same, length of time in their transit; however, as the repeaters will only work within very 
 narrow limits of adjustment, aiwl as the, combined wave and armature time varies so little on different 
 nights, the error originating from this source must be exceedingly small, and in the mean of five 
 nights it is probably entirely eliminated. 
 
 The total length of wire, exclusive of that on the magnets, between Washington and Des 
 Moines, via Keokuk, is 1,373 miles ; and via Davenport, 1,318 miles. 
 
 KKCOKD OF EXCHANGE OF SIGNALS. 
 
 July 21 i, 1800. Uepeaters at Philadelphia, Pittsburg, Crestline, Chicago, and Keokuk. 
 Comparison of chronometers to show whether or not Negns 1319 suffered any appreciable change 
 in its error while being carried to the telegraph office and back : 
 
 Negn 1300. Negus 131!'. 
 
 li. m. s. /i. m. x. 
 
 11 22 0.0 11 24 7.8 
 
 5 47 0.0 5 49 8.0 
 
 Kessels clock, 22 s . 45 fast. 
 
 Chronometer Negus 1310, G 1 ' 18"' 9 S .S fast. 
 
 Comparisons of clock and chronometer by means of signals received at Des Moines: 
 
 Negus 1319. Kessels. 
 
 /I. III. #. ll. III. H. 
 
 3 57 55.5 19 5 53.0 
 
 4 50.0 8 48.0 
 52 50.5 20 57.0 
 55 41.0 3 48.0 
 
 4 58 50.5 G 58.0 
 
 5 1 52.0 10 0.0 
 
 Reducing all these comparisons to the same instant, we get 
 
 Negns 1319. Kessels. 
 
 ft. m. K. li. m. *. 
 
 3 52 3.47 10 0.0 
 
 3.44 
 
 3.49 
 
 3.45 
 
 3.47 
 
 3.47 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 45 
 
 Taking the mean, applying the clock and chronometer errors, and reducing the Washington 
 
 sidereal time to tlic corresponding mean time, there results 
 
 Wasliiii-itnn. Des Moiiics. Dift'. longitude. 
 
 .10" 40'" ! s .r,.-) 9" .33 5.T.60 1" 6'" 15 S .89 
 
 Comparisons of clock and chronometer by means of signals received at Washington: 
 
 NCfJUS liil'.l. Krssrls. 
 
 /I. III. . /I. III. 0. 
 
 4 10 0.0 lit 17 59.87 
 
 12 0.0 liO 0.21 
 
 i:i 0.0 21 0.38 
 
 Reducing all these comparisons to the same instant, we get 
 
 Nl'gll.s KU',1. Krssrls. 
 
 7i. in. . /i. 111. i. 
 
 4 10 o.o 10 17 r>9.87 
 
 39.88 
 
 59.89 
 
 Taking the mean, applying the clock and chronometer errors, and reducing the Washington 
 sidereal time to the corresponding, mean time, there results 
 
 \V:ishini;toii. Des Moines. "Dill', longitiulp. 
 
 10" 58" Cr.lS 9" 51' 50.20 I' 1 6'" 1G".2S 
 
 The difference of longitude found from the signals received at Washington necessarily varies 
 from that found from the signals received at 1 )es Moines. The mean of the two results is l h 0'" l(i s .OS, 
 which is the true dilferenee of longitude given by this evening's work. Half the difference between 
 the two results is 0.20 of a second, which is the time occupied in the passage of a signal from one 
 city to the other. As repeaters were included in the circuit, this is the combined effect of wave and 
 armature time, and gives no clue to the speed of the galvanic, current. 
 
 </nltl 29, 1809. Itepeatcrs at Philadelphia, 1'ittsbnrg, Chicago, and Keoknk. 
 
 Comparison of chronometers : 
 
 Negus 1300. Negns 1319. 
 
 /i. m. . li. m. 
 
 10 14 0.0 10 1C 8.2 
 
 4 14 0.0 4 16 8.4 
 
 Kessels clock, 20V>:: fast. 
 
 Chronometer Negus 1319, 6 h 18 12 s .l fast. 
 
 Comparisons of clock and chronometer by means of signals received at Des Moines: 
 
 Negus 1319. K.-ssels. 
 
 ft. m. s. It. m. 8. 
 
 2 45 10.0 18 4 41.0 
 
 48 5.5 7 37.0 
 
 51 15.0 10 47.0 
 
 54 14.5 13 47.0 
 
 57 13.0 10 46.0 
 
 Reducing all these comparisons to the same instant, we get 
 
 Negns 1319. Kesscls. 
 
 /I. 111. *. A. 71). S. 
 
 2 40 29.77 18 0.0 
 29.75 
 29.76 
 29.74 
 29.75 
 
46 REPORT OF PROFESSOR IIARKNESS. 
 
 Taking the mean, applying the clock and chronometer errors, and reducing the Washington 
 sidereal time to the corresponding mean time, there results 
 
 Washington. Des Moincs. J>ilV. longitude. 
 
 ii' 1 2s' 33 s .75 s 1 - 22-" i7 s .or> i 1 ' 6- i5 s .< 
 
 Comparisons of clock and chronometer by means of signals received a) Washington: 
 
 Negus 1319. 
 h. m. s. Ii. m. s. 
 
 3 17 0.0 18 36 36.60 
 
 18 0.0 :;7 36.74 
 
 19 0.0 38 36.89 
 
 Reducing all these comparisons to the same instant, we get 
 
 Negus 1319. Kessds. 
 
 7i. MI. s. h. m. n. 
 
 3 17 0.0 18 36 36.60 
 
 36.58 
 
 36.56 
 
 Taking the mean, applying the clock and chronometer errors, and reducing the Washington 
 sidereal time to the corresponding mean time, there results 
 
 Washington. Des Moines. Diff. longitude. 
 
 10 1 ' 5'" 4 s . 15 8" 58 47.90 1" (i 1 " .16 S .25. 
 
 This evening's work, therefore, gives 
 
 /I. III. 8. 
 
 Difference of longitude 1 t! lii.O'.l 
 
 Wave and armature time 0.16 
 
 July 30, 1869. Repeaters at Philadelphia, Pittsburg, Crestline, Chicago, and Keokuk. 
 Comparison of chronometers : 
 
 Xegus K!00. Negus 131 !. 
 
 /I. III. t>. ll. III. K. 
 
 11 21 0.0 11 23 s.s 
 
 5 36 0.0 5 38 9.0 
 
 Kessels clock, 21".20 fast at the time of the Des Moines comparison ; L'l',17 fast at the time of 
 the Washington comparison. 
 
 Chronometer Negus 1319, C 1 ' 18 m 12 B .7 fast at the time of the, Des Moincs comparison ; 6 1 ' IS> 
 12 S .8 fast at the time of the Washington coni])arison. 
 
 Comparisons of clock and chronometer by means of signals received at Des Moines: 
 
 Negus 1319. Kessels. 
 
 7i. m. s. Ii. HI. *. 
 
 3 47 3.5 19 10 41.0 
 
 50 5.0 13 43.0 
 
 53 7.5 16 46.0 
 
 56 5.0 19 44.0 
 
 59 6.5 22 46.0 
 
 Reducing all these comparisons to the same instant, we get 
 
 Negus 1319. Kessels. 
 
 h. m. *. Ji. m. s. 
 
 3 36 24.25 19 0.0 
 
 24.25 
 
 24.25 
 
 24.23 
 
 24.23 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 47 
 
 Taking the iiu'iin, applying the cluck and chronometer errors, and reducing the Washington 
 sidereal time to the corresponding mean time, there, results 
 
 \Yiiliin<rloii. Jlcs Muincs. Dili'. linifjil mlr. 
 
 Ill 1 ' 21'" 27MO <J h 18'" 11 ".51 I 1 ' <>'" 15.G2. 
 
 Comparisons of clock and chronometer h.y means of signals received at Washington: 
 
 Nri;iis I'.ili). Keswels. 
 
 It. m. s. A. nt, ,s. 
 
 5 3 0.0 20 'M 50.20 
 
 4 0.0 27 50.42 
 
 5 0.0 28 50.57 
 
 Reducing all thesv comparisons to the same instant. \ve get 
 
 Nf<;iis KS19. Krssrls. 
 
 /'. lit. .v. /*. in. x. 
 
 5 ;{ o.o i'o liii ."lO.^'ii 
 
 .-.0.2G 
 50.24 
 
 Taking the mean, applying the clock and chronometer errors, and reducing the Washington 
 sidereal time to the corresponding mean time, there results 
 
 \Viisliin<r|<>ii. DCS MoineH. Hill', longitude. 
 
 11" 51'" 3.21 10" 44'" 47 K .2() 1" 0"' Ki'-.Ol. 
 
 This evening's work, therefore, gives 
 
 h. ' m. s. 
 
 Difference of longitude 1 <i 15.82 
 
 Wave and armature time ' ()' 0.20 
 
 .lull/ :>1, lS(i!. Kcpcaters at I'liiladelphia, I'ittsburg, Crestline, Chicago, and Keokuk. 
 Comparison of chronometers: 
 
 N.-MIIS 1300. 
 //. in. s. 
 1 1 3 0.0 
 5 9 0.0 
 
 Negus i:;i'.i. 
 A. m. x. 
 
 11 5 8.9 
 5 11 9.0 
 
 Kesscls clock, L'1\S:; f;ist. 
 
 ChroiKuneter Negus l.'5H, (i h IS"' liKS fast. 
 
 Comparisons of clock and chronometer by means of signals received at Des Moines: 
 
 Negus 1319. 
 
 Kessds. 
 
 /I. !. . 
 
 It. m. 8. 
 
 4 2 17.5 
 
 19 29 51.0 
 
 5 15.0 
 
 32 52.0 
 
 8 17.5 
 
 35 5.5.0 
 
 23 20.0 
 
 51 0.0 
 
 20 17.5 53 58.0 
 
 Reducing nil ihesc comparisons to the same instant, we get 
 
 Kcssels. 
 
 A. IH. n. li. m. 8. 
 
 '< 32 28.40 1!) 0.0 
 
 28.38 
 
 28.38 
 
 28.36 
 
 28.34 
 
 Taking the mean, applying the clock and chronometer errors, and reducing the Washington 
 sidereal time to the corresponding mean time, there results 
 
 \V;iKliin s -|iiii. DCS M, lines. I (ill', longitude. 
 
 10" 20"' 30.<;:; 9" 14'" 14 8 .57 I 1 ' lu 9 .OG. 
 
48 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 Comparisons of clock and chronometer by means of signals received al Washington : 
 
 Negus 1319. Kessrls. 
 
 /i. m. s. li. m. x. 
 
 4 20 0.0 19 57 41. -44 
 
 31 0.0 58 41.58 
 
 32 0.0 5!) 41.74 
 
 Reducing all these comparisons to the same instant, we gel 
 
 Negus 1319. Kessels. 
 
 /I. m. s, H. tn. x. 
 
 4 30 0.0 1!) 57 41.44 
 
 41.42 
 41.41 
 
 Taking the mean, applying the clock and chronometer errors, and reducing the Washington 
 sidereal time to the corresponding mean time, there residts 
 
 Wellington. Dew Moines. I (ill. longitude. 
 
 11" 18 m 2".0 10' 1 Jl> 40 8 .20 I 1 ' 0'" JIJ-.40. 
 
 This evening's work, therefore, gives 
 
 /I. III. X. 
 
 Difference of longitude 1 <; i<>.23 
 
 Wave and armature time n 0.17 
 
 August 7, 180!). Repeaters at Philadelphia, Pittslmrg, Chicago, and Davenport. 
 Comparison of chronometers : 
 
 Negus 1300. NYgiis 1319. 
 
 h. m. x. h. in. H. 
 
 12 57 0.0 12 59 8.7 
 
 4 8 0.0 4 10 8.7 
 
 Kessels clock, 27M(5 fast. 
 (Chronometer Negns 1319, 6 h 18'" 17".4 fast. 
 Comparisons of clock and chronometer by means of signals received at Des Moines : 
 
 Negus 1319. Kcsscls. 
 
 /i. m. . /i. m. . 
 
 2 30 l.S.O 18 25 17.0 
 
 33 10.5 28 10.0 
 
 3G 18.0 31 18.0 
 
 39 16.5 34 17.0 
 
 42 18.0 37 19.0 
 
 Reducing all these comparisons to the same instant, we gel 
 
 N.-gUS 1319. hYssrls. 
 
 /I. HI. S. /I. HI. H. 
 
 3 4 55.31 19 o.O 
 
 55.30 
 55.30 
 55.30 
 
 55.28 
 
 Taking the mean, applying the clock and chronometer errors, and reducing the Washington 
 sidereal time to the corresponding mean time, there results 
 
 Washington. Des Moines. Mitt', longitude. 
 
 9 h 52"' 53 8 .94 8 h 40 m 37 8 .90 I 1 ' li'" 1<;.04. 
 
 Comparisons of clock and chronometer by means of signals received at Washington : 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 18fi9. 
 
 49 
 
 Negus 1319. 
 It. iw. s. 
 
 2. 49 0.0 
 
 r.o o.o 
 
 51 0.0 
 
 Kessels. 
 li. m. . 
 18 44 2.46 
 
 45 2.66 
 
 46 2.82 
 
 I {oil iiciiig- all these comparisons to the same instant, we get 
 
 Negus 1319. Kessels. 
 
 /I. 711. *. /I. 'III. S. 
 
 2 49 0.0 IS 44 2.46 
 
 2.50 
 2.49 
 
 Taking the mean, applying' the clock and chronometer errors, and reducing' the Washington 
 sidereal lime to the corresponding mean time, there results 
 
 \V:ishinn'l<>ii. lies Moines. Dill', longitude. 
 
 9 h 36'" 59 8 .04 S 1 ' :!0' 42".GO 1" 6 1 " 16 9 .44. 
 
 This evening's work, therefore, gives 
 
 li. m. 
 
 Difference of longitude - 
 Wave and armature time 
 
 KexuU from the exchange of signals. 
 Collecting the results obtained from the different nights' work, \ve have 
 
 ti 
 
 
 16.24 
 0.20 
 
 
 
 \Vavc :in<l 
 
 Date. 
 
 Diff. longitude. 
 
 armature 
 
 
 
 time. 
 
 1869, 
 
 It. III. K. 
 
 X. 
 
 July 26 
 
 1 (i If,. 08 
 
 0.20 
 
 89 
 
 1C. 09 
 
 . ii; 
 
 :to 
 
 15.82 
 
 .'JO 
 
 31 
 
 10.23 
 
 .17 
 
 Aug. 7 
 
 16. 24 
 
 0.20 
 
 Taking tlie mean, we find that our temporary observatory at Des Moines was 
 
 I 1 ' 6"' 16 S .09 Qs.OS west 
 
 ot the east transit instrument of the United States Naval Observatory at Washington. But the 
 east transit instrument is 42.9 feet, which in this latitude is equal to 0.036 of a second of time, to 
 the east of the center of the dome. Hence we, have as the result of these signals that the tempo- 
 rary observatory at Des Moincs was 
 
 I 1 ' G 1 " 16 S .05 0- s .05 west 
 
 of the center of the dome of the United States Naval Observatory at Washington. From a series 
 of observations made since my return to Washington, I have satisfied myself that if any personal 
 equation exists between Professor Yarnall's determination of the time with the east transit instru- 
 ment and my determination with the sextant, it is so small as to be entirely hidden by the acci- 
 dental errors inseparable from sextant observations. 
 
 TEIANGULATION CONNECTING THE VARIOUS TEMPORARY OBSERVATORIES. 
 
 
 
 In order to ascertain the relative positions of the temporary observatories of the different 
 astronomers who might be at Des Moines, 1 took with me several small pocket surveying instru- 
 ments, which were the best at my command. Subsequently Colonel J. W. Otley, engineer of the 
 Des Moines Valley railroad, kindly lent me a small theodolite, which was much better adapted to 
 the accomplishment of my purpose, and with which, in connection with Dr. C. H. F. Peters, I exe- 
 cuted the triangulatipn shown in Plate III. The theodolite was made by Spears & Co., of Dublin, 
 and was of the English pattern, the range of the telescope being limited to altitudes not much 
 greater than sixfy degrees. Its horizontal and vertical limbs were each five inches in diameter, 
 
50 
 
 EEPOET OF PROFESSOR IIARKNESS. 
 
 divided to thirty minutes, and read, the horizontal limb by two verniers, the vertical limb by one 
 vernier, to single minutes. The telescope had a focal length of nine and one-quarter inches, a clear 
 aperture of one inch, and a magnifying power of thirty diameters. 
 
 The base-line was situated upon a low level island in the DCS Moines Uiver, to the east of our 
 observatory, and, from two very careful measurements made with the Chesterman metallic tape, was 
 found to be l,0.'>l ) ..')fcet=314.72 meters* in length. The signals North IJase, South P.ase, Kast Signal, 
 and West Signal, were Hags attached to small poles eight or ten feet high. The signal "Naval 
 Observatory " was the south peak of the roof of our temporary observatory. The signal " Litchfield 
 Observatory" was a Hag placed on the east side of the temporary observatory occupied by Dr. ('. 
 H. P. Peters and party. The signal "Court-house" was the center of the dome of the ( 'onrt house. 
 Near it Professor Simon Newcomb, United States Navy, and Professor ,1. K. llilgard, United Stales 
 Coast Survey, with their parties, observed. 
 
 In almost all cases the angles between the different signals were measured both by Dr. Peters 
 and myself, each of us repeating the angle six times. The results are given in the following table 
 the column headed "II" containing my measures, that headed "P" Dr. Peters's measures, and that 
 headed "concluded" the concluded value of the angle, which is generally the mean of the results 
 contained in the columns " II" and " P." In the case of the angles at West Signal I have rejected 
 Dr. Peters's measures because they were made a day later than mine, and I am almost certain that 
 during the interval some of the signals were disturbed by cattle: 
 
 Alixlwt of (Hwrrnl AiKjlrx. 
 
 Date. 
 
 Station. 
 
 Object. 
 
 X umber of 
 repetitions. 
 
 Observed angle. 
 
 H. 
 
 P. 
 
 Concluded. 
 
 1869. 
 Aug. 3 
 
 East Signal 
 
 Court-house and,Sonth Base . 
 
 6 
 
 i n 
 65 27 CO.tl 
 
 53. :\ 
 
 56.6 
 
 
 
 Coort-boiiBe and West Signal . . . 
 
 
 
 68 32 36. 2 
 
 30.5 
 
 33. 4 
 
 
 
 South Base and North Base .... 
 
 r> 
 
 40 38 22. 5 
 
 34.2 
 
 28.4 
 
 
 
 West Signal and Naval Observatory 
 
 r, 
 
 2 20 0. 
 
 41.7 
 
 20.8 
 
 
 
 Litchfield Observatory and Court-house 
 
 r. 
 
 67 49 2.5 
 
 2.5 
 
 2.5 
 
 
 Litchn'eld < Misei valory 
 
 Court-house and Weat Signal 
 
 (i 
 
 69 44 25. 
 
 19.2 
 
 22. It 
 
 
 Xnrtli I'.ase 
 
 Court-house and Litchlield Oliservatory 
 Kast Si (r n;tl ;i]id South Base 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 <; 
 
 2 28 
 55 10 17.5 
 
 :;t yti 55.0 
 
 36.6 
 
 63.3 
 
 96. a 
 
 59. > 
 
 South Base and West Signal .... 
 
 
 
 South Base and Naval Observatory . - 
 
 6 
 
 II :,-> 19.2 
 
 10.8 
 
 15.11 
 
 
 South Base 
 
 North Base and Kast Signal .... 
 
 (i 
 
 84 11 I'.l.? 
 
 1.7 
 
 11). 7 
 
 
 
 West Signal and North Base .... 
 
 r> 
 
 86 4 f,(l. II 
 
 5-.'. 5 
 
 56.2 
 
 
 
 Kast Signal and Court-house .... 
 
 6 
 
 97 33 42. 5 
 
 56. 
 
 49.2 
 
 
 
 West Signal and Naval Observatory 
 
 6 
 
 3 22 40. 
 
 43. 3 
 
 41.6 
 
 
 Wrst signal 
 
 North Base and South Base .... 
 
 (i 
 
 <;-> 34 50.6 
 
 
 511.0 
 
 4 
 
 
 North Base and South liasc .... 
 
 6 
 
 62 34 
 
 20.8 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 North Base and East Signal - - -. - 
 
 r> 
 
 55 56 34.2 
 
 
 34.2 
 
 4 
 
 
 Xorth Bane and East Signal .... 
 
 6 
 
 55 56 
 
 11.7 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 Kast Signal and Court-house .... 
 
 
 
 86 2 57.5 
 
 
 51. 2 
 
 4 
 
 
 Kast Signal and Court-house .... 
 
 6 
 
 86 2 45. 
 
 108.3 
 
 
 
 
 Litchlield Observatory and Court-house 
 
 C> 
 
 74 47 43.3 
 
 %. 7 
 
 I: 1 ,. :: 
 
 
 
 Court-house and Naval Observatory 
 
 1 
 
 110 20 
 
 
 
 
 
 Naval Ohscr\atory and North I'.ase . . 
 
 1 
 
 107 35 
 
 
 
 * I have taken 1 meter at 32" Kahr. ==3<.3(>f5 inehes at 62" Fahr. 
 
 tThe theodolite could not be placed in the position occupied by the signal " Lilclilicld Observatory," and therefore 
 it was jilaeed eccentrically at a distance of 5s. (Mi l'eet= 17.70 meters. The reduction to the center, computed ill the 
 
 usual manner, is 1 17' 4".2, to be added to the angle given in the table. Hence. Hie tr bserved value of the angle 
 
 between Court-house and West Signal is 7.1" 1' 26".3. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 51 
 
 Converting these observed angles into observed directions, we yet the numbers given in the 
 third column of the following table : 
 
 Table of Observed and Adjusted Directions. 
 
 Station. 
 
 Object. 
 
 Observed 
 direction. 
 
 Correc'n by 
 adjustment. 
 
 Adjusted 
 direction. 
 
 
 
 o ' // 
 
 // 
 
 ' II 
 
 East Signal .... 
 
 Litehlield Observatory . . 
 
 o o o.n 
 
 - 7.5 
 
 359 59 52. 5 
 
 
 Court-house 
 
 67 49 2.5 
 
 3.2 
 
 67 48 59. 3 
 
 
 Smith Base 
 
 133 16 59.1 
 
 - 2.6 
 
 133 16 56. 5 
 
 
 \\Ysl Signal . , 
 
 136 21 :i5.9 
 
 + 21.6 
 
 136 21 57. 5 
 
 
 Naval Observatory . 
 
 138 41 56. 7 
 
 + 13.2 
 
 138 42 9. 9 
 
 
 North Base 
 
 I"! 55 27.5 
 
 - 15.8 
 
 173 55 11.7 
 
 Litehtield Observatory 
 
 Court-house 
 
 (I 0.0 
 
 - 22.6 
 
 359 59 37. 4 
 
 
 West Signal 
 
 71 1 36.3 
 
 + 22.6 
 
 71 1 48.9 
 
 North Base .... 
 
 Kasl Signal 
 South Base 
 
 0. 
 55 10 26.2 
 
 + 14.0 
 
 + 8.0 
 
 14.0 
 55 10 34.2 
 
 
 West Signal 
 
 86 31 25. 4 
 
 - 22.0 
 
 86 31 3. 4 
 
 South BMM- .... 
 
 Naval Observatory . 
 \orlh Base 
 
 100 a 41.2 
 0. 
 
 - 2.5 
 5.6 
 
 100 2 38.7 
 :!59 59 54. 4 
 
 
 East Signal 
 
 *4 11 16.7 
 
 + 2.3 
 
 84 11 19.0 
 
 
 Court-house 
 
 181 45 5.9 
 
 + 8. 5 
 
 HI 45 14.4 
 
 
 \\Yst Signal 
 
 27:! 55 3.8 
 
 - 5.2 
 
 273 54 5S.ll 
 
 \VeM Signal . 
 
 \a\al Observatory - . . 
 Nortli Base 
 
 277 17 15. 1 
 
 0.0 
 
 + 1-4 
 + 19.6 
 
 277 17 46.8 
 19. 6 
 
 
 Kasl Signal 
 
 55 5i :;!.> 
 
 - 18.2 
 
 55 56 16. 
 
 
 Soulli Base 
 
 62 34 50. 
 
 + 4.6 
 
 62 34 54. 6 
 
 
 Lituhlield Observatory . . 
 
 07 11 42.1 
 
 + 1.9 
 
 67 11 44.0 
 
 
 Court-house 
 
 111 51) 25.4 
 
 5.8 
 
 141 59 19.6 
 
 
 Naval Observatory . . . 
 
 252 25 25. 
 
 2.0 
 
 252 25 23. 
 
 1 n order to facilitate the adjustment of this triangulation by the, method of least squares, I have 
 adopted the following notation : 
 
 1= North Base. 
 
 2 = South Base. 
 
 3 = East Signal. 
 
 5 = Naval Observatory. 
 
 (>== < Conrt-house. 
 
 7 = Litchfield Observatory. 
 
 4 = West Signal. 
 
 1 2 :> would, therefore, denote the angle North Base, South Base, East Signal ; () woidd denote 
 the direction from South Base to North Base; and (:|) would denote the direction from South Base 
 to East Signal. Hence ( 2 + 2) would denote the angle 123. 
 
 Proceeding in the usual manner,* the quadrilateral 1324 furnishes the side equation 
 
 sin 142. .sin 123. sin 134=sin 124. sin 132. sin 143. 
 and the three angle equations 
 
 1800 = 132 + 321 + 213 
 1800 = 124 + 241 + 412 
 1800 = 134 + 341 + 413 
 
 from which we, derive the equations of condition 
 
 0= + 29.6 + 0.4(1) + ;,.! (j)_(U(i) + 0.2 (>) 2.8(J) + 0.3 () + 0.2 (4) + 2..1 (jj) - 1.5 (<) I. 
 
 0=+ 11.3- (j) + (J)_(i) + (|) -(?) + (?) II. 
 
 0= + 111.2 () + (J)-(J) + (>)_() + () jv. 
 
 1 See a paper by Charles A. Schott, csq., in the United States Coast Survey Report for 1854, page 80* vt xcq. 
 
52 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 The quadrilateral 2346 furnishes the side equation 
 
 sin 632. sin 462. sin 342 = sin 263. sin 246. sin 234. 
 from which we derive the equation of condition 
 0= +137.7 7.9(g) + 47.1(i) + 32.8(5) 14.7() + 21.2(!>) 14.:{(j) 18.1(5) 6.0(:!) 3!).-'(J) V. 
 
 These five equations of condition give rise to the following 
 
 Equations of correlatirfx. 
 
 V 
 
 oiKi 
 
 o-iKj 
 
 o 3 K 3 
 
 0& 
 
 5 K 5 
 
 (?) 
 
 
 + 1 
 
 -I 
 
 
 
 (?) 
 
 
 - 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 (1) 
 
 
 
 + 1 
 
 + 1 
 
 
 (1) 
 
 0.4 
 
 - 1 
 
 + 1 
 
 
 
 (I) 
 
 + 0.2 
 
 + 1 
 
 
 
 6.9 
 
 ) 
 
 + 0.2 
 
 
 - 1 
 
 
 14.3 
 
 (i) 
 
 
 
 
 
 + 21.2 
 
 cj) 
 
 + o.:i 
 
 + 1 
 
 
 + 1 
 
 
 CD 
 
 + 2.5 
 
 - 1 
 
 
 
 + 47. 1 
 
 (i) 
 
 2.8 
 
 
 
 - 1 
 
 39.2 
 
 (i) 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 7.9 
 
 (3) 
 
 + 11.4 
 
 
 - 1 
 
 - 1 
 
 
 (!) 
 
 + 1.1 
 
 
 + 1 
 
 
 + :.8 
 
 (I) 
 
 1.5 
 
 
 
 + 1 
 
 - 18.1 
 
 (5) 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 11.7 
 
 K 4 = 20.2 
 K 5 = + 0.31)9 
 
 The resulting normal equations are 
 
 0=+ '29.6+ 18.04 K, 
 
 + 11.3- 1.60 + 6.00 K 2 
 
 + 45.4+ 0.10 - 2.00 + 6.00 K 3 
 
 + 111.2 + 1.20 + 2.00 + 2.00 + 6.00 K 4 
 
 + 137.7 + 286.50 -54.00 +47.10 +21.10 + 6138.54 K 5 
 
 Solving, we find 
 
 K,=: 6.08 
 K 2 = + 6.20 
 K :i = -1.81 
 
 Substituting these values in the equations of correlatives, we, obtain the corrections to the 
 observed directions given in the column "Correction by adjustment" of the table of observed and 
 adjusted directions. 
 
 The quadrilateral 1 325 furnishes the side equation 
 
 sin 315. sin 235. sin 521 = sin 531. sin r>23. sin 215 
 from which we derive the equation of condition 
 
 0= 324.5 2.5 (I) + 25.2 () 9.3 (:;) VI. 
 
 The quadrilateral 3245 furnishes the side equation 
 
 sin 235. sin 425. sin 543 = sin 523. sin 542. sin 435 
 from which we derive the equation of condition 
 
 0= + 342.4 29.7 (g) + 26.7 (=) 5.0 (J) 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OP AUGUST 7, 1369. 
 The equations of conditions VI. and VI J. give rise to the following 
 
 Equations of correlatives. 
 
 53 
 
 V 
 
 a,K, 
 
 & 
 
 (f) 
 
 2.5 
 
 
 (I) 
 
 - 9.3 
 
 + 26. 7 
 
 (3) 
 
 + 25.2 
 
 - 29.7 
 
 (S) 
 
 
 - 5.0 
 
 The resulting normal (-([nations are 
 
 = 324.5 + 727.8 K, 
 
 + 342.4 996.8 + 1020.0 K, 
 
 Solving, we lind 
 
 K, = + 0.994 
 
 K 2 = + 0.400 
 
 Substituting these values in the equations of correlatives, we obtain the corrections to the 
 observed directions given in the column "Correction by adjustment" of the table of observed and 
 adjusted directions. 
 
 The quadrilateral .'3407 furnishes the side ('([nation 
 
 sin 340. sin 730. sin 074 = sin 034. sin 073. sin 740 
 from which we derive the equation of condition 
 
 ()= -57.3-0.4(5)- 1.11 () + 1.2(<) f 0.1 (I) VIII. 
 
 The equation of correlative is: 
 
 The normal equation is 
 Solving, we Hud 
 
 0= 57.3 + 3.05 K, 
 K, =+18.8 
 
 Substituting this value in the equation of correlative, we obtain the corrections to the observed 
 directions given in the column "Correction by adjustment" of the table of observed and adjusted 
 directions, 
 
 Applying the "Corrections by adjustment" to the observed directions, we obtain the adjusted 
 directions, by means of which the whole triangulation has been computed, as follows the lengths 
 of the sides being given in meters : 
 
54 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 No. 
 
 Deuomiuation. 
 
 Observed 
 angles. 
 
 Corr. by 
 adjust. 
 
 Planr angles 
 anil ilislauiT'S. 
 
 Logarithms. 
 
 
 North Base South Rase 
 
 o / // 
 
 // 
 
 31 1.72 
 
 2. 497923 
 
 I. 
 
 East Signal '. . 
 North Base 
 South Base 
 East Signal South Base 
 East Signal North Base ... 
 
 40 38 28.4 
 55 10 26.2 
 84 11 16.7 
 
 13.2 
 6.0 
 + 7.9 
 
 40 38 15.2 
 55 10 20.2 
 -1 11 24.6 
 306.66 
 480.76 
 
 0. 1*623* 
 11. 1114276 
 9.99776: 1 , 
 2. 598437 
 2. 681924 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 314 72 
 
 2. 497923 
 
 II. 
 
 West Signal 
 North Base 
 South Base 
 
 62 34 50. 
 31 20 59. 2 
 86 4 56.2 
 
 15.0 
 
 30.11 
 0.4 
 
 62 34 35.0 
 31 20 29. 2 
 
 86 4 55.8 
 1*4 42 
 
 0. 051770 
 9.71611* 
 
 9. 998984 
 2 265811 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 353. 73 
 
 2. 548677 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 III. 
 
 East Signal South Base 
 West Signal . . . 
 East Signal 
 South Base 
 West Signal South Base 
 West Signal East Signal 
 
 6 38 15.8 
 3 4 36.8 
 170 16 12. it 
 
 + 22. 8 
 + 24.2 
 
 + 7.5 
 
 3116. 6* 
 6 38 38. 6 
 3 5 1.0 
 170 16 20.4 
 184.43 
 579. 29 
 
 2.59*137 
 0. 936663 
 8. 730727 
 9.387798 
 2. 26,'i*-:7 
 2.762898 
 
 
 West Signal North Base . . 
 
 
 
 353. 73 
 
 2. 548677 
 
 IV. 
 
 East Signal 
 West Signal - , 
 North Base 
 East Signal North Base 
 
 37 33 51. 6 
 55 56 34.2 
 86 31 25. 4 
 
 - 37.4 
 
 - 37. H 
 - 3(5.0 
 
 37 33 14.2 
 55 55 56. 4 
 
 .-d :;o in. i 
 1-0.76 
 
 0. 215021 
 9. 918228 
 9.999196 
 2. 681926 
 
 
 East Signal West Signal 
 
 
 
 579. 29 
 
 2. 762894 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 East Signal West Signal 
 
 
 
 579. 29 
 
 2. 762896 
 
 V. 
 
 Court-house 
 East Signal 
 West Signal 
 Court-house West Signal 
 Court-house East. Signal 
 
 68 32 33. 1 
 *<> 2 51.2 
 
 + 21.* 
 + 12.4 
 
 25 23 5.-'. 2 
 68 32 58. 2 
 *6 3 3. (i 
 1257. 01 
 1347. 35 
 
 0. 367616 
 9.968825 
 9.99*116* 
 3. 099337 
 3. 129480 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 East Signal South Base . 
 
 
 
 396. 08 
 
 2. 598437 
 
 VI. 
 
 Court-house 
 East Signal 
 South Base 
 Coiirt-hoiiHO South Base 
 Court-house East Signal 
 
 65 27 56. 6 
 97 33 .111.2 
 
 + 0.6 
 + 6.2 
 
 16 58 7.4 
 65 27 57.2 
 97 33 55. 4 
 1236. 47 
 1347. 35 
 
 0. 534841 
 
 9. 958! N 15 
 9.990203 
 I!. 092183 
 3. 1294*1 
 
 
 North Base West Signal 
 
 
 
 353.73 
 
 2.54*677 
 
 VII. 
 
 Naval Observatory . 
 North Base 
 West Signal .......... 
 Naval Observatory West Signal . . 
 Naval Observatory North Base . . . 
 
 13 31 15.8 
 107 34 35.0 
 
 + in.:. 
 + 21.6 
 
 
 
 r,s r,:; 2". 1 
 
 13 31 35.3 
 107 34 56.6 
 96. 63 
 393. 85 
 
 0.067431 
 
 9.3691120 
 
 ftttWU 
 
 1.9*5128 
 2. 595330 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 55 
 
 No. 
 
 1 iriHiinination. 
 
 Ol) served 
 angles. 
 
 Corr. by 
 
 adjust. 
 
 Plane angles 
 and distances. 
 
 Logarithms. 
 
 
 Kast Si-nial West Signal 
 
 o / // 
 
 // 
 
 f>79 29 
 
 2 762894 
 
 
 Naval Observatory 
 
 
 
 14 8 54 6* 
 
 611835 
 
 VIII. 
 
 Ka.-l Signal 
 West Si-nal 
 
 2 20 20. 8 
 ifi:i :u ' 2 
 
 8.4 
 1C 2 
 
 2 20 12. 4 
 163 30 53 
 
 8. 610374 
 9 4 r > ->( Mi"i 
 
 
 Naval Observatory West Signal 
 Naval Observatory East Signal . 
 
 
 
 96. 63 
 672. SO 
 
 1.985103 
 
 2.H27694 
 
 
 West Signal Court-house .... 
 Litehticld < >bservatory 
 
 71 1 26 :> 
 
 j_ 45 o 
 
 1257. 01 
 71 2 11 5 
 
 3. 099337 
 024^35 
 
 
 West Signal 
 
 74 47 43 3 
 
 
 74 47 '!5 6 
 
 <) 984521 
 
 IX. 
 
 ( 'cinrl-lioiisc 
 Litchfield Observatory Conrt-b.ouse . 
 
 l.itehlield Observatory West Signal . 
 
 
 
 3-1 10 12.9 
 1282. 61 
 746. f.2 
 
 9. 749469 
 3. 108093 
 2. 873041 
 
 
 Kast Signal West Signal 
 
 
 
 579 29 
 
 2 762896 
 
 
 Litchl'ield ( (bsrrvatorv 
 
 
 
 32 22 27 
 
 271284 
 
 X. 
 
 East Signal 
 West Signal 
 Litelilield Observatory West Signal . 
 Litelilielil Observatory East Signal 
 
 136 21 :{"). 9 
 11 1") 7.9 
 
 + 29.1 
 + 20. 1 
 
 136 22 5. 
 11 15 28.0 
 746. 52 
 211.21 
 
 9. 838864 
 9. 290532 
 2. 873044 
 2. 324712 
 
 In the triangle Nnvsil Observatory, West Signal, Court bouse, we have 
 
 
 Plane angles 
 and distances. 
 
 Logarithms. 
 
 Naval Observatory West Signal . 
 West Signal Court-house . . . 
 Angle at West Signal 
 
 96.63 
 1257. 01 
 110 26 3.4 
 
 1.985115 
 3. 099337 
 
 From which we find 
 
 
 
 Angle at Naval Observatory . . 
 Angle at Court-house . 
 
 1)5 33 10.3 
 4 46 3 
 
 
 Naval Observatory Court-house . 
 
 1293. 91 
 
 3. 111905 
 
 For the determination of the azimuth of the sides of the triangles we have the following obser. 
 various of the sun, made near the time of its setting: 
 
 August 9, 1889. Theodolite placed over West Signal Chronometer, Negus 1319 which is 6 h 
 
 IS'" 17-vs fast of l(i,-i,l mean time. 
 
56 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 Telescope direct. 
 
 Object. 
 
 
 Horizontal circle. 
 
 Transit of sun's 
 
 Vernier A. 
 
 Vernier B. 
 
 Court-house . . 
 Snu .... 
 Sun .... 
 Sun .... 
 Court-house . . 
 
 Means. 
 
 O III 
 
 360 
 84 20 40 
 85 6 .30 
 
 
 21 30 
 7 30 
 
 2d limb . 
 1st limb . 
 
 /I. III. X. 
 
 12 7 '.I 
 
 * 31 
 
 84 44 2 
 
 
 
 
 12 7 51.5 
 
 360 
 
 
 Telescope reversed. 
 
 Court-house . . 
 Sun .... 
 Sun .... 
 Sun .... 
 Court-house . . 
 
 Means. 
 
 360 
 
 86 18 
 85 58 
 
 
 19 
 59 
 
 1st limb . 
 2d limb . 
 
 !> ic, :, 
 
 17 -JH 
 
 86 8 30 
 
 
 
 
 12 16 42.5 
 
 360 
 
 
 For the reduction of tbese observations I have made use of the formula 
 
 tan M 
 
 hill n 
 COS / 
 
 tan A = 
 
 tan t. cos 
 
 Sill 
 
 M) 
 
 where A is to be taken greater or less than 180, according as t is greater or less than 
 A = azimuth of object, counted from the south around by the 
 S = declination of object. 
 t = hour angle of object. 
 <p = latitude of place of observation. 
 
 We therefore have 
 
 
 Telescope 
 direct. 
 
 Telescope 
 reversed. 
 
 
 7i. w. x. 
 
 /I. HI. K. 
 
 Equation of time .... 
 t . . 
 
 - 5 9.5 
 5 44 24.2 
 
 - o 5 9.4 
 5 53 15. 3 
 
 ci 
 
 + 1538'40. " 
 
 + 1538'34." 
 
 t 
 
 + 41 35 36. 
 
 i 41 I!.", ;j(j 
 
 M '. . . 
 
 (<t> M) 
 
 + 76 21 5. 
 34 45 29. 
 
 + 84 3. 
 42 24 27. 
 
 
 99 21 5. 
 
 100 4f> 21. 
 
 Reading of horizontal ciivle . 
 
 84 44 2. 
 
 86 H 3d. 
 
 South point of circle . 
 
 345 22 57 
 
 345 23 9 
 
 Reading to Court-house . . 
 
 360 
 
 360 
 
 Azimuth of Court-house . . 
 
 14 37 3 
 
 14 36 51 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 57 
 
 The azimuths of such other of the sides as were required, together with the differences of lati- 
 tude and longitude, have been computed by means of the formula* 
 
 d L = K. B. cos Z + K 2 . C. sin 2 Z + h 2 D 
 
 A 1 . K. sin Z 
 cos L 1 
 
 _ d Z = d M. sin 
 
 In which 
 
 N. arc 1" 
 
 ,_ tan L 
 
 ~~ 2 N. R. arc 1" 
 
 \ = K. B. cos Z, or first term. 
 
 R. arc 1" 
 
 f e 2 . sin L. cos L. arc 1" 
 (1 e 2 . sin 2 L)| 
 
 a.(l e 2 ) 
 (1 e 2 . sin 2 L) f 
 
 (1 
 
 a equatorial radius of the earth = G377397.1G meters. 
 b = polar radius of the earth = 635G078.9G meters. 
 
 I*- 
 
 =v : 
 
 = 0.08169083 
 
 K = the given geodetic distance, in meters, between two trigonometrical points; L = the given 
 latitude of the first point ; M = the given longitude of the same ; Z = the given azimuth of the 
 second point as seen from the first : the azimuth being counted from the south around by the west ; 
 L 1 , M 1 , Z' = the required latitude and longitude of the second point, and the azimuth of the first 
 point as seen from it; dL, <Of, ZZ = the required differences iu latitude, longitude, and azimuth of 
 the two points, expressed in seconds of arc ; so that 
 
 L'=L +dL 
 
 Z l = Z +(1Z 180. 
 
 Taking the values of A 1 , B, 0, and D from the Coast Survey tables, the following are the results 
 of the computations : 
 
 Azimuths of sides. 
 
 West Signal to Court-house 
 Court-house to West Signal . . . 
 Court-house to Naval Observatory 
 Naval Observatory to Court-house 
 Court-house to Litclifieltl Observatory 
 Litchfield Observatory to Court-house 
 
 14 36 57. 
 
 194 36 47. 9 
 190 36 1.6 
 
 10 36 8.4 
 
 228 47 0. 8 
 
 48 47 28.4 
 
 The West Signal was 39".43 north, and 13".70 = S .913 east of the Court-house. The Naval 
 Observatory was 41".23 north, and 10".28 = O s .685 east of the Court-house. The Litchfield Observa- 
 tory was 27".40 north, and 41".66 = 2 S .777 east of the Court-house. 
 
 8* 
 
 ' Extracted from the United States Coast Survey Report for 1860, p. 363. 
 
58 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR ITARKNESS. 
 
 GEOGRAPHICAL POSITION OF THE COURT HOUSE DOME. 
 
 The positions of all the temporary observatories must finally depend upon, and be referred to, 
 the Court-house dome, for the determination of which we have the following data : 
 
 In a letter to Commodore B. F. Sands, United States Navy, dated November 1, 18611, Professor 
 J. E. Hilgard states, that the office reductions of the observations made for the determination of the 
 position of the Coast Survey station at Des Moines have not yet been completed, but that the field 
 computations give 
 
 Latitude = 41 35' 2".08 
 Longitude = l h 29 m 58 N .29 west of Cambridge. 
 
 The reduction from the station to the center of the Court-house dome is, in latitude + 1".27, and in 
 longitude + O s .05. To refer the difference of longitude to Washington, I have employed the value 
 of Cambridge Washington obtained from the joint observations of this observatory and the United 
 States Coast Survey in June, 1867, namely, O 1 ' 2:5"' H S .(IS + O.04. 
 
 My own observations, given in the previous pages of this report, place our temporary observa- 
 tory at Des Moines in 
 
 Latitude =41 35' S-^'.O 0".!K! 
 Longitude = 1" G 1 " 1 8 .05 O s .05 west of Washington. 
 
 On the evening of August 7, while 1 was exchanging longitude signals with the observatory in 
 Washington, Professor Newcomb and Dr. Peters came to the telegraph office and compared their 
 chronometers with the Washington clock. From these comparisons Professor Newcomb finds for 
 the Court-house dome 
 
 Longitude = I 1 ' 6"' 16 S .67, 
 
 and Dr. Peters finds for the Litchfield temporary observatory 
 
 Longitude = I 1 ' 6'" 14 S .02, 
 in both cases counting from the dome of the observatory in Washington. 
 
 Applying to these values the geodetic differences of latitude and longitude found from the tri- 
 angnlation, we get for the Court-house dome 
 
 Latilndt'. 
 
 Longitude. 
 
 Authority. 
 
 o / // 
 
 ll. III. X. 
 
 
 41 35 3. 3 
 
 1 6 17. 26 
 
 U. S. Coast Survey. 
 
 41 34 54.7 
 
 16.74 
 
 Harkncss. 
 
 
 1C. 117 
 
 Newcomb. 
 
 
 16.80 
 
 Peters. 
 
 the longitude being measured from the center of the dome of the United States Naval Observatory 
 in Washington. I am rather stiqirised at the large discrepancy between the Coast Survey observers 
 and myself. On that account I will defer all further discussion as to the position of the Court-house 
 until I make my report on the reading off and discussion of the photographs taken during the 
 eclipse, hoping that by that time the final results of the Coast Survey observations may be avail- 
 able. 
 
 HEIGHT OF THE DIFFERENT STATIONS ABOVE THE SEA. 
 
 Colonel J. W. Otley gave me a memorandum stating that the lines of level run for the Des 
 Moines Valley railroad show that its track at the depot in East Des Moines is 310 feet above the 
 Mississippi River at Keokuk. The Mississippi River at Keokuk is 450 feet above the level of the 
 ocean. Hence the railroad track at the depot in East Des Moines is 7(i(i feet = 233.4 meters above 
 the level of the sea. 
 
 Setting up the theodolite at the Des Moines Valley railroad depot, the axis of its vertical circle 
 being 4.5 feet = 1.37 meters above the track, I measured the zenith distance of the ball on the finial 
 of the Court-house dome and found it to be 87 41'; the distance from the theodolite to the Court- 
 house being 3,700 feet = 1,128 meters. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1809. 
 
 Setting up the theodolite at the West Signal, with the axis of its vertical circle 1.37 meters 
 above the ground. I measured the following x.enith distances: 
 
 o / 
 
 Ball mi linial of Court -house .dome - 88 38 
 
 Floor of Litchtield Observatory 89 47 
 
 Floor of Naval Observatory 88 16 
 
 For the reduction of these observations I have employed the formula 
 Difference of level = K. cot (A 0.01356 K) 
 
 in which K is the distance iu meters between the two stations, A is the observed zenith distance, 
 and (0.01350 K) is seconds of arc. 
 
 The resulting elevation above the sea of the different stations is as follows: 
 
 
 Elevation. 
 
 Object. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Meters. 
 
 Feet 
 
 Cmn t-lionse dome .... 
 
 280. 5 
 
 920.2 
 
 Ground at West Signal . . - 
 
 249.0 
 
 816.9 
 
 Naval Observatory floor . 
 
 253.3 
 
 831.0 
 
 LitrhlirM Observatory floor 
 
 253.2 
 
 830. 7 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS WORK DURING THE ECLIPSE. 
 
 Before describing the observations made during the eclipse, I must not omit to mention the kind- 
 ness and forethought of his honor J. H. Hatch, mayor of Des Moines, who, without any solicitation 
 on our part, oil the afternoon of August 7, sent us two special policemen, Messrs. Thomas French 
 and - Walker, to keep spectators from crowding too closely around our observatory. They did 
 their duty most efficiently, preventing the occurrence of any noise in the neighborhood, and our 
 thanks are due both to Mayor Hatch and to them. 
 
 As I had decided to rest the astronomy of the eclipse entirely upon the readings to be obtained 
 from the photographs, I attached very little importance to the making of optical observations of 
 the times of contact. Nevertheless, as I did not expect to be otherwise employed at the beginning 
 and ending of the eclipse, I at one time contemplated observing the first and last contacts by means 
 of my three-inch telescope, but abandoned that plan for a reason which will presently appear. 
 
 The course which seemed to me to afford the means of obtaining the greatest accuracy in deter- 
 mining the beginning of the eclipse from the photographs, was to commence taking pictures about 
 thirty seconds before the predicted time of lirst contact, and to continue taking them at as short 
 intervals as possible, until the moon was well on to the sun. Upon mentioning this plan to Dr. 
 Curtis he readily agreed to put it into practice, and a few trials showed that, with the number of 
 baths and assistants at his disposal, he could take seven or eight pictures in about two minutes, 
 after which a delay of two or three minutes would occur before fresh plates could be sensitized. 
 Owing to the great length of the photographic telescope, it was found impossible to remove one 
 sensitive plate and insert another without somewhat disturbing the pointing of the instrument, and 
 thus rendering a new pointing necessary. When taking pictures at the rate of one per minute, Dr. 
 Curtis found no difficulty in making the pointings himself; but in order to take four per minute, his 
 whole time was required for the insertion, timing, exposure, and removal of the plates, and there- 
 fore, at his request, I made the pointings of the telescope during the time that pictures were being 
 taken at such short intervals. As it was necessary to take pictures rapidly, not only at the begin- 
 ning of the eclipse, but at the end also, and as during the totality I was engaged with the spectro- 
 scope, I was precluded from observing the time of any of the contacts. 
 
 After the first two minutes of the eclipse 1 was relieved from the photographic telescope, and 
 
60 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 at once proceeded to attach the spectroscope to my three-inch telescope, and to place and adjust the 
 necessary counterpoises. When the eclipse had so far progressed as to reduce the sun to a crescent, 
 with the assistance of Professor T. H. Saft'ord I adjusted the needle in the finder so that when its 
 point fell upon a horn of the crescent the image of that horn fell accurately within the jaws of the 
 spectroscope slit. This, with some other little matters, occupied my time till within three minutes 
 of the totality, when, according to previous arrangement, I called Professor Eastman, who was to 
 assist me in making the spectroscope observations by placing and keeping the needle point of the 
 finder successively upon the different objects to be examined. 
 
 THE SPECTROSCOPE OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 It seems to me that one of the desiderata in spectroscopic observations of the sun during total 
 eclipses, is to penetrate as low down towards the photosphere as possible. In order to accomplish 
 this, I placed the slit of my spectroscope parallel to the moon's path, and clamped- it in that position, 
 and so it remained during all my observations. Professor Eastman's eye was at the finder, and 
 mine at the spectroscope, at least a minute before the commencement of totality, but he saw no 
 prominences. Presently the sunlight disappeared like the snuffing out of a candle, and simulta- 
 neously a suppressed, but very audible, "Oh, oh," arose from the spectators in the neighborhood. 
 Instantly he placed the needle point on the prominence marked Fig. 2. 
 
 1 on Fig. 2, and I recorded its spectrum as rapidly as possible. 
 Then we passed on to the prominences marked 2 and 3, and 
 their spectra were successively recorded in like manner. Next 
 I asked him to give me the corona, and he placed the needle 
 point at c 1 . No spectrum appearing, I asked him to try another 
 place, and he placed the needle at c 2 . Still nothing was visible, 
 and, raising my head from the instrument for the first time since 
 the commencement of the totality, I remarked, "Can't see any 
 spectrum; don't believe we will get any." "Oh, yes, we will," 
 said he. At that instant it struck me that perhaps the slit was 
 too narrow, so I opened it a little, and then again placed my eve 
 at the instrument. In the meantime he had put the needle 
 point on a very bright part of the corona, marked <? in the figure, s 
 and I at once saw a continuous spectrum about as bright as that given by the full moon on a clear 
 night. Remembering that the observers in India, in August, 1868, had said that the corona gives 
 a continuous spectrum with absorption lines, I looked very carefully for them, but to my great sur- 
 prise I could see none, and I am perfectly satisfied that none were visible in my instrument. On 
 the contrary, I saw an absolutely continuous spectrum, crossed by a single bright line, whose posi- 
 tion was recorded. 
 
 Once more raising my head from the instrument, I glanced upward to the sky and saw the 
 moon encircled by the corona, and ac<x>nipauied by one remarkably large prominence, which was 
 attached to the lower limb of the sun. I was well aware that the red prominences are sometimes 
 visible to the naked eye, but this one was so exceedingly conspicuous that it could not fail to attract 
 the attention of the most careless observer. Almost without thinking what I was doing, I asked 
 Professor Eastman to point the spectroscope to it. He replied, "You have had it already." "Never 
 mind, give it to me again," said I. He did so, and, as it is the prominence marked 3 in the figure, 
 I have recorded its spectrum in the column headed 3 2 iu the table below. Professor Eastman then 
 looked down to the chronometer in order to take up its beat for the purpose of noting the end of 
 the totality. As he did so, I glanced into the finder so that I might get some idea of the appear 
 ance of a total eclipse as seen through a telescope of small power. My view of it may have lasted 
 five or ten seconds, certainly not more, yet the magnificence of the spectacle is so indelibly impressed 
 upon my memory that it will be years ere I forget it. When he looked up from the chronometer I 
 replaced my eye at the spectroscope, and asked him to give me another prominence. He put the 
 needle point on the one marked 4 in the figure, and while I was yet engaged in recording its spec- 
 trum there came a sudden burst of light, and Professor Eastman withdrew his eye from the finder, 
 
OBSERVATIONS OP THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1809. 61 
 
 exclaiming, "All over." It was too true. The event, for the proper observation of which we had 
 traveled so far, and spent so much time, aud thought, and money, had come and gone, and now it 
 remains for the scientific world to judge whether or not we made the most of our opportunity. 
 
 Professor Eastman at once sat down and made a sketch of the corona and prominences as they 
 appeared to him in the finder, numbering the prominences in the order in which he had given them 
 to me in the spectroscope, and also marking the places on the corona at which he had pointed. I 
 had recorded the spectrum observations myself, using for that purpose a small memorandum book, 
 writing down the figures without looking at the page, arid recording only one spectrum at each open- 
 ing of the book that is, when I had recorded one spectrum I always turned the leaf before record- 
 ing another thus devoting two whole pages to each observation. Such being the state of the case, 
 all that was necessary in order to identify each spectrum with the prominence to which it belonged, 
 was for me to mark the records of the spectra in my note book with the same numbers as those 
 employed by Professor Eastman on his sketch, and that I did at once ; therefore I think no question 
 can ever be raised as to the prominences to which the spectra belonged. 
 
 At the time of making these observations the impression left on my mind was that the spectra 
 given by the different prominences differed from each other, not only in the number of the lines, but 
 in their position also. It was not till four hours after the eclipse that I had time to compare them 
 with each other, and when I did so, arranging them as in the table below, great was my surprise to 
 find that the difference between the different prominences was only in the number of lines, and not 
 in their position at all. Before passing to the consideration of the lines, however, it will be best to 
 mention some particulars relative to the adjustments of the spectroscope, and the method pursued 
 in making the observations. 
 
 Some minutes before the beginning of the totality the micrometer scale was so adjusted that 
 its fiftieth division coincided exactly with the mean of the two sodium lines which together form the 
 line D ; and the slit was opened to such a width as to give fine, sharp definition of all the lines. The 
 instrument remained in that condition till the observation of the spectrum of the corona, before 
 which the slit was opened a little wider. After that none of the adjustments were altered in the 
 slightest until the next day. Immediately after the end of the totality the scale reading of the line 
 D was tested ; first by observing the position of the black line in the solar spectrum, and then by 
 placing the Hame of an alcohol lamp, whose wick contained a little common salt, before the object- 
 glass of the telescope and observing the position of the resulting bright line. In both cases the 
 reading was exactly fifty divisions, thus proving that the instrument had kept its adjustment during 
 the observations of the prominences and corona. Then the following readings of the positions of 
 some of the lines in the solar spectrum were taken : 
 
 C 36.2 
 
 D 50.0 
 
 E 67.9 
 
 b 71.5 
 
 F 84.8 
 
 115.0 
 116.0 
 
 G 117.8 
 
 After that the spectroscope was detached from the telescope. Next morning, before any of the 
 adjustments had been altered in the slightest, a sodium flame was put before the slit of the spectro- 
 scope and the width of the resulting bright line was observed to be 0.8 -of a scale division. From 
 the angular value of one division of the scale, together with the focal length of the collimating lens 
 of the slit, it can easily be shown that- when the width of the bright sodium line is one division, the 
 width of the slit is 0.0037 of an inch. Therefore, at and after the observation of the spectrum of 
 the corona the width of the opening of the slit was 0.0030 of an inch ; in observing the spectra of 
 the prominences before that it was a little narrower. 
 
 As my instrument gives a spectrum about 330 minutes in length, the whole of which is visible 
 at once in the field of view of its telescope, it is admirably adapted for rapid work. But when the 
 telescope is adjusted to give the best possible definition of the lines near D, those near H, although 
 still quite distinct, are nevertheless slightly out of focus, and by moving the eye across the eye-piece 
 their scale reading can be made to vary a little. To have adjusted the focus accurately on each line 
 observed during the eclipse would have involved an expenditure of time not for one moment to be 
 
62 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 thought of, and, as each scale division corresponds to somewhat less than two minutes, I therefore 
 judged it best to observe as many spectra as possible, noting the position of each bright line to the 
 nearest half of a scale division only, and trusting that, from the closely approximate positions thus 
 obtained, all the lines might be found at any time after the eclipse with a sufficiently powerful instru- 
 ment. 
 
 Now let us pass to the consideration of the observations. They are given in the table below, 
 the first column of which contains the letters of such of the lines as are so designated ; the columns 
 headed 1, 2, 3 1 , 3 2 , and 4, contain respectively the spectra of the prominences marked 1, 2, 3, and 4> 
 in Fig. 2, the column headed 3 1 containing the record of the first, and that headed 3 2 the record of 
 the second spectrum observed from the prominence 3 ; the column headed "Corona" contains the 
 reading of the bright line in the spectrum of the corona. 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3' 
 
 Coroiia. 
 
 3- 
 
 4 
 
 Meau. 
 
 Kirch, 
 scale. 
 
 \Vav.j 
 length. 
 
 c 
 
 46.0 
 
 37.0 
 
 36.5 
 
 
 36.0 
 
 36.0 
 
 36.3 
 
 693 
 
 656.9 
 
 D 
 
 50.0 
 
 50.5 
 
 
 
 50.0 
 
 50.0 
 
 50.1 
 
 1007 
 
 589.4 
 
 
 67.5 
 
 67.0 
 
 67.0 
 
 66.5 
 
 66.5 
 
 67. r> 
 
 67. (1 
 
 1497 
 
 531 1. 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 70.5 
 
 . 
 
 70.5 
 
 Kill 
 
 520.1 
 
 F 
 
 85.0 
 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 si. 
 
 84.5 
 
 84.5 
 
 2069 
 
 Mr. e 
 
 
 
 - - 
 
 - 
 
 - - 
 
 114.0 
 
 1 1 1. 5 
 
 114. '.> 
 
 8776 
 
 436.9 
 
 The number 40, recorded on the line C in column 1, is evidently a misreading of ten divisions. 
 It should doubtless have been 3G. Making this correction, and bearing in mind that the readings 
 were made at a glance, te the nearest half division only, without stopping to verify them, I think 
 it will be admitted that all the numbers on any one horizontal line of the table are sufficiently near 
 to each other to warrant me in assuming them to be readings of one and the same bright line. In 
 other words, during the whole of the totality I only observed six lines; the double line D being 
 counted as a single line because it so appeared to inc. I have therefore taken the mean of the num- 
 bers on each horizontal line, and placed them in the column headed "Mean." These I consider to 
 be the observed scale readings of the bright lines, and in the columns headed " Kirch, scale " and 
 " Wave length," I have given the corresponding readings of Kirchhotf 's scale, and the wave lengths 
 expressed in milliouths of a millimeter. 
 
 Now let us examine the position of each prominence at the time its spectrum was taken. The 
 spectrum of 1 was observed as soon after the beginning of the totality as possible, but a glance at 
 Fig. 2 shows that it lay very far from the path of the moon's center, and therefore its base was not 
 visible. It gave four bright lines. 2 was next examined.- It lay almost exactly in the path of the 
 moon's center, but by this time she had advanced so far that probably it was not visible more than 
 half-way down to its base. It gave three bright liues. Then the t-elescope was pointed at 3, which, 
 being on the southwestern limb of the sun and distant from the path of the moon's center, had only 
 just begun to be much uncovered. Its summit was all that was visible, and it gave but two bright 
 lines. After spending some time on the corona, 3 was again examined. As the moon had moved 
 forward considerably the prominence was uncovered much further down towards the sun, and now 
 it gave no less than six bright lines. Finally 4 was pointed at, and as it lay almost exactly in the 
 path of the moon's center, and the totality ended while it was yet under examination, the spectro- 
 scope must have penetrated down to its very base. I recorded five bright lines from it, but I am 
 not certain that there were no more, because I was not done with it wheu I was stopped by tin- 
 flood of returning sunlight. The first thing that would be likely to strike a person on looking at 
 the observations is that no two prominences gave the same spectrum ; but I think it is now evident 
 that this does not indicate any difference of constitution among them. On the contrary, the num- 
 ber of lines visible seems to depend solely on the part of the prominence examined. If we take the 
 spectrum from near the summit we get but few lines ; if we take it lower down we get more lines, 
 but those that we found at the top are still there ; if we take it near the base all the lines we had 
 before remain, and, in addition, some new ones appear. Therefore I infer that these observations 
 
OBSERVATIONS OP THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 63 
 
 indicate that all the prominences possess nearly, if iiot precisely, the same physical constitution, but 
 that that constitution undergoes a gradual change from their bases toward their summits. If such 
 is the case, then, when the spectrum of a prominence is examined with the slit of the spectroscope 
 perpendicular to the limb of the sun, the bright lines should appear of different lengths. This 
 applies to my observations of the prominences 2 and 4, but whether or not they gave lines of dif- 
 ferent lengths I am unable to say. I remember distinctly that some of the prominences did do so, 
 but unfortunately I made no memorandum which will enable me to identify the particular ones. 
 
 The next question which presents itself is, what are the substances which gave rise to the 
 observed bright lines? In order to identify these lines in the most certain manner possible, I was 
 very anxious to observe with my instrument the spectra of hydrogen, iron, and magnesium, but 
 unfortunately I did not succeed in obtaining a sufficiently powerful induction coil. 1 am therefore 
 obliged to resort to the published results of other investigators. 
 
 Professor W. Gibbs,* on the authority of Pliicker, gives for the wave lengths of the hydrogen 
 lines, H = 653.3, Rft = 484.3, H^=433.9 ; and on the authority of Angstrom, H/?=1797.3, H^=1604.3. 
 H and lift are known to coincide respectively with Fraunhofer's C and P, for which I have adopted 
 the wave lengths 050. 8 and 486.5. In order to render Pliicker's values identical with these, his II 
 must be multiplied by 1.0054, and his 11,5 by 1.0045. Multiplying his HJ- by this last quantity, it 
 becomes 435.9, which I shall consider as the result of his observations. Angstrom's wave lengths 
 are, given in j-ujnlooou ^ a P ai 'i s inch, and in order to reduce them to millionths of a millimeter, I 
 have assumed 
 
 1 Paris inch = 27.0700 millimeters. 
 
 They therefore give, H,S = 480.5, 11^ = 434.3. Taking the .mean of Plh'ckcr's and Angstrom's meas- 
 ures, we have for the wave lengths of the hydrogen lines 
 
 II = G5G.S 
 H/S = 48G.5 
 H r = 435.1 
 
 Assuming the wave lengths of the lines sodium ft and to be respectively 590.53 and 589.88, 
 Kayett gives as the wave length of the yellow bright line in the solar spectrum, 588.27 = 1016.8 of 
 Kirchhoff's scale. Throughout this report I have adopted Na. ft = 590.04, Na. a = 589.43. It there- 
 fore results that the wave length of the 
 
 Yellow bright line = 587.9 
 
 From a paper "On the Spectra of some of the Chemical Elements," by Mr. William Huggins,| 
 I have extracted the following positions of certain bright lines in the spectrum of iron : 
 
 Huggins's scale. Wave length. 
 1560 530.7 
 
 .1574 529.4 
 
 1582 528.8 
 
 The lines 1560 and 1574 are quite faint, but 1582 is very bright. I have made use of Professor 
 W. Gibbs's tables to convert the readings of Mr. Hnggins's scale into wave lengths. 
 
 I have not any table of the spectrum of magnesium, but its principal lines are known to coin- 
 cide with the components of Fraunhofer's line 6, the wave lengths of which, as deduced by Profes- 
 sor W. Gibbs from Ditscheiner's and Angstrom's measurements,!] are as follows: 
 
 518.73 
 517.70 
 517.15 
 
 American Journal of Science, [2,] XXXIX, 217. } Philosophical Transactions, 1864, p. 139. 
 
 t Comptes Rendus, LXVIII, 320, February, 1869. American Journal of Science, [2,] XLVII, 194. 
 
 II American Journal of Science, [2,] XLIII, 1, and XLV, 298. 
 
64 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 For convenience of reference the results are collected in the following table, the first column of 
 which contains my observed wave lengths of the various bright lines given by the corona and prom- 
 inences, together with the possible error of each wave length, deduced upon the supposition that 
 the observed scale reading of any line may be in error to the extent of half a division ; the second 
 column contains the wave lengths found above for the bright lines in the spectra of certain chemi- 
 cal elements : 
 
 Wave lengths of 
 bright lines. 
 
 AV:ivi> lengths of chemical ele- 
 ments. 
 
 656. 9 3. 2 
 
 656. 8 Hydrogen. 
 
 589. 4 2. 1 
 
 587. 9 Unknown, (sodium f) 
 
 
 530.71 
 
 530.0 1.4 
 
 529. 4 I Iron. 
 
 
 528. 8 J 
 
 520.1 1.4 
 
 518. 7 Magnesium. 
 
 487.5 1.0 
 
 486. 5 Hydrogen. 
 
 435. 9 0. 7 
 
 435. 1 Hydrogen. 
 
 Owing to the very moderate dispersive power of my spectroscope the iron lines 528.8 and 529.4 
 would certainly coalesce, and 530.7 would probably coalesce with them, and appear as a single 
 rather thick line, which was what I actually sa\v.* Bearing in mind what is already known of solar 
 physics, I think there can scarcely be a doubt that the bright lines in the prominences were pro- 
 duced by the substances whose names stand respectively on the same horizontal lines with the 
 observed wave lengths in the table above. The identification of the lines is therefore complete. 
 
 Physical constitution of the corona. On this subject many different theories have been proposed, 
 but they may all be divided into three general classes: 1. Those which attribute the formation of 
 the corona to the passage of the sun's rays through the earth's atmosphere. 2. Those which attrib- 
 ute its formation to the passage of the solar rays through a supposed lunar atmosphere. 3. Those 
 which consider the corona as an envelope of some kind surrounding the sun. 
 
 Against theories belonging to the first class there are two objections which seem to me to be 
 fatal. The moon's shadow, at the point where it enters the earth's atmosphere, usually has a diame- 
 ter of one hundred miles or more, and if it were possible for an observer placed within that shadow 
 to see the illumination of the atmosphere outside of it, the appearance presented would be that of 
 a halo having an interior diameter much greater than the size of the moon. At the commencement 
 of the totality the moon would be within, and tangent to, this halo, and as the eclipse progressed 
 she would move across its interior till she finally reached its other edge, at which instant the totality 
 would end. It is almost needless to say that no such phenomenon has ever been seen, the only 
 known effect of the illumination of the surrounding atmosphere being to produce a blush of light in 
 the distant horizon. Besides, as the illumination of the surrounding atmosphere is due to ordinary 
 sunlight, if it is the cause of the corona its spectrum should show Fraunhofer's lines, while my 
 observations prove that it does not do so. I looked specially for them, but could see none, although 
 the spectrum was sufficiently bright and the width of the slit was only 0.0030 of an inch. 
 
 Against theories belonging to the second class there are equally fatal objections. For many 
 years astronomers have exhausted all their ingenuity in devising methods for the detection of a 
 lunar atmosphere, but as yet without success. Mr. Huggins's observation of the occupation of 
 e Piscium, on January 4, 1865, through the spectroscope,! is probably the most delicate optical test 
 that can be applied, but even it failed to show any trace of such an atmosphere. I am aware that 
 the brightening seen along the limb of the moon on photographs of solar eclipses has been attributed 
 by some to the effect of a lunar atmosphere; but Mr. Airy has shown f that, even if such an atmo- 
 
 * I do not wish to be understood as stating that the bright line in the corona is either double or triple. I only assert 
 that, so far as my observations are concerned, such may be the case ; and that, at all events, I think it will be found to 
 coincide with one, or more, of the three iron lines in question. 
 
 t Monthly Notices, Royal Ast. Soc., XXV, 60. } Monthly Notices, Royal Ast. Soc., XXIV, 13. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OB' THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 65 
 
 sphere existed, it could not produce this effect; and Dr. Curtis shows in his report on the eclipse 
 under discussion that it is due to the diffraction of the sunlight caused by the moon's limb. In 
 short, there is not a shadow of reason to believe that any such thing as a lunar atmosphere exists ; 
 but if it did, and the corona was due either to reflection or refraction of the sunlight by it, then the 
 spectrum of the corona should show Fraunhofer's lines, which, as I have already stated, is not the 
 case. 
 
 An examination of the photographs of totality, fac-similes of which are given in Plates X and 
 XI, shows that as the moon advanced the corona was progressively covered ; and this, taken in 
 connection with the spectroscope observations, forces us to conclude that it must be an envelope of 
 some kind surrounding the sun. It has been objected that it cannot be a solar atmosphere because 
 its form is too irregular. Plates IX, X, XI, and XII show that during the present eclipse its gen 
 era! outline was trapezoidal, the angles being in middle latitudes ; in other words, it did not extend 
 so far from the body of the sun either at the equator or at the poles as it did about latitude 45. 
 Observations of the barometer made at the level of the sea show that the earth's atmosphere has a 
 very similar form, which, I think, is a sufficient answer to the objection. It has also been objected 
 that if the corona is an atmosphere surrounding the sun, it should reverse the bright lines which 
 can always be seen in the chromosphere by using a spectroscope of sufficient dispersive power. 
 This is somewhat difficult to answer. The general appearance of the spectrum of the corona, as I 
 saw it, is very well represented on Plate V. The brightness of the continuous portion was about 
 equal to perhaps slightly less than that of the spectrum which I get from the moon in the same 
 instrument ; and I am perfectly convinced that there were no absorption lines. I looked particu- 
 larly for them, and the light was sufficiently intense and the slit sufficiently narrow for me to have 
 seen them if they had been present.* The bright line was tolerably conspicuous, but it did not 
 stand out so glaringly as the bright lines in the prominences. So far as a single observation can be 
 depended upon, it seems to me that this one tends to prove that the corona is a highly rarefied 
 self-luminous atmosphere surrounding the sun, and that it is composed principally of iron in the 
 state of incandescent vapor. Probably the selective absorption of the continuous portion of the 
 spectrum is not sufficiently strong to do more than slightly dim, without actually reversing, the 
 bright lines of the chromosphere. But with the bright line at 67.0 divisions of my scale the case 
 is different. If I have rightly identified its wave-length, it does reverse the solar spectrum, for the 
 rays whose wave-lengths are 530.7 and 528.8 are respectively identical with the dark lines at 1487.7 
 and 1508.6 of KirchhofFs map. 
 
 It has very recently been suggested that the bright line in the corona probably coincides with 
 one of the bright lines in the spectrum of the aurora, and that therefore the corona is nothing else 
 than a permanent solar aurora. On the nights of April 15 and June 6, 1869, Professor Joseph 
 Winlock observed the following bright lines in the spectrum of the aurora : t 
 
 Mr. Huggins' scale. Wave length. 
 1280 (brightest) 557.1 
 
 1400 544.6 
 
 1550 531.5 
 
 1680 near F. 521.0 
 
 2640 near G. 463.9 
 
 Angstrom gives J for the wave-length of the brightest line in the aurora 556.7, agreeing very 
 well with the result above. I found for the wave-length of the bright line in the corona 530.0, while 
 Professor Winlock finds for one of those in the aurora 531.5. I scarcely think that the two are 
 identical, but even if they are, although it may prove that the glowing gas, or vapor, is the same in 
 both cases, it certainly does not prove that in the case of the corona the heating power is an elec- 
 trical discharge, which is generally admitted to be the cause of the aurora. It is worthy of remark 
 
 * It is now nearly certain that if hydrogen gas is gradually heated until it becomes luminous it will first yield a 
 continuous spectrum, which, when the temperature becomes sufficiently intense, will suddenly change into the well- 
 known spectrum consisting of three or four bright lines. May not the continuous spectrum of the corona be due to 
 hydrogen which is much cooler than that forming the red prominences f 
 
 tAmer. Journal of Science, [2,] XLVIII, 123. tPgg- Annalen, May, 1869. 
 
 -9* 
 
66 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 that the lines 1400 and 1680 of Professor Winlock's spectrum of the aurora .coincide respectively 
 with the positions of an iron and a chromium line in Mr. Hnggius' tables. Have we iron vapor in 
 the upper regions of our own atmosphere f 
 
 Physical constitution of the red prominences. A glance at Plate V shows that all the promi- 
 nences which I observed presented the bright line whoso wave-length is 530.0, together with a faint 
 continuous spectrum ; but as those were dne.to the light radiated from that portion of the corona 
 lying between me and the prominences, there remain only three hydrogen lines, one magnesium 
 line, and the unknown line near that of sodium, which were produced by the prominences them- 
 selves. These lines have all been frequently observed before, and it is also well known that the 
 magnesium never rises very high above the chromosphere, but so far as I am aware the following- 
 fact is new. At the base of a prominence we find all the lines, but as we ascend from the surface 
 of the chromosphere we lose first the magnesium and the blue hydrogen line, then the green hydro- 
 gen line, then the unknown yellow line, and only the red hydrogen line extends to the very summit 
 of the prominence. This has a very important bearing on a remark by Mr. De La Hue,* who lays 
 great stress on the fact that he found on one of his photographs of the total solar eclipse of July 18, 
 1860, the image of a prominence which he had not seen in his telescope. Hearing in mind that the 
 red and yellow portion of the spectrum contains most of the luminous rays, while it is destitute of 
 chemical ones, it will be evident that the spectroscope observations tend to prove that, owing to 
 their summits not containing any chemical rays, the prominences will not appear so high on a pho 
 tograph as they do when viewed in a telescope ; and also that any prominence which can be photo- 
 graphed must be visible to the eye through a telescope of sufficient power, while there may be 
 prominences perfectly visible to the eye which cannot be photographed. Tliis is in direct opposi- 
 tiod to Mr. De La Eue's statement, but it agrees perfectly with Professor Eastman's observations 
 of the present eclipse, for his sketch shows all the prominences which are to be found on the 
 photographs. 
 
 The question naturally presents itself, why do the hydrogen lines disappear successively in the 
 manner indicated above 1 So far as we know it must be the effect either of pressure or of temper- 
 ature. Under a pressure of 360 millimeters, and with a very intense spark, hydrogen gives a con- 
 tinuous spectrum. At a somewhat less pressure the spectrum breaks np'into bands, H/3 and H/ 
 being the broadest ; if the gas be considerably rarefied these bands become perfectly sharply defined 
 lines. If the reduction of pressure be still further continued, the red line, H, gradually disappears, 
 while H/J, though fainter, remains well defined. Hence the disappearance of the lines in the 
 prominences cannot be an effect of pressure, and is probably due to decrease of temperature. The 
 highest temperature procurable by artificial means is that yielded by the electric spark which will 
 produce all the hydrogen lines. Next to it ranks the oxy hydrogen flame, the spectrum of which, 
 and also that of the hydrogen flame, I was enabled to examine by the kindness of Brevet Lieutenant 
 Colonel J. J. "Woodward, assistant surgeon United States Army. In both cases the result was the 
 same. Only three lines were visible, namely : that of sodium and the lines calcium and /?. Not 
 .the slightest trace of the hydrogen lines appeared. I therefore "conclude that the temperature of 
 the summits of the red prominences is greater than that of the oxy-hydrogeu flame, which is about 
 2500 Centigrade = 4532 Fahrenheit, and less than that of the electric spark, the heat of which is 
 entirely unknown. 
 
 To recapitulate, the new facts developed by the spectroscope observations recorded in this 
 report are 
 
 I. The corona gives an absolutely continuous spectrum, crossed by a single bright line whose 
 wave-length is approximately 530.0. 
 
 II. In ascending from the chromosphere the hydrogen lines in the red prominences disappear 
 in the order H^, H/3, Ha ; Ha being the only line found at the very summit of the prominences. 
 
 III. The physical constitution of the red prominences appears to be the same in all. 
 
 From these facts I consider the following conclusions highly probable, if they are not actually 
 proved. 
 
 A. The corona is a highly rarefied self-luminous atmosphere surrounding the sun, and, perhaps, 
 principally composed of the incandescent vapor of iron. 
 
 * Phil. Transactions, 1862, p. 404. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OP THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 67 
 
 B. The temperature of the summits of the red prominences, at a distance of a hundred thou- 
 sand miles from the sun's surface, exceeds 4500 Fahrenheit a heat more than sufficient to vaporize 
 iron. 
 
 SCALE OF TINTS. 
 
 The scale of tints, with which the colors of the prominences seen around the sun during the 
 totality were compared, is shown in Plate V, and is composed of the following pigments: 
 
 a and b, pure carmine, c and d, carmine and cadmium, e, Vandyke brown, fandg, Van- 
 dyke brown and cadmium. A, pure cadmium, i, sepia and cadmium. 
 
 CONCLUSION, 
 
 All my instruments and apparatus worked in the most satisfactory manner, and were I 
 ordered to observe another solar eclipse I would make but two change* in my outfit. In place of 
 the small pocket surveying instruments I would take, if possible, a five or six. inch theodolite ; and 
 I would have my spectroscope altered so as to employ a collimating lens of shorter focus between 
 the prism and the slit thus bringing the body of the instrument nearer to the telescope, and 
 avoiding the use of such heavy counterpoises. In the examination of the corona and prominences, 
 I believe that more spectra can be observed during the time of totality by having a steady and 
 reliable assistant to point the finder, than if a driving clock is employed and the spectroscope 
 observer makes the pointings himself. 
 
 In view of the very great importance which the question of the physical constitution of the 
 corona has assumed, I regret exceedingly that there was a failure in the use of my polarizing appa- 
 ratus, and that I am unable to report any results from it. 
 
 I shall at once proceed to design the large micrometer necessary for reading off the photographs 
 taken by Dr. Curtis during the eclipse, and as soon as the instrument is completed I will make the 
 measurements on the negatives, reduce and discuss the results, and place my report on the subject 
 in your hands, so that it may be published without any unnecessary delay. 
 I am, Commodore, most respectfully, 
 
 \VM. HARKNESS, 
 1'rofennor of Mathematics, United States Navy. 
 
 Commodore B. F. SANDS, U. S. N., 
 
 Superintendent United States Naval Observatory, Washington, D. C. 
 
REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 SCHEDULE A. 
 
 Observations of the sun for Time, made at the temporary United States Naval Observatory at Des 
 Moines, Iowa, by Prof. Wm. Harkness, U. 8. N., icith the Sextant Staekpole cfc Bro. No. 937, Mer- 
 curial Artificial Horizon Ha. 1, and Chronometer T. S. & J. D. Negus No. 1.310. 
 
 [NOTE. The barometer employed was an aneroid belonging to Prof. J. R. Eastman; and 0.38 of an inch must be 
 subtracted from all its recorded readings in order to free them from constant errors.] 
 
 SUN . . . JULY 23, 1869. SUN . . . JULY 23, ls(>9. 
 
 
 
 Index Corr. 
 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = 6>. 
 
 Off Arc = 4)i. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = o. 
 
 Off Arc = t)i. 
 
 / a 
 29 10 
 30 
 20 
 
 O ' " 
 
 4 26 30 
 10 
 25 
 
 t ii 
 29 10 
 20 
 15 
 
 O ' " 
 
 4 26 10 
 10 
 10 
 
 + 2 9.6 
 + 10.4 
 
 t 
 
 + 2 17.5 
 + 8.9 
 
 
 -f- 2 20 
 
 + 2 26. 4 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 Q 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 Q 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 O ' '/ 
 
 60 30 
 45 
 61 
 60 30 
 45 
 61 
 
 h. m. a. 
 1 55 35.0 
 56 15.1 
 56 55.6 
 58 23.6 
 59 2.9 
 59 42.3 
 
 O ' '/ 
 
 54 30 
 15 
 
 54 30 
 15 
 
 
 /I. !. 8. 
 
 11 6 3.2 
 ti 44. 
 7 23.5 
 8 50.5 
 9 31. 5 
 10 11.3 
 
 60 45 0.0 
 + 2 20.0 
 
 1 57 39. 1 
 
 54 15 0.0 
 + 2 26. 4 
 
 11 8 7.3 
 
 o 
 Ther. 76.0 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29. 58 
 
 O ' /' 
 
 = 69 58 49. 3 
 
 h. m. s. 
 7 33 20. 1 
 
 . + 6 10.6 
 
 
 60 47 20. 
 1 33.0 
 
 + 7.3 
 
 54 17 26. 4 
 1 44.5 
 + 7.5 
 
 Polar distance of object . . 
 
 Local Apparent Time . . . 
 Equation of Time .... 
 
 Local Mean Time .... 
 Time by Chronometer . . . 
 
 Chronometer fast of Local M. T. 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Timi 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Chromm 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 These observatu 
 
 / " 
 
 object . . =70 3 34. 4 
 
 h. in. s. 
 ime .... 4 43 48. 7 
 
 ) -L R 11 9 
 
 
 
 . 7 39 30. 7 
 . 1 57 39. 1 
 
 4 49 59 9 
 
 rlrl 1 . 
 
 . 11 8 7.3 
 
 . 6 18 8.4 
 
 of Lorn! M.T. . 6 18 7. 4 
 us wi'i- made after noon. 
 
 These observations were made before noon. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 SCHEDULE A Continued. 
 
 69 
 
 SUN .... JULY 23. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 24. 
 
 On Arc u. 
 
 Off Arc = u'. 
 
 On Arc = a. 
 
 Off Arc = a 1 . 
 
 t n 
 
 ot" 
 
 t it 
 29 20 
 20 
 30 
 
 ' " 
 
 4 25 40 
 40 
 45 
 
 Index Corr. + 2 17. 5 
 
 E + 7. 7 
 
 
 Index Corr + 2 27. 5 
 E +8.6 
 
 
 Index Corr., &c. + 225.2 
 
 Index Corr., &c. !+ 2 36. 1 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 O ' II 
 
 47 45 
 30 
 15 
 47 45 
 30 
 15 
 
 
 h. m. e. 
 
 11 24 11.3 
 
 24 51. 8 
 25 31.7 
 
 27 0.5 
 27 38.5 
 28 20. 8 
 
 / II 
 
 52 30 
 45 
 53 
 52 30 
 45 
 53 
 
 h. m. s. 
 1 34 50.6 
 35 31.5 
 36 12.0 
 37 40.0 
 38 19.0 
 39 0.0 
 
 Means 47 30 0.0 
 Index Corr.,iVc. -f 225.2 
 
 11 26 15.8 
 
 Moans 52 45 o. 
 Index Corr., &c. ; + 2 36. 1 
 
 1 36 55. 5 
 
 
 
 Thfi . 86. 8 
 
 O 1 II 
 
 70 3 43. 3 
 
 /I. III. 9. 
 
 . 5 1 56.7 
 - + 6 11.2 
 
 .0 
 
 Thcr. 77. 
 
 in. 
 
 Bar. 29. 46 
 
 o" / /' 
 = 70 11 11.2 
 
 h. Ml. 8. 
 
 . 7 12 34.8 
 + 6 11 8 
 
 Q 47 32 25. 2 
 Kofi-action 2 1.2 
 Parallax -f- ~-7 
 
 Q '>> 47 36. 1 
 Refraction 1 49.8 
 Parallax -f- 7.6 
 
 Polar distance of object 
 
 Local Apparent TimS 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Moan Time .... 
 
 Polar distance of object . . 
 
 Local Apparent Time .... 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 
 
 - 5 8 7. 9 
 
 7 18 46 6 
 
 Time by Chronometer . . . 
 Chronometer fast of Local M. T. 
 
 - 11 26 15.8 
 
 Time by Chronometer . . . 
 Chronometer fast of Local M. T. 
 
 1 36 55. 5 
 
 6 18 7.9 
 
 . 6 18 8.9 
 
 These observations \vere made after noon. 
 
 These observations were made before noon. 
 
70 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 SCHEDULE A Continued. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 26. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 26. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = a. 
 
 Off Arc = u 1 . 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc .= u. 
 
 Off Arc = u 1 . 
 
 t a 
 29 10 
 10 
 10 
 
 Q 1 II 
 
 4 26 10 
 25 50 
 26 10 
 
 i it 
 29 10 
 25 
 25 
 
 ' " 
 
 4 26 10 
 10 
 
 
 + 2 23. 4 
 + 12.0 
 
 
 + 2 16.6 
 + 12.0 
 
 
 + 2 35.4 
 
 + 2 28.6 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 n 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 o ' " 
 67 30 
 45 
 68 
 67 30 
 45 
 68 
 
 h. m. s. 
 2 16 29. 5 
 17 10.0 
 17 50.6 
 19 19.5 
 19 58. 
 20 39.2 
 
 / II 
 
 68 
 67 45 
 30 
 
 A. in. s. 
 10 30 38. 4 
 31 19.5 
 31 59.2 
 
 67 45 0.0 
 + 2 35.4 
 
 2 18 34. 5 
 
 
 
 o 
 Ther. 70. 
 
 iw. 
 Bar. 29. 52 
 
 O t H 
 
 = 70 37 39. 1 
 
 A. m. s. 
 . 7 54 12.0 
 
 -f 6 12 7 
 
 
 
 Ther. 81. 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29. 49 
 
 O ' " 
 
 = 70 42 13. 8 
 
 /I. HI. 8. 
 
 67 47 35.4 
 1 22.3 
 
 + 7.0 
 
 
 Polar distann of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Chrononi 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 These observatio 
 
 object 
 me 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Chronom 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 These obiwrvatio 
 
 abject - - 
 me ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 24. 7 
 
 
 eter . . . 
 of Local M. T. 
 
 . 2 18 34. 5 
 
 Bter . . . 
 
 .f l.orul M.T. 
 
 - 
 
 . 6 18 9.8 
 
 - 
 
 as were made before noon. 
 
 is were made after noon. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 71 
 
 SCHEDULE A Continued. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 26. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 27. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = a. 
 
 Off Arc = u'. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., <fec. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc = u<. 
 
 
 o / " 
 
 / // 
 
 o / // 
 
 + 2 16.0 
 + 11.3 
 
 
 + 2 18.3 
 + 13.0 
 
 
 + 2 27.9 
 
 + 2 31. 3 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., <fcc. 
 
 U 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., <fec. 
 
 Q 
 Refraction 
 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 o / // 
 64 45 
 30 
 15 
 64 45 
 30 
 15 
 
 ll. III. 8. 
 
 10 36 33.0 
 37 12.8 
 37 52.5 
 39 20. 8 
 40 1. 5 
 40 41.0 
 
 / " 
 
 72 30 
 45 
 73 
 72 30 
 45 
 73 
 
 h. m. s. 
 2 30 41. 
 31 22.0 
 32 1.0 
 33 29. 8 
 34 9.7 
 34 50.0 
 
 64 30 0.0 
 + 2 27. 9 
 
 10 38 36. 9 
 
 72 45 0. 
 + 2 31.3 
 
 2 32 45.6 
 
 O ' // 
 
 = '70 42 17. 8 
 
 li. m. . 
 . 4 14 ]5.5 
 
 _|_ 6 12 5 
 
 O / // 
 
 = 70 51 18. 7 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 . 8 8 22. 8 
 
 - + 6 12.2 
 
 64 32 27. 9 
 
 1 25.8 
 + 7.1 
 
 72 47 31. 3 
 1 14.5 
 
 + 6.8 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent TJ 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Chronom 
 
 Chronometer last 
 
 These obser\ atio 
 
 object 
 me 
 
 Polar distance of < 
 
 Local Apparent Ti 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Chrouom 
 
 Chronometer fast < 
 These observatioi 
 
 )bject 
 me 
 
 
 
 4 20 28. 
 
 8 14 35 
 
 ?ter . . . 
 jf Local M. T. 
 
 . 10 38 36.9 
 
 jter . . . 
 >f Local M. T. 
 
 - 2 32 45.6 
 
 . 6 18 8.9 
 
 . 6 18 10.6 
 
 is were made after noon. 
 
 is were made before noon. 
 
72 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 SCHEDULE A Continued. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 27. 
 
 SUN .... Jri.V 2K. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., Stc. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc = u'. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 OH' Are (A 
 
 i u 
 29 15 
 30 
 20 
 
 O ' '/ 
 
 4 26 
 5 
 
 
 
 1 II 
 
 29 20 
 30 
 30 
 
 ' a 
 
 4 26 10 
 
 111 
 
 
 + 2 18.3 
 + 13.7 
 
 
 + 2 13.3 
 + 11.3 
 
 
 + 2 32. 
 
 + 2 24. 6 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 B 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 [nili-x (,'OIT., &e. 
 
 a 
 Refraction 
 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 O i .11 
 
 74 45 
 75 
 15 
 74 45 
 
 75 (1 
 15 II 
 
 A. m. a. 
 2 36 43. 8 
 37 25.0 
 38 5.9 
 39 34.5 
 40 14.5 
 40 55. 
 
 o / a 
 64 30 
 45 
 65 
 64 30 (I 
 45 
 ()., (I 
 
 h. m. . 
 2 9 58. 
 10 37.0 
 11 17.8 
 12 46.2 
 13 2<i. 2 
 14 6. 3 
 
 75 0.0 
 + . 2 32.0 
 
 2 38 49.8 
 
 64 45 0.0 
 + 2 24. 6 
 
 2 12 1.9 
 
 o 
 Ther. 74. 
 
 in. 
 
 Bar. 29. 53 
 
 U / // 
 
 = 70 51 22. 1 
 
 A. m. s. 
 . S 14 26. 8 
 
 + 6 12. 2 
 
 Ther. HI. 
 
 in. 
 liar. 29. 58 
 
 ' II 
 
 = 71 4 57.4- 
 
 /(. Ml. 8. 
 
 . 7 47 38.4 
 . + 6 11.2 
 
 75 2 32. 
 1 11.6 
 + 6.7 
 
 64 47 24. 6 
 1 28.2 
 + 7.1 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time l>y Clironnm 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 These observatio 
 
 object 
 me ... 
 
 Polar dislanre uf 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Chronom 
 
 Chronometer fait 
 These obsenalin 
 
 object . . 
 me 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 20 39 
 
 . 7 53 49.6 
 
 eter . . . 
 of Local M. T. 
 
 . 2 38 49. 8 
 
 eter . 
 of Local M.T. 
 
 . 2 12 1.9 
 
 . 6 18 10.8 
 
 . 6 18 12.3 
 
 us were made before noon. 
 
 MS were made before noon. . 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 73 
 
 .SCHEDULE A Continued. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 28. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 28. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Con\, &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc = u'. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &e. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc = o,'. 
 
 / // 
 29 10 
 10 
 10 
 
 o / // 
 4 25 50 
 26 
 25 40 
 
 / // 
 
 o / // 
 
 + 2 ::n. 
 4- 11.3 
 
 
 + 2 30. t' 
 
 + 10. 7 
 
 
 + 241.3 
 
 + 2 40.7 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 U 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 Q 
 
 liVfi action 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 O 1 II 
 
 65 
 64 45 
 30 
 65 
 64 45 (I 
 30 
 
 /I. lit. 8. 
 
 10 34 21.2 
 35 2.2 
 35 42.3 
 37 9.2 
 37 49. 5 
 38 30. 1 
 
 Q 1 II 
 
 62 
 61 45 
 30 
 62 
 61 45 
 30 
 
 A. m. 8. 
 10 42 24. 5 
 ' 43 4.5 
 43 44. 
 45 11.0 
 45 52. 
 46 32. 3 
 
 64 45 0.0 
 + 2 41.3 
 
 lit :i; -j:>. >' 
 
 61 45 0.0 
 + 2 40.7 
 
 10 44 28.0 
 
 O ' // 
 
 = 719 52. 6 
 
 /i. m. s. 
 . 4 12 4.4 
 
 . + 6 10. 7 
 
 
 
 Ther. 74. 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29; 57 
 
 = 71 9 57.2 
 
 /I. 111. X. 
 
 . 4 20 6.4 
 . + 6 10.7 
 
 64 47 41. 3 
 1 26.5 
 
 + 7.1 
 
 61 47 40.7 
 1 31.7 
 
 + 7.2 
 
 Polar distance of < 
 
 Local Apparent Ti 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Clironom 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 These ohservatioi 
 
 ibjcct - - 
 me ... 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent Ti 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Clironom 
 
 Chronometer fast ( 
 These observatim 
 
 ibjeet 
 me 
 
 ;tcT . 
 )f Local M. T. 
 
 
 
 
 - 4 18 15. 1 
 . 10 36 25. 8 
 
 4 26 17. 1 
 
 iter . . . 
 )f Local M. T. 
 
 . 10 44 28.0 
 
 . 6 18 10.7 
 
 . 6 18 10.9 
 
 is were made after noon. 
 
 is were made after noon. 
 
 10* 
 
74 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 SCHEDULE A Continued. 
 
 SUN JULY 29. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 29. 
 
 Index Con - . 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = a. 
 
 Off Arc = <A 
 
 Index Corr., 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 Ou Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc = o>. 
 
 i a 
 29 10 
 15 
 10 
 
 Q I II 
 
 4 26 
 25 50 
 55 
 
 i n 
 
 ' " 
 
 + 2 26. 6 
 + 10.9 
 
 
 + 2 26. 6 
 + 10.9 
 
 
 + 2 37.5 
 
 4- 2 37. 5 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 Q 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 a 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Q 1 II 
 
 63 15 
 .30 
 45 
 63 15 
 30 
 45 
 
 ft. m. H. 
 2 7 23. 
 8 2.5 
 8 40.6 
 10 11.0 
 10 50. 4 
 11 30. 
 
 O / /' 
 
 63 45 
 
 30 
 15 
 03 45 
 30 
 15 
 
 h. in. 8. 
 10 36 55. 8 
 37 34.8 
 38 15.0 
 39 43. 
 40 23. 
 41 3.8 
 
 63 30 0.0 
 + 2 37.5 
 
 2 9 26.2 
 
 f,:i 30 0.0 
 + 2 37/5 
 
 10 38 59. 2 
 
 o 
 Ther. 65. 5 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29.70 
 
 O i ii 
 
 = 71 19 5. 3 
 
 ll. M. 8. 
 
 . 7 45 4.3 
 - + 6 9.5 
 
 O ' ft 
 
 71 24 10. 1 
 
 7l. TO. 8. 
 
 . 4 14 38.5 
 
 4- 6 8. 9 
 
 63 32 37.5 
 1 29.8 
 + 7.2 
 
 <>:: :w 37.5 
 1 28.3 
 
 + 7.2 
 
 * 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Chronon 
 
 Chronometer fust 
 These observatio 
 
 object . . 
 me . . . 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Ki|ii:ilion of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time l>,y ('hronom 
 
 Chronometer last 
 These observatio 
 
 iibjcct 
 me 
 
 
 
 7 51 13 8 
 
 4 20 47.4 
 
 eter . . . 
 of Local M. T. 
 
 . 2 9 26.2 
 
 eter . . 10 38 59.2 
 
 of Local M. T. 
 
 
 . 6 18 12.4 
 
 . 6 18 11.8 
 
 ns were made before noon. 
 
 us were made after noon. 
 
OBSERVATION'S OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 75 
 
 SCHEDULE A Continued. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 29. 
 
 SUN JULY 30. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Oil' Arc = u l . 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 ".Off Arc = 6i l . 
 
 HMM 
 
 i it 
 29 5 
 10 
 15 
 
 Of" 
 
 4 25 50 
 26 
 
 
 i n 
 
 O t ft 
 
 + 2 26. 6 
 + 10.5 
 
 
 + 2 24.2 
 + 13.8 
 
 
 + 2 37. 1 
 
 + 2 38. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 il 
 Befractiou 
 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 Q 
 Refraction 
 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 O ' " 
 
 61 45 
 30 
 15 
 61 45 
 30 
 15 
 
 h. m. s. 
 10 42 16.5 
 42 57. 
 43 37. 
 45 3.0 
 45 44. 
 46 24.2 
 
 o ' " 
 75 45 
 76 
 75 30 
 75 45 
 
 A. m. 8. 
 2 41 46.5 
 42 25. 
 43 56.5 
 44 37.2 
 
 61 30 0.0 
 
 + 2 37. 1 
 
 10 44 20. 3 
 
 75 45 0. 
 + 2 38. 
 
 2 43 11.3 
 
 c 
 Th.-i-. 7 !. O 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29. 63 
 
 o / ' 
 = 71 24 13. 3 
 
 h. m. n. 
 . 4 19 59. 8 
 
 4- 6 8.9 
 
 / /.' 
 
 = 71 33 53. 9 
 
 h. m. s. 
 8 18 52. 1 
 
 . + 6 7.2 
 
 61 32 37. 1 
 1 32.0 
 + 7.2 
 
 75 17 38.0 
 1 10.9 
 4- 6.7 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Chronom 
 
 Chrouiimeler last 
 These obscrvatio 
 
 object 
 me 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Clirononi 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 These observatio 
 
 object . . 
 me ... 
 
 
 
 4 26 8.7 
 
 . 8 24 59. 3 
 
 eter . 
 of Local M. T. 
 
 . 10 44 20. 3 
 
 eter . 
 of Local M. T. 
 
 . 2 43 11.3 
 
 . 6 18 11.6 
 
 . 6 18 12.0 
 
 ns were made after noon. 
 
 is were made before noon. 
 
76 
 
 REPORT OF PKOFESSOR HAEKNESS. 
 
 SCHEDULE A Continued. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 30. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 30. 
 
 Index t'orr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off An- = (A 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc = w'. 
 
 / // 
 29 20 
 20 
 20 
 
 C ' " 
 
 4 25 50 
 55 
 50 
 
 i a 
 29 10 
 20 
 15 
 
 Q 1 It 
 
 4 2<i 10 
 1(1 
 5 
 
 + 2 24. 2 
 + 14.4 
 
 
 + 2 18.4 
 + 10.6 
 
 
 4- 2 38.6 
 
 + 2 29.0 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &e. 
 
 H 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 a 
 Befraction 
 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Q t II 
 
 77 45 
 78 
 15 
 77 45 
 78 
 15 
 
 It. m. a. 
 2 47 11.5 
 47 51.8 
 48 33.6 
 50 3.0 
 50 44. 9 
 51 25.0 
 
 O ' " 
 
 62 
 (il 45 
 30 
 62 
 61 45 
 30 
 
 II. III. 8. 
 
 10 40 46.5 
 41 27.0 
 42 6.9 
 43 35. 
 44 15.0 
 44 55.5 
 
 78 0.0 
 + 2 38. 6 
 
 2 49 18.3 
 
 61 45 0.0 
 + 2 29.0 
 
 10 42 51. 
 
 c 
 Ther. 71. 
 
 i. 
 Bar. 29. 69 
 
 ' II 
 
 = 71 33 57. 6 
 
 h. m. s. 
 . 8 24 58. 6 
 
 -f 6 7.2 
 
 O 1 II 
 
 71 38 46.7 
 
 Jl. }ll. 8. 
 
 . 4 18 32. 
 . + 6 6. 4 
 
 78 2 38. 6 
 1 8.2 
 + 6.6 
 
 61 47 29. 
 
 1 30.8 
 + 7.2 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Thin 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Clirouon 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 These observatii 
 
 object 
 ime . . . 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Chronoir 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 These nhservatii 
 
 object . . 
 ime . . . 
 
 eter . . . 
 of Local M. T. 
 
 
 eter . 
 of Local M. T. 
 
 
 . 8 31 5. 8 
 . 2 49 18. 3 
 
 . 4 24 38.4 
 . 10 42 51. 
 
 . 6 18 12.5 
 
 . 6 18 12.6 
 
 us were made before noon. 
 
 us were made after noon. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 77 
 
 SCHEDULE A Continued. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 30. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 31. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc = cA 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc = u'. 
 
 / // 
 29 10 
 30 
 35 
 
 ' " 
 
 4 26 5 
 5 
 15 
 
 / // 
 29 10 
 15 
 25 
 
 O ' '/ 
 
 4 26 
 
 10 
 
 + 2 13.4 
 + 10.1 
 
 
 
 + 2 20.0 
 + 13.7 
 
 
 + 2 23. 5 
 
 + 2 33. 7 
 
 Mem 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 U 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &e. 
 
 a 
 
 Refraction 
 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 O I II 
 
 60 
 59 45 
 30 
 CO 
 59 45 
 30 
 
 It. III. S. 
 
 10 46 7. 5 
 46 48.2 
 47 28.0 
 48 55. 
 4!) 36.5 
 50 15.3 
 
 O / '/ 
 
 75 
 . 15 
 30 
 75 
 15 
 30 
 
 /I. III. S. 
 
 2 40 33. 5 
 41 14.0 
 41 54.5 
 43 23. 5 
 44 4.3 
 44 44.5 
 
 59 45 0.0 
 
 + 2 23. 5 
 
 10 48 11. 8 
 
 75 15 0. 
 + 2 33.7 
 
 2 42 39. 
 
 o 
 Ther. 79. 
 
 i. 
 Bar. 29. 61 
 
 o / // 
 = 71 38 -19.7 
 
 /I. III. 8. 
 
 4 23 53. 5 
 
 + 664 
 
 o / // 
 = 71 48 39.9 
 
 h. m. a. 
 . 8 18 20. 8 
 
 . + 6 4.4 
 
 59 47 23. 5 
 1 34.5 
 + 7.3 
 
 75 17 33.7 
 1 10.4 
 
 + 6.8 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Cbronom 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 These olisurvutiu 
 
 object . . 
 me . . . 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Chronom 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 These observatio 
 
 object . . 
 me 
 
 
 
 4 29 59.9 
 
 8 24 25 2 
 
 eter . . . 
 of Local M. T. 
 
 . 10 48 11.8 
 
 eter . . . 
 of Local M. T. 
 
 . 2 42 39.0 
 
 - 6 18 11.9 
 
 . 6 18 13.8 
 
 is were made after noon. 
 
 IN were made before noon. 
 
78 
 
 EEPOKT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 SCHEDULE A Continued. 
 
 SUN . . . . JULY 31. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 31. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Are==u. 
 
 Off Arc = <j 1 . 
 
 Index Corr. 
 t 
 E 
 
 Index Con-., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc = cj'. 
 
 / // 
 
 o / a 
 
 / // 
 29 20 
 30 
 35 
 
 O / " 
 
 4 26 10 
 15 
 10 
 
 + 2 20.0 
 + 14.4 
 
 
 + 2 12.0 
 + 10.5 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 + 2 34.4 
 
 + 2 22.5 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 n 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 a 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Q 1 II 
 
 78*30 
 45 
 79 
 78 30 
 45 
 79 
 
 7l. Ml. 8. 
 
 2 50 3. 
 50 44.5 
 51 26. 
 52 54. 5 
 53 36. 
 54 17.2 
 
 o / /' 
 62 
 61 45 
 30 
 62 
 61 45 
 30 
 
 li. m. s. 
 10 39 55. 2 
 40 35. 3 
 41 15.5 
 42 44.2 
 43 24. 5 
 44 3.2 
 
 78 45 0. 
 + 2 34. 4 
 
 2 52 10. 2 
 
 61 45 0.0 
 + 2 22.5 
 
 10 41 59.6 
 
 o 
 Ther. 72.5 
 
 iii. 
 Bar. 29. 68 
 
 ' " 
 
 = 71 48 45. 9 
 
 7l. III. 8. 
 
 . 82751.9 
 . + 6 4.4 
 
 O f ft 
 
 = 71 53 38. 7 
 
 /(. III. S. 
 
 . 4 17 42.9 
 + <> 3 4 
 
 78 47 34. 4 
 1 6.1 
 + 6.6 
 
 61 47 22. r, 
 1 28.8 
 + 7.3 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Chronoui 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 These obaervatio 
 
 object 
 line . . . 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Clironom 
 
 Chronometer last 
 These obsenalio 
 
 object . . 
 me 
 
 eter . 
 if Local M. T. 
 
 
 8 33 56 3 
 
 . 4 23 46.3 
 
 . 10 41 59.6 
 
 eter - 
 of Local M. T. 
 
 . 2 52 10.2 
 
 . 6 18 13.9 
 
 . 6 18 13.3 
 
 us were made before noon. 
 
 is were made after noon. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OP AUGUST 7, I8G9. 
 
 79 
 
 SCHEDULE A Continued. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 31. 
 
 SUN .... AUGUST 4. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 
 E 
 
 Index Con-., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc = u 1 . 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc = o>. 
 
 i u 
 
 ' II 
 
 i n 
 29 20 
 30 
 30 
 
 O / ii 
 
 4 26 10 
 15 
 10 
 
 + 2 12.0 
 + 10.0 
 
 
 + '.> 10.8 
 + 13. 
 
 
 + 2 22. 
 
 + 2 23. 8 
 
 Menus 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 11 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Q 1 II 
 
 59 15 
 
 59 
 58 45 
 59 15 
 59 
 58 45 
 
 li. m, n. 
 10 47 18. 
 47 57. 
 48 37.8 
 50 5.5 
 50 46. 
 51 25.8 
 
 O ' II 
 
 72 
 15 
 30 
 72 
 15 
 30 
 
 h. m. s. 
 2 35 41. b 
 36 22.3 
 37 2.1 
 38 32. 1 
 39 12.7 
 39 53. 1 
 
 59 0. 
 + 2 22. 
 
 10 49 21.7 
 
 72 15 0.0 
 + 2 23. 8 
 
 2 37 47. 3 
 
 o 
 Ther. 81. 5 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29. 60 
 
 i II 
 
 = 71 53 43. 2 
 
 ft. Mi. 8. 
 
 . 4 25 4.7 
 - + 6 3.4 
 
 o 
 Ther. 80.5 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29. 47 
 
 c / /' 
 = 72 50 38. 8 
 
 h. m. s. 
 . 8 13 44. 8 
 
 - + 5 47.4 
 
 59 2 22. 
 1 33.8 
 + 7.4 
 
 72 17 23.8 
 1 12.6 
 
 + 6.9 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparrnl T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Chronom 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 These obstT\ al in 
 
 abject 
 me 
 
 Polar distance of < 
 
 Local Apparent Ti 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Chrouom 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 These observatioi 
 
 )bjeet 
 me 
 
 4 31 81 
 
 8 19 32 2 
 
 eter . . . 
 )f Local M. T. 
 
 . 104921.7 
 
 ter . . . 
 if Local M. T. 
 
 . 2 37 47. 3 
 
 . 6 18 13.6 
 
 . 6 18 15. 1 
 
 is were made after noon. 
 
 is were made before noon. 
 
80 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR IIARKNESS. 
 
 SCHEDULE A Continued. 
 
 SUN .... AUGUST 4. 
 
 SUN .... AUGUST 7. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc = t>. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc = u'. 
 
 i n 
 29 20 
 25 
 30 
 
 O ' 'I 
 
 4 26 5 
 25 55 
 26 5 
 
 i n 
 29 45 
 40 
 50 
 
 O 1 II 
 
 4 26 15 
 20 
 10 
 
 + 2 16.6 
 + 10.4 
 
 
 + 2 0.0 
 + 12.5 
 
 
 + 2 27.0 
 
 + 2 12.5 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 Q 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &.c. 
 
 Q 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 o / " 
 61 
 60 45 
 30 
 61 
 60 45 
 30 
 
 h. m. s. 
 10 38 52. 
 39 32. 5 
 40 12.8 
 41 40.5 
 42 21.2 
 43 1.0 
 
 O 1 II 
 
 70 15 
 30 
 45 
 70 15 
 30 
 45 
 
 h. m. s. 
 2 33 28. 8 
 34 10.5 
 34 50.5 
 36 20. 3 
 37 1.4 
 37 42.0 
 
 60 45 0.0 
 + 2 27.0 
 
 10 40 56.7 
 
 70 30 0.0 
 + 2 12.5 
 
 2 35 35.6 
 
 o 
 Ther. 89. 5 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29. 39 
 
 o / " 
 = 73 40 5. 4 
 
 /i. in. *. 
 . 8 11 50.0 
 
 + 5 28.4 
 
 60 47 27.0 
 
 1 28.4 
 + 7.3 
 
 70 32 12. 5 
 1 18.5 
 
 + 6.8 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Chronom 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 These observatio 
 
 o / " 
 abject . . = 72 56 3. 5 
 
 A. m. s. 
 ime - - - - 4 10 5, r .. 6 
 j- r, 4r, 4 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Chronom 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 These observatio 
 
 object 
 me . . - 
 
 - - - - 
 
 eter - . . 
 
 of Local M. T. 
 
 
 
 4 22 41. 
 . 10 40 56.7 
 
 8 17 18.4 
 
 eter . . . 
 of Local M. T. 
 
 . 2 35 35. 6 
 
 . 6 18 15.7 
 
 . 6 18 17.2 
 
 ns were made after noon. 
 
 as were made before noon. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 81 
 
 SCHEDULE A Continued. 
 
 SUN * . . . . AUGUST 7. 
 
 SUN . - - - AUGUST 7. 
 
 Index Corv. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = a. 
 
 Off Arc = iA 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc = <A 
 
 / n 
 
 o / " 
 
 / // 
 29 30 
 25 
 25 
 
 o ' // 
 4 26 5 
 
 5 
 
 + 2 0.0 
 + IS. 6 
 
 
 + 2 15.0 
 + 16.1 
 
 
 + 2 13.6 
 
 + 2 31. 1 
 
 Meana 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 It 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 Q 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 o / // 
 74 (1 
 15 
 30 
 74 
 15 
 30 
 
 /I. l. 8. 
 
 2 43 42.2 
 44 23.2 
 4.') 4.4 
 46 34.5 
 47 15.4 
 47 56.7 
 
 O ' " 
 
 85 
 84 45 
 3(1 (1 
 85 
 84 45 
 30 
 
 /I. III. H. 
 
 9 30 8. 5 
 30 51. 5 
 31 33.6 
 33 5. 
 33 47. 1 
 34 29.4 
 
 M 15 0.0 
 + 2 13.6 
 
 2 45 49. 4 
 
 84 45 0.0 
 + 2 31. 1 
 
 9 32 19.2 
 
 o 
 Ther. 62. 5 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29. 82 
 
 / /; 
 
 = 73 40 12. 6 
 
 I/, in. . 
 . 8 22 3. 1 
 
 + 5 28 4 
 
 O ' '/ 
 
 = 73 44 59.4 
 
 /I. 111. S. 
 
 3 8 36.0 
 _j_ 5 "fi 2 
 
 74 17 13.6 
 1 13.3 
 
 + 6. 8 
 
 84 47 31. 1 
 
 59. 5 
 + 6.3 
 
 i'nlar distance of ( 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Chrouoin 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 
 
 . 
 
 The.se observatio 
 
 llljeet 
 
 me 
 
 Polar disfaiiec ul' 
 
 Local Apparent Ti 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Clironom 
 
 Chronometer last 
 These observatioi 
 
 >hject 
 me 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 27 31 5 
 
 3 14 22 
 
 eter . . . 
 of Local M. T. 
 
 . 2 45 49. 4 
 
 
 itcr . 
 
 if Local M. T. 
 
 . 9 32 19.2 
 
 . 18 17.9 
 
 . 6 18 17.0 
 
 is were made before noon. 
 
 is were made after noon. 
 
 11* 
 
82 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 SCHEDULE A Continued. 
 
 SUN ' . . AUGUST 7. 
 
 SUN .... AUGUST 8. 
 
 Index Covr. 
 E 
 
 Index ('CUT., &<. 
 
 On Are = u. Off Arc = w 1 . 
 
 (Mi Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc=<A 
 
 i 
 / // c i a 
 
 / // 
 ) :in 
 :, 
 
 ; 
 
 Q 1 II 
 
 \ 26 5 
 
 to 
 
 10 
 
 + 2 15.0 
 + 15.4 
 
 Index Corr. + 2 10. 8 
 E + 17. 8 
 
 
 f 2 30.4 
 
 Index Ci.n-.. Ac. + 2 28.6 
 
 Means 
 Index Con 1 ., &c. 
 
 Q 
 
 Refraetion 
 Parallax 
 
 2 Altitude. Chronometer. 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 A. m. s. 
 82 (I (I 9 38 32. 8 
 
 PI 45 (i 39 14. r. 
 
 30 (1 39 50. 5 
 82 41 28.0 
 PI 45 42 8.8 
 :!0 42 50.7 
 
 / " 
 
 91 30 
 45 
 92 
 91 30 
 45 
 92 
 
 A. HI. S. 
 
 :: 33 33. 
 34 16.5 
 35 0.5 
 36 36. 5 
 37 20.0 
 38 4.2 
 
 81 15 0.0 9 40 41.9 
 
 Means 111 45 0.0 
 Index Corr., &c. + 2 28. 6 
 
 3 35 1-. 1 
 
 + 2 30. 4 
 
 o 
 Ther. 69.5 
 
 i. 
 Bar. 29.75 
 
 ' " 
 
 - 73 57 50. :: 
 
 A. . K. 
 
 9 12 10.9 
 + 5 20. 6 
 
 81 47 30.4 Ther. 74. 
 
 1 9 ' 7 - 
 + C>.4 Bar. 29.76 
 
 U 91 47 28.6 
 Refraction 53. 
 Parallax + 5. 9 
 
 Polar distance of 
 
 Local Apparent T 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time 
 Time by Clironom 
 
 Chronometer fast 
 These oliservatio 
 
 o / /' 
 object - 73 45 5.3 
 
 A. ?. s. 
 me 3 16 58 7 
 
 Polar distance of object 
 
 Local Apparent Time 
 
 '. + 5 26.2 
 
 Local Mean Time .... 
 
 Time liy Chronometer . 
 
 Chronometer fast of Local M. 1> 
 
 
 3 22 24 9 
 
 9 17 31.5 
 3 35 48. 4 
 
 eter . . 9 40 41.9 
 
 of Loenl M.T. . C. 18 17.0 
 
 . 6 18 16.9 
 
 us were made after noon. 
 
 These observations were made before noon. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, JSG'J. 
 SCHEDULE A Continued. 
 
 SUN 
 
 AUGUST 8. 
 
 On Arc = u. Oft' Arc 
 
 29 25 
 30 
 30 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 
 2 15.0 
 11.4 
 
 Index Con-., &c. !+ 2 26. 4 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Means 
 
 Index Con'., &c. 
 
 > 
 
 IvYIVactioll 
 Parallax 
 
 65 45 
 
 30 
 
 15 
 
 65 45 
 
 30 
 
 15 
 
 65 30 0. 
 + 2 26. 4 
 
 65 32 26. 4 
 1 23.0 
 
 + ' 7.2 
 
 4 26 
 5 
 
 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 It. lit. 8. 
 
 10 21 93.3 
 
 22 33. 2 
 
 23 M.5 
 
 24 43.3 
 
 25 23. 5 
 
 26 3.5 
 
 10 23 58. 6 
 
 Thcr. 7(1. 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 2'J. 64 
 
 1'oliir distance of object 
 
 Local Apparent Time 
 
 Equation of Time 
 
 Local Mean Time . . 
 Time by Chronometer 
 
 = 74 2 42.0 
 
 h. in. y. 
 . 4 23. 1 
 
 . + 5 18.3 
 
 4 5 41.4 
 
 10 23 58. 6 
 
 Chronometer fast of Local 31. T. . 6 18 17. 2 
 
 These observations were mudo after noon. 
 
 83 
 
84 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 SCHEDULE 13. 
 
 Observations for Latitude, made at the temporary United States Naval Observatory at Des Moines, 
 Jozra, by Prof. Wm. Harkn8S, U. S. N., icith the /Sextant Mclq>ole. A- Bro. No. 0,'!7. 
 Artificial Horizon Ha. 1, and Chronometer T. >S'. & J. I). Negus No. 
 
 [NOTE. Tlic barometer employed was an aneroid belonging to Professor J. E. Eastman, and O.MS of an inch must 
 be subtracted from all its recorded readings in order tn free them from constant errors.] 
 
 SUN . . JULY 23, 1869. 
 
 SUN . . ' JULY 23, 1869. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 Index Con-., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off Are =u'. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = a. 
 
 Off Arc = o'. 
 
 i n 
 28 30 
 30 
 20 
 
 O / " 
 
 4 26 20 
 10 
 
 
 i tf 
 
 / /' 
 
 + 2 41.6 
 + 29.6 
 
 
 -f 241.6 
 + 29.8 
 
 
 + 3 11.2 
 
 + 3 11.4 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 H 
 
 f 
 
 Refraction 
 
 Parallax 
 Am 
 Bn c 
 
 ft' 
 
 9 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 S2 
 
 ? 
 Refraction 
 
 Parallax 
 Am 
 Bn 
 
 6 
 
 <t> 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 O ' " 
 
 136 15 30 
 
 2(1 30 
 24 40 
 135 27 20 
 31 40 
 35 40 
 
 7(. JH. 8. 
 
 6 2 7.0 
 3 10.8 
 3 55. 3 
 4 58.5 
 5 58.2 
 6 56.8 
 
 ' " 
 
 135 58 10 
 136 30 
 2 
 U!7 7 
 9 
 10 50 
 
 A. in. . 
 (i 13 20. 8 
 14 14.2 
 14 45.0 
 15 57. 5 
 16 59. 3 
 17 59.0 
 
 135 55 53. 3 
 + 3 11.2 
 
 6 4 31. 1 
 
 136 34 35. 
 + 3 11.4 
 
 6 r5 32. 6 
 
 o 
 Thcr. 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 
 
 7i. HI. s. 
 = 12 6 10. 9 
 
 (i 1H 8.0 
 
 o 
 Ther. 86. 5 
 
 /I. Ml 8. 
 
 = 12 6 10. 9 ' 
 
 = 6 18 8.0 
 
 135 59 4. 5 
 
 136 37 46. 4 
 
 22 27. 8 
 -f- 21. 7 
 3.2 
 24 38.4 
 
 + 13.8 
 
 21 41 6.6 
 + 21. 4 
 3.1 
 
 -i 58. :: 
 
 21 3fi *J. 
 + 19 59 3. 
 
 21 36 27. 
 
 -f 19 58 57. 
 
 H ;;r, ,'.-. 
 
 41 35 24. 
 
 Time of Culmination . . - 
 Chronometer fast .... 
 
 Chron. Time of Culmination . 
 
 Time of Culmination . . . 
 Chronometer fast .... 
 
 Chron. Time of Culmination 
 
 = 6 24 18. 9 
 
 = (i 24 18. 9 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 85 
 
 SCHEDULE B Continued. 
 
 SUN JULY 24. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 25. 
 
 Index Con. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = a. 
 
 Off Arc = u'. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = a. 
 
 Off Arc = u>. 
 
 i a 
 29 5 
 10 
 10 
 
 / II 
 
 1 26 
 
 20 
 10 
 
 t i/ 
 29 25 
 30 
 30 
 
 Q 1 it 
 
 \ 20 10 
 25 55 
 50 
 
 + 2 20. 8 
 + 29.7 
 
 
 + 2 16.7 
 + 29.6 
 
 
 + 2 50. 5 
 
 + 2 46. 3 
 
 Mean.-. 
 Index Corr., Ac. 
 
 a 
 
 i 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 Am 
 Bn 
 
 i 
 * 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 Refraction 
 
 Parallax 
 Am Q 
 Bn 
 
 i 
 9 
 
 2 Altitude 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 ' " 
 
 136 17 45 
 20 10 
 22 20 
 135 23 10 
 25 10 
 29 30 
 
 7l. 111. X: 
 
 6 7 51.5 
 
 8 32. 
 9 9. 5 
 
 10 11.:; 
 10 55. 3 
 12 7.0 
 
 Q i II 
 
 136 14 40 
 
 23 10 
 23 30 
 135 21 
 21 40 
 21 10 
 
 h. m. s. 
 6 15 16.2 
 19 5. 1 
 21 3. 5 
 22 10.6 
 23 11.5 
 20 43. 5 
 
 135 53 0.8 
 + 2 50. 5 
 
 6 9 47. H 
 
 135 50 51.7 
 -f 2 46. 3 
 
 6 21 15. 1 
 
 
 
 Ther. 86. 
 
 /(. HI. H. 
 
 12 6 12.0 
 = 6 18 8.5 
 
 o 
 Ther. 71. 5 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29. 48 
 
 h. m. s. 
 = 12 6 12.6 
 
 = 6 18 8.9 
 
 135 55 51. 3 
 
 i::r, :,:; ::..o 
 
 22 2 4.4 
 
 + 21.7 
 3.2 
 13 14.5 
 + 4.0 
 
 22 3 11.0 
 + 22.4 
 3.2 
 1 21.9 
 
 21 49 12. 
 + 19 46 24. 
 
 22 2 8. 
 + 19 33 21. 
 
 41 35 36. 
 
 41 35 29. 
 
 Time of Culmination 
 Chronometer last .... 
 
 Chron. Time of Culmination - 
 
 Time of Culmination 
 Chronometer fast .... 
 
 Chron. Time of Culmination . 
 
 = 6 24 20. 5 
 
 = 6 24 21.5 
 
86 
 
 REPORT OF PROFExSSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 SCHEDULE B Continued. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 26. 
 
 SUN . . . JULY 27. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc = u'. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 (Ill Arc = u'. 
 
 29 15 
 
 28 55 
 50 
 
 O / If 
 
 4 26 10 
 40 
 10 
 
 / n 
 29 10 
 25 
 25 
 
 O ' " 
 
 4 26 
 26 
 25 50 
 
 + 2 20. 
 + 29.5 
 
 
 + 2 21. 6 
 + 29. 4 
 
 
 4- 2 49. 5 
 
 4- 2 51. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 Q 
 
 f 
 Refraction 
 
 Parallax 
 Am-, ' 
 
 f, 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 .Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 a 
 
 Refraction 
 
 I'arallax 
 
 <5 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 ' II 
 
 135 36 50 
 
 57 50 
 57 45 
 134 55 
 55 20 
 54 40 
 
 /i. m. s. 
 6 21 8. 5 
 22 2.8 
 22 40. 7 
 23 39.2 
 24 13.8 
 24 41.5 
 
 o ' " 
 134 25 10 
 23 50 
 22 40 
 135 24 40 
 24 
 22 40 
 
 //. HI. S. 
 
 6 29 27. 5 
 
 :;o 9.7 
 
 30 48.7 
 31 34.5 
 32 I'.'.'.i 
 : 52.2 
 
 135 26 14. 2 
 4- 2 49.5 
 
 6 23 4. 4 
 
 134 53 50. 
 + 251.0 
 
 6 31 12. 
 
 
 
 Ther. 79.0 
 
 I'M. 
 Bar. 29. 51 
 
 /I. Ml. 8. 
 
 = 12 6 12.6 
 
 = 6 18 9.4 
 
 
 
 Ther. 80.3 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29. 46 
 
 /I. Ml. S. 
 
 = 12 6 12.1 
 
 = 6 18 10. 4 
 
 135 29 3.7 
 
 134 5<; IK" 
 
 22 15 28. 2 
 4- 22.4 
 3.2 
 11.7 
 
 22 31 39. 5 
 4- 22.5 
 3. 2 
 
 2 54. 8 
 
 22 15 36. 
 
 4- 19 20 4. 
 
 22 29 4. 
 4-19 6 25. 
 
 41 35 40. 
 
 41 35 29. 
 
 Time of Culmination . . . 
 Chronometer fast - - - 
 
 Chrou. Time of Culmination 
 
 Time of Culmination . . . 
 Chronometer fast . - - - 
 
 Chron. Time of Culmination . 
 
 = 6 24 22. 
 
 = 6 24 22. 5 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 18C9. 
 
 87 
 
 SCHEDULE B Continued. 
 
 SUN . . . . JULY 28. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 28. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Hnr. 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = o 
 
 Off Are = u l 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u 
 
 Off Are = u 1 
 
 / // 
 28 50 
 20 
 29 
 
 o / // 
 4 25 50 
 26 10 
 26 10 
 
 i n 
 
 O ' " 
 
 + 2 30.0 
 + 29.3 
 0.3 
 
 
 -f 2 30. 
 + 29.3 
 
 + 0.3 
 
 
 + 2 59. 
 
 + 2 59. 6 
 
 Means 
 
 Index COIT., &.c. 
 
 a 
 
 f 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 .tnl 
 
 Iin 
 
 6 
 * 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 a 
 
 f 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 Am s 
 B*o 
 
 f 
 
 $ 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 / II 
 
 135 o no 
 2 r, 
 
 2 25 
 133 59 50 
 59 30 
 59 40 
 
 It. HI. s. 
 6 20 11. 
 21 7.5 
 21 50.0 
 22 40. 
 23 13.0 
 23 42.5 
 
 o / '/ 
 133 59 30 
 134 
 133 59 40 
 135 2 35 
 1 30 
 1 20 
 
 It. in. s. 
 C, 25 8. 
 25 43.2 
 26 15.8 
 26 59.5 
 27 50. 5 
 28 29. 2 
 
 134 :J 43.3 
 + . 2 59. 
 
 6 22 7.3 
 
 134 30 45. 8 
 + 2 59. 6 
 
 6 26 44. 4 
 
 /I. lit. S. 
 
 = 12 6 10.9 
 = 6 18 11.5 
 
 o 
 Ther. 71. 
 in. 
 Bar. 29. 59 
 
 /i. HI. . 
 = 12 6 10.9 
 
 = 6 18 11.5 
 
 134 33 42. 3 
 
 134 33 45.4 
 
 22 43 8.8 
 + 23.1 
 3.2 
 23.1 
 
 22 43 7. 3 
 + 23.1 
 3.2 
 25.5 
 
 22 43 6. 
 
 + 18 52 36; 
 
 22 43 2. 
 
 + 18 52 33. 
 
 41 35 42. 
 
 41 35 35. 
 
 Time of Culmination . . . 
 Chronometer Cast .... 
 
 Chrnn. Time of Culmination . 
 
 Time of Culmination . . . 
 Chronometer fast .... 
 
 Cliron. Time of Culmination . 
 
 = 6 24 22. 4 
 
 = 6 24 22. 4 
 
REPORT OP PROFESSOR IIARKNESS. 
 
 SCHEDULE B. Continued. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 29. 
 
 SUN . . . . JULY 29. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art, Hor. 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = u. 
 
 Off Arc = u'. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Are = o. 
 
 Off Arc = o'. 
 
 i a 
 
 Ct t 11 
 
 -/ // 
 28 40 
 50 
 40 
 
 Q i it 
 
 4 25 50 
 26 
 20 
 
 + 2 40.0 
 + 29.1 
 + 0.3 
 
 
 + 2 40. 
 + 29.1 
 (1.3 
 
 
 + 3 9.4 
 
 + 3 8.8 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 Am 
 Bn 
 
 f, 
 
 fi 
 
 <i> 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 a 
 
 f 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 Am 
 B 
 
 6 
 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 o / // 
 134 34 10 
 34 35 
 34 30 
 133 31 30 
 31 25 
 31 20 
 
 /i. m. s. 
 22 12. 1 
 22 56.7 
 23 30.6 
 24 17.0 
 24 49.2 
 25 19.5 
 
 O in 
 
 l:i:i 31 10 
 :ui n 
 29 50 
 134 32 20 
 31 40 
 31 
 
 //. HI. S. 
 
 26 46. 
 27 35.0 
 27 59.0 
 28 44.0 
 29 24. 
 29 54. 6 
 
 Kit 2 55.0 
 + ' 3 9.4 
 
 6 23 50. 8 
 
 134 1 0. 
 
 + 3 8.8 
 
 6 28 23. 8 
 
 7i. m. s. 
 = 12 fi 9.2 
 
 = C 18 12.0 
 
 o 
 Ther. 74.5 
 
 in. 
 Mar. 29.66 
 
 /i. m. s. 
 = 12 9.2 
 
 = 6 18 12.0 
 
 134 6 4.4 
 
 134 4 8.8 
 
 22 56 57. 8 
 + 23.0 
 3.3 
 
 0.1 
 
 22 57 55.6 
 + 23.0 
 3. 3 
 1 2.3 
 
 22 57 12. 
 
 + 18 38 23. 
 
 22 57 13. 
 
 + 18 38 20. 
 
 41 35 35. 
 
 41 35 33. 
 
 Time of Culmination . 
 Chronometer fast . . . 
 
 Chron. Time of Culmination . 
 
 Time of Culmination 
 Chronometer fast 
 
 Chron. Time of Culmination . 
 
 = 6 24 21.2 
 
 = 6 24 21. 2 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OP AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 89 
 
 SCHEDULE B Continued. 
 
 a AQUILjE - - . JULY 29. 
 
 POLARIS . . . JULY 29. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 Index Corr., &r. 
 
 Coincidence 
 of Images. 
 
 Off Arc = u>. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 Index. Corr.,&c. 
 
 Coincidence 
 of Images. 
 
 Off Arc = <A 
 
 / // 
 2 25 
 30 
 25 
 
 O ' " 
 
 / // 
 
 / " 
 
 + 2 26.7 
 + 23.6 
 
 
 + 2 2C. 7 
 4- 15.8 
 
 
 + 2 50. 3 
 
 + 2 42.5 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 Q 
 
 c 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 Am > 
 
 Alg 
 
 {, 
 
 6 
 
 <t> 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 Q 
 
 4H 
 Refraction 
 p cos t 
 2d term 
 
 # 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 o / // 
 
 m 40 20 
 
 47 50 
 49 10 
 49 15 
 49 50 
 50 10 
 
 li. in. ft. 
 5 24 20. 
 25 34.2 
 26 37.0 
 27 28.5 
 23 12.4 
 28 57.5 
 
 / '/ 
 
 83 3-1 111 
 34 35 
 35 40 
 36 10 
 36 45 
 37 20 
 
 /(. m. . 
 5 32 53. 5 
 33. 53. 
 34 42.5 
 35 35. 3 
 36 23. 
 37 15. 5 
 
 113 48 45. H 
 + 2 50.3 
 
 
 H3 35 46.7 
 + 2 42. 5 
 
 5 35 7.1 
 
 o 
 Ther. 59. 5 
 
 ill. 
 
 Bar. 29. 70 
 
 li. m. s. 
 
 
 
 Ther. 59.5 
 
 IH. 
 
 Bar. 29. 70 
 
 It. m. s. 
 6 18 12. 1 
 
 5 23 2 2 
 
 113 51 30. 1 
 
 83 38 29. 2 
 
 33 4 12.0 
 
 + 30. 6 
 
 53. 3 
 
 41 49 14. C 
 
 1 3.0 
 13 25. 4 
 + 53.1 
 
 41 35 39. 
 
 33 3 55. 
 
 + 8 31 42. 
 
 Chronometer fant .... 
 t 
 
 41 35 37. 
 
 Time of Culmination . . . 
 Chronometer fast 
 
 Chrou. Time of Culmination . 
 
 6 
 
 )- 88 36' 25" 
 5015" 
 
 = 11 12 51.9 
 = 6 18 12. 1 
 
 P - 
 
 = 5 31 4. 
 
 12* 
 
90 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 SCHEDULE B Continued. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 30. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 30. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Ilor. 
 
 Index Corr., &e. 
 
 On Arc = w. 
 
 Off Arc = u'. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art Hor. 
 
 Index Con-., &c. 
 
 On Arc = a. 
 
 Off Arc = o 1 . 
 
 / // 
 29 10 
 10 
 15 
 
 O ' H 
 
 4 26 5 
 10 
 20 
 
 i n 
 
 o ' " 
 
 + 2 18.3 
 + 29.0 
 0.3 
 
 
 + 2 18.3 
 + 29.0 
 + 0.3 
 
 
 + 2 47.0 
 
 + 2 47. 6 
 
 If MM 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 a 
 
 C 
 
 Refract inn 
 Parallax 
 Am 
 7? 
 
 ti 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr.. iVi . 
 
 Q 
 
 f 
 KY Tract ion 
 Parallax 
 Am o 
 Bn s 
 
 C, 
 
 <5 
 t 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 O III 
 
 134 5 10 
 r> 45 
 
 5 45 
 133 2 40 
 3 
 
 2 :io 
 
 7l. Ml. . 
 
 6 21 47. 3 
 22 18.2 
 22 54.0 
 23 24. 5 
 24 19.2 
 24 50.8 
 
 c / " 
 133 2 30 
 2 25 
 2 5 
 134 4 50 
 4 20 
 4 15 
 
 /I. Ml. S. 
 
 26 3. 5 
 20 32.2 
 20 51.2 
 27 21.8 
 27 50.8 
 28 7.5 
 
 133 34 8. 3 
 + 2 47. 
 
 6 23 15. 7 
 
 i:;:i 33 24.2 
 
 + 2 47. 6 
 
 C 27 7.8 
 
 /I. Ml. S. 
 
 - 12 f. 0.9 
 - 6 18 12.2 
 
 o 
 Ther. 79.6 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29. 65 
 
 7l. Ml. . 
 
 - 12 6 6.9 
 : C 18 12.2 
 
 133 30 55. 3 
 
 133 Itf. 11.8 
 
 23 11 32.4 
 + 23.0 
 3.3 
 
 8. 1 
 
 23 11 54. 1 
 
 + 23. 
 3.3 
 29.7 
 
 23 11 44. 
 
 + 18 23 52. 
 
 23 11 44. 
 
 + 18 23 50. 
 
 41 35 36. 
 
 41 35 34. 
 
 Time of Cnlmiuation . . . 
 Curonometer fast . . 
 
 Chron. Time of Culmination . 
 
 Time of Culmination 
 Chronometer fast ... 
 
 Chron. Time of Cnlmiuation . 
 
 = 6 24 19. 1 
 
 = 6 24 19. 1 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 91 
 
 SCIIKW.'LK B Continued. 
 
 POLARIS .11 'LY 30. 
 
 SUN - - JULY 31. 
 
 Index ('CUT 
 E 
 Art. Hc.r. 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 Coincidence 
 of Images. 
 
 Oft Arc u'. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = a. 
 
 Off Arc = u'. 
 
 / // 
 2 20 
 15 
 25 
 
 O f I/ 
 
 t a 
 
 29 10 
 
 5 
 
 20 
 
 o / // 
 4 26 
 25 55 
 26 5 
 
 4 2 20. 
 4- 15.9 
 
 
 4- 2 24. 2 
 
 + 28. 9 
 0.3 
 
 
 4- 2 35. 9 
 
 
 + 2 52. 8 
 
 
 Means 
 
 Index Corr., Ac. 
 
 a 
 
 4 a 
 Refraction 
 
 p r<>;- / 
 
 ad term 
 * 
 
 > Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Con 1 ., &e. 
 
 Q 
 
 ? 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 Am o 
 Bn 
 
 c t 
 
 lJ l 
 
 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 O ' II 
 
 83 53 20 
 54 10 
 55 
 56 
 57 10 
 57 55 
 
 /I. III. S. 
 
 5 55 25. 1 
 56 43.6 
 57 22.5 
 58 47. 2 
 6 46.2 
 2 6.5 
 
 o / " 
 133 35 
 35 25 
 35 35 
 132 33 
 33 10 
 33 10 
 
 /I. Ml. 8. 
 
 6 21 27. a 
 22 10.8 
 22 50. 5 
 23 25. 8 
 24 4. 3 
 24 31.8 
 
 83 55 35. 8 
 4- 2 35.9 
 
 5 58 31. 8 
 
 133 4 13 3 
 
 + 2 52. 8 
 
 6 23 5. 1 
 
 O 
 
 Ther. 63.0 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29.117 
 
 o 
 Ther. 81. 5 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29. 02 
 
 /I. III. S. 
 
 = 12 6 3.9 
 = 6 18 13.6 
 
 83 58 11.7 
 
 133 7 6.1 
 
 41 59 5.8 
 1 1.4 
 23 9.0 
 
 4- 50. 6 
 
 23 26 27. 
 + 23.2 
 3.4 
 
 9.1 
 
 41 35 46. 
 
 , 23 26 38. 
 4- 18 9 3. 
 
 7l. III. 8. 
 
 Chronometer fast .... 6 18 12. 9 
 t 4 55 40.7 
 6 +88 36' 25". 3 
 p 5014". 7 
 
 41 35 41. 
 
 Time of Culmination . . . 
 Chronometer fast .... 
 
 Chroii. Time of Culmination . 
 
 -^ 6 24 17. 5 
 
92 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 SCHEDULE B Continued. 
 
 SUN .... JULY 31. 
 
 SUN .... AUGUST 2. 
 
 ludex Corp. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 On Arc = a. 
 
 Off Arc = u'. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 Index Con-., &c. 
 
 On Arc = a. 
 
 Off Arc u 1 . 
 
 
 o / // 
 
 / n 
 29 40 
 30 
 30 
 
 ' II 
 
 4 26 25 
 20 
 30 
 
 + 2 24. 2 
 
 + 28.8 
 + 0.3 
 
 
 + 2 0.8 
 + 28.6 
 + 0.3 
 
 
 + a 53.3 
 
 + 2 29.7 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 
 
 f 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 Am 
 Bn 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 Q 
 
 f 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 ^o 
 Bn 
 
 6 
 
 4> 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 o / // 
 133 33 20 
 32 45 
 32 20 
 132 29 5 
 28 5 
 26 55 
 
 /I. HI. 8. 
 
 6 28 50. 2 
 29 24.0 
 29 53. 
 30 20. 5 
 30 54. 
 31 17.5 
 
 Q 1 II 
 
 132 34 40 
 33 35 
 33 
 131 29 10 
 
 28 50 
 
 28 15 
 
 /I. l. 8. 
 
 6 26 38. 5 
 27 53.2 
 28 40.2 
 29 13.8 
 29 38.9 
 
 30 1.5 
 
 133 25. 
 + 2 53. 3 
 
 6 30 6. 5 
 
 132 1 15.0 
 + 2 29'. 7 
 
 6 28 41. 
 
 
 
 7l. . 8. 
 
 = 12 6 3.9 
 = 6 18 13.6 
 
 o 
 Th,T. 81. 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29.58 
 
 It. 111. 8. 
 
 = 12 5 56. 4 
 = 6 18 14.5 
 
 133 3 18.3 
 
 132 3 44.7 
 
 23 28 20. 8 
 + 23.2 
 3.4 
 2 0.1 
 
 23 58 7.7 
 + 23.7 
 3.5 
 1 M.2 
 
 23 26 41. 
 
 + 18 8 58. 
 
 23 57 14. 
 + 17 38 27. 
 
 41 35 39. 
 
 41 35 41. 
 
 Time of Culmination . . . 
 Chronometer fast .... 
 
 Chrou. Time of Culmination . 
 
 Time of Culmination 
 Chronometer fast .... 
 
 Chron. Time of Culmination . 
 
 = 6 24 17. 5 
 
 = 6 24 10.9 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 93 
 
 SCHEDULE B Continued. 
 
 SUN , . . AUGUST 2. 
 
 a OPHIUCHI . AUGUST 2. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 Index Corr., &e. 
 
 (In Arc 
 
 Oft" Arc = u'.* 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 ludex Corr., &c. 
 
 Coincidence 
 of Images. 
 
 Off Arc = u 1 . 
 
 i it 
 
 / // 
 
 i 
 
 / // 
 2 15 
 15 
 25 
 
 of" 
 
 + 2 0.8 
 + 28.5 
 
 0.3 
 
 
 + 2 18.3 
 4- 25.9 
 
 
 4- 2 29. 
 
 + 2 44.2 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr.,.&-c. 
 
 Q 
 
 ^ 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 Am a 
 
 fin 
 
 6 
 t 
 
 > Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 
 Index Corr., Ac. 
 
 a 
 
 f 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 Am 
 Sii 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 o / /. 
 
 132 20 n 
 
 25 n 
 
 _:; :;:> 
 
 131 19 20 
 
 17 .in 
 
 15 45 
 
 A. in. *. 
 (i 33 10. 
 33 35. 
 34 11.5 
 34 4y.O 
 35 24. 
 36 1.4 
 
 o / // 
 122 5 50 
 4 40 
 4 50 
 3 30 
 
 a 50 
 
 2 30 
 
 h. m. 8. 
 3 a 30. 1 
 341. 5 
 4 40.2 
 5 44. 
 6 24. 
 6 59.5 
 
 131 51 13.3 
 
 + a ay. o 
 
 6 34 31.8 
 
 122 4 1.7 
 + 2 44.2 
 
 3 4 59.9 
 
 It. Hi. . 
 
 = 12 5 56. 4 
 = 6 18 14.5 
 
 
 
 Ther. 74.0 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29. 61 
 
 A. m. s. 
 = 8 41 57. 8 
 
 = 6 18 14.6 
 
 131 53 42.3 
 
 122 6 45. 9 
 
 24 3 8. 8 
 + 23.8 
 3.5 
 <i 12. 
 
 28 56 37. 1 
 + 29.9 
 
 1 15.4 
 
 23 57 17. 
 + 17 38 24. 
 
 28 55 52. 
 + 12 39 41. 
 
 41 35 41. 
 
 41 35 33. 
 
 Time of Culmination .... 
 Chronometer fast - . . . : 
 
 Chron. Time of Culmination . - 
 
 Time of Culmination . . . 
 Chronometer fast . - 
 
 Chron. Time of Culmination . 
 
 = 6 24 10. 9 
 
 = 3 12.4 
 
94 
 
 EEPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 SCHEDULE B Continued. 
 
 POLARIS . - . AUGUST 2. 
 
 a AQUIL* . . . AUGUST 2. 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 Q 
 
 ta 
 
 Refraction 
 p cos / 
 2d term 
 
 <t> 
 
 Coincidence 
 of Images. 
 
 Off Arc = <a'. 
 
 
 
 Index Corr. 
 E 
 Art. Hor. 
 
 Index Corr.,&c. 
 
 Coincidence 
 of Images. 
 
 Off Arc .= u'. 
 
 / // 
 2 25 
 20 
 15 
 
 o ' /' 
 
 / // 
 2 25 
 20 
 15 
 
 O 1 If . 
 
 + 2 20. 
 -r 15.8 
 
 
 + 2 20. 
 + 23.5 
 
 
 + 2 35. 8 
 
 + 2 43.5 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Means 
 Index Corr., &c. 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 Am 
 7?n 
 
 6 
 
 " 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 / II 
 
 83 30 20 
 31 
 31 40 
 32 45 
 32 30 
 33 30 
 
 li. m. a. 
 5 12 5.2 
 13 35.4 
 14 23. 8 
 15 13.5 
 16 2.0 
 16 48. 
 
 ' 'I 
 
 113 42 45 
 41 20 
 
 39 20 
 :!? i:. 
 35 10 
 32 30 
 
 /I. HI. S. 
 
 5 25 16. 5 
 
 26 17.8 
 27 9.2 
 28 19. 1 
 29 . 8. 3 
 30 6.8 
 
 83 31 57.5 
 + 2 35. 8 
 
 5 14 49.0 
 
 113 38 3.3 
 + 2 43.5 
 
 
 o 
 Ther. 69.5 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29. 63 
 
 h. m. s. 
 6 18 14.7 
 
 5 27 45. 6 
 h 88 36' 25".9 
 5014".! 
 
 o 
 Ther. 69. 5 
 
 in. 
 Bar. 29. 63 
 
 7l. Ml. 8. 
 
 = 10 57 8. 3 
 = 6 18 14.6 
 
 83 34 33. 3 
 
 113 40 46.8 
 
 41 47 16.6 
 1 1.0 
 11 43.0 
 + 53.4 
 
 33 9 36. 6 
 + 35.7 
 
 (i 5:i. 7 
 + 0.7 
 
 41 35 26. 
 
 33 3 19. 
 + 8 31 42. 
 
 Chronometer fast .... 
 1 
 6 . . . - 
 
 9 
 
 41 35 1. 
 
 Time of Culmination . . . 
 Chronometer fast .... 
 
 Chron. Time of Culmination . 
 
 
 = 5 15 22. 9 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1809. 
 
 95 
 
 SCHEDULE B Continued. 
 
 a SAGITTARII . . AUGUST 4. 
 
 Index Coir. 
 E 
 Art. Hnr. 
 
 Index Corr., &r. 
 
 Coincidence 
 of Images. 
 
 Off Arc = a'. 
 
 / a 
 2 10 
 20 
 10 
 
 > II 
 
 + 2 13.3 
 
 + 0.8 
 
 
 + 2 20. 1 
 
 Means 
 Index C'orr.. Ac. 
 
 a 
 
 f 
 Refraction 
 Parallax 
 
 -^"'o 
 Bit? 
 
 : , 
 3 
 
 <t> 
 
 2 Altitude. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 O ' II 
 
 43 40 
 35 40 
 33 50 
 33 30 
 30 
 29 
 
 //. HI. 8. 
 
 4 29 34. 5 
 30 43. 
 31 43.5 
 32 39. 
 33 35.0 
 34 16.2 
 
 43 33 40. 
 + 2 20. 1 
 
 
 o 
 Tlier. 77. U 
 
 h>. 
 liar. 29. 46 
 
 /I. III. 8. 
 
 - 9 52 11.0 
 : fi 18 15.6 
 
 43 36 0. 1 
 
 r,s 1-2 o.o 
 
 + 2 12.8 
 
 11 ;i. 9 
 
 + 0.4 
 
 68 3 3. 
 - 20 27 15. 
 
 41 35 48. 
 
 Time of Culmination 
 Chronometer fast .... 
 
 Chron. Time of Culmination . 
 
 = 4 10 26. 6 
 
96 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HARKNESS. 
 
 SCHEDULE C. 
 
 Observations for Time, made at the United States Naval Observatory, Wxxhinf/ton, with the East Transit 
 
 Instrument, by Professor M. Yarnall, U. 8. N. 
 
 [NOTE. The seoouds were marked on the chronograph sheet by the Kcssels clock, but the beginning of the minutes 
 was taken from the face of a counting clock, which ran quite irregularly. This accounts for tin 1 discrepancy between 
 the hourly rates and the absolute errors on the different days.] , 
 
 
 
 Object. 
 
 Seconds of transits. 
 
 a 
 o .ti 
 
 
 s* 
 
 Date. 
 
 si 
 
 ,a 
 
 
 
 tg to 
 i) 
 
 ZZ 
 
 Almanac 
 
 R.Asccnsion. 
 
 il 
 
 g-o 
 
 
 
 
 
 V. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 I. 
 
 II. 
 
 III. 
 
 IV. 
 
 VI. 
 
 VII. 
 
 VIII 
 
 IX. 
 
 X. 
 
 XI. 
 
 Mean. 
 
 'c& 
 
 5JS 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 O~ 
 
 1869. 
 
 
 
 
 8. 
 
 8. 
 
 s. 
 
 R. 
 
 s. 
 
 s. 
 
 8. 
 
 8. 
 
 s. 
 
 s. 
 
 8. 
 
 in. s. 
 
 s. 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 s. 
 
 July 26 
 
 1 
 
 
 14 
 
 16 1 
 
 17 6 
 
 07 q 
 
 .,,, <i 
 
 w t 
 
 11 6 
 
 V> 6 
 
 13 
 
 44 
 
 46 4 
 
 7 30.24 
 
 + 0.48 
 
 11 7 8.16 
 
 22. 56 
 
 
 2 
 
 /? Leouis . 29.231.3 
 
 32.5 
 
 42.5 
 
 43.5 
 
 44.7 
 
 15.9 
 
 47.0 
 
 57. 
 
 58.1 
 
 0.2 
 
 42 44. "t 
 
 + 0.5o 
 
 11 42 22.67 
 
 22.55 
 
 
 3 
 
 6 Ursa? Min. . . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _ 
 
 . 
 
 
 33. 5 
 
 52. 
 
 26.5 
 
 18 57. 40 
 
 3 45.71 
 
 . 
 
 22. 45 
 
 
 4 
 
 a Lyrse . .35.3 
 
 37/9 
 
 39/3 
 
 51. 6 
 
 52.9 
 
 54.5 
 
 36/0 
 
 57. 3 
 
 9.7 
 
 11.0 
 
 13.7 
 
 32 54. 47 
 
 + 0. 43 
 
 18 32 32. 45 
 
 22. 45 
 
 
 5 
 
 e Delphini . 6. 11 8. 3 9. 4 
 
 19.0 
 
 20.2 
 
 21.4 
 
 22.6 
 
 23. 7 
 
 33.4 
 
 34.6 
 
 36.6 
 
 27 21.39 
 
 + 0. 51 
 
 20 26 59. 48 
 
 22. 42 
 
 
 6 
 
 li Aquarii . 143.946.247.4 
 
 57.1 
 
 58.2 
 
 59.3J 0.6 
 
 1.6 
 
 11.2 
 
 12.4 
 
 14.6 
 
 45 59. 32 
 
 + 0. 57 
 
 20 45 37.4722.42 
 
 29 
 
 7 
 
 & Ophiuchi . 35. 6 
 
 37.938.9 
 
 48.5 
 
 49.6 
 
 50.751.1) 
 
 52. 9 
 
 2.6 
 
 3.7 
 
 5.8 
 
 7 50.74 
 
 + 0. 43 
 
 16 7 30.60 
 
 20. 57 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 3 <1 
 
 *> 7 
 
 6 8 
 
 16 r > 
 
 17 6 
 
 18. 8>20. 
 
 ''I 
 
 30 8 
 
 31 9 
 
 34 
 
 30 18.77 
 
 + 0. 46 
 
 16 29 58. 67 
 
 20. 56 
 
 
 9 
 
 K Ophiuchi . 
 
 
 
 
 47.7 
 
 48.8 
 
 50.051.2 
 
 52.2 
 
 1.9 
 
 3.0 
 
 5.2 
 
 51 55.00 
 
 4.66 
 
 16 51 29. 79 
 
 20. 55 
 
 
 10 
 
 t- I'rsie Mill. 
 
 3.8 
 
 18/4 
 
 26/8 
 
 37.8 
 
 45.2 
 
 54.8 4.2 
 
 11.3 
 
 22.5 
 
 30. 8 46. 4 
 
 59 54. 73 
 
 1.85 
 
 
 20. 55 
 
 
 11 
 
 7 Aqnibi' 
 
 9.1 
 
 11.2 
 
 12.3 
 
 21.9 
 
 23.0 
 
 24.325.5 
 
 26. 5 
 
 36. 3 
 
 37. 4139. 6 
 
 40 24.28 
 
 -f- 0. 38 
 
 19 40 4.15 
 
 20. 51 
 
 
 12 
 
 j3 Aquila- 
 
 0.0 
 
 2.1 
 
 3.1 
 
 12.7 
 
 13.8 
 
 15. 16. 2 
 
 17.4 
 
 26.9 
 
 28. 30. 2 
 
 49 15.04 
 
 -)- 0.40 
 
 l!i 4* 54.93 
 
 20. 51 
 
 
 111 
 
 / 1'i-siH Miu. 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 57.0 
 
 57.0 
 
 56.059.0 
 
 51.0 
 
 _ 
 
 . 
 
 
 56 56. 00 
 
 10.44 
 
 ... 
 
 20. 51 
 
 
 14 
 15 
 
 IT Caprieorni 
 p Aqnarii . 
 
 55.8 
 42.3 
 
 68.1 
 
 44.5 
 
 59.2 
 45.7 
 
 9.1 
 55.3 
 
 10.3 
 56.4 
 
 11.6:12.8 
 57. 6158. 8 
 
 13.9 
 
 59.8 
 
 24.1 
 9.5 
 
 25.427.6 
 10.712.8 
 
 20 11.63 
 
 45 57.58 
 
 + 0. 50 
 -)- 46 
 
 20 19 51.62 
 20 45 37. 54 
 
 20. 51 
 20. 50 
 
 30 
 
 16 
 
 l'i Leonis . 28.0 
 
 30.2 
 
 31.2 
 
 41.2 
 
 42.2 
 
 43.644.i- 
 
 45. 9 
 
 55.8 
 
 56.9 
 
 59. 1 
 
 42 43. 54 
 
 + 0. 23 
 
 . 
 
 21.29 
 
 
 17 
 
 Polaris.8.P.18.0 
 
 6.5 
 
 5.0 
 
 55. 
 
 20. 5 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 
 _ . 
 
 . . 
 
 
 49 9. 00 
 
 +22 46.21 
 
 . 
 
 21. 28 
 
 
 18 
 
 C Ophiuchi - 
 
 4.2 
 
 6.4 
 
 7.4 
 
 17.2 
 
 K3 
 
 19.5 
 
 20.7 
 
 21.7 
 
 31.5 
 
 32.6 
 
 34/8 
 
 30 19.48 
 
 + 0. 37 
 
 16 29 58.63 
 
 21. 22 
 
 
 19 
 
 a Opliiut-lii . 
 
 58.5 
 
 0.7 
 
 1.9 
 
 11.7 
 
 12.8 
 
 14.1 
 
 15. 3 
 
 16.4 
 
 26.2 
 
 27.2 
 
 29.4 
 
 29 14.02 
 
 + 0. 29 
 
 IT 29 53. 10 
 
 -21. 21 
 
 
 20 
 
 X Urae Min. 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 
 55. 5 
 
 49.0 
 
 50. 55. 
 
 50. 
 
 . . 
 
 . . 
 
 _ . 
 
 56 51.90 
 
 14. 83 
 
 . 
 
 21. 18 
 
 
 21 
 
 a- Caprieorni 
 
 54.9 
 
 57/058.3 
 
 8.0 
 
 9.1 
 
 10.4 11.6 
 
 12.6 
 
 22.5 
 
 23. 6 
 
 25.8 
 
 11 10.35 
 
 + 0. 3s 
 
 20 10 49. 56 
 
 21. 17 
 
 
 22 
 
 TT Caprieorni 
 
 56. 6 
 
 58. 8i59. 9 
 
 10.0 
 
 11.1 
 
 12. 4 13. 7 
 
 14.8 
 
 25.0 
 
 26.2 
 
 28.4 
 
 20 12.45 
 
 + 0. 41 
 
 20 19 51. 69 
 
 21. 17 
 
 
 23 
 
 /; A(iuarii . 
 
 43.2 
 
 45. 3 46. 4 
 
 56.1 
 
 57. 2 
 
 58.4 
 
 V.l. 6 
 
 0.6 
 
 10.4 
 
 11.5 
 
 13.6 
 
 45 58. 39 
 
 + 0. 37 
 
 20 45 37.59 
 
 21. 17 
 
 
 24 
 
 C Cygni . . 
 
 27. H 
 
 30.1 
 
 31.4 
 
 42. 5 
 
 41 
 
 1. ? 
 
 45. 46. 5 
 
 47.7 
 
 58. 6 
 
 0.0 
 
 2.5 
 
 7 45.07 
 
 + 0.21 
 
 21 7 24. 12 
 
 21. 16 
 
 31 
 
 25 
 
 C Ophiuchi . 
 
 4.7 
 
 6.9 
 
 8.0 
 
 17.7 
 
 18.7 
 
 20.021.2 
 
 22. 3 
 
 32. 2 
 
 33. 2 
 
 35. 2 
 
 30 20.01 
 
 + 0.44 
 
 16 29 58. 58 
 
 21.87 
 
 
 26 
 
 K O])hiuchi . 
 
 :!6. (i 
 
 38.2 
 
 39. 3 
 
 49.0 
 
 50. 
 
 5 1. \! .V,'. 1 
 
 53. 5 
 
 3.2 
 
 4.4 
 
 6 5 
 
 51 51.25 
 
 + 0.3S 
 
 16 51 29.76 
 
 21.87 
 
 
 27 
 
 < Ill-mi 1 Min. 
 
 4.4 
 
 18.6 
 
 27.1 
 
 38.2 
 
 46.1 
 
 55.0 3.4 
 
 11.7 
 
 23.5 
 
 30. 9 
 
 46.3 
 
 59 55. 02 
 
 0. 52 
 
 . 
 
 21. 86 
 
 
 28 
 
 a 1 HcTculi.s . 
 
 48.2 
 
 :>(). 4 
 
 51. 5 
 
 1.4 
 
 2.6 
 
 3.7 
 
 4.9 
 
 6.0 
 
 16. 
 
 17.1 
 
 19.2 
 
 9 3.73 
 
 + 0. 37 
 
 17 8 42.24 
 
 21.86 
 
 
 29 
 
 (! Ursa- Min. 
 
 
 
 
 35. 5 
 
 51. 
 
 11.532.5 
 
 49.7 
 
 
 . . 
 
 _ _ 
 
 15 12. 04 
 
 1. 75 
 
 . 
 
 -21. 85 
 
 
 30 
 
 a Lyra 1 , . . 
 
 51/1 
 
 52.3 
 
 53. 8 
 
 55. 5 
 
 56.9 
 
 . . 132.6 
 
 35. 9 
 
 37/3 
 
 39.0 
 
 40. 5 
 
 33 15.49 
 
 21.27 
 
 18 32 32.38 
 
 21. 84 
 
 
 31 
 
 TT Caprieorni 
 
 57. 
 
 59. 5 
 
 0.6 
 
 10.8 
 
 11.7 
 
 13. 14. 3 
 
 15. 4 
 
 25. 5 
 
 26.6 
 
 28.9 
 
 20 13.03 
 
 + 0.4? 
 
 20 19 51. 68 
 
 21. 82 
 
 
 32 
 
 f Delphini . j 5. 7 
 
 7.8 
 
 9.0 
 
 18.7 
 
 19.8 
 
 21.0J22.2 
 
 23.4 
 
 33. 
 
 34.2 
 
 36.2 
 
 27 21.00 
 
 + 0. 38 
 
 20 26 59. 57 
 
 -21.81 
 
 
 33 
 
 u Aquarii . 
 
 43.7 
 
 45. 9 
 
 47.0 
 
 56.7 
 
 57. 8 
 
 59.0 0.2 
 
 1.3 
 
 11.0 
 
 13.1 
 
 14.1 
 
 45 5S. 9s 
 
 + 0. 44 
 
 20 45 37. 61 
 
 21. 81 
 
 Aug. 7 
 
 34 
 
 ft Oeininor. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . . 18.7 
 
 21.4 
 
 !>. .- 
 
 24.3 
 
 25.7 
 
 38 22. 58 
 
 37. 78 
 
 
 27.22 
 
 
 35 
 
 C Ophiuclii . 
 
 9/8 
 
 11.9 
 
 13/0 
 
 22/9 
 
 24.0 
 
 25. 1 -.'6. 3 
 
 27.4 
 
 37.7 
 
 38.2 
 
 40.4 
 
 30 25. 11 
 
 + 0. (il 
 
 16 29 :,-. 66 
 
 27.17 
 
 
 36 
 
 K Ophiuchi . 
 
 41.2 
 
 43. 3 44. 4 
 
 54.2 
 
 55. 2 
 
 56. 5 87. 6 
 
 58. 8 
 
 8.4 
 
 9.6 
 
 11.7 
 
 52 56. 45 
 
 + 0. 53 
 
 16 51 29. -1 
 
 -27. 17 
 
 
 37 
 
 r Ursa 1 . Min. 
 
 7.7 83. 6(31.9 
 
 42.8 
 
 49. 9 
 
 59. 7 
 
 7.9 
 
 15. 9 
 
 27. 5 
 
 34. 5 
 
 50. 6 
 
 59 59. 27 
 
 0. 44 
 
 . 
 
 27. 17 
 
 
 38 
 
 a' Hereulis . 
 
 53. 3 55. 5 : 56. 7 
 
 6.5 
 
 7.6 
 
 8.9 
 
 10. 1 
 
 11.3 
 
 21.0 
 
 22.2 
 
 24. 3 
 
 9 8.85 
 
 + 0. 51 
 
 17 8 42. 19 
 
 27.17 
 
 . 
 
 39 
 
 c! I 
 
 rs;e Mill. 
 
 2. Oi:i7. 5 55. 
 
 38. 5 
 
 56. 
 
 17.037.0 
 
 55. 5 
 
 37. 5 
 
 56. 5 
 
 29.0 
 
 15 16.50 
 
 2. 54 
 
 . 
 
 27.17 
 
 
 40 
 
 K AquilfP 
 
 4.3 6.4 7.5 
 
 17.4 
 
 18.3 
 
 19.620.8 
 
 21.8 
 
 31.7 
 
 32. 6 
 
 34. 5 
 
 30 19.54 
 
 + 0.60 
 
 19 29 52. 98 
 
 27. 16 
 
 
 41 
 
 y Aquihe 
 
 5.3 7.6 
 
 8.7 
 
 28. 5 
 
 29.5 
 
 30. ,-::>. o 
 
 33. 2 
 
 42.9 
 
 43.9 
 
 46.0 
 
 40 30.71! 
 
 + 0. 53 
 
 19 40 4. 13 
 
 27.16 
 
 
 42 
 
 e Delphini . 10.913.4 
 
 14.1 
 
 23.8 
 
 24.8 
 
 26. 2i27. 5 
 
 28. 5 
 
 38.2 
 
 39.3 
 
 41.4 
 
 27 26. 16 
 
 + 0. 53 
 
 20 26 59. 54 
 
 27.15 
 
 
 43 
 
 ft Aquarii . 
 
 48.750.952.0 
 
 1.9 
 
 2.8 
 
 4.0 5.1 
 
 6.2 
 
 16.0 
 
 17.1 
 
 19.1 
 
 46 3.98 
 
 + 0.61 
 
 20 45 37.44 
 
 22. 15 
 
 T* 4-r* 
 
 Clock 
 
 Hourly 
 
 
 
 10. Good observation. 
 
 Date. 
 
 correction 
 
 vat,-.' 
 
 n. 
 
 c. 
 
 18. Good observation, through thick haze. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 27. Very nnsteadv. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 29. Very unsteady. 
 
 1809. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Aug. 7. Stars unsteady throughout the night. 
 
 h. 
 
 R. 
 
 s. s. 
 
 s. 
 
 s. 
 
 r. 
 
 July 20 16.5 
 
 22.48 
 
 + 0.014 + 0.48 
 
 - 0.17 
 
 + 0.06 
 
 July 26, 12h. Image west, 0.24. Clamp east . 
 
 29 18. C 
 
 20.53 
 
 + 0.014 + 0.51 
 
 - 0.23 
 
 0.09 
 
 July 26, 61). Image west, 0.25. Clamp east. 
 
 30 18. 3 
 
 21.20 
 
 -f 0.014 . . 
 
 
 0.09 
 
 Image west, 0.45. Clamp west. 
 
 11.2 
 
 - 
 
 . . + 0.35 
 
 0.10 
 
 
 30,211i. linage west, 0.36. Clamp west. 
 
 16.4 
 
 
 
 . -j- 0.43 
 
 0.20 
 
 . 
 
 Image west, 0.15. Clamp east. 
 
 31 18. 6 
 
 21.84 
 
 + 0.015 + 0.35 
 
 0.18 
 
 + 0.06 
 
 31, Imago west, 0.10. Clamp east. 
 
 Aug. 7 17.3 
 
 27.17 
 
 + 0.005 + 0.50 
 
 0. 25 
 
 + 0.07 
 
 Ang. 7, 21h. Image west, 0.18. Clamp east. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Image west, 0.41. Clamp west. 
 
REPORT 
 
 PROFESSOR JOHN R. EASTMAN, U. S. N. 
 
 13* 
 
REPORT OF PROFESSOR J. R, EASTMAN, U. S. N. 
 
 UNITED STATES NAVAL OBSERVATORY, 
 
 Wa-sMn-gtoii, D. C., September 28, 1869. 
 
 Sin: In obedience to an order from the honorable Secretary of the Navy, dated June 14, 1869, 
 I have the honor to submit to you the following report of my observations of the solar eclipse of 
 August 7, 1809, at Des Moines, Iowa. 
 
 In company with the other members of the party, I left Washington on the 5th and reached 
 Des Moines on the 10th of July. 
 
 A site for the temporary observatory was immediately selected in the northern portion of the 
 city, on the north side of Short street, between Second and Third streets; but, owing to the 
 extremely bad weather, tiro building, together with the small inclosure for the protection of the 
 meteorological instruments, was not completed until July 20. 
 
 The following is a list of the instruments taken from Washington: One telescope and stand 
 one actinometer ; one photometer ; one barometer (aneroid) with attached thermometer; one dry- 
 bulb thermometer; one wet-bulb thermometer; one solar thermometer ; maximum and minimum 
 thermometers; and three mean-time box chronometers, (T. S. & J. D. Negus, Nos. 1275, 1.'500, and 
 1319.) The telescope and chronometers were taken from the Observatory, but the other instruments 
 were my private property. 
 
 DESCRIPTION Ot 
 
 The Telexe<>i>c. The focal length 
 of this instrument is IS. 5 inches, and 
 the diameter of the object-glass is 3.5 
 inches. The. celestial eye-piece has a 
 power of 50, and is fitted with three 
 colored shades of red, green, and neu- 
 tral-tinted glass. The stand and the 
 equatorial mounting were made by 
 H. G. Fit/, of New York, and, though 
 working very badly, fulfilled all the 
 conditions required on the day of the 
 eclipse. 
 
 The Actinometer. This instru- 
 ment is in many respects similar to 
 the one used by the Rev. G. C. Hodg- 
 kinson in the Alps in 1866,' and was 
 made by Messrs. F. W. and It. King, 
 of Baltimore, from sketches and 
 specifications which I furnished for 
 their guidance. It consists of a ther- 
 mometer with a spherical bulb 1.75 
 inch in diameter and a tube 12 inches 
 long. At a distance of 9.25 inches 
 from the bulb the tube abruptly ex- 
 pands to a diameter of 0.5 inch for a 
 distance of 1.6 inch, and terminates 
 in a spheroidal chamber 0.8 inch in 
 diameter, from which the air is only 
 partially exhausted. The interior 
 diameter of the small tube is about 0.06 inch. 
 
 INSTRUMENTS. 
 
 The bulb is filled with alcohol colored with aniline 
 
100 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR EASTMAN. 
 
 blue, and the different portions of the instrument are so adjusted that at a temperature of about 
 40 Fah r. the top of the column is very near the bottom of the scale attached to the tube. An 
 ivory scale, 10 inches long and 0.9 inch wide, graduated in millimeters, is attached to the tube, its 
 lower end being one inch from the bulb. Below the end of the scale the tube passes through a 
 cork bung, perforated and split to receive it, by which the actinometer is attached to the brass 
 shading-tube when in use. 
 
 In order to avoid the usual difficulties in shading the actinometer, a plain brass tube, 14.1i.> 
 inches long and 2.4 inches in diameter, open at both ends and blackened on' the inside, was adopted, 
 as affording the best facilities for passing the bulb from the direct rays of the sun into the shade, 
 and still presenting no additional obstruction to radiation. In the central section of this tube it is 
 pierced with a circular hole 1.8 inch in diameter, from which spiings a Hanged shoulder which 
 receives and holds firmly the perforated cork on the actinometer tube, while the bulb of the ac.ti- 
 nometer projects so far into the tube that the sun can shine completely round it. 
 
 Two brass caps with plain plate-glass fitted into the ends are made to screw into the ends of the 
 brass tube, in order to permit the free passage of the sun's rays, and at the same time prevent t In- 
 action of currents of air. 
 
 At 90 from the center of the aperture for the actinometer bulb is a screw to connect the brass 
 tube with a socket, and a strong wood screw, (Fig. 1, a,) by which the tube is attached to a stall' or 
 post while in use. 
 
 In using this instrument, the actinometer is attached, by means of the perforated cork, to tin- 
 brass tube, which is then so adjusted that the sun's rays fall directly on the bulb until a sufficient 
 quantity of liquid is driven into the upper chamber; when the chamber is held lower than the bulb, 
 the column is broken and allowed to fall to the temperature at which the instrument is to be worked. 
 The bulb of the instrument is again exposed to the sun, and after an interval of ten seconds the 
 height of the column is noted on the scale and recorded as the first reading. At the end of the 
 adopted period of exposure the height is again read and recorded as the second reading in the*H, 
 and the tube is turned away until the bulb is perfectly shaded. After the bulb has been in the 
 shade ten seconds the height of the column is noted and recorded as the lirsl reading, and, after 
 the same interval as before, the height is again read and recorded as the second reading in the slitulc. 
 In the same manner the number of observations may be increased at pleasure. When the working 
 column reaches the widened tube, more liquid may be expelled, and the observations continued as 
 before; or, if the fall in the shade is greater than the rise in the sun, the column may be expanded 
 until it reaches the widened tube, when, if it is not broken and is allowed to contract, enough liquid 
 may be withdrawn to maintain the column at a proper working height. 
 
 The temperature 
 of the liquid is de- 
 termined from a table 
 derived from com- 
 parison with a stand- 
 ard thermometer to 
 ascertain the tem- 
 perature of the col- 
 umn when it reaches 
 the following points, 
 viz: on the scale, 
 the junction of the 
 small and widened 
 tubes, and the vari- 
 ous divisions of the 
 scale for the widened 
 t ube. 
 
 The Photometer. 
 This instrument was 
 devised for the pur- 
 
1869. 101 
 
 pose of measuring the relative amount of diffused light in the atmosphere at different periods in 
 the progress of the, eclipse, and was constructed from my own designs. It consists of one main tube 
 of brass 10.2 inches long and 2,5 inches in diameter, intersected, at 1.8 inch from the bottom and 
 at an angle of 30, by a small brass tube 8.0 inches long and 1.1 inch in diameter; a brass plate 
 with a flange in the center which screws into the bottom of the main tube, and an apparatus for 
 regulating the area of the aperture admitting the light, which tits by a thin flange into the upper 
 end of the main tube. 
 
 This apparatus (Fig. 2, <i) is inclosed between two brass [dates pierced by a hole of nearly the 
 diameter of the main tube, and consists of two thin brass plates, each pierced by an aperture 1.46 
 inch square to admit the light, sliding on each other, by means of a double rack and pinion move- 
 ment, in opposite directions. 
 
 The reduction of the aperture admitting the light is measured by the revolutions of a gradu- 
 ated disk 1.5 inch in diameter, attached to the pinion shaft and adjustable by means of a binding 
 screw. Upon the plate at the bottom of the main tube was fastened a disk of black paper, (Fig. 2, 
 6,) upon which was painted a small live-pointed star, the points and center of which were white; a 
 black circle or ring was drawn through the bases of the points, and a small black dot made in the 
 center of the ring. 
 
 In using this instrument, it is first lixed witti the main tube in a vertical position, and a thin 
 plate of ground glass is placed over the aperture admitting light. The eye is then placed at the 
 end of the small tube, lilting close enough lo shut out all light, and the aperture is gradually dimin- 
 ished, by turning the head of the pinion shaft, until the "ring" in the star suddenly disappears. 
 The observer then reads and records the revolutions of the graduated pinion head. Five readings 
 are sullicient for a good observation. The pinion head is divided into 100 equal parts, and, as 
 one revolution effects a change of 0.83 1 inch in the length of the side of the aperture, one division 
 will represent a change of 0.1108 inch. 
 
 Aneroid Bannm-tcr. This instrument, made by J. T. Large, is graduated to 0.02 inch, with a 
 range of scale from 27.70 to .'51. .'JO inches, and is provided with an attached thermometer. Its errors 
 were determined by comparison with the observatory standard, before and after the trip to Iowa, 
 and by comparison on the day of the eclipse with an instrument owned by Mr. A. McConuell, who 
 determined the errors of his barometer before and after the trip by comparison with the standard 
 at the Dearborn Observatory, Chicago. 
 
 Thermomclcrx. The dry, wet-bulb, and solar thermometers were made by James Green, and, 
 upon careful comparison with the observatory standard, no scale errors could be detected. The 
 solar thermometer has a blackened bulb, and is inclosed in au exhausted glass tube. 
 
 The maximum and minimum thermometers were made by F. W. & E. King. They are mounted 
 side by side on the same plate, and by comparison the errors were ascertained to be less than the 
 probable error of a single reading. 
 
 The Chronometers were of the common style, made by T. S. & J. I). Negus for the use of the 
 navy, and were selected for this service on account of the steady rates which they had maintained 
 for several months. 
 
 The meteorological instruments were placed in a small inclosure, sixteen feet square, about 
 seven yards southeast from the temporary observatory. 
 
 The barometer and the dry and wet bulb and maximum and minimum thermometers were 
 placed in a box 18 inches long, 12 inches wide, and 15 inches high, made on the east, south, and 
 west sides of two thicknesses of louver or blind-work, with a space of 0".25 between them, and on 
 the north side of one thickness. 
 
 The top of the box was covered with thin strips of deal 2".5 wide, at intervals of 0".75. Over 
 these crevices were placed strips of deal 2".5 wide raised 0".25 above the lower layer. A roof, 
 projecting 0" over the south side, was placed over the box, sloping to the south, the southern edge 
 of the box being 1".5 below the roof. 
 
 This construction permitted free circulation of air, but prevented the undue influence of the 
 sun, radiation, and currents of air. 
 
 The box was securely attached to two posts nrmly driven into the ground in the northern part 
 
102 KEPOKT OF PROFESSOR EASTMAN. 
 
 of the iuclosure. Across the bottom of the box, which was 3'.5 iibovc tlio grass, were nailed narrow 
 strips of deal to protect the instruments from disturbance from below. 
 
 The three thermometers were suspended from the top of the box, near the central line, and the 
 barometer was placed on the lattices at the bottom. From information received from Colonel J. W. 
 Otley, engineer of the Des Moiiies Valley railroad, and from the triangulatiou of Professor -Hark- 
 ness, I find that the barometer was 833.5 feet above the level of the sea. 
 
 The solar thermometer was suspended in wooden crutches 4" above the grass and 0' south of 
 the thermometer box. 
 
 The actinometer, when in use, was attached to a post near the northeast corner of the inclostire, 
 and the photometer was placed on a stand directly south of the actinometer. 
 
 METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 Before the completion of the observatory a daily record of the weather was made, from which 
 the following extracts are taken, showing the character of the weather during- that period: 
 
 July 10. Afternoon nearly clear; wind northwest. Evening hazy, with wind southwest. 
 
 July 11. Temperature and moisture increasing-. Many cirro-cumulus clouds. Hazy in the 
 evening. 
 
 July 12. Heavy shower, with lightning and thunder, in the morning. Almost constant light- 
 ning during the night, with considerable rain. 
 
 July 13. Heavy thunder-shower in the morning, and a very heavy one in the evening. 
 
 July 14. Rain in the morning; cooler in the afternoon, and clear at sunset. 
 
 July 15. From daylight until W'SO 111 a. in. a severe storm prevailed, and from 7 h until 9 h the 
 thunder was one continuous peal. Slight showers at intervals during the afternoon and evening. 
 Wind west and northwest. 
 
 July 16. A very severe storm came on at 7' 1 a. m., and lasted lour hours. For more than two 
 hours there was a continuous peal of thunder. Clear at 4 h p. in. 
 
 July 17. A heavy northeast storm during the morning. Clear at 7 h 30'" p. in. 
 
 July 18. A fair day; clear most of the time. 
 
 July 19. Thunder-storm in the morning; clear at 4 h 31) m p. m. 
 
 July 20. A fair day. Wind north. 
 
 July 21. A clear day. Wind north-northwest. 
 
 July 22. Light haze during the day. 
 
 July 23. Hazy and quite warm during the day. 
 
 On July 22 and 23 the instruments were unpacked and mounted, and on July 24 the obscrva. 
 tions with the barometer and thermometers were commenced and continued every day until August 
 9 at 3 h p. in. 
 
 Having no one but Mrs. Eastman to assist me, I was unable to make so extensive a. series of 
 observations as I desired, for I was obliged to devote a portion of my time to the use of the actinome- 
 ter and photometer, and a large, portion of Mrs. Eastman's time Was occupied in practice with these 
 instruments, and in recording the observations which 1 made with them. The original plan was to 
 make the observations every hour during the day, but occasionally it was impossible to have an 
 observer at hand when I was necessarily absent for my meals; and there were many breaks in the 
 series on that account. 
 
 I am greatly indebted to Messrs A. E. Le Merle and E. J. Ward for voluntary assistance on 
 several occasions when the observations would otherwise have been lost. On the 28th of July I 
 commenced the observations at 7 1 ' a. m., and continued them hourly until 7' 1 p. m. on the 29th, but, 
 finding this too exhaustive labor, I was forced to abandon the observations during the night, though 
 I was very anxious to determine the march of the temperature and atmospheric pressure during the 
 entire day and night. 
 
 On the morning of the 29th I commenced the observations with the actinometer and photome- 
 ter at sunrise, and continued them as often as practicable until sunset. The observations were fre- 
 quently interrupted by patches of light haze, and I realized, more fully than ever before, the fact 
 that perfectly clear days are extremely rare in August, even in the unusually pure air of Iowa. 
 
 Another series of observations with the actiiioineter was made on August 4, and, though appa- 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 103 
 
 rently a clear day, the observations gave evidences of the presence of light haze before the snn, 
 which, on careful examination, could be detected by the eye. 
 
 The weather from July 24 to August 5 was generally clear and pleasant, with but little rain, 
 which fell in showers of short duration. On the 5th of August the wind had swung around into the 
 fjist, and the sky was overcast with cumulo-stratus clouds. A few drops of rain fell at 8 h a. m. and 
 again in the afternoon. 
 
 On the morning of the Gth the wind was blowing hard from the northeast, and the clouds were 
 much more dense than on the 5th. At II 1 ' 30 111 a. m. a misty, drizzly rain commenced, and lasted 
 until I 1 ' .'>0"> ]>. m., when the temperature began to rise, and there was a change from gray to black 
 in the color of the clouds. The clouds grew darker and more dense until dark, when it seemed that 
 a heavy northeast storm was unavoidable. During the evening, telegrams from stations east and 
 west of Des Moines reported the sky "perfectly clear" at Chicago and Davenport, and "clear" at 
 Omaha, while the indications of a storm seemed to increase at Des Moines until ll h p. m. 
 
 The meteorological observations for each day, save August 7. will be found in Tables I to VII, 
 inclusive. All the corrections, except for elevation, have been applied to the readings of the baro- 
 meter ; and the readings from the thermometer scales require no correction. The results of the 
 observations with the actinometer on July 29 and August 4, and with the photometer on July 29, 
 are given in Tables VIII and IX. 
 
 OPERATIONS ON SATURDAY, AUGUST 7. 
 
 At sunrise the whole sky was completely overcast, though the clouds were in many places less 
 dense than on the previous evening, and there were some signs of approaching fair weather. 
 
 At this time the wind was very changeable, and blew from all points between north -northeast 
 and southeast, increasing in force as it swung around to the southeast, and decreasing as it moved 
 back to the north-northeast. At 7 h 30 m the wind became steady from the southeast, and blew a stiff' 
 breeze, while the moisture in the atmosphere became perceptibly less than on the Gth. At S 1 ' the 
 clouds began to break up into detached masses and rapidly disappear. At 10 h the force of the wind 
 had abated considerably, and small masses of fleecy clouds and patches of light haze were all that 
 remained of the ominous gloom of the early morning. The observations with the barometer and 
 thermometer were commenced at 9 1 ' a. m., but, owing to the prevalence of drifting clouds, the acti- 
 nometer and photometer were not used until II 1 ' a. m.; and even then several attempted observations 
 between ll h and noon were interrupted and spoiled by clouds and haze. 
 
 About noon the clouds increased rapidly for a short time, but soon began to disappear again, 
 and at l h 15'" only a light haze remained to dim the brilliancy of the sun. At l h 30 m a few cumulus 
 clouds were seen in the west, but they soon disappeared, and the only clouds seen during the 
 remainder of the afternoon were a few light cirri, which seemed to be collected in the vicinity of the 
 sun. The haze remained during the afternoon, and, though at several times it almost disappeared 
 in the immediate vicinity of the sun, it was generally a serious obstacle to the satisfactory use of the 
 actiuomcter and photometer. I intended to make a series of observations with all the instruments 
 every half hour during the afternoon until the time of first contact, and then as often as possible 
 until after the last contact. The first part of the plan was accomplished, but the several readjust, 
 ments of the actinometer column, which were required by the decrease of the direct solar heat, 
 occupied more time than I anticipated, and diminished the number of observations that I had thought 
 it possible to make. IJesides using the various meteorological instruments, I decided to observe the 
 "first contact," the beginning and end of " totality," the various phenomena of totality, and the 
 " last contact" of the eclipse. 
 
 After some conference with Professor llarkness, I had decided that, as the success of the spec- 
 troscopic observations depended greatly upon the rapidity and steadiness with which the instrument 
 was directed to the different points to be examined, I would, by means of the finder, direct the tele- 
 scope, to which he had attached his spectroscope, to the most prominent objects and, at the same 
 time, note the general phenomena of the totality. 
 
 During the afternoon Mrs. Eastinan recorded my observations with the actinometer, the baro- 
 meter, and the thermometers, and made the observations with the photometer, except during totality, 
 
104 REPORT OF PROFESSOR EASTMAN. 
 
 when, \vitli the assistance of Mr. D. P. Marryatt, jr., of Chicago University, who kindly volunteered 
 his services, she made all the observations that were obtained with the above instruments. 
 
 At two minutes before the computed time of first contact I took my position at the 3".5 tele- 
 scope, the aperture of which had been reduced to l".7o, and carefully examined the sun's disk, upon 
 which were seen very distinctly three groups of small spots and two large single spots. The c\r- 
 piece used had a power of 50, and I obtained a very clear and well-defined image. 
 
 The first apparent contact of the limbs of the sun and moon was observed on the north \\csi 
 limb of the sun at 9 b 59 m 22 S .5 by chronometer, (Negus 1300.) This was several seconds later than 
 the computed time, and from the observed motion of the moon's limb for the next five seconds I 
 concluded that the actual contact occurred from four to five seconds before it was detected by the. 
 eye. 
 
 The edge of the moon, as projected on the sun's disk, was as sharp and well defined as the limb 
 of the sun. 
 
 Soon after returning to the use of the meteorological instruments the actiuometer and photo- 
 meter exhibited a decided change in the amount of heat and light, but the varying amount of ha/.e 
 operated unfavorably upon the attempt to ascertain precisely when the instruments would have 
 detected the change. 
 
 The decrease of heat and light progressed steadily until about 4 h 20'", when an unusual collec- 
 tion of cirri and haze shut off a large portion of the light and heat of the sun, as will be seen by 
 reference to the observations or to the curves on Plate VIII, for nearly ten minutes. 
 
 As the eclipse progressed the wind gradually decreased and blew in little pnffs, the sun's light 
 became visibly diminished, the distant landscape assumed a different hue, and a slight moist chilli- 
 ness seemed to pervade the air. 
 
 'The actiuometer now needed careful attention and frequent adjustment, and the photometer 
 showed that the light was rapidly diminishing. The landscape on the eastern bank of the Des 
 Moines River had a greenish-yellow hue, as if seen through tinted glass, and the shadows of the 
 trees had almost disappeared. The countenances of the observers had a sickly, ghastly appearance, 
 and the peculiar chilliness had increased until it was A T ery uncomfortable. 
 
 What sunlight there was left at 4 h -40 m seemed, as it fell upon the observatory and the adjacent 
 grounds, like the feeble reflected light from a large conflagration at night. The totality was now 
 near, and, after adjusting the actinometer for the observation during totality, I went into the 
 observatory to prepare for the observations. 
 
 The object-glass of the finder which I used for the observations during the total phase was 0.08 
 inch in diameter, and the eye-piece had a power of 10. The definition of the sun's image as exam 
 ined before the eclipse was very good. The neutral-tinted glass for the protection of the eye before 
 totality was in a brass cap fitting loosely over the object-glass. 
 
 At two minutes before the computed time for the beginning of the total phase I carefully exam- 
 ined the portion of the sun then visible, and also that portion of the moon that was well defined, and 
 found the edges of both sharp, with no indentations or irregularities of any kind, and none appeared 
 until the instant of totality, when the cusps of the crescent-like band of light suddenly became 
 obtuse, and, retreating towards the central line of the crescent with the velocity of lightning, the 
 last ray of light disappeared at II 1 ' 1 36 8 .8, by Negus 1300. 
 
 The moment the cusps of the sun's light became obtuse I removed the glass shade, so that the 
 last view of the light was unobstructed and not bright enough to be disagreeable. 
 
 The total obscuration was coincident with the appearance of the corona and protuberances and 
 with the rush of a peculiar, almost tangible darkness. The corona (Figs. 1 and 2, Plate IX) appeared 
 as if a screen had been suddenly withdrawn to present it as a background for the better exhibition 
 of the black body of the moon and the colored prominences. I was considerably disappointed with 
 the appearance of the color and brilliancy as well as with the extreme contour of the corona. Most 
 observers have described the color as " pure" or "clear" white and the light as very brilliant, while, 
 nearly all the published sketches represent the contour as nearly circular and regular and the coronal 
 rays as radial and equally distributed about the body of the sun. 
 
 The color of the corona, as I observed it both with the telescope and without, was a silvery 
 white, slightly modified in the outer portions by an extremely faint tinge of greenish-violet, and ] 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 105 
 
 could not detect the least change in the color or in the position of the rays during totality. The 
 light of the corona was not brilliant perhaps from the effect of haze but appeared more like the 
 pale light from the train of a meteor than like anything else that I could recall at the time. 
 
 The corona seemed to be composed of two portions, both visible to the naked eye, in which 
 with the small instrument which I used, I was unable to trace any similarity of structure. 
 
 The portion nearest the sun was about 1' high, forming nearly a continuous band about the 
 sun, and appeared to be a mass of nebulous light, resembling in structure the most brilliant, irre- 
 solvable portions of the milky way. Its color was silvery white and, like its density, appeared the 
 same throughout its whole extent. The outer portion consisted of rays of light arranged in two 
 different ways. In five places they were arranged into groups resembling star points composed of 
 slightly convergent and radial rays, but elsewhere were disposed as radial lines. The color of the 
 bases of the star points and of the radial lines was the same as that of the inner portion, while 
 the outer portion of the points had a very faint greenish-violet tint. The radial lines were the 
 most prominent. 
 
 Four of the star points project farther from the sun than the ordinary radial lines, and give the 
 contour of the corona the form of a trapezoid. Between the protuberances JSTos. 4 and 5 scarcely 
 any corona was observed. 
 
 As the sunlight disappeared the protuberances seemed to be thrust out from the body of the 
 
 sun, and their maximum size and their color during totality is represented in Figs. 1 and 2, Plate IX. 
 
 I immediately directed the spectroscope to the prominence marked "3," Fig. 3, and aftenvards 
 
 o those marked "5" and 
 " 1." Then I directed it 
 to the points in the corona 
 marked "CV'and "C 2 ," but 
 no spectra were obtained 
 until the slit was directed 
 o that portion of the 
 largest star point marked 
 "C 3 ." Thinking that the 
 end of totality was near, 
 I took my eye away from 
 the finder, and, seeing by 
 the chronometer that 
 there was yet consider- 
 able time before the reap- 
 pearance of the sun, I 
 looked carefully at the 
 co ona, and at the light 
 as it appeared to come 
 from a peculiar twilight 
 in the southwest for about 
 fifteen seconds, when I 
 took up the beat of the 
 chronometer in order to 
 note the time of the end 
 of the total phase. Pro- 
 fessor Harkness at this 
 moment proposed to ex- 
 amine with the spectro- 
 scope the large prominence that was so plainly visible on the sun's western limb. The instrument 
 was instantly turned to this prominence, which proved to be No. 1, (previously examined,) but it 
 had increased nearly fifty per cent, since the first examination. In order to vary the observation, 
 the instrument was directed to the lowest point of the prominence. 
 14* 
 
106 REPORT OF PROFESSOR EASTMAN. 
 
 Upon the completion of this observation the instrument was directed to No. 7, and while in this 
 position the limb of the sun appeared. 
 
 The protuberance marked "1" was the largest of the series, and was the one which most 
 attracted the attention of naked-eye observers. The color of this protuberance, like all the others, 
 was a bright carmine, a dark shade near the base changing to a bright pink, in Nos. 1, 3, and 4, 
 near the top. A faint dark line, as shown in Fig. 3, was the only mark of any kind observed. At 
 the time of the second examination with the spectroscope this protuberance was very brilliant near 
 the base, but it was at this time that the line was seen on the southern portion and that the upper 
 portion had a pinkish tinge. 
 
 The color of No. 2 appeared the same, from the bottom to the top, and when first seen there was 
 a low line of light stretching out toward the west, along the edge of the moon. On the eastern 
 portion of this protuberance, and nearly parallel with its eastern boundary, was a dark line much 
 heavier than the one in the first protuberance. 
 
 No. 3, when first seen, was much more curved than it appears in Fig. 3. About three seconds 
 after its first appearance it seemed to make a half turn from the left toward the right, not gaining 
 length by the movement, when it became fixed in the position shown by the full line in Fig. 3. The 
 dotted line represents its outline before the change. The color of the upper portion of this pro- 
 tuberance was very much lighter than that of the lower almost a light pink. 
 
 When No. 4 was first seen it had the flickering motion of an alcohol flame in a strong current 
 of air. This motion was so violent that at times only a trace of its light was visible beyond the 
 limb of the moon, and, thinking that it would be impossible to examine this prominence with the 
 spectroscope. I concluded not to waste any time in the attempt while the motion continued. In 
 about thirty seconds the motion subsided, and this protuberance became as steady as No. 1. At 
 that time the upper portion had a pinkish tinge. The sketch in Fig. 1, Plate IX, represents the 
 form after the movement ceased. 
 
 In No. 5, and the low range of protuberances to the north of it, the same motion was observed 
 as in No. 4, though in No. 5 it was not so violent, and had ceased when the spectroscopic examina- 
 tion of No. 3 was finished. This motion continued for some time in the low range of protuberances 
 after it ceased in No. 5, but, owing to the fact that my attention was confined to the examination 
 of No. 1, I did not notice when it ceased I only saw that it was perfectly steady before the spec- 
 troscopic observations of the corona were commenced. 
 
 No. G, and the low range of protuberances to the north of it, had the same bright carmine color 
 throughout their whole extent, but had no motion that was perceptible. Toward the end of the 
 total phase Nos. 6 and 7 became connected by a lower ridge of the protuberant mass, which increased 
 in height until the end of totality. No. 7 was motionless like No. 6, and was of the same color. 
 While examining No. 7 the sunlight, preceded about l s .5 by a lighting up of the corona, appeared 
 exactly between Nos. and 7 not as a very attenuated crescent of light, as before the beginning 
 of totality, but like a fleecy flame, resembling somewhat, in size and form, protuberance No. 1. 
 This flame instantly spread along the edge of the moon, and became immediately too strong for the 
 eye. The appearance of this light occurred at ll h 4 m 34 8 .0 by Negus 1300. I immediately made the 
 sketches of the corona (Fig. 3) and the protuberances, (Figs. 1 and 2, Plate IX,) and wrote out my 
 notes on the appearance of the various phenomena. Figs. 3 and 4, and Figs. 1 and 2, Plate 1 X , 
 were sketched from the appearance of the objects in the reversing telescope. 
 
 While my eye was away from the finder, just after the examination of the corona, I gave a few 
 seconds time to the observation of the peculiar light. Owing to my position in the observatory, 1 
 could see only the western sky, in which the darkest portion was just outside the bounding lines of the 
 corona. This portion of the sky had a dark slate color, changing toward the southwest to a leaden 
 hue, but maintaining its dark slate color, with but little modification, as far east and north as I could 
 see. This dark color prevailed in the sky west of the sun nearly down to the horizon. Near the 
 horizon in the southwest the light resembled that of a hazy twilight, slretchiug as far south as I 
 could see and to a point in the western horizon west 15 south. To the northward of this point 
 there was a narrow band of grayish light on the horizon. From my point of observation it seemed 
 that all the light we received (a very small amount) came from this southwestern twilight, though 
 Mrs. Eastman observed a similar phenomenon in the northeast. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OP THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7. 1869. 
 
 107 
 
 I coukl detect 110 resemblance between the light during totality and that of the rnoou, and can 
 conceive of no way in which a comparison could be instituted, except by comparing the light in 
 shadows of equal magnitude in both solar and lunar eclipses. The light more nearly resembled 
 that from a faint twilight, about the time of the appearance of second-magnitude stars. On re- 
 turning to the meteorological observations, I noticed that the shadows were becoming deeper, and 
 the chilliness, so marked during totality, had nearly passed away. 
 
 I found that Mrs. Eastman had made the desired observations with the actinoineter and solar 
 thermometer, but on attempting the observations with the photometer she found the light was 
 insufficient to render the least trace of the " star" at the base of the photometer visible. On being- 
 assured by Mr. Marryatt that the aperture was fully open, another observation was attempted, but 
 the "star" was not visible. A third attempt resulted in a similar failure. 
 
 She then gave up the observation as hopeless, and, for the first time, looked at the corona and 
 protuberances for a few seconds, when, thinking that her eye had become accustomed to the pecu- 
 liar darkness, she made another attempt, with the same result as before. 
 
 On the reappearance of the limb of the sun the " star" could at first be seen only as a faint, 
 blurred image, but gradually the points of the "star," then the ring, and finally the dot, appeared 
 by the light from the full aperture. 
 
 The observations with the photometer, barometer, and thermometers were resumed at 4 h 55 m , 
 and continued without interruption until 6 h . 
 
 The work with the actinometer was recommended at 5 h 15 m , and continued, with a short inter- 
 val at the time of the last contact of the limbs of the sun and moon, until 6 h . 
 
 Tta4 
 
 A few minutes before the last contact I carefully examined the disk of the sun with the 3.5-iuch 
 telescope, and made the sketch of the solar spots a.s seen in Fig. 4. 
 
 The last contact was observed with the 3.5-inch telescope, with the aperture reduced to 1.75 
 inch, and occurred at 12 h l m 32 S .5 by Negus 1300. After G 1 ' the western sky became so obscured by 
 cirrus clouds and haze that no more meteorological observations were attempted. 
 
 The observations on the 7th will be found in Tables X, XI, XII, and XIII, and the results are 
 graphically represented in Plates VI, VII, and VIII. 
 
108 REPORT OF PROFESSOR EASTMAN. 
 
 The curves for the barometer and dry and wet-bulb thermometers show but little deviation from 
 the curve deduced from twelve days' observations. The solar thermometer shows the greatest 
 change, and, as will be seen by reference to Table XIII, was lower eight minutes after totality than 
 during that phase. 
 
 The curves deduced from the observations with the actinometer and photometer fail, on account 
 of the variable effect of the haze, to give that nice determination of the rate of the change in heat 
 and light which I am confident they would have done under a clear sky. The same is true of the 
 results of the observations Avith the solar thermometer.' 
 
 Actinometer: This instrument worked better than I expected it would, though it is larger in 
 many respects than is necessary. The scale is very easily read, and I found that under ordinary 
 circumstances no assistant was needed in making and recording the observations. 
 
 Photometer. lielying on the accuracy of the statement of former observers, that the light during 
 a total eclipse was equal to that of the full moon, the photometer was so constructed as to show the 
 "star" with less light than that of the full moon at an altitude of 30. I was convinced, after my 
 observations at Des Moines, that moonlight was not a proper standard of comparison, and after 
 my return to Washington I made a series of observations with the photometer on the decrease of 
 light after the disappearance of the sun and when there were no clouds. 
 
 I found that the appearance of the light after sunset was very nearly like that during the eclipse, 
 and the results of the several comparisons are given below in the same terms as in Table IX. From 
 several series of observations made in Des Homes I found the observations of Mrs. Eastman and 
 myself so nearly identical that the differences were not appreciable in the terms given in Table IX, 
 so that the following observations of the disappearance of the "ring" will be comparable with 
 those made during the eclipse. 
 
 The following observations were made with the "ring" until it entirely disappeared at C,, 15, 
 and afterwards with the "star" until it was too dark to read the divisions on the pinion-head. The 
 sun disappeared at 5 h 57 m . 
 
 Time. Area. Tirue. Avon, 
 
 /i. 7H. *. sq. in. li. m. s. sq. in. 
 
 COO 0. 01 17 30 0.21 
 
 650 0.64 20 0.55 
 
 6 10 0.74 . 22 30 0.59 
 
 12 30 1.39 25 0.66 
 
 15 1. 93 27 ,30 0. 74 
 
 30 0. 96 
 
 32 30 1. 00 
 
 35 1. 21 
 
 At 6 h 32 m saw Saturn and Antares, and at 6,, 35 m saw second-magnitude stars. 
 
 At 6 h 40 m a faint trace of the " star" could be seen ; still a trace at 6 h 45 m , at which time all 
 the stars in the "Dipper" could be seen. No trace of the "star" at 6 h 47 m 30 s . 
 
 From the above observations and from my impressions at the time of the total phase of the 
 eclipse, I conclude that the light during the totality on August 7 was about equal to that on a clear 
 moonless evening, at the time when third-magnitude stars can be easily seen. 
 
 Chronometers. The chronometers were taken out of the gimbals in Washington and packed in 
 cotton in a small box divided into three compartments. This box was carried in the hand, except 
 when in the cars, and was in the care of Dr. Curtis from Washington to Des Moines. From the 
 time they left Washington until they were packed to return I wound them every day, and, taking 
 No. 1300 as the standard, compared them, with one exception, every day. After the observatory 
 was completed they were replaced in their boxes, and No. 1300 placed in the photographic " dark 
 room." Professor Harkness used 1319, and Dr. Curtis timed his photographic experiments and 
 work by No. 1275. On returning to Washington they were repacked in cotton, as before, and car- 
 ried by Mr. A. E. Le Merle. On July 3, before leaving Washington, No. 1275 was 5h 10 m 43 S .5, No. 
 1300 was 5 h 9 m 41'.5, and No. 1319 was 5 h ll m 31 s .O fast of Washington mean time. On the 31st of 
 August, after returning from Des Moines, No. 1275 was 5 h ll m 1 8 .9, No. 1300 was 5 h 9 m 35 8 .6, and 
 No. 1319 was 5 b 12 3 S .9 fast of Washington mean time. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1809. 109 
 
 Time. According to the determinations of Professor Harkness, the error of No. 1319 at the 
 time of the eclipse was C h 18 m 17 8 .2 fast of local mean time. No. 1300 was compared with No. 1319 
 three times on the 7th August, with the following results: 
 
 It. m. .s-. It. m. .v. //. m. *. 
 
 No. 1300 300 12 30 1C 8 
 
 No. 1319: 3 8 8.0 12 32 8.0 1010 8.7 
 
 Taking, from the above comparisons, the error of No. 1303 to be 2 lu 8 8 .0 less than that of No. 
 1319, we have No. 1300 G' 1 1C 8.C fast of local mean time. 
 
 Applying this error to the times of contact, &c., which I observed, we have 
 
 First contact 3 43 13.9 j 
 
 1.2 f. 
 
 It. m. H. 
 
 3 43 13, 
 
 Beginning of totality 4 45 28 v , 
 
 _ . , n * A > -Local mean time. 
 
 End ot totality 4 48 25.4 C 
 
 Last contact 5 45 23.9 ) 
 
 Duration of total phase 2 57.2 
 
 The meteorological observations were timed b} 1 a pocket- watch showing exact local mean time. 
 The night of the 10th of August was so cloudy that no meteors were seen. A A^ery few were 
 seen on the evening of the 9th, but there were no indications of an unusual display. 
 
 After the eclipse most of my time was devoted to the preparation of a copy of my observations 
 and notes, which I forwarded by express to the Observatory in Washington. 
 
 "When this work was completed and the instruments packed, I left Des Moines as soon as pos- 
 sible, and reached Washington on the 29th of August. 
 
 To the citizens of Des Moines I am greatly indebted for the many social courtesies which 
 rendered the trip to that city one to be remembered with the greatest pleasure. 
 
 The thanks of the party are due the officers of the Northern Central, the Pennsylvania Central, 
 and the Chicago, liock Island and Pacific Hallways for favors received while passing over their 
 respective roads. 
 
 Very respectfully, your obedient servant, 
 
 JOHN E. EASTMAN, 
 Professor of Mathematics United States Navy. 
 Commodore B. F. SANDS, U. S. N., 
 
 Superintendent United States Naval Observatory, Washington, D. C. 
 
110 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR EASTMAN. 
 
 8 
 
 5 
 
 M 
 O 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 S 
 
 8' 8* 
 
 18 8 
 
 CJ X X Cl Ol Oi 
 
 5* w o* c> o* ot 
 
 W X l- CO X CO 
 . X O5 O O O rH 
 
 5 SS8'i3gJgi . . 
 
 : SSSSSSgi5? 
 
 
 
 Ci X '^ ?0"iV-r""" -f i CC G^ X CO 
 
 .XClOSOiOrH 'OOXrHWrH 
 
 ...... 
 
 "- '- f "/_ "/.' 51 Ci 92 SH ^ ^ ^ 
 
 i ~ -^j c; -T ? -r -n- c: i / ( 
 
 .ClCSOiCSOrHrH . 'OOXrHC^i-* 
 
 a* 
 1 
 
 r a> -i o o t>. -^ 
 
 . OS fli O O ^-i 1-1 1-1 
 
 = . .8* .88 - . . . 
 
 < 
 
 CO CO 
 OJ -<N 
 
 .8 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 - 
 ^ 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 o 
 
 S i 5 
 
 (^ CO CO 
 
 4 
 
 O O iS 
 
 -H- eo d 
 
 i- CO X 
 
 fi 
 
 o c- - o 
 
 
 o o o U5 o i-t o ir: x ~ s 
 
 
 co x o w x o i^ i* c~. rt 
 
 
 IS (N O O IS O O ' IS O iS O hS IS 
 
 
 x i> i-* 5 r* < 'C t -i x x x r^ & t"- 
 
 
 O O 3i tS iS IS ' S O iS iS C O 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 " 
 
 x i^ x i-* t-* i>. 7^. x x x x c; i^ o t'. x 
 
 
 (MX1SWOO . . -XOXOCOiO . 
 
 53 
 
 t- CO rH O CO CO ~T ( O X O <^ 
 X I 1 * X X ! t ' X X O CC CO t~* ' 
 
 
 iSOOXC^Tj-O t iGLSthOkSO . 
 
 
 ssKsB^^si . .ssse& . 
 
 a 
 
 OiCOCOOlSiSiS 'rHiSOiSXlSCO 
 
 J 
 
 ^SSSP^SSS .sss^gses 
 
 j 
 
 
 l-H 
 
 . ^OCOX^COiS. OOtOOrnCO 
 
 J 
 
 
 O 
 
 WO^XGOrH X^-i^OCOW 
 X i~* { t* CO t* ' ' ' 1" l^> X 1 l^ CO f* ' 
 
 J 
 
 USlOWOJOOMUS^OOOJCOiSiaiS 
 
 S 
 
 &'&?;!$$* 
 
 4 
 
 . .eo .00 . . . .ininoo 
 oo *r so riaiaS 
 
 S 
 
 . . o o ift QO > " . o 
 o .... . 
 
 QC J O ^f CD 
 
 i 
 
 (M .00 
 
 .rf S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s? 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 ' i -O ' 
 
 1 s? 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 35 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o - 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 ,d 
 
 o . 
 
 
 kS 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 o 
 
 
 IS 
 
 
 1 
 
 "s B 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 Ill 
 
 - 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 K 
 
 H 
 H 
 W 
 
 a 
 3 
 
 i-H 
 i-t 
 
 i 
 
 
 I ( 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 S 5 
 
 i- CO lA 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 t X 
 
 . b o 
 
 J: 
 
 g 
 
 lO O ** 
 
 . 8 83 
 
 Iffl 
 
 $ 
 
 
 O CO O ift rt 
 
 OOO (NOO500 
 
 to 
 
 TT X O CO <-H 
 
 1O' O 00 ^^ ^^ T 
 
 t- 00 !* to CO to 
 
 . 
 
 o w x x r- LO o 
 
 occooomoo 
 
 g 
 
 in 1.0 r-' -* i- re x 
 
 !> CO CO CD CO CO CO 
 
 I- 00 *>. CO CO CO 
 
 
 O O O lO O LO 
 
 1 M O 00 IN O 
 
 -r 
 
 t^- CO CO CO CO CO ' ' 
 
 giSSS8 
 
 . 
 
 *190000019 
 
 i.-; ?: o co >n m o 
 
 
 
 it S c5 to cb -^ i n i~ 
 
 1 -4 Si CO 7- "J C-7 
 
 
 OONOOO O i 
 
 00000.0 . 
 
 i 
 
 gsssss . . . 
 
 SSSS8S . 
 
 . 
 
 1900MOOO . . 
 
 O O - _ 7 1 .O 
 
 i-H 
 
 xO X X O ^H ^* c^ 
 1^- CO CO t^ CO CO CO ' * 
 
 TO O C5 t^. ffl ^J 
 
 
 
 
 O OOO OO 30O 
 
 
 feq 
 
 
 f:f:[:feSSg 
 
 j 
 
 o o m co o o o* 
 
 ^ootoooo . 
 
 s 
 
 SSSS88S . . 
 
 ssssss . 
 
 . 
 
 O O O 1> O I-H 
 
 O O LO t- S-! 
 
 ^H 
 
 KSSSS2 . . . 
 
 i^ ro CD to -< ^f 
 
 t- (-, i>, CD CO CO 
 
 -; 
 
 
 ^0-!<NOO 
 
 8 
 
 
 |^ ^ t^ CO CO CO !O 
 
 *! 
 
 : :i :iS : : : 
 
 US : : : 
 
 4 
 
 . . . o 19 o n 
 o .... 
 
 1O Oi i^ "^ 
 
 iO 19 i9tO ' 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Tf J 
 
 19 tO 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 o S ' ' ' 
 
 ....... 
 
 J 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 u5 
 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 f, 
 
 s . . . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i-H 
 
 o 
 
 s . . . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 : :i: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 43 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 (S3 
 
 rH 
 
 ; I 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 m o o 
 o 
 SP ig tfi 
 
 t^ CO LO 
 
 
 4 
 
 . o o 
 
 o 
 
 . s s 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 0019 
 
 . g g 
 
 00 
 
 S' 
 
 g 
 
 O CC OOO 19 
 
 o* cj to o' r^ 
 
 O & 00 Ol 00 
 
 ooooooo 
 co 10 oi u5 -r ^ 
 
 O2O50C t^COOO 
 
 
 
 000<NOO 
 
 S 
 
 
 SSSSSo 
 
 
 O O>O lOOO . 
 
 O O .9 O 1C O 
 
 rr 
 
 
 gggssg 
 
 
 1OO1900OOOOOO 
 
 
 n 
 
 ssssss^ 
 
 S -2 ^Cgj^ gg 
 
 
 
 O CO CO X O A ' 
 
 o! 
 
 
 
 
 O O O X O O O - 
 
 
 
 
 Sco . 
 
 " 
 
 O iC O O O CO O O - 
 
 0.000000 t~ 
 
 
 
 S|''*g*^fe 
 
 88&3888SS 
 
 . 
 
 OOiOiOirt O 01 - 
 
 O 5J1O1OO 00 
 
 ^H 
 
 ^-1 
 
 
 
 . . 
 
 ifl O LA b. kA iA 
 
 x o o e o M 
 
 
 
 co x o^ * 65 o> 
 
 ^H ^H i-H i-H i-H 
 
 2^?5Sg . 
 
 
 
 19 19 10 .0 
 
 & 
 
 if? CO O C: X Ot O ^ O 
 'T* X CN W W ^ > Of ^ 
 
 O O J> ^- O5 T-< 00 
 O > T O t^ (>> rH 
 
 A 
 
 00 
 
 . .1A .WOO . - - 
 
 lA 00 lA 
 i i O ' O ^H i . 
 
 i-H i 1 i t 
 
 o o >o . . 
 
 d s ff 
 
 . ^^ CO t*. " " ' 
 
 . 
 
 A 
 
 , . .0000 ' . 
 o .... 
 
 co -*r o -^f 
 
 GC 
 00 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 o i 'S 'S f 
 
 
 
 CO 1-* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 'S ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 _ 
 
 
 i 
 
 ' . 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 g . . . 
 
 
 
 i-H 
 
 o . 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 SJCSwSwOTCOCO 
 
 s 
 
 1 1 
 
 
112 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR EASTMAN. 
 TABLE V. WEATHER. 
 
 Day. 
 
 Hour. 
 
 Clouds. 
 
 Portion 
 cloudy. 
 
 Wind. 
 
 Day. 
 
 Hour. 
 
 Clouds. 
 
 Portion 
 cloudy. 
 
 Wind. 
 
 3irectiou. 
 
 ''orce. 
 
 direction. 
 
 Torce. 
 
 1869. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1869. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 July 24 
 
 9 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 SW. 
 
 3 
 
 July 28 
 
 7 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 XW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 10 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 sw. 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 N\V. 
 
 1 
 
 
 11 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 SW. 
 
 3 
 
 9 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 W. 
 
 1 
 
 
 Noon 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 sw. 
 
 4 
 
 
 10 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 2 
 
 
 1 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 sw. 
 
 4 
 
 
 11 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 2 
 
 
 2 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 sw. 
 
 4 
 
 
 Noon 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 2 
 
 
 3 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 sw. 
 
 5 
 
 
 1 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 2 
 
 
 4 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 sw. 
 
 4 
 
 
 2 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 2 
 
 
 5 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 sw. 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 Clear - 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 2 
 
 
 6 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 sw. 
 
 2 
 
 
 4 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 2 
 
 
 9 
 
 Clear 
 
 .0 ' 
 
 sw. 
 
 1 
 
 
 5 
 
 C'leai- 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .6 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 
 July 25 
 
 9 
 
 C. K. S. 
 
 10 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 7 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 XW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 10 
 
 C. K. S. 
 
 10 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 8 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 XW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 11 
 
 C. K. S. 
 
 10 
 
 NW. 
 
 2 
 
 
 9 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 x\v. 
 
 1 
 
 
 Noon 
 
 C.S. 
 
 10 
 
 NW. 
 
 2 
 
 
 10 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 C.K. 
 
 10 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 11 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 XW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 
 C.K. 
 
 10 
 
 NW. 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 C.K. 
 
 10 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 July 29 
 
 
 
 Clew- 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 4 
 
 C.K. 
 
 10 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 5 
 
 C. K.&N. 
 
 10 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 July 26 
 
 8 
 
 C.K. 
 
 1 
 
 NW. 
 
 2 
 
 
 4 
 
 S. 
 
 Slight 
 
 XW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 9 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 xw. 
 
 3 
 
 
 5 
 
 S.' 
 
 1 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 10 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 3 
 
 
 6 
 
 C. 
 
 Slight 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 11 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 xw. 
 
 2 
 
 
 7 
 
 C. 
 
 Slight 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 
 
 Noon 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 2 
 
 
 8 
 
 C. 
 
 Slight 
 
 NE. 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 9 
 
 C.K. 
 
 2 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 10 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 
 
 3 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 11 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 
 
 4 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 Noon 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 X. 
 
 1 
 
 
 5 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 6 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 Clear 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 
 
 7 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 3 
 
 Haze" 
 
 1 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 
 
 8 . 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 4 
 
 Haze" 
 
 1 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 
 
 9 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW: 
 
 1 
 
 
 5 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (i 
 
 Haze* 
 
 1 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 
 July 27 
 
 7 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 7 
 
 C.S. 
 
 4 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 9 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 July 30 
 
 7 
 
 Clear 
 
 II 
 
 SW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 11 
 
 Th'kha/e 
 
 10 
 
 S. SW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 9 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 sw. 
 
 1 
 
 
 Noon 
 
 Haze C.K 
 
 10 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 
 11 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 sw. 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 C.K. 
 
 10 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 
 Noon 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 sw. 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 
 C.K. 
 
 10 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 sw. 
 
 1 
 
 
 3 
 
 N. 
 
 10 
 
 sw. 
 
 1 
 
 
 3 
 
 Clear 
 
 . 
 
 sw. 
 
 1 
 
 
 4 
 
 N. 
 
 10 
 
 NE. 
 
 1 
 
 
 5 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 sw. 
 
 1 
 
 
 5 
 
 N. 
 
 10 
 
 NE. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 * In tli< 
 
 west. 
 
 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1809. 
 TABLE V. WEATHER Continued. 
 
 113 
 
 
 
 
 
 Wind. 
 
 
 
 
 Wind. 
 
 Day, 
 
 Hour. 
 
 Clouds. 
 
 Portion 
 cloudy. 
 
 
 Day. 
 
 Hour. 
 
 Clouds. 
 
 Portion 
 cloudy. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Direction. 
 
 Force. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Direction. 
 
 Force. 
 
 1869. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 July 31 
 
 f, 
 
 Clew 
 
 
 
 SW. 
 
 1 
 
 Aug. 5 
 
 8 
 
 N. 
 
 10 
 
 E. 
 
 2 
 
 
 9 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 8W. 
 
 1 
 
 
 9 
 
 C. K. S. 
 
 10 E. 
 
 2 
 
 
 Noon 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 SW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 10 
 
 C. K. S. 
 
 10 
 
 E. 
 
 2 
 
 
 :s 
 
 Cleat 
 
 
 
 SW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 11 
 
 K.S. 
 
 9 
 
 E. 
 
 2 
 
 
 fl 
 
 C. S. 
 
 3 
 
 SW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 Noon 
 
 K.S. 
 
 8 
 
 E. 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 K. S. 
 
 8 
 
 E. 
 
 3 
 
 Aug. 1 
 
 9 
 
 C. Haze 
 
 10 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 
 K.S. 
 
 10 
 
 E. 
 
 2 
 
 
 3 
 
 C. Haze 
 
 8 
 
 SW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 3 
 
 K.S. 
 
 9 
 
 E. 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 K.S. 
 
 9 
 
 E. 
 
 3 
 
 Aug. y 
 
 9 
 
 C. K. 
 
 9 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 5 
 
 K.S. 
 
 9 E. 
 
 3 
 
 
 10 
 
 C.K. 
 
 8 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 
 
 6 
 
 K.S. 
 
 10 E. 
 
 2 
 
 
 It 
 
 C.K. 
 
 f> 
 
 N. 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Noou 
 
 C. K. 
 
 4 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 C.K. 
 
 S 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 
 Aug. fi 
 
 9 
 
 K.S. 
 
 10 
 
 NE. 
 
 3 
 
 
 9 
 
 C.K. 
 
 3 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 
 
 10 
 
 K.S. 
 
 10 
 
 NE. 
 
 3 
 
 
 :i 
 
 C.K. 
 
 3 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 
 
 11 
 
 K.S. 
 
 10 NE. 
 
 3 
 
 
 4 
 
 C.K. 
 
 2 
 
 X. 
 
 1 
 
 
 Noon 
 
 N. 
 
 10 NE. 
 
 3 
 
 
 5 
 
 C.K. 
 
 2 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 N. 10 NE. 
 
 3 
 
 
 i; 
 
 C.K. 
 
 1 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 
 N. 
 
 10 NE. 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 K. 8. 
 
 10 NE. 
 
 3 
 
 Aug. 3 
 
 7 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 SE. 
 
 I 
 
 4 K. 8. 
 
 10 
 
 N. NE. 
 
 3 
 
 
 8 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 K. 8. 
 
 10 
 
 N. NE. 
 
 3 
 
 
 9 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 ii 
 
 (i 
 
 K.S. 
 
 10 N.NE. 
 
 3 
 
 
 10 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 11 
 Noon 
 
 Clear 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 
 SE. 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 Aug. rf 
 
 9 
 10 
 
 C.K. 
 C.K. 
 
 1 SE. 
 
 1 ' SE. 
 
 2 
 2 
 
 
 1 
 
 K. 
 
 1 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 
 11 
 
 Clear 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 . 
 
 K. 
 
 1 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 
 Noou 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 SE. 
 
 2 
 
 
 3 
 
 K. 
 
 1 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 SE. 
 
 2 
 
 
 4 
 
 K. 
 
 Slight 
 
 S. 
 
 I 
 
 
 2 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 SE. 
 
 3 
 
 
 5 
 
 C.K. 
 
 1 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 
 3 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 SE. 
 
 2 
 
 
 6 
 
 C.K. 
 
 1 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 
 4 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 SE. 
 
 2 
 
 
 7 
 
 K.S. 
 
 2 
 
 Calm 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 SE. 
 
 2 
 
 
 8 
 
 C. K. S. 
 
 4 
 
 NW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 6 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 Aug. 4 
 
 8 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 S. 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 S. 
 
 2 
 
 Aug. 9 
 
 9 
 
 C. 
 
 2 
 
 SE. 
 
 2 
 
 
 10 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 S. 
 
 2 
 
 
 Noou 
 
 C.K. 
 
 5 
 
 SE. 
 
 2 
 
 
 11 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 S. 
 
 3 
 
 
 O 
 
 C.K. 
 
 3 
 
 SE. 
 
 2 
 
 
 Noon 
 
 Haze 
 
 Slight 
 
 S. 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Haze 
 
 Slight 
 
 S. 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Haze 
 
 Very slig't 
 
 SW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Haze 
 
 Very slig't 
 
 SW. 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 Haze 
 
 Slight 
 
 SW. 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 C. Haze' 
 
 1 
 
 SW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 C. Haze* 
 
 1 
 
 SW. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * In the 
 
 west. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 15* 
 
114 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR EASTMAN. 
 
 TABLE VI. EXTREME TEMPERATURES. 
 
 Day. . 
 
 Maximum. 
 
 Minimum. 
 
 Day. 
 
 Maximum. 
 
 Minimum. 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 July 24 
 
 90.5 
 
 67.0 
 
 August 1 
 
 87.5 
 
 73.5 
 
 25 
 
 75.5 
 
 57.0 
 
 2 
 
 87.5 
 
 64.0 
 
 26 
 
 83.5 
 
 62.0 
 
 3 
 
 91.0 
 
 70. 5 
 
 27 
 
 85.8 
 
 60.3 
 
 4 
 
 94.0 
 
 70.0 
 
 28 
 
 76.0 
 
 52.0 
 
 5 
 
 73.3 
 
 60.0 
 
 29 
 
 79.0 
 
 53.0 
 
 6 
 
 65.0 
 
 59.0. 
 
 30 
 
 82.0 
 
 59.0 
 
 8 
 
 80.5 
 
 56.5 
 
 31 
 
 85.5 
 
 63.5 
 
 9 
 
 88.0 
 
 65.0 
 
 RAIN. 
 
 [No measurements were made before July 24.] 
 
 July 25. Rain at l h a. m. Amount 
 
 27. Rain during the afternoon. Amount 
 
 0.42 inch. 
 0.135 inch. 
 
 August 2. Light rain at l h a. m. Amount ..... - 0.085 inch. 
 
 5. A few drops of rain at 8 h a. m. and 4 h p. m. 
 
 6. A light, drizzling rain from 11" 30 m a. m. to I 1 ' 30 p. m. 
 
 Total amount . . - - 0.640 inch. 
 
 The following table exhibits the meaii results of the meteorological observations on July 24, 
 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, and August 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 8. On July 25 and 27 no observations were made 
 at C h . This fact will explain the anomalous results at that hour. 
 
 TABLE VII. 
 
 T/mv 
 
 
 Thermometers. 
 
 -tiour. 
 
 Barometer. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Wet. 
 
 Solar 
 
 
 in. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 29.09 
 
 73.3 
 
 67.6 
 
 112.7 
 
 10 
 
 29.08 
 
 74.3 
 
 68.1 
 
 115.6 
 
 11 29. 07 
 
 76.1 
 
 68.5 
 
 118.6 
 
 Noon 
 
 29.06 
 
 76.6 
 
 68.9 
 
 119.6 
 
 1 
 
 29.05 
 
 78.2 
 
 69.5 
 
 121.6 
 
 2 29.04 
 
 78.4 
 
 69.4 
 
 117.4 
 
 3 
 
 29.03 
 
 78.3 
 
 69.3 
 
 115.0 
 
 4 
 
 29. 035 
 
 77.1 
 
 69.0 
 
 106.1 
 
 5 
 
 29.04 
 
 76.0 
 
 68.8 
 
 95.0 
 
 6 
 
 29.05 
 
 76.2 
 
 69.5 
 
 87.5 
 
 The curves in Plates VI and VII were constructed from the data in the above table and from 
 the observations on the 7th. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 115 
 
 The following table shows the mean results of the observations with the actinoineter on July 
 29 and August 4. The solar eftect is given in millimetres, and 21 mm .7 represents 1 Fahrenheit- 
 The exposures were 30 seconds in each case. 
 
 TABLE VIII. 
 
 Date and observation. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 Date and observation. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 It. m. mm. 
 
 
 A. in. mm. 
 
 
 July 29 6 40 12.6 
 
 
 Aug. 4 8 30 13.9 
 
 
 78 16. 
 
 
 90 12. 8 
 
 Haze. 
 
 7 35 14. 7 
 
 
 9 30 -14.8 
 
 
 8 10 16.3 
 
 
 10 16. 7 
 
 
 8 47 16.6 
 
 
 10 30 17.0 
 
 
 90 17. 3 
 
 
 11 16.7 
 
 
 9 35 16.8 
 
 
 11 30 15. 1 
 
 Lower cap oft' shading tube. 
 
 10 10 17.2 
 
 
 12 13.6 
 
 Hazy. 
 
 10 32 17. 8 
 
 
 1 14.0 
 
 Hazy. 
 
 11 8 20.8 
 
 
 1 30 14.2 
 
 Hazy. 
 
 12 5 23. 8 
 
 
 20 13. 9 
 
 Hazy. 
 
 1 15 25. 4 
 
 
 2 30 14.7 
 
 Hazy. 
 
 2 20 22.1 
 
 
 30 11.8 : Hazy. 
 
 32 14.2 
 
 Hazy. 
 
 3 30 12.4 : Hazy. 
 
 4 42 15. 
 
 Hazy. 
 
 40 11.6 
 
 Hazy. 
 
 50 10. 8 
 
 Hazy. 
 
 4 30 8.7 
 
 Very hazy. [and haze. 
 
 5 25 10.4 
 
 
 5 12. 4 
 
 Sun shining through rift in cirri 
 
 60 7.9 
 
 Hazy. 
 
 5 30 3.5 Cloudy. 
 
 At 6 h 30 two minutes exposure produced no effect on 
 
 At ti h SO" 1 the sun was olisrurcd by cirrus clouds. 
 
 the height of the column. 
 
 
 OBSERVATIONS WITH THE PHOTOMETER. 
 
 The following table shows the variations in the area of the aperture through which light is 
 admitted to the photometer tube to render the "ring" in the "star" visible. The area is given 
 in square inches. 
 
 TABLE IX. 
 
 7(. 
 
 m. 
 
 Area. 
 
 ft. 
 
 m. 
 
 Area. 
 
 July 2U 4 
 
 30 
 
 1.10 
 
 July 29 I 
 
 
 
 0.02 
 
 4 
 
 45 
 
 0.26 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 .02 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 .06 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 .06 
 
 5 
 
 15 
 
 .04 
 
 3 
 
 30 
 
 .07 
 
 5 
 
 30 
 
 .04 
 
 4 
 
 30 
 
 .07 
 
 5 
 
 45 
 
 .04 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 .10 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 .04 
 
 5 
 
 30 
 
 .08 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 .06 
 
 5 
 
 45 
 
 .10 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 .03 
 
 6 
 
 (1 
 
 .09 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 .03 
 
 6 
 
 30 
 
 .11 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 .01 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 .12 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 .01 
 
 7 
 
 ir> 
 
 .12 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 .004 
 
 
 
 
116 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR EASTMAN. 
 
 TABLE X. ACTINOMETER OBSERVATIONS, AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d -a 
 
 ' - j^ 
 
 ; 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sun 
 
 
 
 
 
 '5 a 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 Hour. 
 
 S* 
 
 V 
 CM 
 
 O 
 rtt 
 
 O 
 Shade 
 
 First 
 reading. 
 
 Second 
 reading. 
 
 Change 
 
 1 
 v 
 
 *S '* 
 
 2 
 s 3 
 
 ll 
 
 1 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 is 
 
 'i ^ ^ 
 
 E- " 
 
 *^2 
 
 s 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 In snn. 
 
 In shade. 
 
 
 
 ' .2 -5' 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~. 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 EC 
 
 n 
 
 H 
 
 & 
 
 B 
 
 h. m. 8. 
 
 8. 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm. 
 
 ram. 
 
 Will. 
 
 mm. 
 
 HI HI. 
 
 
 
 mm. 
 
 HI HI . 
 
 
 
 
 
 14.0 
 
 19.2 
 
 5.2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 17.0 
 
 9. 5 
 
 
 7.5 
 
 11.9 
 
 
 
 11.7 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 10.8 
 
 11.3 
 
 3.5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 13.0 
 
 8.0 
 
 
 - 5.0 
 
 10.6 
 
 
 
 10.4 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 21.2 
 
 29.0 
 
 7.8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 ;io. o 
 
 26.3 
 
 
 - 3.7 
 
 10.7 
 
 224.5 
 
 67.0 
 
 10.5 
 
 10.8 
 
 
 
 
 
 27.2 
 
 33.5 
 
 6.3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 35.0 
 
 28.0 
 
 
 - 7.0 
 
 11.2 
 
 
 
 11.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 25.5 
 
 27.5 
 
 2.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 32.5 
 
 16.0 
 
 
 - 6.5 
 
 10. 5 
 
 
 
 10.3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 13.5 
 
 19.5 
 
 6.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 la r 
 
 13.5 
 
 
 - 5.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 87.8 
 
 95. 8 
 
 8.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 12 30 95.0 
 
 92.0 
 
 
 3.0 
 
 5.5 
 
 224.5 
 
 70.0 
 
 5.4 
 
 5. 4t 
 
 
 O 91-0 
 
 88.0 
 
 - 3.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 86. 5 
 
 82.5 
 
 
 - 4.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 58. 
 
 67.5 
 
 9. 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 72. 8 
 
 69.0 
 
 
 - 3.8 
 
 14.1 
 
 
 
 13.8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 72.8 
 
 83.8 
 
 11.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i :;o o 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 85.5 
 
 82.0 
 
 
 - 3. 5 
 
 14.5 
 
 224. 5 
 
 69.0 
 
 14.2 
 
 14. Of 
 
 
 
 
 
 86.0 
 
 97.0 
 
 11.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 98.8 
 
 94.8 
 
 
 4.0 
 
 14.3 
 
 
 
 14.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 97.0 
 
 106.5 
 
 'J.5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 130. 5 
 
 137.0 
 
 0.5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 139.8 
 
 135.0 
 
 
 - 4.8 
 
 11.3 
 
 
 
 11.1 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 135.0 
 
 141.5 
 
 6.5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 200 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 140. 5 
 
 136.5 
 
 
 4.0 
 
 10.4 
 
 224. 5 
 
 72.0 
 
 10.2 
 
 10.7$ 
 
 
 
 
 
 138.5 
 
 144.8 
 
 6.3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 143.8 
 
 139.0 
 
 
 - 4.8 
 
 10.9 
 
 
 
 10.7 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 139.3 
 
 142.5 
 
 5.9 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 153.5 
 
 161.0 
 
 7.5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 160.0 
 
 155.0 
 
 5. 
 
 12.2 
 
 
 
 12.0 
 
 
 2 30 
 
 30 
 
 o 
 
 156.5 
 
 163.5 
 
 7.0 
 
 
 224.5 
 
 73.0 
 
 
 10. 9f 
 
 
 
 
 
 164.0 
 
 161.0 
 
 
 - 3.0 
 
 10.0 
 
 
 
 9.8 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 164.5 
 
 171.5 
 
 7.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 101.0 
 
 110.0 
 
 9.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 115.5 
 
 U3.5 
 
 - 2.0 
 
 11.1 
 
 
 
 10.9 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 118.3 
 
 127.5 
 
 9.2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 300 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 128. .0 
 
 125.8 
 
 
 2.2 
 
 10.6 
 
 224.5 
 
 72.0 
 
 10.4 
 
 10.4 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 130.0 
 
 137.5 
 
 . 7.5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 140.2 
 
 138.0 
 
 
 2.2 
 
 10.2 
 
 
 
 10.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 142.5 
 
 151.0 
 
 8.5 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * Interrupted by clouds. 
 
 t Cloudy. 
 
 J Clear. 
 
 Hazy. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 117 
 
 TABLE X. ACTINOMETEB OBSERVATIONS, AUGUST 7, 1869 Continued. 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 
 "3 -d 
 
 *S 
 
 
 _^ 
 
 Hour. 
 
 iodof expoKii 
 
 Sun 
 
 
 
 Shade 
 
 First 
 rciiding. 
 
 Second 
 reading. 
 
 
 Change 
 
 ar eft'ect. 
 
 ?! 
 
 i% 
 
 literature < 
 liquid. 
 
 aj ^3 
 
 Jt-H QJ 
 
 ' 7" 
 
 a 
 
 e 
 
 in solar effec 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 In sun. 
 
 In shade. 
 
 i 
 
 i- 3 * 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 u 
 
 s 
 
 h. m. . 
 
 . 
 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm. 
 
 o 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm. 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 139. 5 
 
 147.5 
 
 8.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 148. 5 
 
 147.0 
 
 
 1.5 
 
 10.5 
 
 
 
 10.3 
 
 
 3 30 
 
 30 
 
 O 
 
 152.0 
 
 162. 
 
 10.0 
 
 
 
 222. H 
 
 68.0 
 
 
 10.8 
 
 
 
 
 
 163.0 
 
 161.0 
 
 
 - 2.0 
 
 11.5 
 
 
 
 11.2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 167.0 
 
 176.0 
 
 9.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 101.8 
 
 108.0 
 
 6.2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 110.5 
 
 109.0 
 
 1.5 
 
 7.9 
 
 
 
 7.7 
 
 
 400 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 108.0 
 
 114.5 
 
 6.5 
 
 
 
 222.8 
 
 66.0 
 
 
 7.6 
 
 
 
 
 
 115.0 
 
 112.5 
 
 
 2.5 
 
 7.7 
 
 
 
 7.5 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 113.0 
 
 117.0 
 
 4.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 151.0 
 
 154.5 
 
 3.5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 154.0 
 
 151.0 
 
 
 - 3.0 
 
 6.2 
 
 
 
 6.1 
 
 
 4 10 
 
 30 
 
 o 
 
 151.5 
 
 154. "> 
 
 3.0 
 
 
 
 222.5 
 
 67.0 
 
 
 5.2 
 
 
 
 
 
 153.0 
 
 151.0 
 
 
 - 2.0 
 
 4.3 
 
 
 
 4.2 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 149.4 
 
 151.0 
 
 1.6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 149.0 
 
 149. 5 
 
 ,5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 149.0 
 
 144. 5 
 
 
 4.5 4.9 
 
 * 
 
 
 4.8 
 
 
 4 20 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 143.0 
 
 143. 3 
 
 .3 
 
 
 
 222. 5 
 
 67.0 
 
 
 4. 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 141.5 
 
 137. 5 
 
 
 4.0 
 
 3. 9 
 
 
 
 _ :i. 8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 136.8 
 
 136. 
 
 .5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 125. 5 
 
 123.5 
 
 2.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 120.0 
 
 115.0 
 
 
 - 5.0 
 
 2.8 
 
 
 
 2.7 
 
 
 4 30 
 
 30 
 
 o 
 
 112.5 
 
 110.0 
 
 2.5 
 
 
 
 222. 5 
 
 65.0 
 
 
 2.5 
 
 
 
 
 
 106.5 
 
 101.5 
 
 
 - 5.0 
 
 2.5 
 
 
 
 2.4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 98.0 
 
 95.5 
 
 2.5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 76.5 
 
 73.5 
 
 3.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 69. 5 
 
 64.5 
 
 
 5.0 
 
 1.8 
 
 
 
 1.8 
 
 
 4 35 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 59.5 
 
 56.0 
 
 3.5 
 
 
 
 222. 5 
 
 83.0 
 
 
 1.3 
 
 
 
 
 
 53. 
 
 48.5 
 
 
 4.5 
 
 .8 
 
 
 
 .8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 46. 5 
 
 42.5 
 
 - 4.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 45 
 
 30 
 
 o 
 
 17.2 
 
 16.4 
 
 .8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 45 30 
 
 
 
 
 16.4 
 
 15.6 
 
 
 - .8 
 
 .0 
 
 222. 5 
 
 61.0 
 
 
 0.0 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 157.0 
 
 156.0 
 
 1.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 152.2 
 
 148.0 
 
 
 - 4.2 
 
 3.4 
 
 
 
 3.3 
 
 
 5 15 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 145. 5 
 
 144.9 
 
 .6 
 
 
 
 221.5 
 
 66.0 
 
 
 3.2 
 
 
 
 ffi 
 
 .143. 
 
 139.3 
 
 
 3.7 
 
 3.1 
 
 
 
 3.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 137.5 
 
 137.0 
 
 .5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
118 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR EASTMAN. 
 
 TABLE X. ACTINOMETER OBSERVATIONS, AUGUST 7, 1869 Continued. 
 
 
 9 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c -a 
 
 fad 
 
 i 
 
 _^ 
 
 
 
 
 Sun 
 
 
 
 
 
 '5 a 
 
 
 = 
 
 v 
 
 ,t 
 
 Hour. 
 
 Period of expo 
 
 
 
 Shade 
 
 
 First 
 reading. 
 
 Second 
 reading. 
 
 Change 
 
 Solar eft'ect. 
 
 s J 
 
 "*- 
 
 o 
 
 Q 
 
 Pi 
 
 Temperature 
 liquid. 
 
 Sfc V 
 g 
 
 . -5 
 
 rt 
 
 1 
 
 Mean solar eft 
 
 In sun. In shade. 
 
 A. m. s. 
 
 s. 
 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm. mm. 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm. 
 
 o 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm. 
 
 
 
 
 
 122.5 
 
 120.8 
 
 1-7 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 117.0 
 
 111.0 
 
 - 6.0 . 
 
 4.3 
 
 
 
 4.2 
 
 
 5 30 
 
 30 
 
 O 
 
 116.5 
 
 114.8 
 
 1.7 
 
 
 221.5 
 
 65.0 
 
 
 4.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 100.5 
 
 95.0 
 
 5.5 
 
 3.9 
 
 
 
 3.7 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 91.0 
 
 89.5 
 
 1.5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 51.5 
 
 50.3 
 
 1.2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 48.0 
 
 43.0 
 
 5.0 
 
 3.9 
 
 
 
 3.8 
 
 
 5 50 
 
 30 
 
 O 
 
 39.0 
 
 38.0 
 
 " 
 
 
 221.5 
 
 62.0 
 
 
 4.3 
 
 
 
 
 
 33.8 
 
 28.0 
 
 i 5.8 
 
 4.9 
 
 
 
 4.8 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 25.3 
 
 24.5 
 
 -.8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 3.4 
 
 3.3 
 
 .1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3.0 
 
 2.6 
 
 .4 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 .2 
 
 
 600 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 2.4 
 
 2.2 
 
 .2 
 
 
 221. 5 
 
 55.0 
 
 
 0.2 
 
 
 
 
 
 2.0 
 
 1.6 
 
 .4 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 .8 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Curve II ou Plate VIII is a graphical representation of tlic changes in the heating power of 
 the sun on the day of the eclipse. 
 
 The following table exhibits the observations with the photometer on August 7. The observa- 
 tions ou July 20 were made in a similar manner, but only the results are given in Table IX. The 
 numbers tabulated below indicate revolutions of the pinion head, which, when the aperture is open 
 o its maximum size, reads 0.21 rev., and when completely closed reads 1.96 rev. 
 
 TABLE XI. 
 
 /i. MI. r. 
 
 /(. HI. r. 
 
 1.76 
 
 1.75 
 
 1.82 
 
 1.78 
 
 1.82 
 
 2 30 1.76 
 
 August 7 11 a. m. 1.80 
 
 1.72 
 
 1.79 
 
 1.77 
 
 1.76 
 
 1.71 
 
 1.73 
 
 1.70 
 
 1 30 p. in. 1. 72 
 
 3 1.72 Hazy. 
 
 1.77 
 
 1. 77 
 
 1.76 
 
 1.77 
 
 1.77 
 
 1.74 
 
 1.76 
 
 1.75 
 
 2 1.70 
 
 3 30 1.74 
 
 1.77 
 
 1.73 
 
 1.80 
 
 1.70 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OP AUGUST 7, 1809. 
 TABLE XI Continued. 
 
 119 
 
 
 
 /i. HI. r. 
 
 li. in. r. 
 
 1. 75 
 
 1.42 
 
 1.71 
 
 1.42 
 
 3 50 1.G9 
 
 4 55 1.44 
 
 1.80 
 
 1.38 
 
 1.78 
 
 1.42 
 
 1.68 
 
 1.59 
 
 1.70 
 
 1.70 
 
 40 1.67 
 
 5 5 1. 58 
 
 1.74 
 
 1.64 
 
 1.69 
 
 1.70 
 
 1.68 
 
 1.74 
 
 1.70 
 
 1.74 
 
 4 10 1.64 
 
 5 15 1. 69 
 
 1.63 
 
 1.74 
 
 1.69 
 
 1.65 
 
 1.51 
 
 1.64 
 
 1.60 Considerable increase 
 
 1.67 
 
 4 20 1. 52 of cirri and haze over 
 
 5 30 1.65 Hazy. 
 
 1.57 the sun. 
 
 1.67 
 
 1.57 
 
 1.60 
 
 1.64 
 
 1.60 
 
 1.67 
 
 1.59 
 
 4 30 1.63 
 
 5 45 1. 66 Haze and cirri. 
 
 1.66 
 
 1.61 
 
 1.65 
 
 1.68 
 
 1.56 
 
 1.71 
 
 1.50 
 
 1.71 
 
 4 35 1.54 
 
 60 1. 70 Quite clear. 
 
 1.60 
 
 1.69 
 
 1.54 
 
 1.69 
 
 4 46 "Star"invisihle. 
 
 
 Variations in the area of the aperture admitting light. 
 
 TABLE XII. 
 
 7i. 
 
 m. 
 
 Area. 
 
 It. 
 
 m. 
 
 Area. 
 
 August 7 11 
 
 
 
 0.02 
 
 August 7 4 
 
 20 
 
 .12 
 
 1 
 
 30 
 
 .03 
 
 4 
 
 30 
 
 .06 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 .03 
 
 4 
 
 35 
 
 .12 
 
 2 
 
 30 
 
 .03 
 
 4 
 
 55 
 
 .18 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 .04 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 .12 
 
 3 
 
 30 
 
 .03 
 
 5 
 
 15 
 
 .04 
 
 3 
 
 50 
 
 .03 
 
 5 
 
 30 
 
 .06 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 .04 
 
 5 
 
 45 
 
 .07 
 
 4 
 
 10 
 
 .05 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 .04 
 
 Using the quantities in the above table as linear ordinates, the variation of light on the 7th 
 of August may be graphically represented as in the curve in Plate VIII. 
 
120 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR EASTMAN. 
 TABLE XIII. METEOROLOGICAL, OBSERVATIONS, AUGUST 7, 1839. 
 
 Maximum thermometer 
 Minimum thermometer 
 
 Hour. 
 
 Barometer. 
 
 Thermometers. 
 
 Clouds. 
 
 Portion 
 cloudy. 
 
 Wind. 
 
 Dry. 
 
 Wet. 
 
 Solar, 
 
 Direction. 
 
 Force. 
 
 h. m. 
 
 in. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 29. 35 
 
 63.8 
 
 59.3 
 
 108.0 
 
 C. K. Hazy 
 
 2 
 
 SE. 
 
 3 
 
 10 
 
 .33 
 
 67.0 
 
 61.1 
 
 118.0 
 
 C. K. Hazy 
 
 2 
 
 SE. 
 
 3 
 
 11 
 
 .33 
 
 70.8 
 
 63.0 
 
 122.7 
 
 C. K. Hazy 
 
 1 
 
 SE. 
 
 3 
 
 Noou 
 
 .31 
 
 73.0 
 
 64.0 
 
 127.0 
 
 C. K. Hazy 
 
 1 
 
 SE. 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 .31 
 
 73.5 
 
 63.5 
 
 130.5 
 
 C. K. Hazy 
 
 1 
 
 SE. 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 .30 
 
 74.0 
 
 63.8 
 
 127.0 
 
 C. K. Hazy 
 
 1 
 
 SE. 
 
 3 
 
 2 30 
 
 .28 
 
 73.3 
 
 63.3 
 
 121.8 
 
 C. Haze 
 
 1 
 
 SE. 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 .28 
 
 74.0 
 
 63.5 
 
 119.0 
 
 C. Haze 
 
 1 
 
 SE. 
 
 2 
 
 3 30 
 
 .27 
 
 74.0 
 
 63.5 
 
 118.5 
 
 C. Haze 
 
 1 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 3 50 
 
 .27 
 
 73.0 
 
 63.0 
 
 107.0 
 
 C. Haze 
 
 t 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 4 20 
 
 .27 
 
 71. 5 
 
 62.5 
 
 88.8 
 
 C. Haze 
 
 1 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 4 30 
 
 .27 
 
 70.5 
 
 62.0 
 
 79.0 
 
 C. Haze 
 
 1 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 4 35 
 
 .27 
 
 70.2 
 
 61.7 
 
 75.0 
 
 C. Haze 
 
 1 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 4 46 
 
 
 
 
 72.0 
 
 C. Haze 
 
 1 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 4 55 
 
 .28 
 
 69.3 
 
 61.5 
 
 68.5 
 
 C. Haze 
 
 1 
 
 SE. 
 
 2 
 
 r> so 
 
 .27 
 
 69.5 
 
 61.7 
 
 83.0 
 
 C. Haze 
 
 0.5 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 5 40 
 
 .27 
 
 68.9 
 
 62.2 
 
 81.7 
 
 C. Haze 0. 5 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 .27 
 
 68.8 
 
 61.8 
 
 78.8 
 
 C. Haze 
 
 1 
 
 SE. 
 
 1 
 
 76. 
 53. 
 
REPORT 
 
 DR. EDWARD CURTIS, U. S, A, 
 
 16* 
 
REPORT OF 1)11. EDWARD CURTIS, U. S. A. 
 
 SURGEON GENERAL'S OFFICE, 
 
 Army Medical Museum, Washington, D. C., November 6, 1869. 
 
 GENERAL: I have the honor to submit the following report on the photographic observations 
 of the total solar eclipse of the 7th of August last, made by the expedition from this office, under 
 my charge. In response to a request from the Superintendent of the United States Naval Observa- 
 tory, accompanied by an offer of a suitable telescope and chronometer, I received on the 14th of 
 May last, through your office, an order from the War Department, directing me to proceed, in com- 
 pany with an astronomical expedition from the Observatory, to Des Moines, Iowa, for the purpose 
 above mentioned, of taking photographs of the solar eclipse. Hospital Steward A. E. Le Merle and 
 Private M. S. Breunan, United States Army, both on duty in the Surgeon General's Office, were 
 directed in the same order to accompany me as assistaiits, and, in addition, the services of Mr. E. 
 J. Ward, a photographer of Washington, were secured for the occasion. 
 
 I. SYNOPSIS OF OPERATIONS. 
 
 The members of the party, leaving Washington at different dates early in July, met at Chicago 
 July 8 and reached Des Moines July 10. The boxes containing the photographic apparatus, which 
 had been previously expressed from Washington to Des Moines, we found awaiting us on our arrival. 
 A site for a temporary observatory was immediately selected near the northeastern limit of the city, 
 but, owing to the incessant rains for a week following our arrival, the erection of the building was 
 so delayed that it was not ready for occupation before the 20th instant. Four days were then con- 
 sumed in unpacking the boxes, mounting the telescope, fitting up the dark-room, and preparing the 
 chemicals for use. 'On the 24th of July the first sun picture was taken, and from this date until 
 the 7th of August every fair afternoon was spent in experimenting and practicing with our instru- 
 ment. Of the negatives obtained on the 2Gth and subsequent days one from each day's work has 
 been kept as a record of the appearance of sun-spots. On the 7th of August six negatives of the 
 sun, of which also one has been preserved, were taken early in the afternoon for the purpose of 
 testing the condition of the chemicals, and on the occasion of the eclipse one hundred and twenty- 
 two exposures were made, as follows: two immediately before the time of first contact, fifty-nine 
 during the partial phase between the periods of first contact and the commencement of totality, 
 two during the total obscuration, fifty-seven between the times of reappearance of the sun and last 
 contact, and two immediately after the latter event. Of these negatives three of the partial phase 
 following totality were spoiled, leaving a total of one hundred and nineteen plates actually secured. 
 One negative of the sun was also taken each afternoon for two days following the eclipse days 
 that were spent in varnishing and packing the negatives and precipitating the silver baths for 
 transportation. Two more days were consumed in dismantling the observatory and packing up for 
 departure, and on the 12th of August the expedition started on its return. 
 
 In connection with the solar photography a series of experiments was also instituted to deter- 
 mine photographically the relative amount of actinic force exerted by the sun at different altitudes. 
 These experiments -were made on eight separate days, and comprise seventy-nine photographic tests 
 of the sun's chemical power. 
 
 Stereoscopic and other views of the observatory and neighboring scenery, the instruments, and 
 members of the expedition at their various duties, were also taken at odd moments by Messrs. Le 
 Merle and Ward. 
 
124 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 To sum up, the material results of the photographic expedition arc as follows: eleven negatives 
 of the sun, representing the appearance of that body on as many different days; one hundred and 
 nineteen negatives of the solar eclipse of August 7; seventy-nine photographic paper slips showing 
 the relative actinic force of the sun at different altitudes on eight separate days; twenty- three 
 stereoscopic and other negatives. 
 
 In accordance with your instructions, the eclipse negatives will be placed at the disposal of the 
 Superintendent of the Naval Observatory for the reading off of the astronomical information which 
 they contain. On the completion of this work they will be deposited, with the other results of the 
 expedition, in the Army Medical Museum. 
 
 The following is a detailed description of the apparatus and methods of procedure followed in 
 the photographic work, an account in full of our operations, and a discussion of the results obtained : 
 
 II. THE TELESCOPE. 
 
 The telescope used was the large equatorial of the United .States Naval Academy, at Annapolis, 
 Maryland, which was loaned to the Naval Observatory for the expedition, at the request of Commo- 
 dore Sands, by Vice-Admiral I). D. Porter, United States Navy, superintendent of the Academy. 
 This instrument is a refractor, constructed by Alvau Clark & Sons, of Cambridge port, Massachusetts, 
 in 1857. It has an object-glass of 7.75 inches clear aperture and nine, feet six inches local length. 
 The tube is mounted eqnatorially, in the German style, on a solid cast iron pier, provided with a 
 spring- governor driving clock. The tinder of the instrument is a small telescope, with an object 
 glass of 1.7 inches clear aperture and 20.25 inches focal length. 
 
 This telescope, having been received at the Naval Observatory in Washington in .May, was 
 mounted temporarily in a wooden shed on the, grounds of that institution, .and there fitted up for 
 photographic use. For this purpose the, following apparatus had to be made: 
 
 1. A heavy wooden cross for the pier of the telescope to rest upon. 
 
 2. A camera-box to be attached to the eye end of the instrument and fitted up with two differ- 
 ent arrangements for making the exposures, one to be used during the total and the other during 
 the partial phases of the, eclipse. 
 
 3. A diaphragm carrying two position wires crossing at right angles, to be adjusted in the eye- 
 piece. 
 
 4. A clamp to hold the eye-piece immovable in its tube after adjustments for focus and angle 
 of the position wires. 
 
 5. Diaphragm caps of different sizes to reduce the aperture, of the object-glass in photographing 
 the partial phases of the eclipse. 
 
 C. New weights for the driving clock, the old ones being too long to use conveniently. 
 
 7. A new suspension-piece for the pendulum of the clock to rest upon. This change was required 
 from the fact that, there being no arrangement for altering the position of the polar axis, the pier 
 itself had to be tipped up to make allowance for the difference in latitude between DCS Moines and 
 Annapolis. A new suspension-piece was therefore needed for the pendulum, to suit the altered 
 position of the pier. 
 
 All these additions to the telescope were made under the immediate supervision of Professor 
 William Harkness, United States Navy, the brass work being done by Mr. W. F. Gardner, instru- 
 ment maker at the Observatory, who worked most zealously that everything might be completed in 
 amide time for an early departure for the West. Four plate-holders and a frame carrying a ground- 
 glass screen were also prepared under my own direction. 
 
 The camera-box requires special description. In devising this piece of apparatus the first ques- 
 tion that presented itself was whether to use the focal image of the object-glass alone to produce 
 the sun-pictures or to enlarge it by the interposition of a Huyghenian eye-piece. The answer was 
 emphatically given in favor of the latter plan, for the following reasons : In the first place, it could 
 only be by means of an eye-piece that position ^ires could be used and depicted upon the plates, 
 and without these the value of the negatives of the partial phases for astronomical purposes would 
 be greatly impaired ; in the second place, a fair size for the sun-pictures was considered an important 
 consideration in the partial-phase negatives as conducing to greater accuracy in the niicrometrical 
 
1869. 125 
 
 measurements, and iii those of the totality as giving such dimensions to the red protuberances that 
 points of structure and detail iu those bodies might bo caught and recognized without the necessity 
 of subsequent enlargement of the negative, an operation that, iu my judgment, is always to be 
 avoided. The only drawback to the use of an eye-piece was the comparatively long exposures 
 required in consequence during totality, making it possible to obtain but few photographs of that 
 phase ; but I considered that even one negative, showing the structure of the red prominences ou 
 a comparatively large scale, would be worth a dozen little images where nothing but the mere posi- 
 tion of the principal protuberances could hope to be shown. 
 
 It was therefore decided to use an eye-piece, to employ negative plates seven inches square, and 
 to place them at such a distance from, the eye-piece that the image of the sun projected upon them 
 should be as nearly as possible four inches in diameter. To meet these requirements a long slightly - 
 lapering camera bo.v, with square ends, was constructed. This was made in two parts, the joint 
 running lengthwise, with the smaller end fitted to clasp the telescope tube tightly around its entire 
 circumference at two places eleven inches apart, wheu the two halves of the box were screwed 
 together upon the instrument. This fastening was accomplished by stove-bolts passing through 
 solid lugs of wood which projected from the sides of the box along the line of junction of the two 
 halves. The posterior or free end of the camera was fitted to allow the plateholder to slide in upon 
 a slip of glass let into the wood, the holder being then held in position by the pressure of two strong 
 brass springs from behind. The various uprights of the framework at this end of the box were so 
 made that in all cases two projecting arms from each half of the box should, when the latter were 
 fitted together, slide past each other so as to admit of being screwed into one piece, thus making 
 the framework solid and light-tight. The arrangement for making the exposures was as follows: 
 About two and a half inches beyond the end of the eye-piece was a fixed partition across the 
 camera box, pierced with a central aperture just large enough to admit the entire cone of rays from 
 the instrument. Immediately in front of this, passing through rebated slots in the sides of the 
 camera box, was a movable wooden slider long enough to project several inches beyond the sides of 
 the camera, and pierced with two apertures, either of which could be centered with the hole in the 
 fixed partition by simply running the slider to or fro a few inches. In either position of the slider 
 it was held in place by a spring bolt on the side of the camera. One of these apertures for use 
 during totality was fitted up with a light brass shield turning laterally on a pivot, by means of 
 which the hole could be covered or uncovered, the shield being operated from without by being 
 attached by a catgut cord to a little cylinder surmounted by a milled head fixed at the free pro- 
 jecting end of the slider. A stop was originally provided to limit the swing of the shield when 
 thrown aside to expose the aperture beneath, but, finding that the striking of the shield upon it 
 produced a sensible jarring of the telescope, the stop was removed. The other aperture to allow 
 of instantaneous exposures during the partial phases was covered by a rectangular brass plate 
 running freely on guide-rods and pierced with a transverse slot half an inch in width, which was 
 adjustable to a slit of any dimensions by means of a secondary slotted plate, attached to the first 
 by screws. Instantaneous motion of this plate across the aperture was effected by a fine steel wire 
 spring coiled around one of the guide-rods; and when drawn up against the spring the plate was 
 held by a wire loop catching over a little pin which projected upwards through a bridge from the 
 upper surface of a spring trigger, also placed at the free end of the slider. A light touch upon this 
 trigger then released the plate, when the rapid flashing of the slit across the aperture in the slider 
 effected the exposure; and by pressing the trigger always at a predetermined second of time, with 
 eye and car upon a chronometer standing close by, the timing of the exposures could be made with 
 the utmost accuracy. The accompanying figure represents the wooden slider, fitted, as described, 
 with the apparatus for making the exposures. 
 
126 
 
 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 The tube of the telescope being adjusted to the position it would occupy during the eclipse, tlu> 
 camera box was clamped upon it in such a manner that the plateholdcrs and the wooden slider should 
 run in from the side with the lower edges maintained horizontal. On the top of the camera box as 
 thus placed the finder of the telescope was mounted. At a suitable distance behind it was an 
 upriglt of wood carrying a slip of ground glass with a circle drawn on it, to serve as a screen on 
 which to view the image of the sun from the finder when adjusting the telescope. To provide for 
 the fainter image of the corona during totality, a movable screen of white card-board was made to 
 slip over the ground glass, so as to give a more brilliant surface for the reception of the image. On 
 this also a circle was drawn to center the image by. In the under face of the camera box a door 
 was cut to permit the hand to reach the eye-piece, in adjusting the latter for focus and angle of the 
 position wires. 
 
 The accompanying woodcut, from a photograph by Mr. Le Merle, shows the telescope as it 
 appeared when in actual use in the afternoon. The chronometer is seen strapped to a tripod stand 
 close to the camera box, and the operator is represented in the act of timing an exposure, the end 
 of the slider carrying the trigger being beliiud the camera, and therefore not seen in the cut. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OP THE ECLIPSE OP AUGUST 7, 1869. 127 
 
 III. THE OBSERVATORY. 
 
 A site for a joint temporary observatory at Des Moiues, to serve both for my owu party and 
 for Professors Harkuess and Eastman, was selected on a piece of high ground at the northern 
 limit of Second street. This offered the advantages of as close an approach to the central line of 
 the eclipse as possible, a clear horizon in all directions, a well of good water close by, freedom 
 from dust, and good drainage. The exact position occupied by the photographic equatorial, as 
 determined by Professor Harkness, is as follows: latitude, 41 35' 36"; longitude, I u 6 m 16 s .05 
 west of center of dome of United States Naval Observatory at Washington ; height above the 
 level of the sea, 831 feet. 
 
 On this site a rough board building thirty-two by sixteen feet was erected, running nearly north 
 and south in the direction of its length. The entire building was floored, and from the northern 
 end an extent of seven feet was partitioned off for the dark-room and ceiled on a level with the 
 eaves. The remainder of. the building was one large room, with the western slope of the roof and 
 upper portion of the western wall not boarded, but covered by a canvas roof which could be rolled 
 up when the telescopes were to be iised. 
 
 The dark-room was furnished with seven negative baths, standing in a long trough filled with 
 water to keep them cool, a sink composed of a common wash-tub with an India-rubber waste-pipe 
 attached, a barrel of water standing on a platform outside the building with a pipe closed by a 
 stop-cock projecting through the wall, and a large flxing-bath composed of a wooden trough with 
 grooved sides like a negative rack, capable of holding one hundred and fifty plates and filled with 
 a very weak solution of hyposulphite of soda. The room was provided with ventilators on a level 
 with the floor and in the ceiling, and in the partition wall adjoining where the telescope stood 
 were two little dumb-waiters by which the plate-holders could be passed in and out of the dark- 
 room without the admission of light or the necessity of any of the operators moving from their 
 places. Plate I, from a photograph by Mr. Ward, gives a view of the observatory with the canvas 
 roof rolled up and the telescopes ready for use, and Plate II, from a drawing by Mr. Le Merle, 
 shows the arrangement of parts. 
 
 IV. PRELIMINARY EXPERIMENTS. 
 
 The telescope being ready for use in June, we immediately commenced our self-taught lessons 
 in celestial photography. These preliminary experiments, commenced in Washington, were con- 
 tinued after our arrival in Des Moines, and were for the purpose of determining the chemical 
 focus of the optical combination, selecting the most suitable photographic formula; for the special 
 work, studying the subject of lengths of exposure both for the partial phases and for totality, 
 deciding upon a plan of operations to be followed during the eclipse, and drilling ourselves thor- 
 oughly in our respective duties, so that there, might be -no mistake or contretemps at the critical 
 moment. 
 
 1. Determination of the chemical focus. I confess to having had a great deal of anxiety about 
 the photographic performance of the telescope, both on account of the object-glass being an ordi- 
 nary achromatic lens not corrected for photography and on the score of the additional confusion 
 that must arise from the use of an eye-piece. I was fearful that with such a combination no 
 adjustment of the focus would give a picture sufficiently sharp for exact micrometrical measure- 
 ment. The first day's trial, however, removed my doubts, for with a two-inch diaphragm cap over 
 the object-glass the sun picture came up beautifully sharp as soon as the chemical focus was 
 found. This focus was determined experimentally by sliding the eye-piece to and fro until the 
 best photographic effect was produced. And since the curvature of field affected slightly the 
 definition at different distances from the center of the plate, that position of the eye-piece was 
 selected, in order to secure the best mean focus, which should give the sharpest definition midway 
 . between the center and limb of the sun's image. Using, then, as a test object, a large sun-spot 
 that happened to occupy just this position on the solar disk, the proper adjustment of the eye- 
 piece for the required focus was determined with great care and recorded. But this determination 
 being made with a two-inch diaphragm cap over the object-glass, it was necessary to test also the 
 performance of the full aperture of the lens with the same focus, since this aperture would be used 
 
128 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 during totality. For this purpose solar negatives were taken .just before sunset, when the feeble 
 actinic force of the sun permitted the whole diameter of the object-glass to be used without over- 
 exposure of the plates, and it was found that with this aperture the definition was not nearly so 
 good as when the two-inch diaphragm cap was employed, but that the focus could not be improved. 
 2. Selection of photographic formula. In deciding upon what formulae for bath, collodion, and 
 developer to use during the eclipse, regard was had exclusively to the peculiar phenomena of total- 
 ity, since the sun negatives during the partial phases, intended solely for micrometrical measure 
 uient, could be obtained equally well by any process. The subject presented peculiar difficulties, 
 since it involved representing upon one plate, if possible, the corona, possessing very feeble actinic 
 power, and the red protuberances, which, on the contrary, exert a very strong photographic action. 
 Desirous of knowing how far this difficulty had been overcome by previous operators, I obtained 
 copies of Dr. Vogel's photographs of the eclipse of 1868 in Arabia, and through the kindness of 
 my friend, Dr. R. L. Maddox, of Southampton, England, and the courtesy of Mr. Richard Beck, of 
 London, was also furnished with prints of Mr. De La Rue's negatives of the totality in the eclipse 
 of 1860 in Spain. In both cases the prints were from enlarged negatives, which was to be 
 regretted, for in such pictures much of the detail of the original negative is infallibly lost. An 
 examination of these prints showed in the photographs of De La Rue a very faint corona, with 
 the prominences nevertheless so dense that but little detail in them could be made out. The 
 Arabian pictures presented the same characteristics still more strongly marked, the corona being 
 scarcely visible at all, while the red protuberances appeared as mere masses of white upon a black 
 ground. In the latter instance much of the effect described may have been due to bad weather; 
 still I could not help believing that in both cases collodions had been used that gave brilliant pic- 
 tures of great intensity rather than soft negatives full of detail, and that, by a selection of chemi- 
 cals that should produce the latter effect rather than the former, much better results might be 
 obtained. The subject was fully discussed with Mr. Le Merle, a practical photographer of long 
 experience, to whom the preparation of the chemicals was intrusted, and he, entertaining the same 
 views, felt confident that with a collodion of his own, containing a full proportion of bromide, a 
 sufficient exposure, and careful development with a moderately strong developer, negatives could 
 be secured that would show detail in the prominences and give a fair indication of the corona as 
 well. Accordingly he prepared his solutions by the following formulae: 
 
 COLLODION. 
 
 Iodide of ammonium ."> grains. 
 
 Iodide of cadmium 5 grains. 
 
 Bromide of cadmium 5 grains. 
 
 Atxvood's alcohol, 95 per cent. 1 fluid ounce. 
 
 Sulphuric ether 1 fluid ounce. 
 
 Pyroxyline, (Anthony's negative,) enough to give the proper consistency. 
 The collodion intended for use during the eclipse was made in a large stock bottle on the 29th 
 of July, and on the fifth of August was brought to a lemon yellow color by addition of tincture of 
 iodine. 
 
 BATH. 
 
 Nitrate of silver, recrystallized - 40 grains. 
 
 Distilled water - 1 fluid ounce. 
 
 Nitric acid, C. P., sufficient to make the bath work clean under a long development 
 with the above collodion. 
 
 The bath solution was made five days before the eclipse, was dosed with the proper amount of 
 iodide of silver in the usual way, and was worked a little each day. 
 
 DEVELOPER. 
 
 Saturated solution of sulphate of iron 1 fluid ounces. 
 
 Acetic acid, No. 8 1 fluid ounces. 
 
 Water ... 13 fluid ounces. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 129 
 
 The delicate beauty of the totality negatives obtained, which, while showing considerable of 
 the corona, are full of detail in the prominences, proves the soundness of the views entertained and 
 the excellency of Mr. Le Merle's formula' for producing the desired result. 
 
 3. Estimation of the length of exposures. The exposure during the partial phases was simply a 
 matter to be decided by direct experiment upon the sun, and it was found that while a two-inch 
 aperture to the object-glass gave abundant exposure in the middle of the day, this had to be some- 
 what increased as the afternoon, advanced and the sun approached the horizon. The width of the 
 slit in the instantaneous plate found necessary varied from a quarter to half an inch, but while this 
 may seem excessive, it must be remembered that the plate was about an inch and a half from the 
 eye-piece. 
 
 The question of the length of exposure to be given to the plates during totality, was, on account 
 of its great importance, made the subject of careful study and experiment. As a basis for this esti- 
 mation I determined to rely exclusively on the teachings of De La Eue's totality pictures of the 1860 
 eclipse, considering these as the most satisfactory photographs of the phenomenon in existence. 
 This astronomer's result afforded two ways of making the estimate. The first depended upon his 
 calculation of the relative photographic intensity of the light from the red prominences and full 
 moon. This calculation he made as follows : * During the taking of his second totality picture the 
 telescope was shaken and three impressions of the prominences appeared. From their relative 
 intensity he inferred that the faintest of these received twelve seconds' exposure. Attempting to 
 photograph the full moon with the same instrument used for the eclipse he obtained an " extremely 
 faint impression" after an exposure of three minutes. This impression he estimated to be one- 
 twelfth the intensity of the faintest of the impressions of the prominences above referred to, an esti : 
 mate which makes the relative photographic power of the full moon and solar prominences as 180 
 to 1. Taking this estimate for what it was worth, and inferring (though De La Eue does not so 
 state) that he photographed the full moon when at nearly the same altitude as the sun during the 
 1860 eclipse, I determined to try the full moon with my own telescope and see what length of expo- 
 sure would be necessary to produce a fair impression of that satellite when at an altitude of about 
 26, the position that the totally eclipsed sun would occupy on the 7th of August. Dividing this 
 time by 180 should then give the time necessary to produce a correspondingly strong impression of 
 the prominences. The full moon occurred at 8 h 30 m p. m., Washington mean time, on the 23d of 
 June, but that evening was unfortunately cloudy, so that the experiment could not be made till the 
 following night, when the moon of course was many hours past the full. It was then found that at 
 26 above the horizon five minutes produced a weak image, ten and fifteen a better, and twenty an 
 image that came up promptly under the developer. But since there was no means of allowing for 
 the moon's motion in declination during these long exposures, the pictures were necessarily mere 
 blurs, and it was very difficult to say exactly what was the correct exposure. Moreover, when it 
 came to an exposure of twenty minutes, five minutes more or less seemed not to make any great 
 difference in the strength of the image. These experiments were therefore exceedingly unsatisfac- 
 tory ; and considering also that De La line's original calculation of the comparative actinic force, of 
 the light of the moon and the red flames was, though the best that could be made, yet necessarily 
 rather loose, I determined to abandon altogether this method of estimating the totality exposures 
 as untrustworthy, and to rely exclusively upon the second method afforded by De La Rue's labors, 
 that, namely, of calculating directly from the exposures he gave his own totality pictures in Spain. 
 This was a very simple matter. In the first place, I proposed to follow his plan of using an eye-piece 
 to magnify the focal image of the object-glass, and moreover to represent the sun upon the photo- 
 graph of the same size as in his pictures. So far as the telescopes were concerned, therefore, the 
 exposures to produce like effects should be exactly proportional to the size of the instruments; that 
 is, inversely as the areas of the object-glasses. Now, the object-glass of the Kew photo-heliograph 
 is 3.4 inches in diameter, that of the Annapolis equatorial 7.7/5 inches ; or, in other words, taking the 
 proportion of the squares of these diameters, my equivalent exposure should be slightly less than one- 
 fifth that of De La Eue. An exposure, that is, of eleven and a half seconds with my telescope should, 
 other things being equal, produce the same result as the one-minute exposure given by De La Eue. 
 I say " other things being equal," because an important consideration has been disregarded in stating 
 
 ' I'liilosopliiriil Transactions, 18(52, l>ag' 405. 
 
130 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 this estimate, namely, the effect oil the necessary length of exposure of the dilfereut altitude of the 
 sun on the occasion of the two eclipses. In De La Hue's case the sun was near the zenith, whereas 
 in the 1869 eclipse it would be but 26 above the horizon. In proportion, therefore, to the sun's 
 loss of actinic force when at this altitude the estimated exposure for the totality whould have to be 
 increased. In order to determine exactly what this loss was I began experimenting by testing the 
 length of exposure necessary to produce negatives of the sun of equal intensity at mid-day and at 
 a quarter to five in the afternoon. But owing to the latitude that always exists in exposures of 
 negatives by the wet collodion process, I soon abandoned this method as too coarse and uncertain, 
 and resorted to comparative exposures of photographic paper. These were made in the following 
 way : A strip of sensitized paper was tacked to a board and covered by a sheet of yellow paper in 
 which were cut out twenty-seven rectangular spaces. The board, covered by a velvet cloth, was 
 set up so as to exactly face the sun, when at a given second, timed by the chronometer, the vel- 
 vet was whisked away, and by means of narrow strips of wood the rectangular spaces were suc- 
 cessively and suddenly covered over at definite periods of time, thus effecting a different length of 
 exposure for the sensitive paper under each space. Such a series of exposures was made at differ- 
 ent hours of the day, the times of exposure being invariably the same. These times were as fol- 
 lows, the numbers meaning seconds : , 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7J, 10, 12i, 15, 17J, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60 ; 
 and also, when the light was feeble, 80, 110, 150, 200, 260, 330, 410, 500, 600. Then by taking the 
 slip exposed at noon as a standard, and matching shades with those exposed at other hours, the 
 relative amount of actinic action exerted by the sun was roughly calculable. That is, if at 5 h p. in., 
 for instance, the space exposed for ten seconds is identical in shade with that exposed for five sec- 
 onds at noon, and if the proportion holds good in the other spaces, the reasoning is that at that 
 hour the sun's actinic force, as measured by the photographic effect produced, is one-half that at 
 noon. But not to rely upon any single comparison, the shades in any one slip.were, in all cases that 
 would admit of it, matched at least as high as the shade produced by an exposure of fifty or sixty 
 seconds, and the mean of the results obtained from these various comparisons was taken as the 
 expression of the sun's chemical power at the time.* 
 
 * It is proper to state that neither at the time of making these experiments nor of writing the above had I read of 
 Professor Roscoe's critical observations of this character at Manchester, England, (I'hil. Trans., 1863, p. 139, and 1865, 
 p. 605.) It will be seen that my own was a rough method of applying the same principles as those involved in Profes- 
 sor Roscoe's elaborate and admirable arrangement. The question as to the relation between length of exposure and chemi- 
 cal intensity of light in producing identical shades of blackening I had also experimented upon, in order properly to 
 interpret the results of the photo-chemical observations, and had reached the same conclusions that Professors Bunseu 
 and Roscoe had previously arrived at, nnconsciously verifying, by a different experiment, the law of this relation dis- 
 covered by them and thus announced: (Phil. Trans., 1863, p. 145.) " Equal products of the intensity of the light into 
 the time of insolation correspond, within very wide limits, to equal shades of darkness produced on chloride-of-silvcr 
 paper of uniform sensitiveness." My plan of experimenting on this subject was rough and simple, like that of the other 
 actinometrical observations, but quite effective. A sensitized paper strip was first exposed at noon in the precise man- 
 ner described above in the text, different spaces on the strip receiving different, lengths of exposure, and care being taken 
 that the surface of the paper should be exactly at right angles to the course of the solar beam. Immediately afterwards 
 a second strip was exposed, the board to which it was tacked being, in this case, inclined to the direction of the sun's 
 rays at such an angle that the shadow of a strip of cardboard projecting from the face of a box previously carefully 
 adjusted so as to exactly face the sun, should, when falling from the board immediately under it, measure twice the 
 actual width of the cardboard itself. Under these circumstances each space of this sensitized strip received, of course, 
 but one-half the amount of sunlight that impinged upon those of the first strip, and a comparison of the two strips 
 showed that in all cases double the length of exposure was required on the second strip to produce degrees of blacken- 
 ing identical with the shades of the first. 
 
 The actinometrical experiments described in the text, -which were undertaken, as then 1 stated, for the purpose of 
 estimating the length of the totality exposures, led me, by their interest, into making something of a series of them in 
 order to test, approximately, the chemical force of the sun at all altitudes. One day, the 29th of July, was entirely 
 given up to this work, and photographic observations were taken from sunrise to sunset at every fifteen minutes during 
 the morning and afternoon, and every half and whole hour during the middle of the day. Although from the compara- 
 tively rude character of the method of observation the results obtained can only be considered as rough approximations 
 to the truth, yet they are sufficiently accurate for the purposes of a practical photographer in estimating lengths of 
 exposure for negatives, and possess, it is believed, so far as they go, a peculiar value on account of the unusually cloud- 
 less skies and equable condition of the atmosphere in that splendid Iowa climate during the period through which the 
 observations extended. A table of the results of the observations is accordingly given in Schedule B. Though for the 
 sake of avoiding error as far as possible the slips of each day were invariably compared with the noon shade of the same 
 day as the standard, yet these mid-day slips have been found to differ so rery slightly from each other in most cases not 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST T, 1869. 131 
 
 A general meau of observations of this character, made on seven different days at or iiear the 
 time at which totality would occur, gave for the sun's actinic force at that period 0.374, the chem- 
 ical intensity at noon being taken as 1.000. But since a collodion plate is probably not so sensi- 
 tive to a diminution of chemical force in the light as silvered paper, I considered it safe to estimate 
 that, on account of the time of day at which totality would occur, the calculated exposure should be 
 just doubled. The difference in time of year and latitude between De La Hue and myself on the 
 occasion of the two eclipses being too inconsiderable to affect the question of length of exposure, I 
 thus obtained twenty-three seconds as the equivalent with my telescope of the one-minute exposure 
 given by that astronomer. With this estimate I had to allow on the one hand for the fact that De 
 La Rue's negatives were considerably over-exposed, and as an offset on the other for the considera- 
 tion that I did not propose to use such very sensitive chemicals as he describes his to have been. 
 Weighing these two considerations against each other, I estimated that about ten seconds should, 
 under the circumstances, yield a negative properly timed for the protuberances, upon which, by the 
 help of Mr. Le Merle's well-bromized collodion, the corona might also be shown to some extent. I 
 accordingly determined to give the first plate this exposure, designing this negative especially for 
 the prominences, which would of course be seen to best advantage during the first and last few sec- 
 onds of duration of totality. The second plate, to be exposed while the first was in process of devel- 
 opment in the dark-room, I determined should have from thirty to forty seconds, for the purpose of 
 representing the corona. After these two I would, of course, be guided by word from the dark- 
 room. How these estimates were modified on the occasion of the eclipse, on account of the bad 
 weather, will be detailed further on. 
 
 4. Plan of operation* during 1lte edi])ne. After experimenting to see how best to dispose of our 
 force, and divide the labor during the eclipse, we settled down to the following plan, which was 
 strictly followed: The first operator, Mr. Ward, was to coat the plates and put them into the baths; 
 the second, Mr. Brennan, to take them out, wipe their backs, place them into the holders, and pass 
 the latter out to me by means of one of the dumb-waiters in the wall. My own duty, as third ope- 
 rator, was to take the plate-holder from the dumb-waiter, place it in the camera, draw the slide, 
 adjust the telescope, (whose position was invariably disarranged by shifting the holders,) expose at 
 a predetermined second of time by a chronometer standing at my elbow strapped to a tripod stand, 
 return the holder to the dark-room by the second dumb-waiter, and then record the instant of the 
 exposure on a sheet of paper tacked to a shelf. The fourth operator, Mr. Le Merle, was to take the 
 plate from the holder when returned to tlie dark-room, develop, wash, and drop it into one of the 
 grooves in the large fixing trough. There the plates were to remain, slowly fixing, until the eclipse 
 was over, when they were to be taken out in the exact order in which they had been put in, washed, 
 and numbered with a diamond , By this even distribution of labor, and by the help of the dumb- 
 waiters and the large fixing trough, we found upon trial that we could take negatives at the rate of 
 twenty in fifteen minutes. But desiring that all the operations should be performed with perfect 
 deliberation, and conceiving that the number of negatives that would be taken during the eclipse 
 at the above rate was unnecessarily great, I determined to limit the exposures to one each minute, 
 (except at the times of first and last contact and during totality,) so that all the operators having 
 ten or fifteen seconds to spare with each plate could do their work coolly and carefully. For total- 
 ity, the arrangement was that at two minutes before the time of its commencement I was to cease 
 exposing and call "Prepare for totality." All three operators in the dark-room were then to take 
 out plates from the baths and rapidly fill all four of the plate-holders. Brennan, then leaving the 
 dark-room, was to assist me at the telescope by handing me the holders, taking them again from 
 me, and recording the times of exposure as I called them out from the chronometer. This plan was 
 on the supposition that, with a clear sky and with exposures varying from ten to forty seconds, four 
 or five negatives might be secured during the duration of the total phase. While developing the 
 first totality negative it was also Mr. Le Merle's duty to judge, as soon as possible, by the manner 
 in which the image came up under the developer, what modification in the exposure for the promi- 
 
 at all that the results obtained on different days an' quite comparable with each other. lu the ease of the observa- 
 tions on the 3d of August, however, allowance must be made for the fact that the standard slip was not exposed till 
 after three o'clock in the afternoon, at which time, as the results of other days show, the diminution of chemical inten- 
 sity of sunlight has commenced. The two slips exposed on July 27 are only comparable between each other on account 
 of the hazy atmosphere of that day. 
 
132 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 nences should be made iu the succeeding plates, and to call out .the same lor my guidance. During 
 the two minutes, also, covering respectively the times of the first and last contacts, it was suggested 
 by Professor Harkuess to take negatives as fast as they could be run through the camera, and 
 accordingly the same plan as for totality was adopted for these occasions, with the addition that 
 Professor Harkness, being then at leisure from his own duties, should assist by attending to the 
 adjustment of the telescope, leaving me nothing to do but to shift the plate-holders in the camera 
 and make the exposures. 
 
 V. THE ECLIPSE. 
 
 For three weeks before the 7th of August the weather had been magnificent, day following day 
 with the sun unobscured from rising to setting, and the atmosphere beautifully clear. But at sun- 
 set on the 4th the west was streaked with ominous "mare's tails,'' and for the following forty-eight 
 hours the sky was overcast with rain-clouds, the air loaded with moisture, and the wind strong from 
 the northeast. The morning of the 7th dawned upon a similar day. but before eight o'clock the wind 
 shifted to the southeast and the clouds rapidly broke up and cleared away, leaving, however, to my 
 sorrow, a dense ha/e in the air that foretold of long photographic exposures and thin negatives. 
 Our preparations were complete. I had a rope stretched around the observatory at a distance of 
 a hundred yards, and by the kindness of Mayor Hatch, of Des Monies, we were furnished with two 
 special policemen, who performed most thoroughly their duty of keeping beyond this barrier the 
 crowd that nocked to the place in the afternoon. In the photographic line one hundred and fifty 
 plates had been cleaned and carefully inspected, so that all used might be faultless. During the 
 morning the baths were freshly filtered and tested by taking some stereoscopic views; four gallons 
 of developer mixed iu a large jar, and the collodion decanted from the large stock bottles in which 
 it had been ripening into eleven wide-lipped vials of about eight ounces capacity. These were filled 
 about three-quarters full, and were to be nsed in turn till half empty. The dark-room and camera- 
 box were thoroughly sponged out, the plate-holders tried to see if the slides ran free, and all the sur- 
 faces rubbed with paraffine. The paper on which to record the exposures was tacked down to the 
 shelf between the dumb-waiters, and before the commencement of the eclipse two lanterns were 
 lighted and hung so as to illuminate this shelf and my chronometer. Against the wall, near by, 
 were hung memoranda of the exact time of commencement and termination of the several phases of 
 the eclipse, calculated for the chronometer I was to use, by Professor Safford, of the Chicago Obser- 
 vatory, and also of the proportions of the areas of the different diaphragm apertures to be nsed over 
 the object-glass of the telescope, to guide me iu estimating the exposures. 
 
 As soon as the sun crossed the ridge-pole of the observatory Professor Harkness and I adjusted 
 the eye-piece of the telescope so that the position wires should be approximately at 4f> to a parallel 
 of declination, and clamped it immovably. Then to determine the 1 exact position of the wires, the 
 Professor observed on the ground-glass screen three transits of the sun across each wire. These 
 observations were also repeated immediately after the eclipse was over. As soon as the position 
 wires were set we commenced taking solar negatives, in order to test the amount of exposure that 
 the hazy atmosphere would necessitate, and to be sure of the condition of the chemicals. Every- 
 think worked perfectly at first, but about half an hour before the time for commencement of the 
 eclipse, to our dismay, jet-black spots, such as none of us had ever seen before, suddenly appeared 
 on every plate. These did not come up during development, but only after the water was turned on 
 to icash off the developer. Suspicion at once attached to the well-water with which the barrel was 
 filled, although we had been using it for washing negatives for two weeks with perfect success, and 
 it had worked well that very morning on some stereoscopic plates. A plate was accordingly rapidly 
 exposed, developed, and washed with (Unfilled water. It came up perfectly clean, thus proving the 
 trouble to be in the water. Fortunately, in order to provide against every contingency, I had pre- 
 viously had hauled to the observatory a large cask of cistern water; so we rapidly emptied our 
 barrel of the well-water and filled it from the cask, while Mr. Breunan started off at a run to engage 
 a man to bring more water from the nearest cistern in the neighborhood during the progress of the 
 eclipse, so that there might be no danger of our running short. In the mean time Mr. Ward was 
 coating the batch of plates for the first rapid exposures. Taught by the preliminary practice we 
 had just had, I arranged the telescope with the slit in the instantaneous-plate at its widest half an 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OP AUGUST 7, 1869. 133 
 
 inch and with six inches aperture to the object-glass. At 9 h 59"' 57 N by my chronometer I made 
 the first exposure, and passed seven plates through the camera in rapid succession, as had been 
 arranged. An interval of about four minutes then elapsed while Mr. Ward refilled the baths, after 
 which we settled down to our steady work of one plate a minute. At the thirty-ninth plate, Mr. 
 Le Merle calling for more exposure, I removed the diaphragm cap from the object-glass, and from 
 that time on worked with the full aperture, of the lens. As the eclipse advanced and the sun's disk 
 narrowed to a crescent the light became very gloomy, and the air growing suddenly damp and 
 chilly, I was glad to don a coat to prevent shivering. At the same time the image from the finder 
 on the ground-glass became so faint that I was obliged to slip up the white card-board screen that 
 had been prepared for use, during totality. At exactly two minutes before the calculated time for 
 the commencement of that phase I gave the prearranged signal to the operators in the dark-room. 
 The four plate-holders were then quickly filled, and Brennan came out to assist me. A holder was 
 placed in the camera and the telescope was adjusted as well as possible by the fine crescent image 
 of the sun. With my back to the heavens and my eye riveted upon this little image on the white 
 card-board, I watched it shrink to a mere line, and then suddenly melt away in all directions like 
 an icicle thrown into boiling water. With its fading came a solid, rushing darkness, that seemed 
 to grow in the very air and close upon me from all sides, producing a strange sensation as of positive 
 eugulfment by something black and material, whose embrace was all the more thrilling from being- 
 swift, noiseless, and impalpable. Out went the last twinkle of sunlight, and out flashed the light 
 in the lantern swinging by my chronometer, as suddenly as the blaze from a match struck in the 
 dark. The totality had come, and the "Oh! Oh! Oh!" of the distant crowd which had followed the 
 rapid fading of the sunlight changed to one shout of admiration, and was then suddenly hushed. 
 But to me the moment was one of dismay, for, with the vanishing of the sun's image from the card- 
 board screen, a most unexpected difficulty presented itself, which threatened to destroy all chance 
 of making but one exposure during the totality. This was that the image of the corona thrown by 
 the finder was so excessively taint that at first I could see absolutely nothing upon the screen when 
 the sun disappeared. But, as previously mentioned, the telescope required readjusting after each 
 change of plate-holders in the camera, no matter how carefully that operation was performed, and 
 it instantly flashed through my mind, how will it be possible to effect this readjustment after the 
 present plate is removed, if the image from the finder is too faint to be seen ? Fearing, then, that 
 everything would have to be staked upon the single plate already in the instrument, 1 shrank from 
 making the exposure until I could be absolutely sure that in this case, at least, the rather uncertain 
 preliminary adjustment by the fast dwindling crescent of sunlight, was correct. I therefore strained 
 my eyes to the utmost, and at last, by putting my face close to the screen, was able to make out a 
 faint halo of light, defining the disk of the dark moon. Seeing, then, that the centering of the 
 image was very nearly exact as the telescope stood, I wasted no time attempting to better it, but 
 at once threw open the shield to make the exposure. This difficulty of the faintness of the image 
 of the corona was totally unexpected, and the more provoking because, to make sure, as I thought, 
 that I was secure against just this mishap, and that the plan of receiving the image from the finder 
 upon white card-board was safe for use during totality, 1 had previously carefully tested the arrange- 
 ment upon the moon, whose light that of the corona was universally held to equal, and had found 
 that I could see the image of that luminary upon the screen with perfect distinctness when standing 
 so as to command the adjusting-screws of the telescope. Whether it was that the real amount of 
 light of the corona has been overestimated, or whether its feebleness on this occasion was entirely 
 due to the prevailing haze, I cannot, of course, positively say, but am inclined to think that most 
 of the trouble was from the latter cause. 
 
 After starting the exposure and calling the time by the, chronometer for Brennau to record, I 
 turned to gaze at the heavens. My first feeling, I confess, was one of slight disappointment at the 
 appearance of the corona, which did not look as bright or extensive as I had been led to expect from 
 the various drawings of previous eclipses. It seemed to extend to a distance equal only to one-fifth 
 or one-quarter of the moon's diameter. But the magnificence of the red prominences, and the dis- 
 tinctness with which they could be seen by the naked eye, filled me with astonishment, for I had 
 supposed they would scarcely be visible without a glass, especially to slightly near-sighted eyes like 
 mine. They were, however, readily to be seen, and, instead of being a "pink" or "rose" color, they 
 
134 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 looked to me of a pure, rick carmine tint, and .seemed to glow and sparkle as if the moon were a 
 disk of jet studded ou its eastern side with rubies or garnets flashing in the sun. Glancing at the 
 surrounding sky, I observed two stars, probably Venus and Mercury, though I made no note of 
 their position. The appearance of the sky was different from what I had expected, the color being 
 rather a leaden bluish-gray than the deep indigo generally observed where the atmosphere has been 
 clear. Of the degree of darkness I can form no estimate; I never once thought of it; and have 
 only a- vague remembrance that after the effect of the first rush of the shadow had subsided it was 
 not really dark. Indeed, I was so intensely absorbed in my work, and so dreadfully anxious for the 
 success of the plate, in the camera, upon which 1 then believed that the only chance of securing a 
 photograph of the totality was staked, that I really paid no attention to anything but the chronom- 
 eter beats, and my impression of the appearance of the phenomena already described is only as 
 of some dimly-remembered dream. Of the landscape and horizon I saw nothing, being shut in by 
 the walls of the observatory. 
 
 As to the length of exposure to be given to the plate in the camera, the unfortunate weather 
 had, of course, upset my predetermined estimate, and I was obliged, during the progress of the 
 eclipse, to make the following rapid calculation of the additional time that the hazy atmosphere 
 would necessitate. At the thirty-ninth plate, Mr. Le Merle calling for more exposure, 1 was forced 
 to work with the full aperture of the object-glass; that is, I was using an aperture of seven and 
 three-fourths inches in diameter, when two and one-half or three ordinarily sufficed; or, in other 
 words, taking the proportions of the squares of these diameters, I was giving at the time of the 
 fortieth negative from six to ten times the usual exposure. At this rate, then, allowing for the pro- 
 gressive diminution of actinic force as the sun and moon sank lower in the heavens, the totality ex- 
 posures should be at least ten times the original estimates; or, my shortest exposure for the prom- 
 inences should be a minute and forty seconds, and the longer timing intended especially for the 
 "corona would be, of course, impossible. But, from the effect of the progressive motion of the moon 
 in successively covering up the eastern and bringing into view the western prominences, I consid- 
 ered one minute as, imder any circumstances, the longest available time, for an exposure. This 
 amount, therefore, I determined to give the negative, and so notified Mr. Le Merle, warning him, 
 however, that the plate would probably be under-exposed, and that he must do his best by a pro- 
 longed development. As a matter of fact, I ran the exposure six seconds over the minute. 
 
 After removal of the first a second plate-holder was slid into the camera, though with grave 
 doubts in my mind if it could be used, on account of the difficulty of seeing the image from the 
 finder, by which to adjust the telescope. Again I strained my eyes to the utmost to catch the faint 
 glimmer of light on the screen. At first, as before, the card-board was an absolute blank, but gradu- 
 ally, as the pupils of my eyes dilated, I could see a faint image, and, by dint of turning the adjust 
 ment screws by guess, and then stooping over the screen to see what effect was produced, 1 managed 
 at last to bring the image into tolerable centering, when, without waiting to make the adjustment 
 perfect, I whirled open the shield to make the exposure. But thirty-seven precious seconds had 
 been consumed in this annoying method of adjusting; we were in the last minute of totality; and 
 I listened in great anxiety for word from the dark-room to regulate the length of exposure. Fifteen 
 more seconds passed, when Mr. Le Merle called out, "Double the time," and my heart sank as the 
 inexorable chronometer showed that, instead of double the exposure, this plate must have even less 
 than the first. I believed that the totality pictures would be failures, but, to secure all the effect 
 possible, I ran the exposure of the second plate to within one second of the calculated time for the 
 reappearance of the sun. This calculation, however, proving not to be accurate, the last nine 
 seconds of totality were lost, and I was putting the third holder into the camera when a spark of 
 sunlight reappeared. Kapidly shifting the slider to bring the instantaneous apparatus iuto play 
 again, and adjusting as quickly as possible, I touched off the trigger and secured a negative (No. 
 64) showing a fine crescent of the sun not over a thirtieth of an inch in thickness at the middle. 
 And now I was cheered by hearing from the dark-room that tinder a prolonged development the 
 totality pictures, which at first seemed to be hopelessly under-exposed, had come up well and showed 
 beautiful detail in the prominences, with a very fair indication of the corona. We now returned 
 to the routine work of one plate each minute, except a break after the ninety-second plate of two 
 minutes, when, OM'ing to the flexure of the long telescope-tube as it swung more and more hori- 
 
1869. 135 
 
 zoiital, \ve were forced to stop and readjust the centering of the finder. Near the time of last con- 
 tact, also, the rate was changed, and seven plates were run through the camera as fast as we could 
 shift them, in the same manner as at the commencement of the eclipse. Finally, immediately after 
 the last exposure had been made, Professor Harkness took another set of transit observations on 
 the ground glass screen of the camera, to determine the exact position of the wires in the eye-piece. 
 
 VI. THE PHOTOGRAPHS AND THEIR TEACHINGS. 
 
 1. Photographs of the partial phases. These negatives, one hundred and thirteen in number, 
 (counting out four exposures that prove to have been made immediately before and after the times 
 of the external contacts and three negatives that were spoiled,) were taken solely for astronomical 
 purposes, and form an invaluable series of accurate observations upon the eclipse. Their measure- 
 ment and astronomical discussion belong, of course, to the United States Naval Observatory, and 
 the work, I understand, will be immediately taken in hand by Professor Harkness. The instants of 
 exposure of the negatives were timed touching the trigger of the instantaneous apparatus always 
 at a predetermined even second by an excellent mean-time chronometer, Negus 1275, which was 
 compared daily by Professor Eastman with the standard Negus 1300, whose error and rate in turn 
 Professor Harkness determined by frequent sextant observations. The record of these negatives, 
 as well as of those of the sun taken on other days, is given in Schedule A. 
 
 As regards the appearance of the negatives from a purely photographic point of view, I cannot 
 but feel some regret that the unfortunate weather should have somewhat marred their beauty. In the 
 first place, the haze required the whole diameter of the object-glass of the telescope to be used, and 
 with this aperture the photographic definition of the instrument was under any circumstances 
 inferior to that afforded with the usual two or three-inch diaphragm cap. Moreover, the haze inter- 
 fered directly with the sharpness of the pictures, the negatives showing a great and interesting 
 difference in appearance, according as the haze was lighter or denser at the times of the various 
 exposures. And the suddenness of the changes in the density of the mist as thus recorded is 
 quite remarkable, two consecutive negatives, taken at minute intervals only, sometimes exhibiting 
 extremes of contrast from this cause. At one time, indeed, the haze was so strong that the atmo- 
 sphere, for some little extent around the solar crescent, was sufficiently luminous to imprint itself on 
 the negative even during the fraction of a second that the latter was exposed. In a large number 
 of the plates the lower portion of the sun is partially obscured, and the sharpness of the limb lost 
 by the effect of a photographically dense belt of haze that hung tenaciously over that portion of 
 the solar disk. These negatives, therefore, cannot be read by the plan of measuring the distance 
 apart of the cusps. But since the effect of lack of perfectly sharp definition upon the main por- 
 tion of the limbs of the sun and moon has been merely to smooth somewhat their naturally rough 
 and uneven outline, the centers of the two disks can be found with as great accuracy as if the defi- 
 nition were absolutely perfect, and by following therefore the method of reading by determining 
 the distance apart and position of the centers, the value of the negatives for astronomical purposes 
 will probably be found not to be in the least impaired by the effects of the hazy weather. 
 
 These partial-phase photographs exhibit very well a physical phenomenon that has been often 
 noticed before, namely, an apparent increased brightness of that portion of the solar disk imme- 
 diately bordering the projection of the dark limb of the moon. The cause of this easily-explained 
 appearance has, so far as I know, been invariably misconceived by such astronomers as have dis- 
 cussed the matter, its occurrence having been even adduced, most erroneously, as evidence in favor 
 of the existence of a lunar atmosphere.* On account, therefore, of the very important bearings 
 which this simple little glow of light has been made to assume, a thorough understanding of its 
 true explanation becomes quite necessary. 
 
 The phenomenon, first observed by Professor Stephen Alexander, in 1831, was specially looked 
 for and again found by him in his expedition to Labrador on the occasion of the eclipse of 1860. In 
 his report on that expeditionf he states that it was seen by himself and three other observers, was 
 plainly depicted on the photographs, anil also " is unquestionably pictured in the copies of daguer- 
 
 '"On the Indications by Phenomena of Atmospheres to the Sun, Moon, and Planets." By Professor Challis. 
 Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society, Vol. XXIII, page 231. 
 
 t In the " Report of the Superintendent of the United States Coast Survey for the year 1860." 
 
136 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 reotypcs of the eclipsed sun taken at Mr. Campbell's observatory in Xew York, under the supervi- 
 sion of Mr. Campbell and Professor Looinis, in May, 1854." The Professor, in his report, offers no 
 explanation of the appearance. The same "bright band" occurred also in Mr. ])e La E lie's photo- 
 graphs of the I860 eclipse in Spain, and was explained by the English astronomer royal, Mr. Airy, 
 after proving that a lunar atmosphere could not produce the effect in question, as being purely 
 a subjective phenomenon, due to the effect of contrast.* This suggestion Mr. De La Eue submitted 
 to experiment t by cutting out half the solar crescent in one of his prints and slipping under the 
 flap thus raised a white background to take the place of the previous black one. Immediately, he 
 states, the bright baud disappeared. Again, upon pasting a black disk partially over the sun's 
 image in an ordinary photograph of that body, he asserts that the bright band instantly sprang 
 up along the line of the artificial moon. He therefore holds with Mr. Airy that the phenomenon is 
 purely an optical illusion. 
 
 Now it is rather singular, to say the least, that this appearance, if at all as well marked in the 
 1860 photographs as in those obtained during the eclipse of last August, should have been so sum- 
 marily dismissed from existence and upon the strength of such loose tests as those applied by Mr. 
 De La Eue.f Convinced by the aspect of my photographs that the bright band was not an optical 
 illusion, I re-read De La Rue's account of his experiments in the matter, when it became evident 
 at once that these were not conducted with sufficient precision to be decisive. Thus considering 
 the effect to be wholly one of contrast, De La Euc substituted a background of pure white in place of 
 one of pure black, and found that the brightening disappeared. But here is an important source of 
 error in this method of testing the matter; by using a pure white background a contrast the other 
 way is established, for the white paper is now a bright surface and the gray disk of the solar image 
 a comparatively dark one, so that by the amount of reversed contrast, as it might be termed, the 
 judgment is blinded as to whether the original bright bordering has totally disappeared or merely 
 been so dimmed in effect by the superior brightness of the brilliant white background as to be no 
 longer appreciable by the eye. To make the experiment fair a background should be used of the same 
 tint as the surface upon which the brightening occurs, when, if the latter is wholly subjective, the 
 tint should be uniform across the cut edge. Such a background can be best obtained by cutting off a 
 piece, in the very print to be tested, from the opposite non-eclipsed side of the sun itself and slipping 
 it under the eclipsed edge, previously, of course, cut out from the original black background, so as to 
 exactly complete and fill up the gap in the solar disk originally occupied by the dark moon. With 
 the experiment performed in this way it will be found that the bright band does not disappear, but 
 looks, if anything, more brilliant than before, since now the eye appreciates that there can be no 
 deception and is able to judge absolutely of the true degree of brightness of the little ribbon of 
 light. In a similar manner De La Rue's second experiment is also wanting in thoroughness. To 
 show, as he thought, that the effect could be produced at will by contrasting a bright and dark- 
 surface together, he pasted a black disk so as to partially cover the solar image in an ordinary pho- 
 tograph of the sun when not eclipsed, and states that the print then " showed the brightening 
 very distinctly." But this experiment totally fails to show that the apparent brightening thus pro- 
 duced is as brilliant as that seen in a genuine eclipse picture, and therefore does not prove that the 
 latter phenomenon is wholly of the same nature as the former. To make this experiment also 
 accurate it should be performed by pasting the black-paper disk on the image of the sun in the 
 eclipse picture itself, taking care to cover the same extent of the solar disk on the one side as that 
 actually eclipsed oh the other. If this be done it will be found that the appearance of the faint 
 brightening, produced by contrast along the line of the black disk, (visible to some persons, but 
 which I confess I have never been able to see at all myself,) is altogether inferior in brilliancy and 
 extent to that bordering the line produced by the genuine eclipse. 
 
 This phenomenon, then, so frequently seen and photographed during a solar eclipse, is, 
 beyond all question, real. To account for its appearance, my first step was to ascertain if it was 
 
 * Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society. Vol. XXIV, pp. 13 and 188. 
 
 t Philosophical Transactions, 1862, page 368. 
 
 t At the time of writing I had not seen Professor Challis's subsequent papers, (Monthly Notices MI' tin- l.'nval Astro - 
 nomical Society, Vol. XXIV, page 49, and Vol. XXV, page 18,) in which he also calls in question Messrs. De La Rue and 
 Airy's assertion that the phenomenon is purely subjective, though finally assenting to Airy's conclusion llmt the exist- 
 ence of a lunar atmosphere would not account for the appearance. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 137 
 
 peculiar to an eclipse, or would occur, as I rather anticipated, whenever the same optical conditions 
 were reproduced. To answer this question, experiments were made with a miniature artificial 
 eclipse, which I prepared in my optical room at the Army Medical Museum after my return from 
 the West, in the following way : For the sun I used the disk of ground glass that serves as the source 
 of illumination for photographing certain characters of microscopic objects. This disk, set in a cir- 
 cular brass mounting', is fixed at the end of a short tube projecting horizontally into the room from 
 the window shutter, and is illuminated evenly and steadily by a beam of sunlight reflected from the 
 mirror of a heliostat outside the window. Exactly in line with the axis of the tube, and therefore 
 with the direction of the light, a camera was mounted, armed with a Dallmeyer triplet lens. Rep- 
 resenting the moon by a disk of black paper, my first experiment was to paste this disk directly 
 upon the ground glass, adjust the focus for the two together, and then take an instantaneous picture. 
 As was expected, a print from this negative showed not the slightest trace of a bright border to 
 the line of the dark disk. I next placed the artificial moon three -inch en or so in front of the sunlit 
 ground glass, so that its image in the camera should appear to eclipse about one-third of the ground- 
 glass disk, then changed the focus to correspond with the altered distance of the " moon," so as to 
 preserve the image of its edge sharp, and again exposed instantaneously. The photograph thus 
 obtained bore an astonishingly close resemblance to a picture of the sun partially eclipsed ; so close 
 indeed, as, at the first glance, to completely deceive Professor Ilarkness, who happened in shortly 
 after the negative was taken, and to whom I merely showed it without comment. The ground 
 glass being, of course, somewhat out of focus, appears most strongly illuminated in the center, with 
 a gradual and uniform diminution of brightness toward the edges, precisely like the appearance 
 of the sun itself, while the grain of the glass represents very well the mottling of the solar surface. 
 But most striking of all is the riritl bonier of increased brightness adjoining the edge of the imitation 
 moon. This appearance, identical in all respects with that shown by the eclipse pictures, is even 
 more unmistakably marked. But to submit the question of its actual existence to a rigid test, 1 
 cut out a second disk of blackened photographic paper and pasted it on one of the prints over the 
 opposite side of the artificial sun from that eclipsed, being careful that it should cover the same 
 extent of the solar disk as the amount eclipsed by the mock moon. The print was then strongly 
 rolled and shown independently to four different persons, who were totally ignorant of what it was 
 intended to represent, or of what they were expected to see. Each was merely asked if he observed 
 any difference, without a hint as to the /./<? of difference, between the two concave edges presented 
 by the picture of the " sun." Three replied instantly and unhesitatingly, yes ; that one border was 
 brighter than the other, all designating for the edge possessing this bright border that of the arti- 
 ficial moon. The fourth answered equally promptly that one looked " sharper" than the other; and 
 being asked to define what he meant by " sharper," replied that one edge appeared to standout 
 more vividly sharp and clear cut, because the gray background iras lighter immediately along its bor 
 tier than on the opposite x'lc. lie also, of course, pointed out the "eclipse" edge as that adjoining 
 which the brightening occurred. To make sure that the appearance was not a chance eftect on thai 
 particular negative, owing to some unnoticed error in the, method of conducting the experiment, I 
 repeated the hitter on another day, taking a second negative with a flat disk for the moon, and a 
 third with the bowl of a hemispherical porcelain capsule substituted for the disk. The effect was 
 I lie same an increased brightness along the line of the imitation eclipse. A final test was made 
 with one of the negatives itself, placing beneath it a piece of paper on which was a line of printed 
 dots. Holding the negative, then, to the light the dots could be plainly seen even through the cen- 
 ter of the image of the ground glass, but close to the concave edge of the artificial moon they dis- 
 appeared, nor could any amount of straining of the eyes make them visible; showing that for a 
 narrow space bordering this edge the silver deposit in the negative was actually denser than on the 
 rest of the image of the mock sun. 
 
 These artificial eclipse photographs, thus proving conclusively that the phenomenon in ques 
 tion could be made manifest at will by photographing any opaque body seen projected against a 
 distant luminous surface, suggested at once that the appearance ought to be one of common occur- 
 rence in photographs, since, of course, these optical conditions are constantly present. Remember- 
 ing, then, that 1 had indeed often seen a faint appearance of some such brightening along the edge 
 18* 
 
138 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 of opaque bodies in my photographs of microscopic objects taken through the, microscope by trans- 
 mitted light, where, of course, the required conditions were present, I turned first to my volumes of 
 these photographs and found, as expected, constant indications of this increased brilliancy of the 
 field of view as the edges of opaque objects were approached. But the appearance was always 
 faint, since in the prints the field of view itself was generally but faintly tinted. To make certain, 
 therefore, of the actual presence of the phenomenon,! selected a negative of unusual intensity, which 
 1 judged should, on that account, show the brightening very strongly, and caused to be taken from 
 it a very deep print, sodeep that in thefinished picture the main portion of the Held should be of a pretty 
 dark shade. And the result fairly astonished me in the brilliancy and extent of the glow of light 
 represented as bordering all the irregular outlines of the opaque object. Upon the strength of this 
 experiment I next selected, quite at random, two ordinary stereoscopic negatives, the subject being 
 our temporary observatory at lies Moiues as seen relieved against the bright sky, and had similar 
 deep prints taken from them also. As confidently expected, the result was the same ; the hidden 
 shading in the impression of the sky upon the negative was. liy the dec]* printing, forced to show 
 itself, and the building in the center of the pictures appeared bordered by the same glow of light 
 manifest in the photomicrographs and the eclipse photographs. And knowing how to appreciate 
 the faint manifestation of this interesting phenomenon afforded by photographic prints of the ordi- 
 nary intensity, I constantly find indications of its presence in photographs of every description 
 where a dark body is shown against a distant luminous background. 
 
 The phenomenon, then, so far as I know, unsuspectingly supposed, by those astronomers who 
 have allowed it an actual existence at all, to be peculiar to a solar eclipse, is thus shown, on the con- 
 trary, to be of invariable occurrence where the same optical conditions obtain, and to be constantly 
 recording itself upon photographic negatives of ordinary terrestrial objects. That it is not as con- 
 stantly noticed is not surprising, when it is remembered that the eye alone can rarely sec the phe- 
 nomenon, since the actual increase in brilliancy of the luminous background is too slight to lie 
 appreciated by vision in the presence of the positive brightness of the surface upon which such 
 increase occurs. The occurrence of the brightening in photographs, also, though 1 tind it has been 
 frequently noticed by photographers beside myself, yet does not arrest serious attention, both 
 because, as ordinarily printed, the luminous background upon which the brightening occurs appears 
 itself almost colorless, and because, as thus shown, the increase of brilliancy is generally more 
 gradual and diffused than in the case of an eclipse, where there appears .almost a well -defined " baud" 
 of bright light immediately bordering the limb of the moon. The phenomenon, in its terrestrial 
 manifestations, therefore, can only be shown by means of a very delicate photometer, or by the sim- 
 pler method adopted above of taking very deep photographic prints from rather under-exposed and 
 strongly intensified negatives, which, by greatly exaggerating all contrasts of light and shade in 
 the original object, will make plainly visible a slight increase of luminosity in the background which 
 might otherwise escape detection. 
 
 The phenomenon being thus found to be one of general occurrence, requiring as conditions only 
 the projection of an opaque body against a distant luminous background, it was evident to me that 
 the explanation must be sought in the general laws of optics, and diffract ion at once suggested 
 itself as the only possible cause of the appearance. Upon analyzing, then, what would be the effect 
 produced by diffraction where, instead of a single spherical wave of light from a radiant point fall- 
 ing upon the diffracting body, an infinite number of such waves from an extended radiant xvrface 
 were suffered to impinge upon it, it became at once manifest that not only miyltt the phenomenon 
 in question be explained as an effect of diffraction, but that under the conditions named just such 
 an appearance must occur as an inevitable consequence of optical laws. If we place in the path of 
 a cone of diverging rays of monochromatic light, emanating practically from a single point, a solid 
 obstruction and receive its shadow upon a screen, we have the well-known effect of diffraction 
 the line of shadow is bordered by a stripe of increased brightness, that followed by a dark stripe. 
 and that succeeded by another bright one, and so on, the stripes gradually fading in intensity. l!ut 
 this point must be remembered : if we take as a mean the degree of brightness produced on the 
 screen by the unobstructed ray, it is a consequence of optical laws that when, by the interposition 
 of an obstruction, these alternate bright and dark stripes are produced, the positive elfect of 
 
181)9. 139 
 
 increase of brightness above the mean in the bright stripe is always greater than the negative 
 effect of diminution of brightness in the succeeding dark one. That is, the sum of the gain of 
 light in all the bright stripes produced by diffraction is greater than the sum of the loss of light in 
 the dark ones; so (hat could \ve blend the bright and dark stripes together, we should have, as the 
 resultant of the dillVaction effect, a general increase of brilliancy upon the screen bordering the 
 shadow of the diffract ing body, and diminishing in intensity in the direction outwards from the 
 line of the shadow. Now this blending of the stripes is exactly what must occur when, instead of 
 receiving light from a radiant point emitting a single diverging cone of rays, the illumination is 
 obtained from a radiant mirfdrc, emitting of course an infinite number of such diverging pencils 
 from points differently situated. Each of these pencils will produce its own system of stripes by 
 impinging upon the obstruction in its path, and each of these systems will have a different locus 
 according to the position of the individual radiant point to which each owes its origin. And there- 
 fore, since I lie radiant points of the illuminating surface are infinitely close, the systems of stripes 
 must be indistiiiguishably blended, and must, in accordance with the above mentioned law of dif- 
 fraction, produce as a resultant the, effect of a general accession of light upon the screen. But now, 
 since the light comes from an extended surface, the diffracting body has no sharp line of shadow, 
 and the accession of light, produced by the diffraction, being distributed over the whole extent of 
 the penumbra, cannot be demonstrated by the method of receiving the rays of light npou an 
 extended screen. But if a lens be employed and a sharp image of the diffracting body formed in 
 a camera, it seemed to me that the action of the lens in referring each individual ray from the radi- 
 ant surface to the same position in the image as the position of the original point of emission in 
 the surface itself, should confine the uppnrent diffraction effect upon the image to a comparatively 
 narrow strip of the radiant surface adjoining the edge of the diffracting body, and thus cause to 
 appear on the screen of the camera just such an apparent smooth increase of brilliancy to the lumin- 
 ous background immediately adjoining the line of projection of the opaque body as lias been shown 
 to occur in photographs both of celestial and terrestial objects taken under the above conditions. 
 
 Desirous, however, that these general ideas should be critically analyzed by competent author- 
 ity, I placed a set of the various photographs showing the phenomenon in question, together with 
 the above hypothetical explanation of its occurrence, into the hands of Dr. F. A. P. Barnard, Pres- 
 ident of Columbia College, Xew York. That eminent physicist, admitting at once the objective 
 reality of the phenomenon as shown by the photographs, as indeed it is impossible not to do, was 
 disposed to regard my explanation as the only possible one, and kindly interesting himself in the 
 matter, undertook to study the subject critically, especially with reference to what would be tne 
 manifestation of diffraction phenomena in case an image of the obstructing body were formed in a 
 camera by a lens. The results of his analysis, fully confirming the hypothesis advanced as the 
 true explanation of the phenomenon of the "brightening," Dr. Barnard has communicated to me 
 in the following letter, which I am happy to have his permission to quote here in full: 
 
 "COLUMBIA COLLEGE, NEW YOHK, 
 
 " President's Room, November 2, 1869. 
 
 "My I>KAI; Sn; : Pressing occupations, since I had the pleasure of seeing you here, must be 
 my apology for not having more, promptly attended to the matter on which you desired my opinion. 
 I feel quite satisfied that you have hit upon the correct explanation of the phenomenon to which 
 you drew my attention, vi/: the reinforcement in a photographic picture of the lights along the 
 margins of opaque objects relieved against a uniformly illuminated background. This effect I 
 think to be evidently due to the same causes which, under circumstances easily realized, produce 
 what are called diffraction fringes. To illustrate this take the following figure, in which SS' repre- 
 sents the visible disk of the sun, M.M' that of the moon, and XY an indefinite plane. 
 
140 
 
 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 n QP 
 
 (L3. 
 
 "Drawing S M E, S' M 13, the limit of the dark shadow will be M E, and that of the penumbra 
 M D. To any observer situated between D and E the sun will be par- 
 tially obscured. Let Abe the obser\er's place, join A M and produce' 
 it to P. Since every point of the sun's luminous surface may be taken 
 as the origin of a spherical wave, and the actual luminous effect which 
 reaches any point as A is the resultant of all these waves, we may first 
 suppose no other luminous origin but 1' to exist. Then, as is well 
 known, there will be formed on the plane X V, and near to A, a series 
 of fringes alternately bright and dark, as B, B', B", &c., (these letter* 
 being supposed to occupy the places of the bright fringes.) At A itself 
 the illumination will be reduced to one half that which the unobstructed 
 wave would have produced. 
 
 "From A set off A C equal to A B, join (' 31 and produce it to Q. 
 If Q be taken as the origin of a second spherical wave, it will produce 
 a series of fringes, of which the first bright one will fall on A. Further 
 Y on, as at E, may be taken the origin of a third wave, of which the first 
 ~dark fringe will fall on A: then another of which the second bright one 
 
 D u BBBAC JE ~ 
 
 may fall on A, and so on. 
 
 "If we take unity to represent the total illumination produced at A by an unobstructed wave, 
 then the resultant effect of all the component impulses above supposed to affect that point will be 
 positive; that is, will exceed the effect which the same number of independent waves reaching A 
 without interference could produce. To show this, let m, m', m", &c., express the values of the 
 abnormal excesses of light in the successive bright fringes, and , n', n", &<., the quantities of light 
 extinguished in each of the dark fringes, n itself being the amount, suppressed at A of the light of 
 the wave P, which, as we have seen, is one-half. Now, the values of m, m', &c., are all greater 
 than one-half, and those of n, n', &c., are all less than one-half, except that of n itself. Hence the 
 total illumination I at A will be expressed by the equation 
 
 1=1-1- (m n) + (m'n 1 ) + (m"n") + (m"'n'") .... 
 
 in which all the terms inclosed by parentheses are positive. As the fringes diminish toward B in 
 intensity, it is obvious that the illumination of the surface XY will similarly diminish in brightness 
 in the same direction. And because the points taken in the sun's disk in the direction PR may be 
 innumerable and indefinitely near together, the decrease of brightness will be uniform, and the 
 fringes as such will disappear. The curve ab may represent this decrease. In looking upon any 
 such extended surface exposed to the sun's light we shall, however, perceive no such inequality, 
 because the great flood of light from the portions ot the disk too remote from P to be affected by 
 diffraction, as for instance V, drowns out the comparatively feeble effect produced by the small 
 number of rays which graze the moon's limb. But if a very small perforation be made in the plane 
 XY, supposed opaque, and the rays passing through be allowed to form an inverted image of the 
 sun and moon upon a screen behind XY, then each portion of the disk will contribute to make up 
 only its own part of the picture, and the differences of illuminating power in the several points will 
 become sensible. This is what the camera obscura does; for though the objective lens is not a point, 
 yet its effect is to confine all the rays which proceed from any point of the object to t he same point 
 of the image; and hence it will increase, by its whole optical power, the actual inequality of bright- 
 ness produced by diffraction. 
 
 "That it may appear how the unequal illumination ab on the plane XV is transferred, in the 
 image, to the margin of the moon, join Q A, Q being the center of the wave which throws its first 
 bright fringe on A. To an eye at A, this fringe will appear to be at F. In a similar manner other 
 fringes would be formed at F' F", &c., by other waves. And the same causes which obliterate the 
 boundaries of the fringes B, B', B", will also cause those of F, F', F", to disappear. 
 
 "The fact that the excess of brightness between A and I." is not perceptible on the indefinite 
 surface XY, is not owing simply to the cause above assigned for it, viz: the great light from the 
 large portion of the sun's disk which is uncovered; but, further to the fact that the point A being 
 arbitrarily taken, a similar effect might be argued at every other point within the penumbra between 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 141 
 
 D and E, as is illustrated for the point I", by the curve u! //. Such au effect would, therefore, be 
 practically uniform throughout I>K, mid would not interfere with the gradually decreasing bright- 
 ness along XY between D and E, due to the increasing obscuration of the sun in the direction Y. 
 
 "But when we suppose the sun's light to be transmitted through the minute aperture A or 
 through a lens, the excess of illumination produced by diffraction is confined to the rays which 
 come from the points of the sun's disk directly iu line with the moon's limb, and hence their superi- 
 ority of illuminating effect becomes manifest. 
 
 "Your suggestion that the diffraction of the sun's light ought to produce sensible, fringes in 
 the few moments just preceding total obscuration by the moon is just; and your question as to 
 whether these may not be large enough to admit of being directly observed is one which may lie 
 answered by computing the distances at which the successive bright fringes ought to be formed 
 from the margin of the shadow. This may be done by means of the formula 
 
 in which r is the distance from the source of light to the diffracting body; n the distance from this 
 body to the screen on which the fringes are formed ; A the mean length of the luminous undulations, 
 and ? the distance sought. This formula gives the distance of the first bright fringe. Those of 
 the succeeding fringes will be obtained by multiplying the result by V3, V, -/7, &c. 
 
 "Putting r + s (the sun's distance from the earth) at 92,500,000 miles; s (the moon's mean 
 distance from the earth) at 240,000 miles, and / = ;r(T J U5 of au inch, we shall have, for the distances 
 from the margin of the shadow of the first four fringes, Ki feet, SO feet, 103 feet, and 122 feet 
 respectively. Though these alternations of light and shade will travel with great velocity, yet to an 
 observer situated above the earth's surface at a moderate distance, it would seem that they might 
 be perceptible. 
 
 " In the experiment on an artificial eclipse described by you .is conducted in your chamber, the 
 fringes must be much smaller. Taking conjecturally =! foot and s=10 feet, the value of 3 becomes 
 one-sixth of an inch; and the series of fringes will occupy the points distant 0.10 inch, 0.28 inch, 
 0.36 inch, and 0.43 inch from the border of the image of the eclipsing body. 
 
 "Please pardon my delay in attending to your questions, and believe me to be, 
 
 "Very sincerely, yours, 
 
 "F. A. P. BAKNARD. 
 
 "Dr. EDWARD CURTIS, 
 
 "Brevet Major United Matrx Army." 
 
 The above clear exposition of the general fact that an appearance similar to the solar-eclipse 
 phenomenon under discussion must theoretically occur wherever an image of an opaque body, 
 viewed against.a distant evenly illuminated background, is formed by a lens, will, it is believed, 
 when taken in conjunction with the experimental proof shown to be afforded by photographs of all 
 descriptions, completely set at rest the question of the cause of the "bright band" seen to border 
 the eclipsing limb of the moon during the transit of the latter over the solar disk. And with the 
 explanation of the phenomenon as simple diffraction light, the last prop that could even be sup- 
 posed to support the theory of the existence of an appreciable atmosphere to the moon falls to the 
 ground.* 
 
 "The question discussed by Dr. Barnard as to the size and consequent visibility of the distinct fringes that must 
 theoretically border the shadow of the moon occurred to me from noticing that Professor Alexander, in his f/ahrador 
 expedition to observe the eclipse of July, 1860, directed the seamen on his vessel to watch for the possible appearance 
 of sueli fringes, and that the men reported that they did indeed sec sonic ' Hying shadows" and a " slight quivering of 
 the last beams of the sun." (Report of the Superintendent of the United States Coast Survey for 1860, pp. SMr> and '-'(iT. ) 
 Dr. Barnard shows that the diffract ion Cringes in question will lie litnir enough to be observed, but there must still 
 remain as dilh'eulties in the way of the observation the tremendous velocity with which the moon's .shadow travels over 
 the earth and a certain amount of confusion in the fringes themselves, since a slight overlapping of independent sys- 
 tems of fringes must still persist. The difficulty of the swiftness of the llight of the moon's shadow might, to a certain 
 extent, be avoided by observing from a point upon the exact nxtryin of the belt of totality, instead of upon its central 
 line, since at such a station the fringes will rush past the observer in the general direction of their length instead of 
 their breadth, and will thus be more readily detected. 
 
142 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 -'. Photographs of the totality. It is a matter of very great s;ilisl';i<-tii>ii tliiit, despite all the 
 difficulties experienced on account of the Lazy weather, two such exquisite negatives of the total 
 pliase of tLe eclipse were secured negatives that are of value not only as affording pictures per- 
 fect in every detail of some unusually remarkable groups of solar protuberances, but also, it is 
 believed, as marking an era in eclipse photography, proving, as they do, that by a proper selection 
 of chemicals and with a siitliciently short exposure to the plates, the photographic art is capable of 
 yielding pictures of the red prominences of a beauty and delicacy of detail never approached before. 
 These negatives show that even the most massive and dense of these gaseous mountains possess 
 many interesting points of structure, which can, and therefore in future ought to, be perfectly pre- 
 served on the photographic plate; while they prove that it is only by a very accurate timing of the 
 exposure that the true form and appearance of the more; delicate flame-like prominences can hope 
 to be shown at all. Finally, they teach that, by a judicious choice of the proper photographic 
 formula? and processes for this special work, an impression of the corona sufficiently decided to 
 indicate its general features can be obtained with an exposure that is still not too great for any 
 but the very brightest of the prominences, thus rendering it possible to secure in future on one 
 plate, even during a totality of very short duration, a valuable record of all the phenomena of that 
 phase of an eclipse. 
 
 In printing from these negatives much of their detail is lost, since they stand just as they 
 cauie from the fixing bath, having been neither redeveloped, intensified, nor retouched; and, as a 
 consequence, the impression of the fainter portions, especially of the corona, is not what a photo- 
 grapher would call of "printing strength." But believing that the relative intensity of the images 
 of the various prominences and of the corona was itself a point of practical interest, I preferred not 
 to produce any falsification by after-intensifying of the plates, but to preserve the original nega- 
 tives as exact records of all those phenomena of totality which it is possible for photography to show. 
 
 There are but two points to be regretted in connection with these negatives. One is. that the 
 first and last few seconds of totality were lost from the exposures-, and consequently the narrow, 
 continuous line of the main layer of the chromosphere immediately surrounding the photosphere 
 does not appear at all in the first plate, and only as a mere trace in the second. As will be recol- 
 lected, the first twenty seconds of totality were spent in struggling to see the all lint invisible 
 image from the finder in order to be sure of the adjustment of the telescope, and the last nine were 
 also lost because the calculated time for the reappearance of the sun, as given me by Professor Haf- 
 ford, was between nine and ten seconds too early, reckoning by Professor Eastman's rendering of 
 the actual time of the third contact. The first plate, then, according to the latter astronomer's 
 observations, represents the appearance of the phenomena for sixty -'six seconds following the twen- 
 tieth second of duration of totality, and the second for forty-five seconds immediately preceding 
 the ninth second before the termination of that phase. The other slight cause for regret is that, 
 owing to the same difficulty in seeing the image whereby to adjust the telescope for the second 
 plate, the centering on that occasion proves to have been faulty, and the image, of the moon in the 
 second negative is a little off' the field on one side. But since the portion so cut off' is the south- 
 eastern limb, where at the time the negative was taken the prominences were all covered by the 
 advancing moon, the mischance is of no consequence, except in eclipsing the image of the south- 
 eastern position wire and marring the symmetry of the picture by the moon's lunb, as defined by 
 the corona, being lost for a quarter of its extent. In this negative but two of the extremities of 
 the position wires are shown, namely, the north and southwestern ones, while on the first plate all 
 four are clearly visible. 
 
 Plates X and XI are lithographic fac-similes of these two totality pictures. The drawing on 
 the stone was done under my personal supervision, and great pains were taken that it should be in 
 all respects an accurate copy of the originals. But it is impossible to reproduce upon stone all t In- 
 delicate detail of these negatives, and the description that follows is intended to apply to Un- 
 original photographs rather than to these lithographic plates. The latter represent the sun and 
 moon in the position they assumed to the naked e\e at DCS Moines, the upper position wire being 
 thus northeast, the right-hand one northwest, the lower southwest, and that on the left southeast. 
 
 In studying the phenomena of the total phase of the eclipse these photographs are, of course, 
 of great assistance. And though, so far as the red protuberances are concerned, the genius of 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 143 
 
 Lockyer, Janiiseu, and lluggins lias rendered it 110 longer necessary to wait for a solar eclipse in 
 order to study their form, structure, and constitution, yet accurate photographs of the phenomena 
 of totality are still of interest, if not value, as affording a faithful representation of the peculiar 
 features of the corona and of the appearance at a given time of large groups of protuberances, 
 whose mutual relations can thus be more readily recognized than by the plan of viewing the indi- 
 vidual prominences in succession by means of the spectroscope. And such a comprehensive survey 
 of the combined appearance of the corona and of groups of protuberances is of especial interest at this 
 time in connection with the important subject of an outer solar atmosphere beyond the layer of the 
 chromosphere a subject upon which the views formerly entertained have of late been necessarily 
 greatly modified by the results of spectroscopic observations. This means of research has now quite 
 conclusively shown that the compound gaseous atmosphere formerly imagined to extend to an im- 
 mense distance from the surface of the sun, and to be the seat of the absorptive action producing the 
 dark lines in the continuous spectrum of the photosphere, does not exist as supposed, but that this 
 action takes place beneath the chromosphere. Moreover, from the known excessive tenuity of the 
 gas in the summits of the red protuberances, and from its comparatively moderate density even in 
 the main substance of the chromosphere,* it follows that whatever gaseous matter exists beyond 
 this envelope must be in a state of extraordinary rarefaction. 
 
 Xow difficult and perplexing though it may be to conceive of an atmosphere that will exist 
 above a layer of extremely rarefied hydrogen gas, yet the evidence afforded by these photographs 
 that the corona is such an atmosphere seems incontestable. In the lirst place, that this strange halo 
 cannot belong to the moon might be considered sufficiently certain from the numerous considera- 
 tions that render impossible Hie existence of any appreciable lunar atmosphere. But positive proof 
 is afforded by the two photographs, which, when compared together, show unmistakably that in 
 August last the corona -was progressively eclipsed by the ad vaneing moon precisely as were the 
 protuberances. In the second place, the notion that the corona may be the luminosity of our own 
 sun-lit atmosphere beyond the belt of totality is also both theoretically impossible and practically 
 proven false by the testimony of the photographs. As to the theoretical considerations, it is suffi- 
 cient to point out that with the diameter of the moon's shadow upon the earth twice or three times 
 as great as the vertical extent of our own atmosphere, it is geometrically impossible for an observer 
 near the center of that shadow to see any portions of our atmosphere which lie beyond the cone of 
 darkness which portions alone, of course, could under the circumstances be illuminated in appa- 
 rent contiguity with the moon's limb. This illumination of the earth's atmosphere, could it take the 
 form of a distinct halo, resembling the corona at all, would necessarily appear as an immense ring of 
 light in the heavens, altering its apparent relative position with respect to the moon, as the latter 
 body advanced in its transit over the sun. Theory alone, then, would force us to the conviction 
 that the corona must belong to the sun ; but, as previously stated, positive evidence pointing in the 
 same direction seems to be afforded by the photographs, in the fact that they show an unmistakable 
 relationship bctirrcn i-orona anil protuberances, the corona being markedly deficient immediately over 
 those prominences where the substance of the chromosphere has been heaped up into apparent solid 
 nodules, and markedly brilliant in and among the closely grouped protuberances composed of long 
 waving tongues and small detached masses of gaseous matter.t These peculiarities of the corona 
 were quite generally noticed by the eye-observers also at DCS Moines, where the brilliancy of the 
 corona light was dimmed by the haze; but I can readily conceive that in a clearer atmosphere they 
 would not be so apparent, since from the great depth of corona looked through, the total visual 
 luminosity along a given line of sight might be so great that a considerable excess or deficiency of 
 brilliancy for a space of but limited extent along this line might be relatively too slight to be 
 detected upon viewing the corona as a whole. In the photograph, however, where the total effect is 
 
 * Frankliiml and Lockyer. Proceedings of the Royal Society, Vol. XVII, No. 109, pp. 289, 290. 
 
 t The lithographic fac-simile of the first totality picture (I'l ate X) while giving a faithful representation of the 
 intensity and general extent of the corona, us shown by the photograph, I am sorry to find fails, in printing, to show the 
 irregularities of its outline. The corona should appear almost alisent in a direction towards the right-hand upper 
 corner of the plate, and should show a marked converging burst of light exactly towards the right-hand side of the 
 picture. In and among the group of protuberances embracing Hie " T," the corona light should also appear much 
 stronger than the lithograph represents it. Plate XI (fac-simile of the second totality photograph) is, however, very 
 faithful in its representation of (he corona. 
 
144 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 but faiut, these variations iu the coronal brightness in the plane of the great circle of the solar 
 sphere normal to the line of sight become readily manifest. Other irregularities in the features of 
 the corona, incompatible with the notion of its being a phenomenon of our own atmosphere, are 
 shown by the photographs, namely, a converging bundle of rays stretching out to the northwest, and, 
 what especially points to the corona's being an envelope of the sun, a well marked deficiency of the 
 halo in the neighborhood of the solar poles.* And still more conclusive than any of these photo- 
 
 * Since writing the above, I have read with considerable surprise an extract from a letter of Dr. B. A. Gould to 
 Professor Henry Morton, of the Franklin Institute of Philadelphia, published in t he current .October number of the 
 journal of that institute, (page 222) in which Dr. Gould says : " An examination of the beautiful photographs made at 
 Burlington and Ottnmwa by the sections of your party in charge of Professors Mayer and Hiiues. and a comparison of 
 them with my sketches of the corona, have led me to the conviction that the radiance around the moon, in the pictures 
 made during totality, is not the corona at all, but is actually the image of what Lockyer has called the chromosphere." 
 Dr. Gould proceeds to specify the points at variance between the corona as photographed and the same object as seen 
 and sketched b\ him, and because the two representations do not correspond in feature he infers that the objects 
 depicted cannot be identical. This same argument would apply equally well to the ' radiance" shown in my own photo- 
 graphs, since in them the phenomenon, though faint, agrees in outline with the' similar object on the Burlington and 
 Ottnmwa pictures. 
 
 Now I cannot but believe that Dr. Gould is in error in imagining this aureole not to be simply the image of the 
 more intense portion of the corona near the surface of the sun. In the first place the experience of this very eclipse 
 has shown how guardedly all sketches and drawings of the appearances of totality should be receh ed as a Hording an 
 accurate record of either the shape, size, or position of the various objects. This is evident upon comparing the various 
 sketches made by eye observers of the protuberances and corona, both with each other and with the photographs, and 
 observing the very great discrepancies manifest. Of course it is not meant that accurate measurements made by a 
 micrometer eye-piece in the telescope or similar determinations of position angle cannot be relied upon, but, on the con- 
 trary, the argument is that only such are to be received as trustworthy, and that all yi-wraJ sketches and drawings made 
 hastily during the few exciting minutes of totality, or from memory afterward, form but a weak ground upon which to 
 base an important scientific hypothesis. But positive proof in the question a I issue is atlbrded by the very perfect photo- 
 graphs of the corona taken at Shelbyville, Kentucky, by Mr. AYhipple, of the Cambridge expedition. Here we have a series 
 of several negatives obtained by receiving the focal image of a six-inch object-glass directly upon the sensitive plate, 
 and taken with a wide range of exposures from five to forty seconds. Of these the one exposed the longest yields a 
 splendid and unmistakable picture of the corona, representing it. where the converging rays occurred, of a depth equal 
 to a quarter of the moon's diameter. Surely Dr. Gould c: of imagine the aureole of thi* photograph to be the chro- 
 mosphere and not the corona, and yet all of these pictures of Mr. Whipplc's, ami nil of the Philadelphia expedition, and 
 my own agree perfectly in the features and position of the \ arions irregularities in the outline of the corona, the differ- 
 ence in the representation of that object in the several photographs being solely one of extent and brilliancy. Dr. 
 Gould adduces as an additional argument in favor of his assumption the observation that the long coronal beams, 
 appeared to him to be "variable." while the " aureole" photographed was evidently " constant" during t he time of totality. 
 This argument, however, loses some of its force when it is remembered thai to other observers the corona appeared to 
 the eye absolutely unchangeable, both in form and position, during the whole period of the total obscuration. 
 
 Perhaps Dr. (Jould, since he based hisbypothesis upon an examination of the photographs taken by the Philadelphia 
 expedition, was influenced in forming the opinion he has advanced by the fact that upon these photographs the 
 "aureole," while falling far short of the height above the moon's limb attained liy the corona, as seen by the eye, yet 
 appears of very great brilliancy, rivaling the protuberances in that respect, and comes to almost an abrupt termination 
 a short distance above the solar surface. Comparing, therefore, 1>riUiiiii<-// with rjrteut, Dr. Gould may have taken the 
 disagreement in these respects between the corona as photographed and as seen, to afford an additional argument in 
 favor of the idea that in the former case the aureole represented could not be the corona at all. lint as a fact this great 
 and rather undue brilliancy of the corona, considering its extent, in the photographs described, is probably altogether a pho 
 tographic effect, such prints of the Burlington andOttumwa pictures as I have seen giving every indication that the nega 
 lives from which they were taken were strongly intensified after fixing. This Operation, practiced to give additional den- 
 sity to weak negatives, would have, in this case, precisely the effect of increasing on the photograph the apparent brilliancy 
 of the corona, without adding to its extent. Moreover, that this excessive photographic brilliancy of the under portion 
 of the corona should not be taken as a proof of any physical or chemical peculiarity in the actual object is quite con- 
 clusively proved by my own photographs, which, while showing about the same extent of corona as those pictures of 
 the Philadelphia, party that received the least exposure, yet represent it as a very feeble luminosity, fading gradually anil 
 imperceptibly into complete darkness, and this while the same photographs show the protuberances of great brilliancy. 
 
 If this peculiarity of the Burlington and Ottumwa photographs had indeed any influence in leading Dr. Gould into 
 the misconception into which I cannot but believe lie has fallen, the circumstance affords but another example among 
 many that I have seen, of the necessity that a critic, before attempting to draw scientific inferences from photographic 
 representations, should himself become something of a photographer, else hi- will be very apt to fall into this natural 
 error of ascribing effects wholly produced in the dark-room to physical characteristics of the object portrayed. And, by 
 B singular coincidence, evidence that Or. Gould has not a practical acquaintance with the art would seem to be afforded 
 
 iu this same published letter by his total misinterpretation of another purely photographic effect, viz: the apparent 
 encroachment of the prominences upon the disk of the moon as seen in the photographs. This curious appearance, 
 instead of being due to " specular reflection," is wholly a dark-room phenomenon, as will be explained in the text. 
 
1869. 145 
 
 graphic indications is the testimony of the spectroscope, which in the hands of Professor Harkness 
 gave for the corona a continuous spectrum with no indication of the Fraunhofer lines, and in addi- 
 tion one bright line. 
 
 In view of the above adduced evidence, then, we seem warranted in considering it quite cer- 
 tain that the corona belongs to the sun, and there appears at present no escape but to assume it to 
 represent an extremely rarifted atmosphere above the hydrogen envelope of the chromosphere. 
 Pending, then, the results of future researches upon this mysterious and almost impalpable gaseous 
 atmosphere, it is well to search for such circumstantial evidence as to its existence and its physical 
 conditions as may be afforded by the aspect of the underlying solar prominences ; for it is evident 
 that these by their appearance should indicate whether the gaseous medium that surrounds them 
 is of such extreme tenuity and subject to such sluggish motions only as to be practically powerless 
 to affect by its pressure and currents their rapidly changing forms, or whether, on the other hand, 
 this atmosphere, rare as it must be, is yet of sufficient density and the seat of sufficiently violent 
 winds to palpably blow the light matter composing the chromosphere before it, and to be thus one 
 of the agencies in producing the peculiar and phantastic shapes which the protuberances from the 
 surface of this gaseous envelope frequently assume. 
 
 Now in studying the aspect of the prominences, as shown by the photographs, with this 
 object in view, it is impossible not to be struck with the fact now quite generally noticed in obser- 
 vations of the protuberances, that these bodies are unquestionably produced at the outset by the 
 action of forces from within or beneath the gaseous envelope of the chromosphere itself that they 
 are upheavals, in other words, and not in any respect waves upon the gaseous sea blown into exist- 
 ence by winds of an outer atmosphere. This appearance of upheaval is perhaps most strikingly 
 manifest in the magnificent prominence seen at the under southwestern border of the moon, 
 which, from its size and splendor, has been universally called the "great protuberance." On 
 examining this in the second totality photograph, holding the plate so that the prominence shall 
 be uppermost, it will be seen to closely resemble in character a bubbling spring, or a fountain 
 whose discharge pipe terminates a little below the surface of the water. There is the same appear- 
 ance of vast volumes of matter tossed up into an irregular heap by the ejecting force and sinking 
 back again on all sides in long vertical rolls. Four such down-pouring streams of gas are visible 
 in this fiery fountain, two of apparently greater density, because viewed directly from the front, 
 flowing toward the observer, and the others, one to each side, leaving a clear space between their 
 under surfaces and the main layer of the chromosphere, which, reaching right and left from the 
 central streams, is just visible as a narrow lino above the limb of the dark moon. It would seem 
 that in this case the upheaving force was directed obliquely to the right, (the photograph being 
 still held upside down,) and was also advancing in the direction of its slant, since the middle 
 streams roll down with a little inclination to the left, the right-hand one is sharply bent as if by 
 the main mass of the protuberance pressing against it from behind, and that on the left is trailed 
 off into a beautiful long streamer of considerable tenuity, which, finally breaking up into little 
 detached masses, sinks down until lost behind the body of the moon, the appearance being not 
 unlike the long trail of smoke from a locomotive. Xorth. of this great fountain protuberance is a 
 group aptly named by some one the antelope horns, which exhibits no less markedly their formation 
 by ejection from the gaseous stratum below. Here, ho\vevcr, the matter would seem to have been 
 forced up in a double narrow column, of which one at least was possessed also of a spiral motion, 
 since the north "horn" still shows a distinct spiral twist, perfectly visible in the photograph. 
 These two columns, falling apart, are seen sinking back to the surface of the sun in opposite direc- 
 tions. Beyond this group again, still in the second photograph, is a bright prominence strongly 
 suggestive of the action of a sudden and, as it were, explosive force, the gas flaming out in all 
 directions from one point of greater intensity close down to the border of the moon, the whole 
 looking like the bursting upward of a bombshell. 
 
 On the first totality plate there are visible, beside the great fountain protuberance, two others 
 of massive character, one of them, surmounted by two short tails or streamers, bearing a rude 
 resemblance to the head of some of the long-eared varieties of owls. The appearance of this 
 prominence suggests the idea that it is rotating on a vertical axis. Xeither of these protuber- 
 ances presents any striking features, so we may pass at once to the main object of interest in this 
 19* 
 
146 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 picture, namely, a group of delicate, phantastic name-like prominences, extending along the eastern 
 limb of the sun for a distance of 35, and shown in the photograph with exquisite beauty. The 
 most southerly of these bears a striking resemblance to a capital T, the cross-piece being entirely 
 detached from the main shaft and curved with the concavity toward the sun. This prominence 
 looks precisely as if it were the eifect of a sudden spirting of gas ejected directly upwards from 
 the surface of the chromosphere, of which the top of the column, its force being spent, is rolled 
 into a huge ring, like the rings of smoke from a locomotive, and is slowly settling back. It is very 
 like many of those figured by Professor Zollner, as seen by him in his spectroscope.* Immediately 
 beyond this prominence is another long, narrow wisp of gaseous matter curling to the north and 
 ending in three detached masses, which, having apparently floated oft' from the end of the wisp, 
 seem to be falling back to the sun. The whole suggests the appearance of a rocket just burst, 
 when the stars and the long curved tail are both slowly sinking to the earth. Next to this rocket 
 occurs a confused mass of rolling flames of gradually decreasing height, which look as if they too 
 had been previously waving in long tongues, but were now bowed down and rolled into a heap 
 together. Beyond them, in the middle of a space almost devoid of corona, stands the most inter- 
 esting of all the protuberances seen during the eclipse. It is composed of a narrow tapering body 
 inclined to the sun's surface at an angle of 45 toward the north, and terminating in three long, 
 widely divergent streamers. The body tapers to the finest point, where it apparently touches the 
 lunar disk, and contains four nodules of greater density symmetrically arranged. Of the stream- 
 ers, one starting from the upper surface of the body as it stands inclined, passes vertically upward 
 a short distance and then, bending sharply down almost at a right angle, sweeps off to the south. 
 The two others, the middle and brightest one of the three being a continuation of the main body, 
 follow the general direction of the latter toward the north while curving gradually downward. 
 All three in their final course are very nearly parallel to each other, and would, if prolonged north- 
 ward, meet the surface of the sun at a very acute angle. From the striking resemblance which 
 this curious protuberance bears to an ear of Indian corn as seen growing iipon the stalk with the 
 long points of the husks waving in the wind, I have given it that name. Beyond it are two long 
 curved tongues of gas arching sharply to the south. 
 
 Now, on viewing as a whole the extraordinary group of prominences just described, it would 
 seem that here, in exception to the indications from the other protuberances studied, there is 
 afforded circumstantial evidence, such as it is, of the action of a local current of some gaseous 
 medium of sufficient density to be able to bear down the substance of the prominences before it. 
 The current thus indicated is in the form of a gigantic whirlwind upon the surface of the chromo- 
 sphere, with, a sweep over two hundred thousand miles in diameter around the corn-ear protuber- 
 ance as an axis. The indications, which are numerous, striking, and concordant, are as follows: In 
 the first place, with reference to the corn ear itself, it is difficult not to believe that this prominence 
 as represented in the photograph is, from whatever cause, rapidly rotating, since the supposition 
 of such a motion is by far the most natural and simple way of accounting for the fusiform shape of 
 the body and the coexistence of the widely divergent streamers, which' have precisely the aspect 
 of being whirled off from the main mass by the action of centrifugal force. As a cause for this 
 axial rotation, the first conjecture would naturally be that the prominence, like all that have been 
 already studied, is a mass of glowing gas that has been projected upward from the surface of the 
 chromosphere, only here with unusual violence, and with an accessory screwing motion, which has 
 imparted to the mass a rotation visible at its summit, where the force of propulsion has ceased, by 
 the whirling off of portions of gaseous matter. This supposition, however, which would hold good 
 were the prominence isolated upon the surface of the sun, does not account so well for the aspect 
 of the rest of the group, of which it is the central figure, as the hypothesis that the mass owes its 
 present form and spinning motion to its being a passive victim in the vortex of a mighty tornado. 
 The indications of the whirlwind afforded by the other members of the group are to be found, first, 
 in the appearance of the two long wisps of gas north of the corn ear, which unmistakably owe their 
 form and position to the same force that is acting upon that prominence; secondly, in the aspect 
 of the rolling masses of flame to the south, which appear to be borne down by some force whose 
 action extends obliquely outward in a straight line from the base of the corn ear, and very nearly 
 
 * Astrouomische Nacliricbten, Bd. 74, No. 1769. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OP AUGUST 7, 18G9. 147 
 
 parallel to the direction of the long southerly streamer from the same. Finally, evidence is afforded 
 by the total absence of any loose wisps of gas in the bare spot upon which the latter protuberance 
 is reared. 
 
 STow, in order to understand exactly the value. of the indications thus pointed out, let us assume 
 a whirlwind, and deducing what would be its natural effects, observe how they correspond with 
 the actual appearances manifest in the photograph. In the first place, .it is not unnatural to imag- 
 ine that the violent bubbling action in the chromosphere, producing the group of flames containing 
 the "T" and tho rocket, extended originally along the whole arc between those protuberances and 
 the wisps beyond the corn ear. Let us then assume the generation, .in the center of this troubled 
 mass, of a whirlwind, shallow in depth but of great lateral extent. Such a tornado would naturally 
 catch up all the flickering tongues of gas within its grasp, suck them into its vortex, and there mold 
 them into precisely such a tapering and whirling mass as the body of the corn ear presents. The 
 top of this gaseous column then being finally carried above the level of the whirlwind, its outer 
 layer would be swung off by centrifugal force into just such long trailing streamers as are actu- 
 ally found to diverge from the summit of this prominence. Beneath the whirlwind we should 
 expect everything not sucked into its vortex to be blown flat, and we accordingly find the surface 
 of the chromosphere for a wide extent around the base of the corn ear absolutely level, while the 
 flaring flames to the south are bowed down into a confused heap, where they impinge upon the under 
 surface of the tornado. And this surface, as thus sharply defined, by the line bounding the summit 
 of the mass of rolling flames, will, when the real position of the hidden sun on the photograph is 
 taken into account, be found to be almost exactly tangential to the solar surface at a point a little 
 north of the corn ear, and very nearly parallel with the upper surface of the whirlwind, whose 
 direction is clearly indicated by means of the streamers from the above-mentioned prominence. 
 The upper and lower surfaces of the eddy, however, converge slightly toward the north, and if 
 we assume the limit of the tornado in that direction to be reached while its sweep is yet within the 
 tumultuous hearings of the chromosphere, we. should again anticipate precisely the appearance 
 actually shown in the photograph. We should expect, that is, that the loose bodies of gas near the 
 border of the storm would be caught by the gigantic eddy, and whirling around upon its outer sur- 
 face, would be drawn out into long, curved, trailing streamers, densest at the base where still cling- 
 ing to the surface of the chromosphere, most tenuous at the tips where spun out into a condition of 
 extreme rarefaction by the sweeping current. And nothing could be more perfect than the realiza- 
 tion of these anticipated effects in the two long tongues of gas seen in the photograph north of the 
 corn ear. The curve of their sweep is probably foreshortened by perspective, but it will be at once 
 observed that their tips point exactly toward the tips of the two northerly streamers from the 
 above-mentioned prominence, clearly indicating that all are borne upon the surface of the same 
 mighty current. 
 
 Here, then, we luive the case of a group of striking phenomena, and a hypothesis that seems 
 to fully and naturally account for them all. But even if we assume upon the strength of these 
 indications that a whirlwind actually existed as imagined, the question of what was the substance 
 that composed the wind is still an open one. Two suppositions are possible: one, that the tornado 
 was a current in the gaseous atmosphere of the corona, and the other that it was an eddy composed 
 of the matter of the chromosphere itself cooled below the point of luminosity. Such an eddy might 
 readily be accounted for as follows: We have evidence in the "T," the rocket, and the corn ear 
 prominences that the chromosphere was in this region before the time of the eclipse, in a state of 
 unusually violent agitation, the gases being ejected upward in vast volumes and to great heights. 
 Such masses, after the ejecting force is spent and they become cooled by radiation, must contract 
 and gravitate back to the surface of the parent layer in currents of considerable strength. In the 
 present case, then, where the outpouring of the glowing hydrogen had been unusually violent and 
 extensive, it is not unnatural to suppose that the subsequent tumultuous downrush of the cooling 
 gas should, from local causes, have taken on an eddying motion, thus giving rise to the appearance 
 of a whirlwind of which the main substance could not be seen because cooled below the point of 
 luminosity, but the heart, retaining as yet its heat, remained visible as the singular corn ear pro- 
 tuberance. 
 
 Whichever supposition as to the constitution of the imaginary whirlwind may be correct, it is 
 
148 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 important to observe that at the limits of its supposed sweep the photographs show the luminous 
 corona to conie to an abrupt termination, although immediately beyond, in the groups of flaring 
 prominences adjoining, the light of this phenomenon is brighter than at any other point. This fact, 
 which gives additional strength to the hypothesis of the existence within those limits of a violent 
 wind, shows what would a priori be expected, that the gaseous substance of this wind was com- 
 paratively cool. Another point of interest is that the corn ear protuberance, and therefore the 
 vortex of the supposed whirlwind, were quite close to the sun's equator, and were also in the neigh 
 borhood of a large sun-spot and group of bright facula>. Photographs of the sun were taken for 
 two days succeeding the eclipse, to see if any additional sun-spots would appear whose position 
 might have been nearer that of the corn-ear prominence; none such, however, were to be found, 
 although a second group of facula> was brought into view, whose position on the day of the eclipse 
 must have been coincident with that of the group of protuberances containing the "T" and the rocket. 
 Our analysis of the appearance of the red protuberances as exhibited in the photographs, results, 
 therefore, in the finding that at only one point is there any marked indication of these bodies being 
 acted upon by atmospheric currents, and that here, from the fact that the supposed aerial move- 
 ment was a local eddy occurring in the heart of an unusually tumultuous outpouring of the gas of 
 the chromosphere, it is possible that the current should be interpreted as an eddying motion of 
 cooled masses of this substance itself, and not of the rarefied atmosphere supposed to be represented 
 by the corona. But, however all this may be, it is evident from the striking character of the pro- 
 tuberances shown in the photographs that much may be learned from systematic observations of 
 the form and manner of growth and dissolution of groups of these bodies, and it is to be hoped 
 that, following the proposal of Zollner, those having such observations in charge will make use of 
 photography to record the fleeting forms. This could easily be done, and photographs of interesting 
 prominences taken at short intervals during their ephemeral existence by attaching a small camera 
 to the spectroscope, widening the slit of the latter, and receiving upon the sensitive plate the 
 image formed by the rays of the blue hydrogen line in the spectrum of those gaseous bodies. 
 
 The question of whether during this eclipse, as on the occasion of that of I860, there were any 
 protuberances whose light Avas of so much greater photographic than visual intensity that they 
 would impress themselves on a negative while invisible to the eye, it is premature to attempt to 
 answer in this place. This, with the converse question, whether any protuberances were seen 
 which do not appear upon the photographs, must be settled by the eye-observers themselves upon 
 an inspection of the plates. It is well, however, to give the caution that in considering the photo- 
 graphs due allowance must be made for the facts that the exposures did not include the first twenty 
 nor the last nine seconds of totality, and that the observatory at DCS Moines was some distance 
 southwest of the central line of the shadow. 
 
 An examination of the solar negatives taken on days previous and subsequent to the day of 
 the eclipse fails to show any immediate connection between sun-spots and protuberances. Of all 
 the sun-spots visible on the 4th, 7th, 8th, and 9th of August none could have been in the neigh 
 borhood of any of the prominences visible during the eclipse, except the large spot previously men- 
 tioned as being quite near the corn ear protuberance. There is merely the coincidence to note that 
 all the large sun-spots visible between the 26th of July and the 9th of August, (the period over 
 which the solar negatives extend,) were, with a single exception, on the southern hemisphere of the 
 sun ; and that during the eclipse the majority of the protuberances, according to the photographs, 
 were upon the same hemisphere. Here again, however, allowance must be made for the position of 
 the post of observation south of the central line of shadow. Of faculce the solar negatives show 
 an abundance, and prove that there must have been almost a continuous line of these objects along 
 that portion of the circumference of a great circle of the solar sphere occupied by the protuber- 
 ances during the total phase of the eclipse. 
 
 On the question of whether there was any perceptible motion in the prominences during the 
 three minutes of totality, the photographs, on account of the excessively long exposures that had 
 to be given the plates, unfortunately cannot speak. The great fountain protuberance and the 
 extreme tips of the uppermost streamers from the corn ear are the only two of these bodies depicted 
 on both of the plates, and it can merely be said that they show no signs of any perceptible motion 
 having taken place during the time of the total obscuration at Ues Moines. 
 
1869. 149 
 
 A point of considerable interest and practical importance in connection with the totality pic- 
 tures yet remains to be discussed. In the photographs obtained by l)e La Eue in I860, and by 
 Vogel iu 18GS, there is noticeable a marked irregular rounding of the contour of all the prominences, 
 even on the side adjoining the sun, giving them a more or less beaded and sausage-like aspect, 
 Combined with this there is also an apparent encroachment of their under edges upon the disk of 
 the moon, apart from the spurious effect of this nature produced by the progressive motion of the 
 moon during the exposure of the plates in the telescope. These curious appearances have been 
 variously commented upon from time to time; some even imagining the rounding of the under 
 edges of the protuberances to indicate that these'bodies are all separated by a narrow space from 
 the solar surface beneath, and that they must therefore be considered as cloud-like masses floating 
 free in the solar atmosphere. Such a supposition, however, fails to account for the encroachment 
 of the image of the prominences upon the lunar disk, and is totally at variance with the positive 
 knowledge we now possess that the chromosphere forms a continuous envelope around the sun, and 
 that the red protuberances are merely irregular upheavings of its gaseous substance, which only 
 exceptionally become detached in any large mass from the parent layer. Being satisfied that the 
 true explanation of the appearances described was yet to be found, I inspected my own negatives 
 after the eclipse was over, with considerable curiosity, to see what light they would throw on the 
 subject, and was at once struck with the totally different aspect of the prominences which they 
 afforded from the appearance of the same objects in the above-mentioned photographs of previous 
 eclipses. Instead of dense, structureless, shapeless patches, which, with uniformly rounded out- 
 lines, seemed to overlap the rim of the dark moon along their entire extent, I found that even the 
 most massive of the protuberances, the " great " protuberance, presented gradations of shade, 
 exhibiting thus interesting details of structure, and was bounded by a very irregular outline, many 
 feathery offshoots of gas being seen to spring from the parent mass. The encroachment upon the 
 disk of the moon, also, instead of being manifest all along the under border of the prominences, 
 occurred only at isolated points where the light from those objects had been evidently very intense. 
 Moreover, there were depicted many delicate, grotesquely-shaped prominences, resembling long 
 Hickeriug flames, and of comparatively feeble intensity, whose contorted and fantastic outlines 
 were beautifully defined, and exhibited not a trace of the patchy, beaded appearance referred to, 
 nor the slightest indication of encroachment upon the limb of the dark moon. 
 
 From the evidence thus afforded by my negatives, which, be it remembered, were under- 
 exposed, I was at once convinced that the peculiar appearance of the protuberances in the pictures 
 of De La Rue and Vogel was entirely a photograph ic effect due to excessive over-exposure of the 
 plates, combined with want of perfectly sharp photographic definition in the telescope. Now, it is 
 a familiar fact with practical photographers, or with those who are accustomed to study photo- 
 graphic effects critically, that the image of a brilliantly illuminated white object entering into any 
 ordinary view or portrait, where, of course, it is over-timed in exposure, is always slightly larger 
 upon the negative than it should be, lacks the sharp outline of the original, and has all angles and 
 irregular surfaces unnaturally rounded. Thus, a white dress in the sunlight, a flash of light from a 
 diamond, a crack in a board projected against a bright sky, are all exaggerated in size, and blunted 
 in outline in a photograph. There is, in other words, in the case of very bright objects a photo- 
 graphic irradiation upon the sensitive plate, precisely analogous, though much less in extent, to the 
 phenomenon of irradiation in the eye. In the same way as a portion of the retina, though itself 
 receiving no rays, will yet convey the perception of light if the part immediately adjacent be very 
 strongly impressed, so the sensitive iodide and bromide of silver in the collodion film directly 
 adjoining a portion that has been subjected to a prolonged exposure to a brilliant light, will itself 
 take up the action, although iu reality receiving no part of the optical image of the bright object, 
 and be capable under the developer of attracting to itself the falling silver.* 
 
 Though convinced, as previously stated, that herein was the true explanation of the phenomena 
 under discussion, yet to put the existence of this not generally recognized fact of " photographic 
 irradiation" beyond a doubt, and at the same time to show that it will produce precisely those 
 curious effects observable in over-exposed totality negatives, I made upon my return to Washing- 
 
 * Since writing the above I have been informed by Mr. Le Merle, who, in the course of his photographic experience, 
 has worked with dry plates, that this action occurs with them to a much less extent. 
 
150 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 ton some photographic experiments with an artificial total" eclipse, devised so as to reproduce 
 exactly the optical conditions of the genuine phenomenon. The contrivance was as follows : In a 
 piece of ordinary writing paper a few irregular holes were cut around the circumference of a small 
 circle. A disk of black paper of about the same size as this circle was then pasted upon the writing 
 paper over it, so that the cut-out spaces should in every instance seem to project directly from the 
 edge of the black disk, in the same way as the solar prominences appear to rise directly from the 
 moon's limb in a total eclipse. The scrap of writing paper so arranged was then pasted over tin- 
 disk of sunlit ground glass mentioned in the description of the artificial partial eclipse experiment- 
 There were thus a moon, represented by the disk of black paper; bright prominences, produced by 
 the intense light from the ground glass passing unobstructed through the holes in the writing paper 
 and appearing, of course, as in a genuine eclipse, contiguous to the " moon's" limb ; and, finally, a 
 .corona, consisting of the feeble light that filtered through the tissue of the white paper upon which 
 the black disk was pasted. This little " eclipse" was then photographed with the Dallmeyer triplet, 
 an excessive exposure of several seconds being given the negative. The plate was developed with a 
 weak developer, that the action might be slow and carefully watched. At first, of course, up cam e 
 the mock prominences alone, the edges being clear and sharp; but as the action of the developer 
 continued and the little patches grew densely black, it was apparent even to the naked eye that the 
 deposit of silver was overstepping the limits of the true optical image of the prominences, and that 
 the edges were becoming blurred and the corners rounded. Finally, the faint " corona" flashed out, 
 defining sharply the true position of the edge of the artificial moon, and it was then found that in 
 all cases the images of the "prominences" overlapped the edge of the ' ; moon" along their whole 
 extent, precisely as in an over-exposed negative of a real total eclipse. A second negative was 
 then taken with double the exposure of the first, and all these effects occurred again, even more 
 strongly marked than before, the under edge of the shorter prominences becoming now convex 
 instead of concave and bulging far into the lunar disk. Nothing could be more striking than the 
 exact resemblance of these mock prominences to the beaded and sausage-like appearance which the 
 real protuberances assume in an over-exposed negative of totality. 
 
 Were any further proof necessary that these appearances are purely photographic effects, it can be 
 found by comparing with my pictures photographs of the same eclipse taken by other parties where 
 a relatively longer exposure was given. Such a comparison will show that in the latter pictures 
 the rounding and blurring of the edges of the prominences and their encroachment upon the lunar 
 disk, occur strongly marked in cases where the same prominences in my own show not the slightest 
 trace of these appearances. 
 
 Now, that the blurring and rounding upon the over-exposed genuine eclipse pictures are some- 
 what greater than on the artificial plates described, is unquestionable, but it is probable that in the 
 former case some of the effect must be attributed to want of perfect photographic definition in the 
 telescopes, the instruments used being ordinary achromatic refractors, employed during totality with 
 tliefull aperture of the object-glass. And since it is likely that telescopes of this kind will often have 
 to be used for eclipse photography, it is important to appreciate fully the fatal effects of over-exposure 
 upon the impression of the prominences produced by the combined action described, and to know 
 therefore that these effects may not be merely confined to a slight blurring and enlargement of the 
 photographic image of those bodies, but- may extend so far as to totally obliterate all detail of 
 structure and to render the true outlines and characteristic features of the protuberances wholly 
 unrecognizable. 
 
 Having thus reviewed the photographs both of the total and partial phases, we may sum up 
 their teachings in solar and lunar physics as follows : 
 
 First. They prove that the corona cannot belong to the moon, by showing that it was pro- 
 gressively eclipsed by the latter body in its transit over the solar disk. 
 
 Second. They render it almost equally certain that the corona does belong to the sun, by exhib- 
 iting a marked relationship between corona and protuberances, and showing what would a priori 
 be expected in an extensive solar atmosphere, that the corona, at the time of the eclipse at least, 
 was comparatively deficient in the neighborhood of the solar poles. 
 
 Third. Considering the corona as necessarily a gaseous atmosphere, they tend to confirm the 
 deductions from theory that the gas of its composition must be of exceedingly low specific gravity, 
 
1869. 151 
 
 and in a state of extraordinary rarefaction, by showing that the underlying red prominences on the 
 occasion of the eclipse exhibited traces of being acted upon by atmospheric currents only at one 
 spot, where, from the character of the supposed current, the interpretation that this was a local 
 eddy, originating in the chromospheric matter itself, is as probable as the aswunption that it was a 
 whirlwind of the corona. 
 
 Fourth. They show that the protuberances are, certainly in the great majority of instances, if 
 not invariably, produced by an upheaving or ejecting force operating from within or beneath the 
 envelope of the chromosphere. 
 
 Fifth. They exhibit phenomena of which one interpretation may be that the down-rush of 
 cooled gas following an unusually tumultuous and extensive upheaving of the matter of the chromo- 
 sphere may take the form of an eddy or cyclone of unprecedentedly vast dimensions. 
 
 Sixth. They fail to show any marked connection between sun-spots and protuberances; one 
 stm-spot only of those visible on days preceding and following the eclipse being even in proximity 
 to any of the prominences seen during the total obscuration. 
 
 Seventh. Their evidence on the question of whether there was any appreciable motion to the 
 protuberances during the duration of totality at Des Moines is, so far as it goes, opposed to the 
 assumption of any such actual motion. 
 
 Eighth. The evidence they aftbrd that the corona cannot belong to the moon, taken in con- 
 junction with the experimental proof adduced that the glow of light bordering the moon's limb as 
 projected upon the sun during the partial phase is purely an effect of diffraction, and that the 
 encroachment of the protuberances upon the lunar disk in the photographs of totality is a pbe- 
 . nomenon of the dark-room alone, shows that none of the varied phenomena of a solar eclipse can be 
 assumed to afford the least evidence of the existence of an appreciable atmosphere to the moon. 
 
 VII. CONCLUDING SUGGESTIONS. 
 
 Since total eclipses occur so seldom in any given country that it rarely falls to the lot of a single 
 individual to observe more than one or two, the practical lessons as to methods of observation 
 taught by the experience of each eclipse assume considerable importance. Especially is this the 
 case with respect to photographic observations, both because, in general, photography more than 
 almost any other art depends for success upon the absolute perfectness of each and every step in 
 the numerous operations required in its practice, and because, as will be the case until the use of 
 the art shall be generally adopted at observatories, the attempt to apply it off-hand to record the 
 varied phenomena of an eclipse must necessarily be made under the very great disadvantage of the 
 work having to be the joint labor of an astronomer ignorant of photography, and a photographer 
 equally unlearned in astronomy. For photography can never be learned by rote, nor practiced by 
 rule: it is an art that requires in practice special management and adaptation to suit the peculiar 
 features of the different objects it is called upon to picture. Its best resources can thus only be 
 fully brought out for any special work when the operators are as thoroughly conversant with the 
 peculiar nature and characteristics of the objects to be photographed, and the photographic capa- 
 bilities and actual manipulation of the optical instrument to be used, as with the more familiar 
 operations of the dark-room. In order to contribute, therefore, to this desirable general informa- 
 tion on the subject of the various requirements of eclipse photography, all the practical hints sug- 
 gested by our late experience will be given in detail, unimportant and frivolous though many may 
 seem to the unprofessional reader. 
 
 With respect first to the telescope: if a refractor is used it is almost needless to refer to the im- 
 mense advantage that would be gained were the optical portion specially constructed for photography 
 both in the matter of having the lenses corrected for violet instead of mean white light, and also 
 of having the "secondary magnifier" constructed so as to insure a flatter field than is given by an 
 ordinary Huyghenian eye-piece. As to whether to use any such magnifier or to receive the focal 
 image of the object-glass directly upon the sensitive plate, the arguments in favor of the former 
 plan are given on page 124, but it may be well here, on account of the general misapprehension 
 of the subject by such as are not practical photographers, to say a word on the matter of photo- 
 graphic enlargements. Now it might appear to many at first sight far the better way during 
 totality to use the focal image alone to produce the negative, and trust to subsequent enlargement 
 
152 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 to render visible the hidden detail of the diminutive picture. This plan, however, if the object be 
 <i detailed representation of the red protuberances, is a fatal mistake. In the first place it cannot 
 be too strongly insisted upon that the secondary enlargement of an image once impressed upon a 
 wet collodion plate can never, even under the best circumstances, rival a negative obtained by 
 receiving at once upon the sensitive plate an equally good optical enlargement of the original image 
 formed directly in the camera; for not only does the size of the grains of silver forming the pho- 
 tographic image put a definite limit to the minuteness of detail that can be recorded by the negative, 
 but it is a well-known law in photography that even- in the best copies a certain amount of the 
 details and "half-tones" of the original picture is infallibly lost in the copying process. Secondary 
 enlargements, then, are at best but poor substitutes for negatives of the same size obtained by direct 
 amplification in the camera, where the character, (especially in the matter ot'JIatncsx,) the dimensions, 
 and photographic brilliancy of the object to be depicted render this possible. Moreover it must be 
 remembered that to produce even moderately good enlargements, such as they are, the original 
 negative must be unusually excellent. The adjustment of the focus must be absolutely accurate, 
 the length of exposure just right, and the chemicals exactly suited to the character of the object to 
 be photographed, so that even the most brilliant lights may appear of very moderate density in the 
 negative. And there must be no chance flaw in the collodion film : any accidental speck, bubble, 
 or microscopic shred of linen or cotton falling on the plate from the air might, from the smallness 
 of the image, totally obliterate some really large and important object. Now where there is oppor- 
 tunity for repeated experiments, as in lunar or planetary photography, trial after trial can be made 
 until a perfect negative fit for enlargement is obtained; but during the total phase of an eclipse, 
 when all has to be staked upon half a dozen plates at most, and when the length of exposure even 
 for them is necessarily to a great extent a matter of conjecture, the chances of securing a negative 
 sufficiently good to bear enlargement well are very few indeed. From these considerations, therefore, 
 and in view of the fact now abundantly proven that the light -of the solar prominences exerts suffi- 
 cient chemical power to enable these bodies to be photographed of a large size at once, the plan of 
 using the focal image alone for their representation should in my opinion be wholly abandoned. 
 Indeed I consider the indications to be to photograph the protuberances on even a larger scale than 
 that used by me, with a view of bringing out finer details of their structure. But to do this satis- 
 factorily the optical part of the telescope should be corrected, chromatically, for violet light, though, 
 from the peculiar character of the image to be depicted, no special trouble need be taken to secure 
 flatness of field; for the protuberances, it will be remembered, form a comparatively narrow ring only, 
 the area which they inclose the moon's disk being an absolute blank. If the focus is adjusted for 
 this ring, therefore, and the photographic definition of the instrument is good, a beautiful picture, 
 of the prominences of large size might be obtained with a telescope which under the same circum- 
 stances would yield nothing but a blurred, worthless photograph of an object having any great 
 extent of surface, such as the disk of the sun or full moon. 
 
 For the delineation of the corona, the results obtained by Mr. Whipple prove that the use of 
 the focal image alone is the only means by which a picture of that phenomenon to its full extent 
 can be obtained during the short duration of totality. And since the object to be represented in 
 this case is a mere uniform glow of light, without any detail, the arguments used above against this 
 method of photographing as a means of showing the solar protuberances do not apply here. 
 
 The flexure of the tube of the telescope was a thing that gave me a great deal of annoyance, and 
 one that it seems to me could be in great part obviated. In the instrument used, if the finder was 
 adjusted so that its axis was parallel with that of the main tube when the latter was standing 
 vertical, this parallelism no longer held good if the telescope was swung horizontal. During the 
 progress of the eclipse, therefore, the negatives had to be watched with great care to detect the 
 commencement of the inevitable shifting of the image from the center of the plate, and when this 
 was found to occur, it was necessary to suspend the exposure of plates until the finder could be 
 readjusted. In view of this annoyance, therefore, it would be well to see that the tube of an equa- 
 torial intended for eclipse photography possess sufficient rigidity not to bend to any appreciable 
 amount, if, as was the case in August last, the eclipse is to extend over an interval during which 
 the sun is rapidly changing its altitude. 
 
 My plan of using a trigger to release the slotted plate making the instantaneous exposures for 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, ]869. 153 
 
 tbe partial phases, I cannot but regard as a vast improvement over De La Eue's method of having 
 the plate held by a loop of thread, which is burnt off by a lighted taper when it is desired to make 
 the. exposure. That the trigger arrangement is quicker to set and less troublesome to work with, 
 are perhaps minor advantages, but that its use admits of so much greater accuracy in the timing of 
 the exposures is certainly a very important consideration. Indeed, the method I employed left 
 nothing to be desired in the matter of accuracy in noting the exact instant of exposure. My plan 
 was, with eye and ear upon the chronometer, and thumb resting lightly against the under surface 
 of the projecting portion of the wooden slider carrying the apparatus for the exposures, to tap 
 gently on the trigger with my forefinger synchronously with the chronometer beats for several 
 seconds before exposing, so as to get the rhythm of the time-piece Avell fixed in my mind, and theii 
 at a predetermined even second, by a slight increase in the strength of the tap upon the trigger, to 
 release the slotted plate and effect the exposure. And such was the accuracy obtainable by this 
 method that my ear, though delicate enough to readily appreciate the interval, minute as it was, 
 between the click of the trigger itself and the click of the slotted plate striking home at the end of 
 its short course, was yet unable to detect the slightest want of synchronism between the click of the 
 trigger and the beat of the chronometer. The only possible argument against the use of the trigger, 
 that it involves touching the telescope and so risks jarring the same, is entirely specious, for the 
 exposure, being practically instantaneous, is necessarily of shorter duration than the quickest jar 
 that can be communicated to the instrument. It is, therefore, really impossible to produce any 
 blurring or doubling of the photographic image even by quite rough handling of the trigger, a 
 fact that I took care to prove by actual trial. 
 
 This method of timing the exposures I therefore consider as far the best that can be adopted. 
 The employment of a chronograph was at one time thought of, but a very little reflection showed 
 that such an instrument would, under the circumstances, be worse than useless ; for to have even 
 a theoretical advantage over the method of timing described above, it would be necessary to have 
 the seconds registered automatically, a requirement that, to be carried out in the field, would involve 
 the construction and care of special and troublesome apparatus. And even then the advantage of 
 the chronograph would be more specious than real, for in the method of springing a trigger 
 synchronously with a chronometer beat, the probable error in timing the tap is actually less than 
 the probable error of the correction of the chronometer, whose reading must in any method serve 
 as the basis for calculating the actual instant of exposure. And icithout an automatic registration 
 of the seconds, the use of a chronograph would evidently be only a clumsy, troublesome, and round- 
 about way of doing precisely what is effected by my simple plan ; that is, instead of making the 
 exposure directly by tapping a trigger synchronously with the beat of a chronometer, the chrono- 
 graph would require that the seconds should be registered on the instrument in precisely this way 
 by one operator, while the exposure of the plate, made by another operator, recorded itself. This 
 chronographic method of timing would thus depend, after all, for its exactness upon the accuracy 
 with which a tap can be made with the finger synchronous with the beat of a chronometer. It is 
 therefore infinitely the simpler and better plan to have this tap make the exposure itself, and thus 
 avoid both the disadvantage of the transportation and care of an additional and complicated 
 piece of apparatus that is extremely liable to get out of order, and the very serious drawback of 
 the necessity of an additional trained operator to attend exclusively to the marking of the seconds 
 by the face of the chronometer. 
 
 In the construction of the camera -box for my telescope a mistake was committed that could 
 not be foreseen at the time, but which, having proved a source of annoyance on the day of the eclipse 
 by reason of the hazy sky, should in future be avoided. This was that the wooden slider carrying 
 the apparatus for the exposures was placed too far from the eye-piece. The effect of this position 
 of the slider was that instead of ordinarily using, as I had anticipated, the slit in the instantaneous 
 plate about one-twentieth of an inch in width, I found that for the sun at the altitude it would 
 occupy during the eclipse, the whole width of the slot half an inch which had been provided to 
 meet the emergency of unfavorable weather, was necessary even with a clear sky, if the usual two- 
 inch diaphragm cap was used over the object-glass. Still, from the uniform clear atmosphere that 
 prevailed at Des Moiues. I anticipated no trouble from this source, not appreciating how very much 
 a ha/.e would cut down the chemical intensity of the sunlight, and therefore imagining that a three 
 20* 
 
154 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 aud four incli diaphragm cap, by using which four times the usual amount of light could be obtained, 
 afforded an ample resource against the contingency of bad weather. This calculation, however, 
 experience showed to be a mistake; and thus, when the haze on the critical day reduced the sun's 
 actinic force, as the eclipse advanced and the sun sank lower in the west, to a tenth and a twentieth 
 part only of the usual amount, there was no means of allowing in the exposures for this excessive 
 diminution in the chemical power of the light, but by the very objectionable method of using the 
 full aperture of the object-glass ; objectionable, because, as previously mentioned, the photographic 
 definition of the telescope fell off very considerably in sharpness when more than three or four 
 inches aperture was allowed to the object-glass. Since, therefore, experience shows that the sun 
 can be photographed through a haze that will diminish its actinic force to a small fraction of that 
 exhibited when the sky is clear, it is important to see that the arrangement of the instantaneous 
 plate shall allow of an increase of exposure to thirty or forty limes the amount found necessary 
 under the circumstances of a clear sky. 
 
 Another point in the arrangement of the telescope from which an unexpected, and, in this 
 case, very serious 'difficulty was experienced was the plan I had adopted for viewing the image 
 from the finder by allowing it to fall upon a screen of white cardboard. This plan, which I had con- 
 sidered the best that could be adopted, because it allowed the operator at the telescope to see the 
 image from the finder while handling the screws that adjusted the instrument for right ascension 
 and declination, should yet neA*er be trusted again for use during totality, my experience having 
 shown that the image of the corona may readily be rendered so faint by the passage of its rays 
 through a hazy atmosphere as to be totally invisible when viewed in this way. In attempting to 
 improve upon this plan, however, the idea of having the image from the finder visible to the 
 operator who adjusts the telescope should still be carried out; since it is impossible to adjust 
 rapidly where one person observes the image and another handles the screws. I would therefore 
 suggest that the finder be mounted well up on the tube of the telescope, and the image received 
 upon a screen of ground glass, which shall then be in such a position that the operator can view 
 the image by looking through and not tipon the screen, when standing so as to command the adjust- 
 ing screws of the telescope. And care should be taken that the lantern -to light the face of the 
 chronometer during totality shall not shine upon this screen. To provide against the excessive 
 brilliancy of the image of the sun itself during the partial phases, colored glasses would have to 
 be interposed somewhere in the path of the solar ray ; or, better still, perhaps, a flap of paper sub- 
 stituted for the ground glass, through which the daz/ling image of the sun would not appear too 
 bright. 
 
 In the important matter of the proper length of exposure to be given the plates during totality 
 for the purpose of showing the detail of the red protuberances, it is greatly to be regretted that 
 though my negatives are so satisfactory in this respect, yet on account of the exceptional condition 
 of the atmosphere through which they were taken, the exposures actually given cannot be relied 
 upon as a basis for calculation in the future. For the sake, however, of an approximate idea upon 
 the subject, the following analysis of the exposures is given for what it is worth. In the first place 
 it must be remembered that the negatives, despite their present beautiful appearance, were really 
 considerably under-exposed, the impression of the faint flame-like prominences, and of the corona, 
 being only brought out by a dangerous forcing of the development ; that operation having been 
 pushed, as the plates show, to the very verge of fogging. Mr. Le Merle, who managed the devel- 
 opment, estimated at the time, and still maintains, that the, proper exposure would have been twice 
 that actually given ; and it is probable he is right, for with a fuller exposure and a quick develop- 
 ment the contrast between the intensity of the massive protuberances and that of the fainter and 
 more delicate forms would not have been so violent. Starting, then, with double the exposure 
 actually given the first totality negative as the proper time it should have had under the circum- 
 stances that is, two minutes and twelve seconds we know, from the aperture of the object-glass 
 used in photographing the sun during the partial phase immediately before totality, that the effect 
 of the haze at that time was to require an increase of all exposures to an amount at the very least 
 ten times as great as the proper allowance for a fair day. But from the fact that the partial phase 
 negatives, even with the exposure given, are thin and weak, it is probable that the absorptive action 
 of the haze should be taken as considerably greater, even double, the above estimate. We thus 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 155 
 
 obtain for the exposure that the totality plates should have received, had the sky been clear, a 
 range of from six and a half to thirteen seconds, the first number probably being nearest the truth. 
 These figures, however, it is all-important to remember, are correct only for an eclipse occurring at 
 the same time of year, and hour of day, as that of last August ; for a station agreeing pretty closely 
 in latitude and climate with the city of Des Moines ; for a telescope corresponding in dimension 
 and optical arrangement with the Annapolis equatorial ; for a photographic image of the same size 
 as that borne upon my negatives ; and last, but not least, for the same bath and collodion as those 
 used by Mr. Ward in the dark-room of our observatory. 
 
 Now, in view of the great number of considerations thus detailed as bearing upon the question 
 of length of exposure, it is very desirable to determine accurately what Do La Eue attempted to 
 estimate, namely, the comparative photographic intensity of the light from the solar prominences 
 and full moon. For when this is accomplished, the would-be eclipse photographer can calculate 
 very closely the proper totality exposure for a special eclipse, station, telescope, and chemicals, by 
 transporting telescope and chemicals to the station in time to photograph on the spot the last full 
 moon before the eclipse, being careful to take the moon at as nearly as possible* the same altitude 
 that the sun is to occupy during totality. 
 
 On this question of the relative chemical intensity of these two kinds of light, it is again 
 unfortunate that our experience cannot speak decisively, since the proper exposure for us, both for 
 the prominences during the eclipse and for the full moon, is a matter of so much uncertainty. But 
 such as it is, the result is as follows: The probable correct exposure for the prominences, in the case 
 of a clear sky, we have found to be six and a half seconds; and the probable correct exposure for 
 the full moon at the same altitude my preliminary experiments showed to be twenty minutes. 
 These figures would give as the relative chemical intensity of the light of the solar prominences 
 and the full moon, the ratio of 184 to 1, a proportion almost identical with that deduced by De La 
 Eue from his experiments. The corroborative evidence thus adduced points strongly to the 
 accuracy of that astronomer's estimate, and it is therefore safe to say that the plan of experiment- 
 ing upon the full moon, and then calculating the totality exposure according to the above ratio, is 
 probably the most reliable way of attacking the question. 
 
 But still, the first exposure during totality must .be to a great degree conjectural ; and the 
 timing of the subsequent plates must be regulated by the result of development of the first. The 
 operator at the developing tank has thus the vitally-important duty to perform of estimating 
 quickly, but coolly and accurately, from the manner in which the image " comes up," what modi- 
 fication should be made in the exposure for the succeeding plates. It is needless to say, therefore, 
 that this post, the most responsible of all during totality, should be intrusted only to a most 
 accomplished photographer, who understands thoroughly the nature of the object pliotographed, and the 
 exact effect which it is desired to produce. And in future this operator will find a valuable auxiliary 
 guide to a correct estimation of the proper exposure, in those peculiar eifects on the impression of 
 the prominences which I have pointed out as due to over-exposure. (See page 149.) That is, if on 
 developing a totality negative the prominences come up with their base markedly convex towards 
 the body of the sun, there is no necessity of waiting for the completion of the development, and a 
 careful inspection of the amount of detail obtained ; but the operator at the telescope may be at 
 once notified that the exposure must be reduced. By this means time can be saved an all-important 
 consideration during the few precious minutes of totality. 
 
 As to the proper exposure for the corona, my negatives of course are silent, since this object is 
 but very faintly impressed upon them ; but it may not be amiss to state that a most accurate basis 
 for calculation on this subject is afforded by the splendid photographs of the corona already alluded 
 to as obtained by Mr. Whipplc, at Shelbyville, Kentucky. The best of these which shows the 
 corona very nearly if not quite as extensive and brilliant as it appeared to the eye we learn was 
 exposed for forty seconds ; the focal image of a six-inch object-glass being received directly upon 
 the sensitive plate. Mr. Whipple also writes :* " The day was splendid ; not a cloud to be seen." 
 But allowance should still be made in a calculation upon this exposure for the low altitude of the 
 sun at Shelbyville at the time of totality. 
 
 With respect to the nature of the photographic chemicals best suited for negatives of the phe- 
 
 * Philadelphia Photographer, September, 1869, page 291. 
 
156 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 noiuena of totality, the bountiful results obtained by us speak loudly in favor of the formula- em- 
 ployed, and prove the correctness of our reasoning that for this peculiar subject a well-bromized 
 collodion yielding soft thin negatives full of detail, is infinitely superior to one giving the brilliant 
 dense negatives abounding in striking contrasts, which so many photographers are accustomed to 
 use. It may also be added that since, as a general rule, the difficulty in exposing for the solar prom- 
 inences is not to get a long enough, but a sufficiently short exposure, the supposed necessity for a 
 neutral bath in order to obtain the greatest possible sensitiveness, does not exist ; and it is better, 
 therefore, to use the ordinary acid bath than incur the danger of fogging, which is always to be 
 apprehended when the neutral silver solution is employed. 
 
 In the matter of the arrangement of the dark-room and apportionment of labor during the 
 eclipse, I can suggest no improvement. The trough of water to hold the negative baths we found 
 absolutely indispensable on account of the excessive heat of the dark room on sunny afternoons. 
 Without the troughs the temperature of the baths was found to rise as high as 83 Fahrenheit, with 
 fogging of the plates as an inevitable result. The plan of having the reservoir of water outside the 
 building borrowed from De La Hue proved a great convenience in the matter of keeping the 
 barrel filled ; and the large fixiug-trough and dumb-waiters for passing the plateholders in and out 
 were not only conveniences, but really did the part of two additional operators. The division of 
 labor among the four of us on the occasion of the eclipse itself, was so even that the operations per- 
 formed by each took almost exactly the same amount of time, so that we were enabled to all work 
 together and accomplish the greatest amount of work in the shortest possible time. 
 
 In conclusion, to serve as some guide to future expeditions of this kind, I have thought it well 
 to give a list (see Schedule C) of the articles taken by us as our photographic equipment, with the 
 remark that of the extensive and somewhat heterogeneous assortment of materials and implements 
 there given, there, was scarcely a thing that did not come into play. The list was made thus com 
 plete, in the first place, because at the time of our starting on the expedition we thought it likely 
 that we might take our station at Mitchellville instead of Des Moines; and the former being a very 
 small country village, I considered it necessary to go thoroughly equipped in every particular, even 
 to the being prepared to build the observatory with our own hands and tools. 
 I am, General, -very respectfully, your obedient servant, 
 
 EDWA14D OUKTIS, 
 Assistant Surgeon and Brevet Major U. 8. Army. 
 
 Brevet Major General J. K. BARNES, 
 
 Surgeon General United States Army. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 SCHEDULE A.i:;ii'il of .Yr;/(fJi><. 
 
 157 
 
 Date. 
 
 Designat'u of neg- 
 ative. 
 
 rr ^ 
 
 X , 
 
 V ft 
 
 5* 
 
 pi 
 
 H 
 
 Instant of expos- 
 ure by local 
 mean time p.m. 
 
 Diameter of aper- 
 ture of object 
 glass used. 
 
 Widthofslitinin- 
 stantau'us slide 
 used. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 1889. 
 
 
 /I. HI. . 
 
 /I. HI. a. 
 
 in. 
 
 I'H. 
 
 
 July 26 
 
 A 
 
 11 3 25 
 
 4 46 7.9 
 
 2i 
 
 A 
 
 Chronometer fast 6 1 ' 17 m 17 s . 1. 
 
 28 
 
 B 
 
 11 14 55 
 
 4 57 37.5 
 
 2| 
 
 ft 
 
 Chronometer fast 6 h 17 m 17 s . 5. 
 
 29 
 
 C 
 
 8 49 55 
 
 2 32 38. 4 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 Chronometer fast 6 1 ' 17 m 16 s . 6. 
 
 30 
 
 D 
 
 8 52 15 
 
 2 34 59. 1 
 
 2| 
 
 I 
 
 Chronometer fast 6 h 17 m 15.9. 
 
 31 
 
 E 
 
 10 37 30 
 
 4 20 13.5 
 
 3 
 
 A 
 
 Chronometer fast 6 h 17 m 16'. 5. 
 
 August 2 
 
 F 
 
 12 G 55 
 
 5 49 38.6 
 
 4 
 
 i 
 
 Chronometer fast 6 h 17 m 16 s . 4. 
 
 3 
 
 G 
 
 10 1 45 
 
 3 44 29. 5 
 
 2 
 
 i 
 
 Chronometer fast 6 h 17<" 15 s . 5. 
 
 4 
 
 H 
 
 7 41 15 
 
 1 23 59.6 
 
 2i 
 
 i 
 
 Chronometer fast 6 h 17 15". 4. 
 
 7 
 
 I 
 
 8 59 45 
 
 2 42 29. 
 
 3 
 
 n 
 
 Iti 
 
 Chrono-jieter fast 6 h 17 m 16". 0. 
 
 
 1 
 
 9 59 57 
 
 3 42 41. 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 10 14 
 
 3 42 58. 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 10 46 
 
 3 43 30. 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 First plate showing contact. 
 
 
 4 
 
 10 1 7 
 
 3 43 51.0 
 
 6 . 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 10 1 23 
 
 3 44 7.0 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 10 1 40 
 
 3 44 24. 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 10 1 54 
 
 3 44 38.0 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 10 (i 15 
 
 3 48 59. 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 It) 7 15 
 
 3 49 59. 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 10 8 15 
 
 3 50 59. 
 
 6 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 10 9 15 
 
 3 51 59.0 
 
 6 
 
 }' 
 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 10 10 15 
 
 3 52 59. 
 
 6 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 10 11 15 
 
 3 53 59. 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 14 
 
 10 12 20 
 
 3 55 4. 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 10 13 20 
 
 3 56 4.0 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 16 
 
 10 14 15 
 
 3 56 59. 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 10 15 15 
 
 3 57 59. 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 10 16 15 
 
 3 58 59. 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 19 
 
 10 17 15 
 
 :i 59 59. 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 10 18 15 
 
 4 59. 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 10 19 15 
 
 4 1 59.0 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 22 
 
 10 20 25 
 
 4 3 9.0 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 10 21 15 
 
 4 3 59. 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 24 
 
 10 22 15 
 
 4 4 59. 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 25 
 
 10 23 15 
 
 4 5 59. 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 26 
 
 10 24 15 
 
 4 6 59. 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 27 
 
 10 25 20 
 
 4 8 4.0 
 
 6 
 
 | 
 
 
 
 28 
 29 
 
 10 26 15 
 10 37 20 
 
 4 8 59. 
 4 10 4.0 
 
 6 
 6 
 
 } 
 | 
 
 Large sun-spot on southwestern portion of SHU'S 
 disk bisected by moon's limb. 
 
 
 30 
 
 10 28 15 
 
 4 10 59. 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 31 
 
 10 29 15 
 
 4 11 59.0 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 32 
 
 10 30 15 
 
 4 12 59. 
 
 6 
 
 | 
 
 
 
 33 
 
 10 31 15 
 
 4 13 59.0 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 34 
 
 10 32 15 
 
 4 14 59.0 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 35 
 
 10 33 15 
 
 4 15 59. 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 36 
 
 10 34 15 
 
 4 16 59. 
 
 6 
 
 A 
 
 
158 
 
 REPORT OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 SCHEDULE A.Scconl o/Ai#r<- Continued. 
 
 Date. 
 
 tt> 
 9 
 
 a 
 
 Is 
 I 1 
 
 8 3 
 
 M c 
 
 X K-. 
 
 <u & 
 
 = fe. 
 
 4- ' 
 
 S LC 
 
 s ss 
 
 i-H 
 
 
 
 Instant of expos- 
 ure by local 
 mean time p. in. 
 
 Diameter of aper- 
 ture of object 
 glass used. 
 
 Width of slit inin- 
 stantan'us slide 
 used. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 1869. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 /I. JM. . 
 
 7l. Ml. *. 
 
 in. 
 
 in. 
 
 
 August 7 
 
 37 
 
 10 35 15 
 
 4 17 59.0 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 38 
 
 10 36 15 
 
 4 18 59. 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 38 
 
 10 37 15 
 
 4 19 59. 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 40 
 
 10 38 15 
 
 4 20 59. 
 
 74 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 41 
 
 10 39 15 
 
 4 21 59.0 
 
 74 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 42 
 
 10 40 15 
 
 4 22 59. 
 
 7f 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 43 
 
 10 41 15 
 
 4 23 59. 
 
 74 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 44 
 
 10 42 15 
 
 4 24 59.0 
 
 7f 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 45 
 
 10 43 15 
 
 4 25 59. 
 
 74 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 46 
 
 10 44 15 
 
 4 26 59. 
 
 74 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 47 
 
 10 45 15 
 
 4 27 59. 
 
 74 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 48 
 
 10 46 15 
 
 4 28 59. 
 
 7} 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 49 
 
 10 47 25 
 
 4 30 9.0 
 
 7f 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 10 48 20 
 
 4 31 4.0 
 
 7i 
 
 '4 
 
 
 
 51 
 
 10 49 15 
 
 4 31 59.0 
 
 7* 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 5-2 
 
 . . . 
 
 
 74 
 
 4 
 
 Trigger liunj; tire; time not noted. 
 
 
 53 
 
 10 51 15 
 
 4 33 59.0 
 
 7f 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 54 
 
 10 52 15 
 
 4 34 59.0 
 
 74 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 10 53 15 
 
 4 35 59. 
 
 74 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 56 
 
 10 54 20 
 
 4 37 4. 
 
 74 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 57 
 
 10 55 15 
 
 4 37 59. 
 
 74 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 58 
 
 10 56 15 
 
 4 38 59. 
 
 7f 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 59 
 
 10 57 15 
 
 4 39 59. 
 
 7f 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 60 
 
 10 58 15 
 
 4 40 59. 
 
 7* 
 
 | 
 
 
 
 61 
 
 10 59 20 
 
 4 42 4.0 
 
 74 
 
 4 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 (11 3 4 
 
 4 45 48. 0^) 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 7J 
 
 
 
 Totality. Exposed (K5 seconds. 
 
 
 
 111 4 10 
 
 4 46 54. oj 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fll 4 47 
 
 4 47 31.0^1 
 
 
 
 
 
 63 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 7J 
 
 
 Totality. Exposed 45 seconds. 
 
 
 
 111 5 32 
 
 4 48 16. OJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 64 
 
 11 6 5 
 
 4 48 49. 
 
 74 
 
 . i 
 
 
 
 <>5 
 
 11 7 20 
 
 4 50 4. 
 
 7f 
 
 . 4 
 
 
 
 06 
 
 11 8 35 
 
 4 51 19. 
 
 74 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 67 
 
 11 9 15 
 
 4 51 59. 
 
 7f 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 68 
 
 11 10 15 
 
 4 52 59. 
 
 74 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 69 
 
 11 11 15 
 
 4 53 59. 
 
 7* 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 70 
 
 11 12 20 
 
 4 55 4. 
 
 74 
 
 } 
 
 
 
 71 
 
 11 13 15 
 
 4 55 59. 
 
 74 
 
 } 
 
 
 
 72 
 
 11 14 15 
 
 4 56 59. 
 
 74 
 
 Y 
 
 
 
 73 
 
 11 15 25 
 
 4 58 9.0 
 
 74 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 74 
 
 11 16 15 
 
 4 58 59. 
 
 74 
 
 i 
 
 
 , 
 
 75 
 
 11 17 25 
 
 5 9.0 
 
 . 7f 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 76 
 
 11 18 20 
 
 5 14.0 
 
 74 
 
 4 
 
 [port inn of sun's disk. 
 
 
 77 
 
 11 19 35 
 
 5 2 19. 
 
 7J 
 
 4 
 
 Reappearance of large sun-spot on southwestern 
 
 
 78 
 
 11 20 15 
 
 5 2 59. 
 
 7J 
 
 4 
 
 Trigger hung lire slightly ; timing not accurate. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OP THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 159 
 
 SCHEDULE A. Record of Xeyatiees Continued. 
 
 Date. 
 
 if 
 
 a 
 
 ?l 
 
 a 
 
 tc 
 
 1 
 
 i! 
 
 ^ tC 
 a v 
 
 _i2 
 
 
 h-H 
 
 a . -H 
 
 -*3 ~- 
 
 fl O 3 
 C3 ^ Qj 
 
 a " " 
 
 M 
 
 Diarneterof aper- 
 ture of object 
 
 glass used. 
 
 AVidthofslitinin- 
 stantan'us slide 
 used. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 1869. 
 
 
 /I. III. S. 
 
 It. ill. S. 
 
 i 
 
 in. 
 
 August 7 79 
 
 11 21 15 
 
 5 3 59. 
 
 7} 
 
 i 
 
 80 
 
 11 22 20 
 
 5 5 4. 
 
 71 
 
 1 
 
 81 
 
 11 23 15 5 5 59.0 
 
 71 
 
 1 
 
 82 
 
 11 24 15 5 6 59.0 7J 
 
 1 
 
 83 
 
 11 25 15 
 
 5 7 59.0 7f 
 
 4 
 
 84 
 
 11 26 25 
 
 5 9 9.0 
 
 71 
 
 i 
 
 
 85 
 
 11 27 15 
 
 5 9 59.0 
 
 71 
 
 i 
 
 . 
 
 
 86 
 
 11 28 25 
 
 5 11 9.0 
 
 71 
 
 | 
 
 
 
 87 
 
 11 29 15 
 
 5 11 59.0 
 
 71 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 88 
 
 11 30 15 
 
 5 12 59. 
 
 71 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 89 
 
 11 31 15 
 
 5 13 59. 
 
 7J 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 90 
 
 11 32 20 
 
 5 15 4.0 
 
 71 
 
 
 
 
 
 91 
 
 11 33 15 
 
 5 15 59.0 
 
 71 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 92 
 
 11 34 15 
 
 5 16 59. 
 
 71 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 93 
 
 11 37 15 
 
 5 19 59. 
 
 71 
 
 j 
 
 
 
 94 
 
 11 38 20 
 
 5 21 4. 
 
 71 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 95 
 
 11 39 20 
 
 5 22 4. 
 
 71 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 96 
 
 11 40 15 
 
 5 22 59. 
 
 71 
 
 j 
 
 
 
 97 
 
 11 41 15 
 
 5 23 59. 
 
 71 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 98 
 
 11 42 15 
 
 5 24 59. 
 
 71 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 99 
 
 11 43 15 
 
 5 25 59. 
 
 7J 
 
 + 
 
 
 
 100 
 
 11 44 15 
 
 5 26 59. 
 
 71 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 101 
 
 11 45 15 
 
 5 27 59. 
 
 71 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 102 
 
 11 46 15 
 
 5 28 59. 
 
 7* 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 103 
 
 11 47 15 
 
 5 29 59. 
 
 71 
 
 i 
 
 Fogged and spoiled.* 
 
 
 104 
 
 11 48 15 
 
 5 30 59.0 
 
 71 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 105 
 
 11 49 15 
 
 5 31 59. 
 
 71 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 106 
 
 11 50 40 
 
 5 33 24. 
 
 71 
 
 i 
 
 Fogged and spoiled.* 
 
 
 107 
 
 11 51 15 
 
 5 33 59. 
 
 7J 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 108 
 
 11 52 15 
 
 5 34 59. 
 
 71 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 109 
 
 11 53 15 
 
 5 35 59.0 
 
 7} 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 110 
 
 11 54 20 
 
 5 37 4. 
 
 7} 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 111 
 
 11 55 15 
 
 5 37 59. 
 
 71 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 112 
 
 11 56 15 
 
 5 38 59. 
 
 71 
 
 4 
 
 Fogged and spoiled.* 
 
 
 113 
 
 11 57 15 
 
 5 39 59. 
 
 7J 
 
 1 
 2 
 
 
 
 114 
 
 11 58 15 
 
 5 40 59. 
 
 71 
 
 4 
 
 Reappearance of large sun-spot on eastern por- 
 
 
 115 
 
 11 59 
 
 5 41 44.0 
 
 7f 
 
 4 
 
 tion of sun's disk. 
 
 
 116 
 
 12 1 15 
 
 5 43 59. 
 
 71 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 117 
 
 12 1 28 
 
 5 44 12. 
 
 71 
 
 4 
 
 . 
 
 
 118 
 
 12 1 42 
 
 5 44 26. 
 
 71 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 119 
 
 12 1 58 
 
 5 44 42.0 
 
 71 
 
 J, 
 
 
 
 120 
 
 12 2 17 
 
 5 45 1. 
 
 71 
 
 4 
 
 Last plate showing contact. 
 
 
 121 
 
 12 2 43 
 
 5 45 27. 
 
 71 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 122 
 
 12 3 16 
 
 5 46 0. 
 
 7J 
 
 4 
 
 
 August 8 
 
 K 
 
 9 34 30 
 
 3 17 13.6 
 
 2 
 
 i 
 
 Chronometer fast 6 1 ' 17 16M. 
 
 9 
 
 L 
 
 8 K) :,:, 
 
 1 53 38.4 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 Chronometer fast 6 h 17 m 16 S .C. 
 
 *Fog#iDg due to a batch f cleaned plati-slwin^ s>t on a pad of lilottiinj. (i:t]M-r that was accidentally damp. As soon as the cause of the 
 difficulty was discovered thin batch was discarded. 
 
160 
 
 REPORT OP DR. CURTIS. 
 
 SCHEDULE B. 
 
 Table showing the relative actinic force of the sun at different altitudes, as determined by comparing 
 shades of blackening of photographic paper produced by exposure to direct sunlight at different times 
 of day for a series of definite intervals of time ranging from half a second to ten minutes.* 
 
 
 , 
 
 ' 4> 
 
 r - 
 
 <" ji (< a 
 
 <0 <H <U 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 c^ a) 
 
 C s 
 
 J3 ^ ~" 
 
 
 
 
 ~ - 
 
 
 *" "S ** 
 
 
 * a 
 
 * d 
 
 
 PfRjt 
 
 
 
 - ? 
 
 W !- 
 
 o o 'fl 
 
 X t-t 
 
 9 A fi 
 
 
 
 "3 = 
 
 "8 ^ 
 
 - r" 
 
 no *> S 
 
 111* 
 
 |J 
 
 
 Date. 
 
 Commencement 
 lire. Local me 
 
 Greatest duratioi 
 lire of shade n 
 comparison. 
 
 Number of shade 
 by different 
 used in the co: 
 
 Relative actinic i 
 sunlight comp 
 that exhibited 
 noon of each 
 standard. 
 
 Altitude of the i 
 time of comme 
 exposure, give 
 nearest degree. 
 
 Keniarks. 
 
 1869. 
 
 /I. HI. 
 
 Ml. 8. 
 
 
 
 o ' 
 
 
 July 27 
 
 12 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 1.000 
 
 67 
 
 Standard. Sky hazy. 
 
 
 2 45 p. m. 
 
 1 35 
 
 4 
 
 .105 
 
 49 
 
 Very hazy ; sun scarcely cast a shadn\v. 
 
 28 
 
 7 54a.m. 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 .568 
 
 31 
 
 
 
 8 54 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 .786 
 
 42 
 
 
 
 10 23 
 
 30 
 
 11 
 
 1.333 
 
 58 
 
 
 
 12 4p.m. 
 
 - 
 
 
 1.000 
 
 07 
 
 Standard. 
 
 
 1 50 
 
 1 
 
 18 
 
 1.000 
 
 58 
 
 
 
 3 1 
 
 1 
 
 18 
 
 1.000 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 4 11 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 .786 
 
 34 
 
 
 
 5 6 
 
 50 
 
 8 
 
 .480 
 
 23 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 35 
 
 7 
 
 .096 
 
 13 
 
 
 29 
 
 5 13 a.m. 
 
 10 
 
 8 
 
 .035 
 
 2 30 
 
 
 
 5 28 
 
 8 20 
 
 9 
 
 .095 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 5 43 
 
 3 20 
 
 6 
 
 .145 
 
 7 30 
 
 
 
 5 58 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 .163 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 16 
 
 40 
 
 7 
 
 .263 
 
 15 
 
 
 
 6 28 
 
 40 
 
 9 
 
 .424 
 
 16 
 
 
 
 6 43 
 
 25 
 
 7 
 
 .433 
 
 18 30 
 
 
 
 6 58 
 
 50 
 
 9 
 
 .499 
 
 21 
 
 
 
 7 13 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 .568 
 
 24 
 
 
 
 7 28 
 
 50 
 
 10 
 
 .636 
 
 27 
 
 
 
 7 43 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 7 58 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 33 
 
 
 
 8 13 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 35 30 
 
 
 
 8 28 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 38 
 
 
 
 8 43 
 
 1 
 
 15. 
 
 1.000 
 
 41 
 
 
 
 9 13 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 46 30 
 
 
 
 9 45 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 52 30 
 
 
 
 10 16 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 57 30 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 1.000 
 
 67 
 
 Standard. 
 
 
 1 3p.m. 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 04 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 56 30 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 9 
 
 .732 
 
 46 30 
 
 
 
 4 1 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 .677 
 
 34 30 
 
 
 
 4 13 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 .615 
 
 33 
 
 
 
 4 28 
 
 1 
 
 9 
 
 .518 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 
 4 43 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 .493 
 
 27 30 
 
 
 ' For an explanation. of the method by which these observations \\civ ni;nlt-. see page 130. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OP THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 161 
 
 SCHEDULE B. Continued. 
 
 
 I 
 
 S 
 
 S 
 
 "35 g e 
 
 S "o Jj 
 
 
 
 
 2 " 
 
 v JH 
 
 
 
 
 
 ?H ii 
 
 pH 
 
 3 3 3 
 
 -B ^ S CS 
 
 +s S 
 
 
 
 .S 
 '- 
 
 S .2 
 
 o 3 J 
 
 v P* a 
 
 1 1 3 J. 
 
 
 
 
 " S 
 
 OS 
 
 a 2 
 
 PN M 9 
 
 X ^ 
 
 "S S c3 " 
 
 So a a 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 Q "~ 
 
 <U 9 
 
 '^ ^ ^ .rt 
 
 * <u 
 
 * 
 
 Date. 
 
 "S ^ 
 
 P 
 
 jh* 
 
 3 2 2 
 
 2 a ^ ~ 
 g s =5 
 
 s 3 * . 
 
 <u - * 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 
 II 
 
 'J 
 
 'Sis 
 
 -g S < "g 
 
 JJ S aTiS 
 
 '*- * 
 
 
 
 a M 
 
 *= Vt c3 
 
 p. -1 -H 
 
 ^ bC * 4- 
 
 i^ Q I 3 00 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 O *" 
 
 li! 
 
 > . 
 
 'S , OJ 
 
 5 ^ 
 
 Ifill 
 
 $ i & I 
 
 S .3 a v 
 
 ^ '-*3 a 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 25 
 
 's. 
 
 w 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 1869. 
 
 /l. l. 
 
 Ml. Jf. 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 4 58 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 .447 
 
 24 
 
 
 
 5 13 
 
 1 
 
 9 
 
 .342 
 
 21 30 
 
 
 
 5 28 
 
 2 30 
 
 10 
 
 .277 
 
 19 
 
 
 
 5 43 
 
 4 20 
 
 11 
 
 .164 
 
 16 
 
 
 
 5 58 
 
 4 20 
 
 9 
 
 .160 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 C 13 
 
 5 30 
 
 8 
 
 .081 
 
 10 30 
 
 
 
 6 28 
 
 8 20 
 
 7 
 
 .046 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 6 43 
 
 10 
 
 6 
 
 .022 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 6 57 
 
 5 30 
 
 1 
 
 .006 
 
 3 
 
 Taken during the setting of the sun. 
 
 30 
 
 9 Oa.m. 
 
 1 
 
 15 . 
 
 1.000 
 
 44 
 
 
 
 10 2 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 55 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 63 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 
 . 
 
 1.000 
 
 67 
 
 Standard. 
 
 
 3 8 p. m. 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 45 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 35 
 
 
 
 5 2 
 
 40 
 
 6 
 
 .313 
 
 23 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 4 20 
 
 7 
 
 .185 
 
 13 
 
 
 31 
 
 9 -8 a. m. 
 
 1 
 
 13 
 
 .808 
 
 45 
 
 
 
 10 21 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 58 
 
 
 
 11 9 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 64 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 . 
 
 
 1.000 
 
 67 
 
 
 
 2 7 p. m. 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 55 
 
 
 
 3 9 
 
 1 
 
 13 
 
 .808 
 
 45 
 
 
 
 5 1 
 
 50 
 
 6 
 
 .211 
 
 23 30 
 
 
 
 5 50 
 
 1 20 
 
 2 
 
 .055 
 
 15 
 
 
 August 2 
 
 1 2 p. m. 
 
 - 
 
 
 1.000 
 
 63 
 
 Standard. 
 
 
 3 5 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 .714 
 
 45 
 
 
 
 3 59 
 
 1 
 
 12 
 
 .726 
 
 35 
 
 
 
 4 57 
 
 1 
 
 9 
 
 .364 
 
 24 
 
 
 
 5 59 
 
 4 20 
 
 5 
 
 .091 
 
 12 30 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 9 p. m. 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 1.000 
 
 44 
 
 Standard. 
 
 
 3 54 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 .730 
 
 35 
 
 
 
 5 1 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 .470 
 
 23 
 
 
 
 5 48 
 
 4 20 
 
 10 
 
 .178 
 
 14 
 
 
 4 
 
 9 2 a. m. 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1.000 
 
 44 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 1.000 
 
 62 
 
 Standard. 
 
 
 11 57 
 
 1 
 
 13 
 
 .808 
 
 66 
 
 Slightly hazy. 
 
 
 2 3 p. m. 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 .676 
 
 55 
 
 
 
 3 21 
 
 1 
 
 9 
 
 .612 
 
 42 
 
 
 
 4 43 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 .426 
 
 26 30 
 
 , 
 
 
 5 40 
 
 4 20 
 
 7 
 
 .159 
 
 16 
 
 Clondy at intervals during exposure. 
 
 21" 
 
162 
 
 REPOET OF DR. CURTIS. 
 
 SCHEDULE C. 
 
 List of articles forming the equipment of the photographic 
 
 I. CHEMICALS. 
 
 Ammonia , . 8 ounces. 
 
 Acetic acid 8 pounds. 
 
 Alcohol, Atwood's 2 gallons. 
 
 Bichloride of mercury 2 ounces. 
 
 Bichromate of potassa 3 pounds. 
 
 Bromide of cadmium 3 ounces. 
 
 Cyanide of potassium 1 pound. 
 
 Caustic potassa 8 ounces. 
 
 Carbonate of soda 1 pound. 
 
 Distilled water* 5 gallons. 
 
 Ether 3 quarts. 
 
 Hyposulphite of soda 15 pounds. 
 
 Iodine 
 
 Iodide of ammonium ' 
 
 Iodide of cadmium 
 
 Iodide of potassium 
 
 Negative varnish 
 
 Nitric acid 
 
 Nitrate of silver (recrystallized) . 
 
 Paraffine 
 
 Permanganate of potassa 
 
 Pyroxyline 
 
 Sulphate of iron 
 
 Sulphuric acid 
 
 12 
 4 
 
 1 ounce. 
 
 2 ounces. 
 2 ounces. 
 4 ounces. 
 
 ounces, 
 ounces. 
 
 3 pounds. 
 1 pound. 
 1 ounce. 
 
 4 ounces. 
 4 pounds. 
 3 pounds. 
 
 II. PHOTOGRAPHIC INSTRUMENTS, MATERIAL, AND APPLIANCES. 
 
 Actinometers. 
 
 Balance and weights. 
 
 Bottles, assorted. 
 
 Beakers. 
 
 Capsule tongs. 
 
 Chamois skin. 
 
 Corks, assorted. 
 
 Corkscrew. 
 
 Cork-squeezer. 
 
 Crocks for cleaning solution for plates. 
 
 Dipping-rods. 
 
 Dumb-waiters for wall of dark-room. 
 
 Dusting-brushes for negatives. 
 
 Evaporating dishes. 
 
 Filtering paper. 
 
 Filtering stands. 
 
 Funnels. 
 
 Graduates. 
 
 Ground glass for camera screens. 
 
 Glass plates for solar negatives. 
 
 Glass plates for stereoscopic negatives. 
 
 Hard rubber photographic trays. 
 
 Magnesium ribbon. 
 
 Mortar and pestle. 
 
 Photographic paper. 
 
 Photographic ware baths for negatives. 
 
 Precipitating glasses. 
 
 Betort stands. 
 
 Backs for negatives. 
 
 Spirit lamps. 
 
 Stereoscopic camera and stand. 
 
 Stereoscopic and other lenses. 
 
 Test paper. 
 
 Beeswax. 
 
 Black velvet. 
 
 Candles. 
 
 Candle-sticks. 
 
 Carpenter's and other tools. 
 
 Coal oil. 
 
 Cardboard. 
 
 Cotton-wool. 
 
 Cotton-flannel. 
 
 Copper still, 1 gallon capacity. 
 
 Glue. 
 
 Glue-pot. 
 
 Glazier's diamond. 
 
 Hinges, springs, and latches, for doors. 
 
 Lamps. 
 
 Lamp oil. 
 
 Lanterns. 
 
 Listing. 
 
 Mathematical instruments. 
 
 Matches. 
 
 Mucilage. 
 
 Muslin. 
 
 Naphtha stove and naphtha. 
 
 Nails, screws, and tacks, assorted. 
 
 III. MISCELLANEOUS. 
 
 Paper black, blotting, tissue, yellow. 
 Photographic books. 
 
 Pulleys and staples for hauling canvas roof. 
 Pins. 
 
 Perforated tin for guarding delivery and waste- 
 pipes. 
 Rope. 
 
 Eubber bauds. 
 Eubber cloth. 
 
 Eubber tubing for water and waste-pipes. 
 Sail-maker's thread, needles, and palm. 
 Sheet tin. 
 Soap. 
 
 Sealing-wax. 
 Sponges. 
 Spigots. 
 Stationery. 
 Tent-flies for roof. 
 Tape. 
 Tape-line. 
 Towels. 
 Twine. 
 Wax tapers. 
 Writing diamond. 
 
 Oil-can and machine oil. 
 Buckets for carrying water, a wash-tub to make a sink of, and other bulky and common articles, 
 were procured at Des Moines. 
 
 * In addition a small still was taken, which was kept constantly in operation during our stay at Des Moines. 
 
REPORT 
 
 MR. J. HO I EH LANE. 
 
REPORT OF MR. J. HOMER LANE. 
 
 . WASHINGTON, D. C., Augwt 28, 1869. 
 
 SIR: Having beeu attached to the party of Professor J. E. Hilgard, of the United States Coast 
 Survey, for observing the recent eclipse of the sun, I am directed by him, in conformity with an 
 arrangement approved by Professor Xewcomb, of the United States Naval Observatory, to report 
 to you, in part, such observations as I made on that occasion. 
 
 At the request of Professor Hilgard I joined his party, and proceeded to the city of Des 
 Moines, in the State of Iowa, to meet him and the other members of his party there. I was 
 expected to note the times of the first and fourth contacts of the moon's limb with the sun's limb. 
 These observations were taken accordingly, and have been duly reported to Professor Hilgard. 
 The times of second and third contacts were left to my own discretion, conditioned on their non- 
 interference with the phenomena of totality. I therefore did not attempt them. 
 
 Beyond the observation of the times of first and fourth contacts it was understood that my 
 attentiou should be primarily given to the corona, but the particular point or points of inquiry 
 were left mostly to my own discretion. As various physical considerations which have been pre- 
 sented in published papers of Professor Helmholtz and Professor Newcomb, and in a paper of my 
 own not yet published, but in part presented to the National Academy at its late session in Wash- 
 ington, have left upon myself, as well as both the individuals just named, a strong impression of the 
 extreme difficulty of realizing the existence above the sun's photosphere of an atmosphere in the 
 ordinary sense of that term, having such a height as fifty or a hundred thousand miles, I proposed 
 to make it the chief object of my own observation to watch for any indication that could bear on 
 that question. More particularly I charged myself with the duty of watching for any possible 
 very low atmospheric limit, marked by anything like a regular boundary and superior intensity of 
 light very near the sun's limb. 
 
 According to the original intention, I was to have used a Coast Survey reconnoitering tele- 
 scope of only three inches clear aperture; but after my arrival in Des Moiues, which was not till 
 12 or 1 o'clock of the Thursday night immediately preceding the eclipse, Professor Newcomb, who, 
 on the part of the Naval Observatory, had charge of the court-house square observatory in Des 
 Moines, proposed to Professor Hilgard that I should observe with one of the much larger instru- 
 ments which he had fitted up. One of these remained unappropriated, and was accordingly 
 assigned to my use. The object-glass was that of the refraction circle of the United States Naval 
 Observatory. Having beeu taken from its tube and conveyed to the station at Des Moines 
 it was there fitted to a temporary wooden tube mounted in such a manner as to command the 
 sun during the eclipse. This glass has a clear aperture of 5.9 inches in diameter, and a focal 
 length of about eight feet seven inches, according to a rough measurement which I made since 
 my return to this city. The eye-piece I employed, one of a set furnished also by the observatory, 
 was a positive, or Eamsden, eye-piece, in the field of view of which 0.2G inch is found to sub- 
 tend to the eye .an angle of about 13 36', which corresponds to a virtual or compound focal length 
 of 1.1 inches. The magnifying power of the instrument was, therefore, not far from 94. The tem- 
 porary wooden tube was square in cross-section, and the eye-piece was mounted on a square piece 
 of board fitted to the interior of the tube. The focal adjustment could be made by sliding this piece 
 of board a little to and fro in the tube, and a thin narrow wooden wedge introduced near the upper 
 right-hand corner of the piece of board served effectually to secure it in its place. The square 
 wooden tube was mounted so as to swing at its middle in a wooden gimbal constructed of four 
 pieces of stout plank, and this gimbal turned on a nearly horizontal axis pointing not far from 
 
166 KEPORT OF MR. J. HOMER LANE. 
 
 north and south, being supported by a pair of heavy upright timbers or posts, set firmly in the 
 ground. The tube was well counterpoised or balanced, and was steadied by means of a pair of 
 braces extending from the tube to the posts. Each brace consisted of a long lath of soft pine wood. 
 The connection of the lath to the post was made by a common wood screw, passed through a hole 
 in the lath and set into the post. Another wood screw, having had its head rasped or filed down 
 till the head of the shank was reduced to a blunt point, was driven into the square tube, by the 
 pointed shank, not far from the eye end. The screw so set in the tube was embraced by a long 
 longitudinal slot made in the lath. The slot, while wide enough to admit the screw bodily, was 
 narrow enough to pinch it by a rather gentle pressure due to the elasticity of the lath alone. This 
 arrangement was effective in preventing oscillations, aud allowed the telescope to be moved by 
 hand with not much effort and not much, false motion. Screw nuts of wood were provided, by 
 which the braces could be clamped at the slots, but these were not used any further than they may 
 have served to guard against the lath working off from the screw. These dispositions were all 
 made by Professor Newcomb, and were, in the main, executed before my arrival. 
 
 On my way to Des Moines it occurred to me that, in looking after the space immediately con- 
 tiguous to the sun's luminous surface or photosphere, something might possibly be gained by 
 occupying part of the field of view of the telescope with a piece of colored glass or smoked mica, 
 bounded by a straight edge. The crescent of the uncovered part of the sun could then be viewed 
 through the colored glass, and on bringing the cusp near to the edge of the glass we would avail 
 ourselves of the artifice by which Dawes made his discoveries in the solar spots, and Clark brought 
 to light the companion of Sirius. A hasty review of the question satisfied me that before totality 
 at Des Moines the cusps would be carried eastward across a line nearly parallel to the line joining 
 them, in consequence of the moon's apparent motion, less rapidly than the sun would be carried 
 westward across the same line by his diurnal motion. This is really the case, but, in the hurried 
 judgment which alone there was any time to form, I somewhat overrated the difference. I will here 
 give the comparison which I have made since the eclipse, at the same time making plain in what 
 manner the screen glass was applied. In Fig 1, let C represent the center of the sun's disk, and 
 about the same center let F B'N E be a circle described with 
 a radius of 47".3, the quantity by which the apparent semi- 
 diameter of the moon seen from Des Moines at totality 
 exceeds that of the sun, aud let A B D E be the apparent 
 track of the moon's center on the sun's disk, and N the north 
 point. My own calculations from the American Nautical i 
 Almanac, according to which the court-house square observa- 
 tory in Des Moiues, at the nearest approach of centers, was 
 about seven miles (.00176) from the axis of the shadow, meas- 
 ured at right angles, give N C B=63 40', and N C E=100 
 44', and the figure is drawn to the true proportions. Now, 
 suppose a circular arc, F A, whose radius is equal to the 
 radius of the moon's disk, to be drawn through the moon's 
 center at A, tangent to the circle F B N E at F. Then it is evi- 
 deut that if the radius F C be prolonged through G it will meet the sun's limb at the cusp. The 
 motion of F is, therefore, a reduced representation of that of the cusp reversed. Drop the perpen- 
 dicular F L upon C B. B L differs very little, especially for the northern cusp, from A B, so long- 
 as the crescent is less than 70 or 75, and the greatest velocity with which F approaches the tan- 
 gent line H B K is very nearly the velocity of the moon's center along A B. Hence the greatest 
 velocity with which the cusp crosses a line parallel to H B K is such a velocity as would traverse 
 the diameter of the sun's disk in about the period of 178 8 , which it would take the moon's center to 
 traverse the diameter of the circle F B N E. But the time occupied by the sun's disk in crossing 
 the same line by its diurnal motion from contact to contact was only about 147 s . The two velocities 
 are nearly in the ratio of six to five, and the cusp was, at the near approach of totality, still carried 
 westward across a fixed line parallel to H B K with a velocity about one sixth that of the diurnal 
 motion across the same line. The angle made by H B K at the time of totality, if my calculation 
 is correct, with the sun's vertical diameter, was 24 51' from the vertex toward the right. The 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 167 
 
 Fi K . ' 
 
 angle at which the straight edge of the colored glass was set, according to a measurement made 
 after the eclipse, was 23. This nearness of coincidence was in part accidental. Moreover, the 
 inclination of the glass was measured with the telescope horizontal, and wheu pointed to the sun 
 (due west at the time of totality) the vertical diameter of the field of view was changed by nearly 
 half whatever angle of azimuth existed between the meridian and the horizontal axis of the gimbal 
 on which the telescope moved. This angle, however, was at least small, if it existed at all. 
 
 My plan of observation before totality was to set the telescope with the cusp, seen through the 
 colored glass, approximated as closely as might be to the edge of the glass, and then allow the cusp 
 to approach still more closely to the edge by the excess of the diurnal motion across it over the 
 opposed cusp motion. But this programme was not as closely realized as it might have been had 
 I had more time for preparation, and for careful preliminary study of the conditions. The prepara- 
 tion ought to have been so complete that the cusp could be continuously and accurately followed 
 by the edge of the glass. 
 
 With the telescope originally intended for my use there was hardly time to have made any 
 preparation at all for this way of observing, there not being at hand a suitable instrument-maker. 
 But the temporary arrangement which Professor Xewcomb placed in my hands, as already 
 described, afforded great facility for carrying it hastily into effect with the aid merely of a carpen- 
 ter. The colored glass, which I had not provided myself with for the reason that the method did 
 not occur to me till after I was on my way, was fortunately at the disposal of Dr. Hilgard, of St. 
 Louis, who also accompanied the expedition, and had an extra glass which he kindly loaned to me 
 for the occasion. It was a piece of deep-blue plate-glass, about one-eighth of an inch thick, as near 
 as I can judge, and showed the sun's disk very soft and easy to the eye. This glass is shown of 
 half size at a b c d, Fig. 2. It was fastened in the manner there shown into a wooden slider 
 e f half an inch thick, also shown of half size, as is 
 likewise the slot g h I A- / m, with some enlargement of 
 the latter on the side remote from the eye. The dotted 
 circle q r shows the field of view of half its actual size, 
 and by moving the slider along the line e f, the blue-f 
 glass abed could be made to cover the entire field of 
 view, or any desired part of the field, or could be 
 thrown entirely out of the field on either side. The slider e f was applied to the surface of the 
 before-mentioned square piece of board that was to carry the eye-piece, on the side, of course, next 
 the eye, and was held in place by a wooden cleat laid across it in the manner shown in quarter 
 size, Fig. 3. This cleat was three-fourths of an inch thick, and was screwed to the square piece 
 of board after having been recessed half an inch deep so as to Fig. 3. 
 
 embrace the slider without undue pressure, and the Kamsden eye- 
 piece was then screwed into a hole cut through the cleat. Bearing 
 in mind the inversion of the sun's image, the left-hand edge a 6, 
 Fig. 2, of the blue glass, would come into use before totality. This 
 edge was, therefore, ground straight and nearly smooth on the oil- 
 stone. The blue glass was adjusted to the focus of the eye-piece, and 
 the sun was afterwards brought into focus by moving the square 
 piece of board a little to and fro in the tube. The blue glass was 
 much thicker than it would have been desirable to employ for this 
 purpose, since the plate displaces the focus of the cone of rays 
 traversing it, by a space equal to one-third its thickness for glass, 
 whose index of refraction is 1. Hence, in adjusting the solar focus some time before totality, 
 the blue plate was slid entirely from the field of view, and the screen glass belonging to the eye- 
 piece, a red glass, I believe, was used to protect the eye in the common manner by placing it between 
 the eye and eye-lens. This was done with a view to leave the open part of the field of view after- 
 wards in good focus, in preference to the part which would be covered by the blue glass for showing 
 the sun's crescent. Yet, after removing the red glass and sliding in the blue glass, the definition of 
 the details of the solar spots appeared equally as sharp and good as before, and my inference was that 
 the eye readily accommodated itself to the difference of focus produced. Taking the change in the 
 
 i 
 
 li e 
 
 k 
 
 I/ (* 
 
 '. r 
 
 > 
 
 S 
 
 a. d 
 
 m 
 
168 REPORT OF MR. J. HOMER LANE. 
 
 place of the focus at one twenty-fifth of au inch, I have found, by direct experiment with the same 
 eye-piece since, that my eye does readily accommodate itself to that difference of focus. As the 
 virtual focal distance of the eye-piece is about 1.1 inch, it is only the difference between the stellar 
 focus of the reversed eye-piece, and the focus of the same for an object at twenty-nine inches, a 
 range easily commanded by the eyes of most persons. 
 
 These things being arranged, as the time of totality drew near, the blue glass entirely covering 
 the field of view, I began by trying the skylight, with the crescent in the field, by a cautious side 
 glance of the eye while moving the blue glass, by its slider e /, so as to open the edge of the field. 
 The light was yet too bright for the eye to endure. Soon I used a very light red glass as a protec- 
 tion to the eye in these trials. As soon as admissible more than half the field was uncovered. My 
 attention was confined, up to the beginning of totality, to the region of the northern cusp, which, 
 of course, as inverted, was at the lower side, the crescent on the right. At last the moon's limb was 
 seen putting boldly out into the open field beyond the blue screen, in correspondence, of course, 
 with the inner limb of the crescent. The time of this was 10 1 ' 57 m 19 s by chronometer Negus No. 
 1281, which, compared" with the time of second contact as noted by Professor Hilgard, gives l ra 13' 
 before totality. Unluckily, I failed to recollect positively whether the light-red screen glass was 
 then used. My impression is it was not, and it certainly was not afterwards. The moon's limb, as 
 then seen, was not a barely percepible outline, but was abundantly palpable to the eye, and might 
 evidently have been seen earlier. Having no assistant, I think I must have taken twelve or fifteen 
 seconds of time in going four or five steps to the chronometer and noting the time with due care 
 before I could resume my place at the telescope. There was, therefore, scarcely over a minute left 
 before the beginning of totality, perhaps not quite that, and it may be as well that, in the anxiety 
 of the moment, 1 did not know the time was so short. It was a somewhat hurried work to bring 
 the cusp to close proximity to the edge of the blue screen with a view to secure a review of as much 
 as possible of the moon's limb while least elevated above that of the sun. A tolerably good 
 approximation was obtained, but some few degrees of the moon's limb intervened between the cusp 
 and the edge of the screen. This remark will at least apply to the important period of the last say 
 ten or twelve seconds before first internal contact, perhaps more. The excess of the sun's diurnal 
 motion across the edge of the screen over the cusp motion across the same was so much smaller 
 than my first rough estimate had led me to anticipate, that it came little, if any, into play for 
 bringing the cusp up to the edge, but this same circumstance gave a useful permanency to such an 
 approximation as I did obtain. Of course, to perfect the arrangement, the screen should have been 
 provided with a slow motion for readier command of the adjustment. 
 
 After the moon's limb had appeared and I had returned from noting the time, and had got the 
 telescope tolerably readjusted, I looked carefully for the appearances next the moon's limb. The 
 light of the corona remained almost quenched by the still superior light of the sky. It had been 
 thought possible that this condition might afford an opportunity to see the regular circular, or level 
 outline, of a low solar atmosphere, if such existed to be seen. But no impression of such an appear- 
 ance was made upon my eye. . None of the light above, or exterior to, the moon's limb, that I no 
 ticed, prevailed largely over the light of the sky, until within some five to eight seconds, as 
 near as I can judge, before internal contact of the limbs ; and when it did begin to prevail it blazed 
 up quite rapidly and to a considerable height at once, say from 10" to 20", yet not, as it struck me, 
 with a regular outline. The general impression upon me of this first outburst for it was only a 
 general impression was more as if it was built up of tongues of flame. The brightness, though by no 
 means dazzling, was such as to make it not impossible that some kind of colored screen glass might 
 have favored the observation of appearances which I did not see. The color appeared mainly white. 
 The estimate of 10" or 20" for the height could not be made at the time, as I was not accustomed to 
 the power employed. I have tried to form a rough judgment in regard to it since, by using the 
 same eye-piece with the objective of a small spy-glass, to view a circle drawn on paper, and placed 
 at the distance where it gave to the eye-piece an image of the same size that the moon's outline 
 gave in the telescope, and then cutting a slit in the paper through which to view a gas-light. 
 
 In these observations no part of the crescent of true sunlight got beyond the blue screen into 
 the open field. In the last second or two before totality, the length of arc of the moon's limb 
 included between the cusp and the edge of the screen increased very rapidly ; and to this may 
 
OBSERVATIONS OP THE ECLIPSE OP AUGUST 7, 1869. 169 
 
 have been due the impression produced upon me that the cusp ran away from the edge of the screen, 
 which I concluded was impossible, if the edge of the screen was really set parallel to the tangent at 
 contact of limbs. At the instant of contact some 20, perhaps, of the moon's limb (10 on each side 
 the point of contact) remained behind the screen, which was then instantly slid entirely from the 
 field of view. [Nothing was now seen at this part of the limb to modify what had been seen before- 
 Satisfied of this I swept the circuit of the wonderful spectacles presented in the corona, but returned 
 immediately to the very peculiarly formed and comparatively small red clouds first seen in the im- 
 mediate region of the point of first internal contact. Leaving to others the sketching of the general 
 features of the phenomenon, I selected a very small number of points on which to concentrate my 
 attention with a view to watch for any visible changes. In this I was partly prompted by a query 
 which had rested on my mind for two or three months previous whether the coronal light might 
 not be of the nature of our auroras, only on an immensely grander scale. One or two of these 
 smaller red clouds were scrutinized very closely for some time, but not the slightest point of change 
 was detected. The several clouds at this part of the limb had a peculiarity of conformation of their 
 own which seemed to distinguish them from all the others which met my eye in sweeping the coro- 
 na. The somewhat slender elongated body curved or bent, will no doubt be seen in the photographs, 
 in one of which in fact, seen on the following day, I recognized these bodies. The boundary of the 
 cloud seemed to be quite sharp and well defined, or at least with no notable shading off. This I 
 state from recollection, and not from any note purposely taken of it at the time. 
 
 Becoming convinced that the red clouds I was scrutinizing were to be an apparent fixture for 
 the period of totality, I turned my attention to the agglomerations of white light in the corona, and 
 fixed upon two of these which were remarkable for their small size and the comparatively dense 
 accumulation of light in them. These were situated about 80 from the vertex toward the right, 
 as seen inverted in the telescope. In appearance they might well be compared to small telescopic 
 comets with tails of some length, but without a head, and with no distinct indication of a head at 
 one end rather than the other. They were not far from radial in direction relatively to the sun's 
 center whether exactly so I did not remark at the time but appeared completely isolated, and 
 had their origin far above the limb of the moon ; so far, at least, that though that part of the limb 
 must have been approaching them, if their height above the sun's limb remained constant, the ap- 
 proach did not attract my attention. I referred them two or three times to the profile of neighbor- 
 ing lunar mountains, so far as to make it evident there was no such relative motion as must have 
 been expected had they been anything floating in our atmosphere. They manifestly belonged to the 
 heavens, and I made no doubt were to be classed with the other parts or aggregations of white 
 light in the corona. These two bodies I scrutinized closely for some time, and, as I suppose, to the 
 end of totality. The form, dimensions, and appearance of each, and their distance apart, were in 
 constant review ; but not the least change in either respect was seen. It would be in vain for me to 
 try to estimate the length of time occupied either with these objects or with the red clouds particularly 
 watched. As to the distance apart of these two white comet-like objects, I judged, after the largest 
 solar spot had been uncovered, that they would have included between their centers the nucleus of 
 that spot, but not the penumbra. I had no means of taking any measures, nor would it have been 
 easy to take measures without sacrificing the watch for the presence or absence of changes. In 
 order, however, to reproduce as near as practicable what I saw, I have laid down upon paper a circle 
 of the same size that the moon's outline had in the focus of the object-glass almost an inch and 
 holding this up to the light in the field of view of the same eye-piece used in the telescope, have 
 tried to lay down with a pencil the dimensions and situations of the two objects. The following is 
 the result I got in this way: 
 
 Length of each cometoid light, 130". 
 
 Height of its origin above moon's limb, 100" to 80". 
 
 Distance from center to center of the two, 50" to 40". 
 
 Perhaps the height above the moon's limb should be taken at about half a minute before the 
 end of totality. The estimate of 50" to 40" here made for the distance apart of the two objects may 
 be considered entirely independent of the one first given referring to the solar spot. In that case the 
 
 22* 
 
170 REPORT OF MR. J. HOMER LANE. 
 
 judgment comparing with tbe spot AN as checked by selecting a pair of scratches on the blue screen 
 glass in the field of view, before the eclipse was over, whose interval was judged not far from equal 
 to that of the two objects, and then bringing the solar spot between them. 
 
 The end of totality having arrived, I thought it well to ascertain how long the eastern, or far 
 limb, of the moon could be seen. With this view I continued to watch that part of tbe limb coin 
 prising most of the lower right-hand quadrant, and some adjoining part, perhaps, of the upper 
 right-hand quadrant, as seen inverted in the telescope. For some little time it continued to be 
 strongly marked ; for a considerable length of time it was easily seen ; and for a still longer time it 
 could be unmistakably followed by the aid of a little motion given to the telescope. As the last 
 faint traces were being obliterated I noted the time by Negus No. 1281, 11" 3 m 30. Comparing 
 this with the time of third contact as noted by Professor Hilgard, I And it to have been 2 5" after 
 the end of totality. This time is so considerable that unless the observation has been confirmed by 
 others, I would not wonder if it should be thought liable to the uncertainty that I might have made 
 a mistake in noting the minute. I can only say that I tried to take good care in noting the 
 minute, and that I have no reason to doubt the time is as 1 have given it. 
 Respectfully submitted. 
 
 J. HOSIER LANE. 
 
 Commodore B. F. SANDS, U. S. N., 
 
 Superintendent U. S. Naval Observatory, Waxhington, D. C. 
 
OF 
 
 MR. . S. GILMAI, JR. 
 
REPORT OF MR. W. S. GIL MAN, JR. 
 
 Sioux CITY, IOWA, August 10, 1869. 
 
 DEAR SIR : I Laud you herewith a report of the total eclipse of the sun on the 7th instant, as 
 observed by myself and eight others at St. Paul Junction, Plymouth County, Iowa, twenty-five 
 miles northeast of this place. 
 
 I took up niy position on the 4th instant, on the northeast quarter of section 16, township 92 
 north, range 45 west, and estimated my longitude to be 19 5' 45" west of Washington, assuming 
 16 34' 1".4 to be the longitude of Des Moines. My latitude I estimated at 42 47' 30" north. In 
 arriving at these values I used the new map of Iowa, issued the present summer by Colton, of 
 New York. 
 
 My telescope was set upon the west side of the house of Mr. N. E. Farrell, at a point twelve feet 
 south of the north line of section 16, and seventy-five feet east of the west line of the same section. 
 
 DESCRIPTION OF INSTRUMENTS. 
 
 There were in the party three small telescopes, of apertures varying from 1 to 1.2 inches and 
 magnifying from eight to ten times. I had brought with me my 4-inch telescope, made by Alvan 
 Clark, of Cambridgeport. Beside these instruments we had a good binocular field-glass. 
 
 All the instruments were substantially mounted on tripods or steady rests, in such a manner 
 as to allow of easy movement in any desired direction, and their eye-pieces were slightly smoked. 
 Neutral tinted shades and deeply smoked glass were also used during the earlier and later portions 
 of the eclipse. 
 
 By means of a good thermometer, of B. Pike's make, I took record of temperatures for several 
 days preceding and following the eclipse, as will be found on reference to Schedule A. The ther- 
 mometer was exposed to the weather on the north side of Mr. FarrelFs house, and screened only 
 from direct light of sun. Its height above the ground was five feet six inches. 
 
 When noting contacts I used S. Hammond's mean time gold chronometer, No. 300, which lost 
 1 8 .86 per diem. 
 
 The instruments were distributed as follows: 
 
 I observed with my admirably defining 4-inch achromatic of five feet two inches focal length, 
 charged with a power of fifty, and carrying a ruled micrometer of glass, giving angles of position 
 for every 45, and measuring arcs of 15" when used in connection with my instrument. My mount- 
 ing was Mr. Clark's usual portable equatorial, without circles or clock work. The power I employed 
 gave a field of view of about 43' of arc. 
 
 My principal aim was to get observations of (1) the times of contact; (2) the size and positions 
 of red flames; (3) the outline and general extent of the corona, and (4) the colors of both the flames 
 and the corona. 
 
 Daniel T. Oilman confined himself to noting time by the chronometer, for which he had been 
 qualified by previous practice with me. 
 
 N. E. Farrell, a member of the Powell Colorado exploring expedition of 1868, kept the record 
 of the thermometer. He used a field-glass at various times, to which instrument he was well 
 accustomed, having employed it constantly during the expedition referred to. 
 
 Leon Vincent, of the civil engineer corps of the Iowa Falls and Sioux City railroad, employed 
 a telescope, with which he was well acquainted, having an aperture of 1.1 inches, and a focal length 
 of 10 inches. It gave a direct image, and magnified about ten times. 
 
 Lucius C. Phelps, associated with the above in the engineer corps, used a telescope of J-iiich 
 aperture, having a focal length of 10 inches, and magnifying about ten times. This instrument 
 gave an inverted image. 
 
 Vincent Wood used a telescope of 1.2 inches aperture and 20 inches focal length, which gave 
 a direct image. The power of this telescope was a little, though not much, above the two just 
 mentioned. 
 
174 
 
 REPORT OF MR. W. S. OILMAN, JR. 
 
 Eugene Lockliii and Seymour Ball observed without instruments for flames, extent of corona, 
 stars, and planets. Mrs. N. E. Farrell observed especially for the approach of the dark shadow in 
 the air, for stars and planets, and assisted in keeping the thermometrical record. 
 
 Specific duties were assigned to each of the above by written schedules, which were carefully 
 studied a day or two previously. 
 
 WEATHEB DURING THE ECLIPSE. 
 
 At 2 p. in. the sky cleared overhead, and at 3 p. m. there were no clouds. A slight haze 
 remained, which assisted the definition of our instruments. On the southeast horizon the hnze 
 was thick and resembled a fog-bank. 
 
 THE ECLIPSE FIRST CONTACT. 
 
 At 4 h 57 m 9 s by my chronometer, (see Schedule B,) I observed with my telescope a small 
 black speck on the preceding limb of the sun's disk, at the precise point to which I had been for 
 some minutes directing my attention. At first I took it to be the result of a slight tremor of the 
 sun's limb produced by an atmospheric cause, though at the time the atmosphere was steady and 
 the definition all that could be desired. 
 
 s. 
 
 w. 
 
 E. 
 
 W. 
 
 N. 
 I. 
 
 FIRST CONTACT, 4*1. 57m. 95. N. Y. M. T. 
 
 At 4 h 57 m 12 s .o, or 3.5 seconds later than the above 
 time, the impinging limb of the moon rendered the nature 
 of the black point apparent. The appearance of this 
 small point is given in the above sketch, No. 1, in which 
 is also shown the moon's limb, visible away from the 
 sun's disk a few minutes from the point of contact on 
 either side. Though I had looked with great care for the 
 approaching moon some minutes previous to contact, I 
 
 N. 
 2. 
 
 APPEARANCE OF THE SUN'S DISC AT 
 
 5(1. 5m. N. Y. M. T., SHOWING FOUR PROJECTIONS 
 
 ON THE MOON'S LIMB. 
 
 saw nothing of it until after 1 had seized 
 
 the black excrescence represented in the sketch, (No. 1.) Mr. Farrell noted the time of first contact 
 independently, by means of his field-glass, at 4 1 ' 57 m 18 s chronometer time, or 9 seconds later than 
 myself. 
 
 As the moon advanced on the sun's disk, it was apparent that its limb was very rough. I made 
 a sketch of its appearance at 5 h 5 m chronometer time, which I append herewith, (No. 2.) 
 
 There were distinctly visible at this time near the center of the dark limb of the moon four 
 projections of unequal altitude and varying extent. The second prominence from the north Avas 
 the highest, and measured about three seconds of arc, as nearly as I could estimate. It was this 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 175 
 
 poiut which first touched the sun's disk, as shown in sketch No. 1. I suppose these elevations to 
 have been the Montos d'Alembert of Beer & Mueller's large map of the moon. I roughly estimated 
 that the distance from I) to A was about 1', from C to B 1'.25, while the two sets of prominences 
 appeared to be separated by an interval of 1'.75. The ridge at B was of greater extent and more 
 jagged than the others, though not so high in relief above the moon's surface as that marked A. 
 These ridges were witnessed by several persons at various times, all agreeing both as regards their 
 number and relative distances. They were seen during the entire transit of the moon's following 
 limb. 
 
 SPOTS ON THE SUN. 
 
 There were, during the eclipse, four groups of spots upon 
 located on a diagram during the hour pre- 
 ceding the first contact, with the intention 
 of recording their exact times of disappear- 
 ance and reappearance. Sketch No. 3 is a 
 copy of this diagram. 1 have numbered the 
 groups from 1 to 4, and reckoned the times 
 of disappearance and reappearance from 
 those portions of the groups indicated by a 
 cross, (x). 
 
 In group No. 1 I reckoned the disap- 
 pearance from the minute bright point in the 
 penumbra of the large spot on the following 
 side of the phenomenon. This point of bright 
 matter was an interesting object. The details 
 of the spot are given in the corner of Sketch 
 No. 3. In estimating the disappearance and 
 reappearance of group No. 3, 1 reckoned from 
 the larger of the two following spots on this 
 triple group. In group No. 2 1 took the largest 
 spot on the following side of the group. In 
 group No. 4 a remarkable object, by the 
 way, of which more anon I selected the 
 southern edge of the umbra of the great spot. 
 The times will be found in Schedule B. 
 
 the sun's disk, all of which I 
 
 s 
 
 had 
 
 DIAGRAM SHOWING SPOTS ON THE SUN DURING THE 
 ECLIPSE, .AS SKETCHED ONE HOUR PREVIOUS TO THE 
 FIRST CONTACT. 
 
 APPEARANCE OF THE SOLAR SURFACE. 
 
 Many times during the progress of the eclipse was my attention arrested by the striking appear- 
 ance of the surface of the sun. The pores of the photosphere were visible, with unusual distinctness, 
 to within a few seconds of the edges of the penumbrae surrounding the larger spots. This phenom- 
 enon was more striking as the eclipse progressed. The facula? clustering around the large spot 
 numbered 4 in the diagram were very prominent, and suggested the comparison to lumps of plastic 
 white clay, or plaster of Paris, scattered around its borders, or to the little lunar peaks in the 
 vicinity of Plato and < 'assini, as they appear when just within the illuminated portion of the moon's 
 disk, at the first quarter. The encircling ridges of facuhe seemed to stand out in bold relief from 
 the sun's general surface. 
 
 APPROACH OF THE TOTAL PHASE. 
 
 At o h 40 1 " chronometer time, which was twenty minutes previous to totality, cocks were heard 
 to crow, and chickens prepared for the night. A herd of cattle also came in from the prairies, 
 where they had been feeding all day, and went into the barn-yard near by. 
 
 At 5 11 48 m chronometer time, the gloom deepened rapidly, and the sudden coolness of the 
 atmosphere struck me with surprise. The feeling was as if one was about to enter a cavern. 
 
176 REPORT OF MR. W. S. OILMAN, JR. 
 
 A few minutes previous to totality the horizon changed color, as it is frequently seen to do on 
 the approach of a storm. To the south the sky became of a rose-violet hue at 30 from the horizon. 
 At the same elevation in the northwest a grayish-violet tint prevailed. 
 
 Perfect silence reigned during the remaining moments of sunlight, and continued even for some 
 instants after the subsequent captivating scene of beauty burst upon our sight. During this still- 
 ness Mrs. Farrell distinctly saw the moon's shadow rapidly approach- 
 ing in the air. It appeared to go upwards from the western horizon 
 like the lifting of a dark curtain. 
 
 As the thin solar crescent was about to vanish I watched care- 
 fully for the phenomenon of Baily's Beads. The atmosphere was 
 very steady, and the limbs of both sun and moon were admirably 
 defined. The roughness of the moon's limb produced an approach 
 to the phenomenon as the several projections closed in upon the 
 remnant of the solar disk, but no appearance of beads was noticed. 
 With a less favoring atmosphere I doubt not the sight would have 
 been witnessed. Mr. Farrell, however, using a field-glass, noticed 
 the beads, and compared them to drops of water running together 
 
 and quickly disappearing. He made the annexed sketch of the PARALLEL TO 
 phenomenon in my note-book soon after the ending of the eclipse. 4 
 
 MINUTE CRESCENT NEAR THE SUN. 
 
 About half a minute preceding totality, possibly somewhat less, Mr. Vincent left his position 
 and came to me exclaiming that he saw a miniature crescent-shaped star under the moon, and that 
 1 must come and verify his observation. So interested was I in my own work that I paid little 
 attention to Mr. Vincent's announcement, but on his returning a second time, more urgent than 
 ever to have me look at the object, I did so in a hurried manner, using his glass. I detected nothing 
 in the few seconds I gave to the search. 
 
 According to Mr. Vincent's drawing, made soon after the eclipse, the little moon was located 
 one and a half times the moon's diameter from its limb, and to the left of a line drawn perpendicu 
 larly down to the horizon. I do not think I searched the sky as far away from the moon as the 
 distance given. During totality the object was forgotten, but shortly after the third contact lie 
 readily picked it up in the same locality. 
 
 TOTALITY. 
 
 The second contact, which was well observed, took plack at 6 1 ' O m 45 S .5 chronometer time. 
 Owing to an unfortunate error in my not removing the dark shade instantly on the extinction of 
 the sun, I saw nothing of the formation of the corona. The gradual appearance of this beautiful 
 feature of the eclipse was observed by Messrs. Farrell and Vincent. An anvil-shaped rose-colored 
 flame or protuberance and a large portion of the corona 'if ere seen several seconds previous to the xcronil 
 contact. 
 
 As soon as I had removed my dark shade the view presented to my eye in the telescope was 
 one of indescribable beauty. My attention was chiefly attracted to the large anvil-shaped protuber- 
 ance, which I at once recognized as occupying that portion of the sun's limb in the region of which 
 I had previously seen the brightest double facuia, indicated in Sketch 3 by the letter B. It appeared 
 like a monstrous glowing coal, dotted here and there, particularly on the southern side, with minute 
 flakes of brilliant deep crimson. It was my expectation that the rich masses of facuia! visible in the 
 sun's southern hemisphere, near the eastern limb, on the 26th of July last, and indicated by the let- 
 ter A in Sketches 5 and G, would be near the western limb on the day of the solar eclipse. The 
 appearance of striking rose-colored flames in this vicinity would, it seemed to me, render plausible 
 the theory of a connection between these objects and portions of the sun's surface that have the 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1809. 
 
 177 
 
 appearance of being unusually agitated. It was, therefore, with considerable interest that I noticed 
 on tlie 5th, Cth, and 7th of August, in the southwestern quadrant of the sun, intensely bright, white 
 ridges approaching the limb, as represented in Sketches 7, 8, and 3. 
 
 s. 
 
 JULY j6<J 6>>. W. M.T. 
 
 TWO SPOTS AT A SURROUNDED BY FACULAE. NO FACULAE 
 
 DETECTED ELSEWHERE. OBSERVATION MADE THROUGH 
 
 CLOUDS BEAUTIFUL LINE OF SMALL BLACK POINTS AT B. 
 
 W. 
 
 THREE SPOTS WELL SEEN THROUGH CLOUDS. FACULAE 
 SURROUNDING A AND FOLLOWING. FACULAE DISTINCT AT B. 
 
 AUG. 
 
 . W. M.T. 
 
 AUG. 6d 4 h. W. M.T 
 
 FACULAE FROM 235- TO 270'. AND VERY MARKED AT 245-. 
 TWO BRIGHT MASSES AT LATTER POINT. SPOTS AT B. C. & D. 
 AT C, SPOT OF CONSIDERABLE SIZE AND INTEREST. NO FA- 
 CULAE SEEN IN NORTHERN HEMISPHERE. 
 
 7 
 
 TWO BRILLIANT FACULAE AT 250" (?) DIFFICULT OBSERVATION 
 OWING TO CLOUDS. 
 
 N. 
 
 So deep was my interest in the subject that I had made the condition of the solar disk a study 
 from the middle of June to the first week of August, and especially on the 24th, 25th, and 2Gth of 
 July and the 5th of August, with a view of forecasting the, positions of protuberances during the 
 23* 
 
178 
 
 REPORT OF MR. W. S. OILMAN, JR. 
 
 eclipse, which forecast I made on the after- 
 noon of the 5th, as given in Sketch 9, herewith- 
 The impression upon my mind has, for a long- 
 time, been that the rose protuberances are in 
 the nature of exhalations from portions of the 
 surface in a high state of agitation, such as 
 witnessed in the vicinity of faculous ridges 
 and spots. 
 
 Having made the forecast referred to, I 
 indicated with. a cross (x) two prominences w 
 which, I expected, might be unusually large. 
 The eastern one of these would, as I thought, 
 be produced through the medium ot the agi- 
 tated ridges at D, pictured in Sketches 10 and 
 11, which, on the afternoon of the 7th of Au- 
 gust, would, if sufficiently persistent, occupy, 
 by virtue of the sun's revolution, a position on 
 the eastern limb, say near 25 north latitude. 
 
 The western flame, which I marked in the 
 same manner, was located in south latitude 
 10, for the reason that the large spot at B, 
 Sketch 7, would, from the same cause, during 
 the eclipse, occupy this portion of the sun's limb, and from it 
 tions that would be readilv visible. 
 
 N. 
 
 ROSE PROTUBERANCES AS FORECASTED 
 AUGUST 5, .869. 
 
 I surmised there would be exhala- 
 
 W 
 
 JULY ?4<i 
 
 W. M. T. 
 
 TWO SPOTS AT A FOLLOWED BY BRIGHT FACULAE. 
 FACULAE VERY BRIGHT AT C, D & E, ESPECIALLY AT D. 
 AT p. 2' FROM LIMB, TWO BRIGHT MASSES OF FACULAE. 
 VERY MUCH CONDENSED. 
 
 IO 
 
 JULY 2 5 <<. ih. W. M. T. 
 
 NlP 
 
 A BRIGHT RIDGE OF FACULAE HAS JUST APPEARED 
 UNDER THE EQUATOR ON EASTERN LIMB AT G. BRIGHT 
 RIDGE ALSO AT H. FOLLOWING A, FACULAE MORE BRIL 
 LIANT. ATMOSPHERE HAZY 
 
 N. 
 
 The first of these marked flames I failed to verify, though it may have been seen by others. 1 
 have, the more hope that this will prove the case since out of six protuberances seen by me I noted 
 the positions of but four from want of time. 
 
 In regard to the second marked flame, this also was not seen, and doubtless had no existence, 
 as the locality was carefully studied by me, and but one flame (A) appeared in this, the southwest- 
 ern quadrant of the sun. The protuberance, however, located over the bright double facula further 
 south, was the great anvil-shaped flame already noticed. . The fact of the utter absence of rosy mat- 
 ter in the vicinity of the spot may indicate an imcard current in the case of spot openings in oppo- 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 179 
 
 sitiou to aii out tea rd or upward OIK- iu the case of factilous agitations. The pointing of the anvil 
 toward the equator may in this connection possess some significance, indicating, possibly, a mon- 
 ster current toward the large spot 13, under the Equator. 
 
 I have reason for believing that the protuberances forecasted at B, (', and D had their true 
 counterparts in those observed during the. eclipse, as represented in Sketches 1^2. 13, and 14. I 
 
 s. 
 
 i? B 
 
 ROSY PROMINENCES AI 
 6h. im.45s N. Y. M. T TREMULOUS LIGHT AT A. 
 
 ROSY PROMINENCES AT 
 
 6h. am. 15,. N. Y. M. T. NORTHERN END OF A COM- 
 POSED OF FIBROUS LINES OF FLAME. 
 
 West. 
 
 ROSY PROMINENCES AT 
 h. am. 455. N. Y. M. T. NEW FLAME AT D. 
 
 East. 
 
 N. 
 
 should here remark, that having made my forecast, I laid it away in my portfolio, where it was not 
 disturbed until the morning of the 9th, when I first became aware of the coincidences referred to. 
 
 The protuberances were uniformly of an orange color, and, as It seemed to me, of the precise 
 tint of the glowing coals in an anthracite grate. There was, however, in the case of the three north- 
 ern protuberances, at least, the remarkable addition of small crimson scales or flakes of astonishing 
 richness of color. These scales seemed to have no connection with the protuberances, though they 
 were projected upon them. They were not seen, however, disconnected from the flames, and their 
 separate character may have been more apparent than real. I was deeply interested in them, and 
 have no doubt that the phenomenon of crimson flakes was truly witnessed, and that my eyes 
 were not deceived. 
 
180 REPORT OF MR. W S. GILMAN, JR. 
 
 At the bases of the flames sulphurous lines were discernible, as also at the tapering, " wispy' 7 
 eud of the anvil-shaped mass pointing to the equator. I saw no changes in any of the llames, except 
 an apparent wavy motion in the pointed end of the large one. Though I have called them inter- 
 changeably flame* and protuberances, they did not appear like names, but possessed a clear, unchang- 
 ing, almost harsh outline, as if cut out of some solid substance. 1 noticed a llaky structure in the 
 large protuberance, and was strongly impressed with its resemblance to glowing embers, dotted 
 over with minute crimson spots, as stated. I was not prepared for such stability on the part of the 
 protuberances as was witnessed. 
 
 I made the positions of the four protuberances by estimation as follows, vi/. : 
 
 A, anvil-shaped mass, 230 235 
 
 B, 140 
 
 Q, 120 
 
 D, 320 
 
 THE COKONA. 
 
 The general outline of the corona was a trapezium, with the widest side to the southeast. (See 
 Plate XII.) There were also lesser projections on the four sides, as well as several small indentations. 
 The longest masses of light coincided very nearly with the north and east points, at the middle of 
 totality. Mr. Farrell also noted the same peculiarity. 
 
 The corona was composed of an infinitude of fine violet, mauve-colored, white, and yellowish 
 white rays, issuing from behind the moon. I detected no clouds in it. The exterior edge was very 
 jagged in appearance, but did not possess a harsh outline, having, on the contrary, a soft blurred 
 look. This was quite contrary to my expectations, as, from all the drawings of eclipses 1 had ever 
 seen, I was led to expect a well-defined and truly circular halo of light, extending to an equal dis 
 tance on all sides. 
 
 Mr. Farrell described the appearance of the corona verbally, as follows: "It was a silvery-gray 
 crown of light, and looked as if it was the product of countless fine jets of steam, issuing from be- 
 hind a dark globe. Near the moon's disk, the light seemed almost phosphorescent." 
 
 During totality the seconds on our watch faces could not be read without the assistance of the 
 lamps placed in the windows of the house to aid us at this juncture. The time could with difficulty 
 be told by the larger hands. 
 
 MINUTE OBJECT SEEN NEAR THE SUN. 
 
 A few moments after the formation of the corona, a minute object was noted independently by 
 four of the party, and should be here mentioned. 
 
 A small but exceedingly bright point, like a star, was witnessed by Messrs. Farrell, Phelps. 
 and Locklin, and Mrs. Farrell, during the period of totality. It appeared near the limits of the 
 corona, below the moon's disk direct vision and in the region of the anvil-shaped protuberance. 
 Mr. Farrel judged it to be about one-sixth some say one-tenth the size of Mercury ; which latter 
 star was almost directly to the right of it, on a line parallel to the horizon. 
 
 With the exception of Mrs. Farrell, all located the star a little to the right of the red promi- 
 nence, or at about 230 from the north point, reckoning by the east. Each of the observers men 
 tioned feels very positive that what he saw was truly a star. 
 
 I cannot connect Mr. Vincent's miniature crescent with the small star of Messrs. Farrell, Phelps, 
 and others, though, owing to Mr. Vincent's peculiar position, he may have located his object too far 
 to the left. He was leaning on his left arm which may have led him to form in his mind a horizon 
 inclining considerably to the true one. This would cause the location of a star below the sun to be 
 too far to the left in his diagram. He estimated the object seen by him as three times as far re- 
 moved from the moon's limb as the star noted by Messrs. Farrell, Phelps, ami others. The report 
 of each observer was given to me shortly after the termination of the eclipse, and not iu the hearing 
 of others. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 181 
 
 PLANETS AND STARS VISIBLE. 
 
 Of the planets and stars 1 saw but Venus. Regains, and Mercury. At no time during the 
 eclipse did it occur to me to look for intra-niercurial planets. I saw Regulus with difficulty as a 
 glimpse star, with the unaided eye. The reports show that seven stars were witnessed by our 
 party, if we include the little brilliant below the snn. 
 
 The gloom of totality did not impress me as being at all like that of moonlight, but rather like 
 the somber light of an approaching thunder-storm, with this remarkable addition : an indescribably 
 delicate mauve or violet-tinted glow in the portion of the heavens occupied by the eclipsed sun. 
 
 Of the effect of color on the landscape I made no note. A sulphurous glow in the northeastern 
 part of the sky drew my attention in that direction while I was arranging my screens, shortly after 
 the second contact. It rose a few degrees above the horizon here, but not so high elsewhere. It pre- 
 sented the appearance of a sunset after a heavy thunder-storm with the sun already below the hori- 
 zon, and illuminating the under edge of the low hanging clouds. The phenomenon was generally 
 observetl, and produced a great impression on all. 
 
 THE THIRD CONTACT. 
 
 By an unfortunate substitution of. a deep red for my ordinary neutral-tinted screen, 1 lost the 
 third contact by about ten seconds, supposing I was witnessing the sun's hydrogen atmosphere, when 
 I was observing his limb. Ascertaining my mistake I called time, and was given G h 3 m 45 K 
 chronometer time ; my cousin remarking that he could now see to read the second-hand without the 
 assistance of (lie lights in the window. I estimate 12* to have elapsed from time of third contact. 
 
 The receding limb of the moon was less rough than the eastern one. Had it given any appear- 
 ance like ' Baily's Beads" on revealing the first line of light from the sun's disk, I should certainly 
 have detected it, so intently was I watching the point at which the sun's limb was to appear. 
 
 A reference to the tliermometrical record kept by Mr. Farrell reveals the fact that the temper- 
 ature of the air fell_from 7(i at first contact to C8 at eleven minutes after the reappearance of the 
 snn. This latter temperature was the lowest reached during the eclipse. One hour later the ther- 
 mometer marked 71, and at 7 p. in. it read C4.5. 
 
 THE LAST CONTACT. 
 
 The last contact occurred at 7 1 ' I" 1 36 s . 
 
 W. S. OILMAN, JK. 
 Commodore B. F. SANDS, IT. S. N., 
 
 United States Naval Observatory, Wnxhinyton. 
 
182 
 
 REPORT OF MR. W. S. OILMAN, JR. 
 
 A. METEOROLOGICAL KECOKD. IN LOCAL TIME. 
 
 AUGUST 5, 1869. 
 
 Hour. 
 
 Therm. 
 
 Sky. 
 
 Wind. 
 
 Clouds. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 11 A.M. 
 
 o 
 79.5 
 
 Overcast 8 
 
 NE. 
 
 Dark Niuib. 
 
 Shower. 
 
 12 M. 
 1 P.M. 
 2 P. M. 
 
 70.5 
 
 73. 
 75.7 
 
 Overcast HI 
 Overcast 10 
 Overcast 9 
 
 E.NE. 
 E. 
 SE. 
 
 Lighter Niuib. 
 Lighter Niiul). 
 Stratified. 
 
 Wind blowing in gusts. 
 
 3 P.M. 
 
 78.5 
 
 Clear 
 
 SE. 
 
 Stratified. 
 
 
 4 P. M. 
 
 77. 
 
 Clouds 3 
 
 E. 
 
 Stratified. 
 
 
 5 P.M. 
 
 74. 5 
 
 Clouds 1 
 
 E. 
 
 Stratified. 
 
 
 6 P.M. 
 
 71. 
 
 Clouds 5 
 
 E. 
 
 Stratified. 
 
 
 7 P.M. 
 
 ee.7 
 
 Clouds 9 
 
 E. 
 
 Stratified. 
 
 
 8 P.M. 
 
 68. 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 E. by S. 
 
 
 
 AUGUST (i, 18(>9. 
 
 6 A. M. 64. 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 NE. 
 
 Stratified. 
 
 
 7 A. M. 63. 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 NE. 
 
 Stratified. 
 
 Misty rain. 
 
 8 A. M. 64. . Overcast 10 
 
 N. NE. 
 
 Stratified. 
 
 Misty rain. 
 
 A. M. 6-2. 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 NE. i Stratified. 
 
 Misty rain. 
 
 10 A. M. 62. 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 NE. 
 
 Stratified. 
 
 Misty. 
 
 11 A. M. 64. 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 NE. 
 
 Clouds higher. 
 
 Misty. 
 
 12 M. 66. 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 NE. 
 
 Still higher. 
 
 Misty. 
 
 1 P. M. 68. 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 NE. 
 
 Clouds higher. 
 
 Misty. 
 
 2 P.M. 71.5 
 
 Overcast 9 
 
 NE. 
 
 Clouds higher. 
 
 Sun at intervals. 
 
 3 P.M. 72.25 
 
 Overcast 9 
 
 NE. 
 
 Clouds thin. 
 
 
 4 P.M. 68.5 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 NE. 
 
 Clouds thicker. 
 
 
 5 P. M. 66. 5 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 NE. 
 
 Softer edgi'il. 
 
 
 6 P.M. 65.5 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 NE. 
 
 Softer edged. 
 
 
 7 P. M. 65. 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 NE. 
 
 Softer edged. 
 
 
 8 P. M. 64. 
 
 Overcoat 10 
 
 E. 
 
 Softer edged. 
 
 
 AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 6 A.M. 
 
 58.5 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 E. 
 
 
 
 7 A. M. 
 
 60.5 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 E. 
 
 Thin overhead and in SE. moving N. 
 
 
 8 A.M. 
 
 64. 
 
 Overcast 8 
 
 SE. 
 
 Clouds thin moving rapidly to NW. 
 
 S) A. M. 
 
 68.5 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 SE. 
 
 Clouds thicker. 
 
 10 A.M. 
 
 67. 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 E. by S. 
 
 Clouds thicker. 
 
 
 11 A. M. 
 
 71. 
 
 Overcast 10 
 
 SE. 
 
 Clouds thinner. 
 
 
 12 M. 
 
 73. 75 
 
 Thinly " 9 
 
 SE. 
 
 
 Sun visible at intervals. 
 
 1 P. M. 
 
 77. 
 
 Thinly " 8 
 
 SE. 
 
 
 Sun visible at intervals. 
 
 2 P. M. 
 
 75.5 
 
 Thinly " 5 
 
 SE. 
 
 
 Snu visible at intervals. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OP AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 183 
 
 Hour. 
 
 Therm. 
 
 Sky. 
 
 Hour. 
 
 Therm. 
 
 Sky. 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 2 30 1'. M. 
 
 78. 
 
 Clear 
 
 4 35 P. M. 
 
 68.5 
 
 C'lciir 
 
 :! r. M. 
 
 7.">. r> 
 
 Clear 
 
 4 40 P. JL 
 
 68.25 
 
 Clear 
 
 3 15 P. M. 
 
 70. 
 
 Clear 
 
 4 45 P. M. 
 
 68. 
 
 Clear 
 
 3 30 P. M. 
 
 7(5. 
 
 Clear 
 
 4 50 P. M. 
 
 68. 
 
 Clear 
 
 3 45 P. M. 
 
 76. 
 
 Clear 
 
 4 55 P. M. 
 
 68.5 
 
 Clear 
 
 4 P. M. 
 
 74. 25 
 
 Clear 
 
 5 P.M. 
 
 69. 
 
 Clear 
 
 4 05 P.M. 
 
 73. 5 
 
 Clear 
 
 5 15 P. M. 
 
 70. 
 
 Clear 
 
 4 10 P. M. 
 
 73. 
 
 Clear 
 
 5 30 P. M. 
 
 71. 
 
 Clear 
 
 4 15 P. M. 
 
 72. 
 
 Clear 
 
 5 45 P. M. 
 
 
 
 4 20 P. M. 
 
 71. 5 
 
 Clear 
 
 6 P. M. 
 
 
 
 4 25 P. M. 
 
 70. 75 
 
 Clear 
 
 6 15 P. M. 
 
 68. 5 
 
 
 4 30 P. M. 
 
 69. 75 
 
 Clear 
 
 6 30 P. M. 
 
 67. 
 
 
 4 31 P. M. 
 
 69. 
 
 Clear 
 
 7 P. M. 
 
 64. 5 
 
 
 4 32 P. M. 
 
 69. -j & 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 
 4 33 P. M. 
 
 68.5 | 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 
 4 34 P. M. 
 
 68. 5 J 
 
 Clear 
 
 
 
 
 AUGUST 8, 1869. 
 
 Hour. 
 
 ITier. 
 
 Sky. Wind. 
 
 Clouds. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6 A. M. 
 
 59. 
 
 Hazy to \. SE. 
 
 
 
 7 A. M. 
 
 04. 
 
 Hazy 
 
 SE. 
 
 
 
 8 A. JI. 
 
 68. 5 
 
 Hazy 
 
 S. 
 
 Clouds low on horizon. 
 
 
 9 A. M. 
 
 71.5 
 
 Ila/.y 
 
 S.SE. 
 
 Few faint milky clouds in N. 
 
 
 10 A. M. 
 
 75. 5 
 
 Cloudy 10 
 
 S. 
 
 Few faint milky clouds in N. 
 
 
 11 A.M. 
 
 76.5 
 
 Cloudy 9 
 
 s. 
 
 Few faint milky clouds iu N. 
 
 
 12 M. 
 
 80.7 
 
 Cloudy 8 
 
 s. 
 
 Cum. all over sky. 
 
 
 1 P. M. 
 
 81.5 
 
 Cloudy 8 
 
 S.SE. 
 
 Cum. all over sky. 
 
 
 2 P. JI. 
 
 81. 25 
 
 Clear 10 
 
 S.SE. 
 
 Few Cum. in W. 
 
 
 3 P. JI. 
 
 81.2! 
 
 Clear 10 
 
 S.SE. 
 
 Few Cum. in SE. and SW. 
 
 
 4 P.M. 
 
 80. 5 
 
 Clear 10 
 
 S.SE. 
 
 Few Cum. on horizon W. & NW. 
 
 
 5 P. M. 
 
 77. 5 
 
 Cloudy 6 
 
 SE. 
 
 Very dark. 
 
 
 6 P.M. 
 
 75. 
 
 Cloudy 8 
 
 SE. 
 
 Dark iu W. 
 
 
 7 20 P. JI. 
 
 7:1. 
 
 Clondy 
 
 S. SE. 
 
 Dark in W. 
 
 
 8 P.M. 
 
 73. 
 
 Cloudy 8 
 
 S. SE. 
 
 Clouds thinner iu W. 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 B. Comparisons for time. Times of contact and of disappearance and reappearance of sun spots. 
 
 By the courtesy of Professors Newcomb and Harkness I was able to make accurate comparisons 
 for time, both before and after the eclipse, at the temporary observatory on Third street, Des 
 Moines. I had a similar opportunity at the Dearborn Observatory, Chicago, on the IGth, and finally 
 at the Naval Observatory, Washington, on the occasion of presenting the foregoing report on the 
 20th of August last, when I was assisted by yourself and Professor Yarnall. 
 
 Of these comparisons I give below those which I consider the most reliable. 
 
184 REPORT OF MR. W. S. OILMAN', JR. 
 
 Des Moines, July 31, 1860. 
 
 Hammond No. 300. Negus No. 131! 
 
 A. MI. . '< ' . 
 
 4 36 14.2p.m. 36 
 
 Negus fast of Des Moines mean time 6 18 13. 7 
 
 Des Homes mean time 3 17 46. 3 
 
 Longitude of temporary observatory 1 6 16. 09 
 
 Washington mean time -1 2-4 2. 39 
 
 Hammond fast of Washington mean time 12 11. 81 
 
 4 36 14. 20 
 
 Des Moines, August 12, 1869. 
 
 Hammond No. 300. NY-jus No. 1319. 
 
 //. Ml. 8. /'. W. x. 
 
 4 18 46. 1p.m. 9 19 
 
 Negus fast of Des Moines mean time 6 18 19.5 
 
 Des Moines mean time 3 40. 5 
 
 Longitude of temporary observatory 1 6 16. 09 
 
 Washington mean time 1 6 56. 59 
 
 Hammond fast of Washington mean time 11 49.51 
 
 4 18 46. 1 
 
 [3.] 
 Dearborn Obserratory, Chiecif/o, August 16, 1869. 
 
 Hammond No. 300. Observatory mi'iin lime dock. 
 
 A. m. s. ti. MI. s. 
 
 4 39 35p.m. 3 45 30 
 
 Longitude west of Washington 42 14.26 
 
 Washington mean time 4 27 53. 26 
 
 Hammond fast of Washington mean time 11 41. 74 
 
 4 39 35 
 
 In this comparison the longitudes, from Greenwich, of Chicago and Washington, are taken 
 respectively at 5 b 50" 1 26 S .65 and 5 1 ' 8 12 S .39. These values I obtained from Professor Safford and 
 Professor Yarnall. 
 
 United 8t<itex Xarul Obsei-ratory, WHxliiiiytnn, August 20, 1869. 
 
 Hammond No. 300. Mi-:in ti ..... clock. 
 
 A. m. s. I'- MI. s. 
 
 . 3 23 34.5 3 12 
 
 Hammond fast of Washington mean time 11 34. 5 
 
 3 23 34.5 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1369. 
 
 185 
 
 From the above I reach the following conclusions : 
 
 Loss of chronometer Xo. 300, July 31 to August 12 = 
 
 Loss of chronometer Xo. 300, August 12 to August 16 = 
 
 (1.) 22.3 
 (2.) 7.77 
 (3.) 7.24 
 
 Loss of chronometer Xo. 300, August 16 to August 20 = 
 
 From the first interval (1.) we obtain 
 
 22 9 .3 H- 12 days^= P.858 loss per diem. 
 From the second interval (2.) we obtain 
 
 7*.77 4- 4 days = 1 9 .942 loss per diem. 
 From the third interval (3.) 'we. obtain 
 
 7 S .24 4- 3 a .95 = l s .832 loss per diem. 
 
 Taking 1 s . 86 as the daily rate at time of eclipse, and reckoning backward from August 12 to 
 August 7, I find that my chronometer lost 9".5 between these dates, and therefore ll m 59 s is the 
 amount to be deducted from all the times given in my report to reduce them to Washington mean 
 time. 
 
 Times of Conlaci. 
 
 1st contact 
 2d contact 
 3d contact 
 4th contact - 
 
 Probable duration of totality at St. Paul Junction 2 47 s . 
 
 Timed of disappearance and reappearance of sun spots. 
 
 Chronometer. Washington moan time. 
 
 k. 
 
 in. 
 
 s. 
 
 ft. 
 
 in. 
 
 s. 
 
 4 
 
 57 
 
 9 
 
 ]>. in. 
 
 4 
 
 45 
 
 10 p. in. 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 45. 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 48 
 
 46.5 
 
 6 
 
 3 
 
 33 
 
 (!) 
 
 5 
 
 51 
 
 34 (?) 
 
 7 
 
 1 
 
 36 
 
 
 6 
 
 49 
 
 37 
 
 Disappearance. 
 
 Group Xo 1. 
 Group Xo. 2. 
 Group Xo.3. 
 Group Xo- 4. 
 
 Reappearance. 
 
 Group Xo. 1. 
 Group Xo. 3. 
 Group Xo. 2. 
 Group Xo. 4. 
 24* 
 
 Chronometer. 
 5 24 10 
 5 43 25.5 
 5 45 23. 5 
 5 58 35 
 
 6 17 58 
 
 6 40 12. 5 
 
 6 44 46 
 
 6 57 4.5 
 
 Washington mean time. 
 5 12 11 
 5 31 26. 5 
 5 33 24. 5 
 5 46 36 
 
 6 5 59 
 
 6 28 13. 5 
 
 6 32 47 
 
 6 45 5. 5 
 
REPORT 
 
 OF 
 
 Mil. F. W. B A ED WELL, 
 
REPORT OF MR. F. W. BARDWELL. 
 
 UNITED STATES NAVAL OBSERVATORY, 
 
 Washington, D. C., September 20, 1869. 
 
 SIR : I have the honor to submit the following statement, from notes made at the time, of the 
 results of my observations of the total eclipse of the sim on the seventh of August last, in Bristol, 
 Tennessee, near the central line of totality. 
 
 Accompanied by Mr. Thomas Davidson, naval constructor United States ]$avy, I arrived in 
 Bristol on tin- day of the eclipse, at an early hour in the morning, with an interval of time suffi- 
 cient to select a suitable point for making observations. 
 
 I found stationed near there a Coast Survey party with General Cutts, who kindly furnished 
 me with the latitude and longitude of their station, which they had determined with every facility 
 for accuracy. 1 also obtained from them a correction for clock error, fully answering every desired 
 purpose. 
 
 The point finally selected lor the purpose of observing the eclipse was on the brow of a hill 
 moderately elevated above the surrounding country, with an extended view of the western horizon, 
 at a distance from the stations of other parties, and far enough from the public highway to be 
 free from the intrusion of idle visitors. The elevation above tide-water was about sixteen hundred 
 and eighty feet, and thus favorable for a clear state of the atmosphere. 
 
 I intended to give special attention during the time of total obscuration to the search for an 
 intra-mercurial planet, and at other times to note any phenomena which would be useful for com- 
 parison with the observations of others. 
 
 For the purpose of detecting the appearance of any stranger planet, 1 had prepared a star- 
 chart or map showing the relative positions of the line of the ecliptic, the apparent horizon, the 
 Sun, Mercury, Venus, and the neighboring stars of not less than the fifth magnitude, within four 
 degrees on either side of the ecliptic, and within ten degrees of the sun. I was also provided with 
 a glass of magnifying power sufficient to show distinctly the spots on the sun's disk. 
 
 In using this instrument it was merely strapped to a stake firmly driven into the ground, so 
 as to secure steadiness of motion in directing it to different portions of the field to be examined. 
 
 During the early part of the day the sky was partially overcast, and much anxiety was felt 
 lest the grand event should be shorn of much of its interest; to observers by the obscuration of 
 clouds; but about noon the sky became much brighter, and as the critical hour approached it 
 seemed in the most favorable condition. 
 
 Everything being in readiness, I was prepared to observe the first contact of the edge of the 
 moon upon the sun's disk. It was arranged that I should observe the instant of contact and call 
 time, while Mr. Davidson, observing the watch and counting seconds, should mark the time called. 
 
 The record showed the time of first contact, corrected for clock error, to be 5 h 4 m 12 s , mean 
 Washington time, which was sensibly later than was anticipated. The total obscuration of the 
 sun commenced at 6 h l m 16 s , continued 2 m 30 s , and ended at 6 h 2 m 46 8 . During the progress of the 
 eclipse numerous notes of the phenomena were recorded, some of which are here transcribed with 
 the corresponding dates: 
 
 "5 h 20 m . The edge of the moon seems slightly serrated or rough.. The disk of the sun is 
 well defined, and shows eight spots in four groups. 
 
 " 5 h 29 m . Visible diminution of light, 
 
 "5 h 41 m . Light dimmed still more. The line between the shadows of clouds and the sunshine 
 in the valley below is quite faint. 
 
 "5 h 55 m . Light nearly the same as when the sun is hid behind a high hill just before setting." 
 
190 REPORT OF MR. F. W. BARDWELL. 
 
 During the time of totality the positions of Venus, the Moon, and Mercury appeared near 
 enough in a direct line to guide me in the brief search for new planets, but none appeared in view. 
 
 Mercury seemed to shine with the full light of a star of the first magnitude, and Venus very 
 much brighter, while Regulus, which is classed as nearly of the first magnitude, appeared scarcely 
 as bright as one of the second class, but it remained visible several seconds after the reappearance 
 of the sun's rays. Almost immediately after the disappearance of the sun's disk a prominence, 
 which I described at the time as " a rosette of bright purple," appeared at the edge of the moon 
 Avhere the sun had disappeared ; then another on the lower limb of the moon that is, on the edge 
 seen nearest the western horizon ; and lastly appeared still another at the point where the sun was 
 about to reappear, while that first seen had nearly or quite disappeared. The order in which these 
 appeared successively and disappeared showed that they belonged to the sun and not the moon a 
 point perhaps well enough established already. The disappearance of the first of these before the 
 reappearance of the suu, and the sensible interval of time before the third one made its appear- 
 ance, showed that the apparent height of these prominences (first and third of those above 
 described) was less than the difference between the apparent diameters of the suu and moon. 
 With regard to the second of these prominences that is, the one seen below the lower limb of the 
 moon if it was visible to observers near the northern limit of the path of totality, the inference 
 would be fair that its apparent height was equal to or greater than the difference between the 
 apparent diameters of the sun and moon. If, on the other hand, it was invisible at such point, 
 then it would be fair to infer that its apparent height was less than the difference of tin- apparent 
 diameters of the sun and moon. Whether it was indeed visible at any such point, I am not 
 informed. 
 
 At my station, no prominences \vciv seen above any portion of the moon's upper limb, while 
 such prominences were visible at other stations, which fact indicated that my station was nearer 
 the southern limit of the path of totality. There were several indications that the central line ol' 
 totality was further north than the predicted place. 
 
 So far as I have been able to compare, it would seem that the position of these prominences 
 relatively to the sun's equator is within the same limits of distance as the spots on the sun's disk; 
 and it is possible that some relation may be found to exist between the two classes of phenomena. 
 
 With regard to the search for an intra-mercurial planet, the evidence so far seems merely neg- 
 ative, and, considering all the difficulties necessarily attendant on the search, is by no means con- 
 clusive against its existence. It is quite possible that this interesting question will yet be defi- 
 nitely settled by new methods which were suggested while prosecuting the recent search. 
 
 The clear atmosphere free from haziness gave the corona a well-defined, brilliant appearance, 
 and altogether the circumstances were extremely favorable for witnessing this spectacle of beauty. 
 
 The elevation of my station above tide-water, sixteen hundred and eighty feet, was estimated 
 from the records of the survey of the Virginia and Tennessee Railway. 
 
 Estimates of the latitude and longitude, as already stated, were based on those of the Coast 
 Survey station : 
 
 Latitude 36 35' 30" N. 
 
 Longitude 5 9 W. 
 
 Nothing further of importance is suggested by the memoranda of my observations. 
 Very respectfully, your obedient servant, 
 
 F. W. BAKDWELL, Aid. 
 Commodore B. F. SANDS, U. S. N., 
 
 Superintendent U. S. Naval Observatory, Washington, I), C. 
 
REPORT 
 
 BREVET BRHI. GEN. ALBERT J. IYER, 
 
 CHIEF SIGNAL OFFICER U. S. A. 
 
REPORT OF BREVET BRIG. GEN. ALBERT J. MYER, 
 CHIEF SIGNAL OFFICER U. S. A. 
 
 OFFICE OF THE CHIEF SIGNAL OFFICER, 
 
 Washington. D. C., November 2, I860. 
 
 COMMODORE: I avail myself with pleasure of the invitation extended iu your courteous note of 
 the 1st instant to communicate to yon the details of observations made by me, in company with 
 Colonel W. Wintlirop, also of the army, of the total eclipse of the sun on August 7, 1809, from the 
 summit of White Top Mountain, near Abingdon, Virginia. Yon will please understand the word 
 " observations" in its simplest colloquial sense, our expedition having been of the most informal and 
 impromptu character ; and our only instruments two telescopes (not reversing) of a magnifying 
 power (measured) of about forty-eight and four-tenths (48.4) diameters. With these we used, for 
 solar observation, obscuring glasses or screens of plain red glass, thicknesses of which were added 
 or taken away as occasion required greater or less obscuration. The point of observation, a mount- 
 ain top, was sought with a view of placing ourselves as far as possible above the lower and denser 
 strata of the atmosphere and the smoke, ha/e, and obstacles to vision with which they are charged. 
 The extensive field of view was also desirable. The ascent of the mountain, which lies in the midst 
 of a wilderness at the junction of the State lines of Virginia, Tennessee, and North Carolina, having 
 been effected after a night's encampment in the woods and a somewhat severe inarch, early in the 
 day an excellent position was selected, and the instruments were placed upon a flat rock on the 
 open summit, from which was had a comprehensive view for fifty (50) miles, over billows of mount- 
 ains, in near and distant ranges, and across the valley of the Holston to the westward. 
 
 During all the morning, and until afternoon, the sky was wholly overcast witli thin white 
 clouds, through which the sun's disk was dimly visible. At about 3 o'clock, however, a breeze 
 sprang up from the northward, which, in the course of an hour, nearly cleared the western sky of 
 clouds, so that a perfectly unobstructed view of the eclipse was had from the beginning to the end 
 of the obscuration, and with the advantage that the effect of the changing light upon the masses of 
 cloud near the apparent place of the sun, and elsewhere above the horizon, could be noted. 
 
 Upon first turning the telescopes upon the sun, the spots upon its surface were noticed located 
 as appears in the various photographs taken by other observers, which have doubtless been under 
 your observation. The spot near the lower (southern) limb was the larger, and exhibited, as it 
 seemed to us, a remarkably distinct penumbra. 
 
 The first exterior contact was readily perceived, but no record of time was made. 
 
 During the progress of the eclipse it was endeavored to observe whether there was change in 
 the appearance of the spots on the sun as they were approached and then covered from view by the 
 moon's disk ; and also whether, with glasses of the power used by us, any lunar prominences could 
 be observed as projected against the disk of the sun as a background. The lunar limb did not 
 exhibit, to our eyes, a sharply-defined or clear line, either as against the unobscured sun's disk or 
 as covering the spots, but no prominences were noted. * 
 
 The first strikingly remarkable accompaniment of the phenomenon which was observed was a 
 flight of brilliant particles, seen by Colonel Winthrop, my companion, and described by him as a 
 " shower of bright specks," to which he more than once called my attention while yet some four or 
 five digits of the sun's disk remained uncovered, and which we do not doubt was the shower of 
 meteors remarked upon by other observers. I was at the time using obscuring glasses too dense to 
 permit the light of these meteors to be observed, a fact which has some bearing in reference to other 
 observations made a few moments later. 
 
 The next principal feature was one which I have, not perceived to have been yet recorded in the 
 published reports of other parties. While some two digits of the sun's disk were still uueclipsed, 
 and many seconds, perhaps a minute, before any appearance of the breaking of the visible sun cres- 
 cent into Baily's Beads, there was distinctly seen by both my companion and myself, and verified 
 25* 
 
194 REPORT OP BREVET BRIG. GENERAL ALBERT J. MYER. 
 
 by attention mutually and repeatedly directed to it, a luminous cloud or prominence of a yellow line, 
 upon the lunar limb below the solar crescent, and removed about fifteen or twenty degrees of the 
 sun's apparent circumference from its lower extremity. It appeared as if from behind or attached 
 to the moon's disk (southeastern portion) at this part of its circumference, of course showing an inky 
 blackness. This object did not appear to be detached or floatiTig. It was fixed in its position and 
 distinctly changed shape, either in itself or by movement of the moon's limb while under observa. 
 tion. Its outlines were not sharp. An appearance, barely visible, was thought to be noticed at its 
 northern and upper part, as might be of a thinner portion of the denser cloud drifting northward. 
 No motion was perceptible. The whole prominence was carefully observed for some seconds. It 
 must have been of a very considerable brilliancy to have been so distinctly seen while so much of 
 the sun's disk was nnobscured, and to have been so plainly observed through the dense obscuring 
 glasses then stilLiu use. It occurred tons, and it has been suggested by others, that it might have 
 been one of the red or rose-colored prominences afterward visible during the totality, and now ear- 
 lier observed under different circumstances of illumination, &c. If this be so, it would seem to 
 establish that these protuberances emit a considerable light ; the observed cloudy prominence 
 appearing distinctly luminous, either by its own, or reflected, or transmitted light; and more lumi- 
 nous at its base, and near the moon's limb, than at its apex. As I now recall the eclipse, some of 
 the red protuberances, and larger than this appeared, were at the moment of totality visible beyond 
 the circumference of those portions of the sun's disk yet unobscured at the time of this observation. 
 If these prominences possess such brilliancy, it would seem these ought, at this time, to have been 
 also visible through the obscuring glasses. This would particularly apply to the prominence after- 
 ward noted at about the center of the eastern limb, and that near the center of the northern limb. 
 Xone were in view. This object did not answer to the description of a detached luminous point 
 noticed by M. Laussedat, as observed at the lower extremity of the sun's cresent at the total eclipse 
 of July 18, 18(50. It was further removed from the crescent, and though exhibiting through our 
 colored (red) glasses light of the same appearance as that of the sun's disk, it was not so bright or 
 intense. We were much impressed with the appearance at the time. Our limited experience did 
 not permit us to account for it, and I am pleased to be able to submit the subject for more compe- 
 tent consideration. 
 
 Upon the breaking of the sun's crescent into the Baily's Beads, the crescent seemed to divide 
 at first, at about the center, into two separate masses, each of which immediately parted into 
 numerous fragments and then disappeared. At the moment of totality we ceased to use screens or 
 obscuring glasses of any kind with the telescopes. Colonel Winthrop had been using hut a slight 
 screen only for some moments before. The red prominences were at once visible. 
 
 The telescopic appearance of the corona or aureola, during the totality, exhibited a clear, yel- 
 lowish bright light closely surrounding the lunar disk and fading gradually, with perhaps some 
 tinge of pinkish green, into the hue of the darkened sky. Upon this corona, extending beyond its 
 brightest portion, the well defined rose-colored prominences were projected at various points of the 
 circumference. They were larger in appearance and more distinct than we had been led to expect 
 from such illustrations of total eclipses as we had seen. We observed no rose-colored clouds or 
 objects appearing as detached from the sun's circumference, or as if floating in an atmosphere. 
 Those visible to us gave the impression of attachment to the sun by their bases. They were of 
 irregular conical shape. They showed steadily without any waving or flickering as of moving llame. 
 and presented sharp outlines and an appearance suggestive at the time of their consisting of 
 straight red rays something like such as are seen in the jet of flame springing from an ignited 
 red light a pyrotechnic composition compressed in a tubular case. The exception to this steadi- 
 ness was noted in the instances of the two central prominences of a number of four, observed a few 
 instants only, on the western limb of the sun at the time the moon's disk was ceasing to obscure it. 
 and almost simultaneously with the formation of the Baily's Beads upon this (western) limb at the 
 moment of emersion. These seemed to incline, toward each other, and to leap for an instant into 
 view as tongues of flame might do, and then were invisible at once. They were so instantly lost in 
 the light of the unobscured sun that it could not be determined whether this was an actual motion 
 or an optical effect, caused by the prominence's being visible but for an instant and then disappear- 
 ing. The instan taneousness with which these red prominences disappeared at the moment of emer- 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 195 
 
 sioii would seem to show that the object first noted by us, before the totality, must have differed 
 from them in something of composition or illumination. 
 
 Of the red prominences, as now recollected, there were visible seven. One, and the largest, 
 near the center of the lower (southern) limb, and one near the center of the eastern limb, were care- 
 fully observed. One a little to the eastward of the center of the northern limb was noticed. Four 
 were visible, for two or three seconds only, upon the western limb. That near the center of the lower 
 limb was the larger and most attractive. Its size and position have suggested that it might be in 
 some relation to the larger and lower spot upon the sun. All the prominences were similar and 
 constant in hue, of a deep rose-color. 
 
 To the unaided eye the eclipse presented, during the total obscuration, a vision magnificent 
 beyond description. As a center stood the full and intensely black disk of the moon, surrounded by 
 the aureola of a soft bright light, through which shot out as if from the circumference of the moon 
 straight massive silvery rays, seeming distinct and separate from each other, to a distance of two 
 or three diameters of the lunar disk; the whole spectacle showing as upon a background of diffused 
 rose-colored light. This light was most intense and extended furthest at about the center of the 
 lower limb, the position of the southern prominence. The silvery rays were longest and most prom- 
 inent at four points of the circumference, two upon the upper and two upon the lower portion, appa- 
 rently equidistant from each other, and at about the junctions of the quadrants, designated as 
 " limbs," giving the spectacle a quadrilateral shape. The angles of the quadrangle were about oppo- 
 site the northeastern, northwestern, southeastern and southwestern points of the disk. A banding 
 of the rays, in some respects similar, has been noted as seen at the total eclipse of July 18, 1860. 
 There was no motion of the rays; they seemed concentric. These discrete rays were not visible to 
 me, or did not attract my attention with the telescope, and the diffused rose-colored light seemed 
 to resolve itself in the field of the glass into the prominences. The field of the glass, with the whole 
 disk in view, did not extend far beyond the prominences. My impression at the time was that the 
 appearance of rays was due to some optical effect. The sight presented to the unaided eye was the 
 superior in beauty; that through the glass in interest. This was so markedly the case that there 
 was a sense of disappointment, on resorting to the telescope, at finding the size and beauty of the 
 spectacle, as seen by the naked eye, so much reduced by the definition of the glass. 
 
 The approach of the moon's shadow did not appear to be marked by any defined line, or the 
 movement of any dark column of shade through the air. The darkness fell gradually, shrouding 
 the mountain ranges and the dim world below in most impressive gloom. Our guides had been 
 instructed to watch for the shadow as described, and to call to us at the glasses. They saw nothing 
 of which to give notice. At the same time, and in vivid contrast, the clouds above the horizon 
 were illuminated with a soft radiance; those towards the east with lights like those of a coming 
 dawn, orange and rose prevailing; those northward and westward, as described to us by Mr. 
 Charles Coale, of Abingdon, Virginia, who was present, with rainbow bands of light of varied hues. 
 I quote, in his words, a description written by him, as of interest, in reference to the dispersion of 
 light: " But the grandest of all to us, who had no astronomical ambition or astronomical knowledge 
 to gratify, was the effect upon the clouds during the total obscuration. Those who have had the 
 privilege of being upon White Top, and enjoying the westward scene, will remember the grand 
 panoramic view of mountains beginning on the northern and southern horizon, and stretching away 
 to the west till they seem to meet, will appreciate the scene that we now attempt to describe. 
 Stretching along this semi-circle of mountains, in long horizontal lines, far below the sun, lay light 
 and fleecy clouds as if resting upon their wings during the seeming struggle between the orbs above 
 them. At the moment of the falling of the dark shadow, when naught was to be seen above but 
 the stars and the circle of light around the moon, these clouds became arrayed in all colors of the 
 rainbow, presenting an indescribable richness, with their background of somber mountain. To our 
 vision it was as if bands of broad ribbon of every conceivable hue had been stretched in parallel 
 lines half round the universe/' Our faces were not turned toward these, and we did not see them. 
 No rainbow hues were seen before or after the eclipse. 
 
 A very cursory examination only could be given the stars and planets visible during the totality, 
 as in a clear twilight at evening. Venus and Mercury, near the apparent place of the sun, exhib- 
 ited an unexpected brilliancy. Colonel Wiuthrop was impressed with the number of stars visible 
 
196 REPORT OF BREVET BRIG. GENERAL ALBERT J. MYER. 
 
 here and elsewhere in the heavens, and not confined to those of the first magnitude only, as by far 
 greater than he had been led to anticipate by descriptions of previous eclipses. 
 
 The fall of the temperature, already low at our elevation, was marked as the obscuration 
 approached and reached totality. Our horses continued to feed quietly during the increasing dark 
 ness, as at an approaching sunset. 
 
 At the moment of emersion the first rays of the sun showed themselves at several detached 
 points on its western limb, forming again the Baily's Beads, which united in a delicate crescent. 
 
 It was a striking circumstance connected with the whole phenomenon that so many of its 
 details could be observed with the unaided eye. In this manner our guides saw very readily Bai- 
 ly's Beads, exclaiming that the sun was "breaking to pieces," and could distinguish without diffi- 
 culty some of the protuberances. Much was no doubt due to the clearness of the atmosphere at so 
 great an elevation. White Top Mountain has been measured by Professor Guyot, of JYinceton 
 College, and found to be five thousand five hundred and thirty (5,530) feet above the level of the 
 sea. He states it to be the highest mountain in Virginia, unless possibly its neighbor, Balsoni 
 Mountain, which, however, is wooded to the summit, and would have been unstated to our purpose. 
 
 If any interest can be attached to this informal narration, it will be because our party was one of 
 the very few, possibly the only one, that observed successfully from a mountain top so elevated. It is 
 to be regretted that the position was not occupied by observers better equipped and better qualified. 
 I am, Commodore, very respectfully, your obedient servant, 
 
 ALBERT ,1. MYER, 
 Brevet Brigadier General and Chief /Signal Officer of the Ann;/. 
 
 Commodore B. F. SANDS, U. S. N., 
 
 Superintendent United States Naval Observatory, Washington, D. C. 
 
 OFFICE OF THE CHIEF SIGNAL OFFICER, 
 
 Washington, D. C., December 4, 1869. 
 
 COMMODORE: I have the honor to transmit to you an extract from a letter just received from 
 Mr. Charles B. Coale, of Abingdou, Virginia, in reply to a communication in which I requested 
 more specific information in regard to the "rainbow hues" observed by him during the total eclipse 
 of August 7, 1869, and to which reference was made in my report. 
 
 I am, Commodore, very respectfully, your obedient servant, 
 
 ALBERT J. MYER, 
 
 Brevet Brigadier General and Chief Signal Officer of the Army. 
 Commodore B. F. SANDS, U. S. N., 
 
 Superintendent U. S. Naval Observatory, Washington, 1). C. 
 
 ABINGDON, VIRGINIA, November 24, 1869. 
 
 DEAR GENERAL : I have been absent from home seven weeks. 
 
 In giving to the clouds "all the colors of the rainbow," I was probably bordering on the 
 extravagant, though not more so than is allowable in country journalism. I distinctly remember, 
 however, that there were distinct bands of pink, purple, yellow, orange, and fiery red, and each 
 slightly tinged with different shades of its own color. One of the bands, I remember, had, to my 
 vision, a slight lilac tinge. I do not remember to have observed any green or blue, but 1 do 
 remember that the lower edge of the purple had a very faint blue tinge. All these resting against 
 a dark background gave them an indescribably gorgeous appearance the lines of color seeming to 
 be divided by strips of black. They all lay in horizontal lines, one above the other. My impression 
 is that these colors appeared at the moment the shadow passed from the lower edge of the sun, 
 though I am not positive. 
 
 Having no astronomical knowledge or aspirations, and no instrument, my whole attention was 
 directed to the clouds, and my whole soul absorbed in their indescribable grandeur. * 
 
 Yours, very respectfully, CHS. B. COALE. 
 
 General ALBERT J. MYER, TJ. S. A., Washington, D. C. 
 
REPORT 
 
 PROFESSOE ASAPH HALL, TJ. S. N, 
 
REPORT OF PROFESSOR ASAPH HALL, U. S. 
 
 UNITED STATES NAVAL OBSERVATORY, 
 
 Washington, December 7, 1869. 
 
 SIR: In accordance with thft order of the honorable Secretary of the Navy, dated May 3, 1869, 
 I proceeded to New York, and having been joined there by Mr. Joseph A. Rogers, we took passage 
 for San Francisco on the steamship of the 21st of May. At the request of Paymaster Eldridge, 
 United States Navy, the officers of the Pacific Mail Steamship Company and of the Panama rail- 
 road gave me letters of introduction to Captain Conner and to Captain Parker, of the steamships 
 Henry Channcey and Colorado, and to the agents of the companies on the isthmus. To all these 
 gentlemen we are indebted for good accommodations for the transportation of our chronometers 
 and instruments and for a safe and pleasant journey. We reached San Francisco June 12, and the 
 same day reported to Admiral Craven, at Mare Island navy yard. To Admiral Craven and the 
 officers of the navy yard, and particularly to Captain Phelps, we are indebted for every assistance 
 they could render us. 
 
 Lieutenant Commander B. C. Merrhnan, in charge of the Navigation Office, furnished us with 
 seven chronometers, a chronometer-case, and a barometer, for the expedition. After making obser- 
 vations at Mare Island to determine the errors and approximate rates of the chronometers, on June 
 21 we went on board the United States steamer Mohican, Captain S. It. Franklin commanding, then 
 lying in the harbor of San Francisco. We spent June 23 and 24 in making magnetic observations 
 on the Island Ycrha Buena, and on June 29 the Mohican sailed for Plover Bay. This bay is 011 the 
 northeastern coast of Siberia, in north latitude 64 20', and in longitude 6 1 ' 2o m west of Washington. 
 The following reasons led to the selection of this place for observing the eclipse: the computed line 
 of central eclipse passed only six or eight miles off the coast; an excellent harbor, easy of access, 
 furnishes a secure anchorage for all kinds of vessels; and, from all the information I could obtain, 
 the chance of having good weather is better there than on the American coast, and as good as at 
 any point in those regions, near the line of central eclipse, that the short time remaining for the 
 voyage would permit us to reach. Mr. William H. Ball, of the Smithsonian Institution, furnished 
 me witli a map of Plover Bay and information concerning the natives of the country. We reached 
 Plover Bay July 30, the vessel stopping on the way at Nanaimo, Vancouver Island, and at Una- 
 laska. The next day Mr. Rogers and I ascended the mountains on the east side of the bay, hoping 
 to find a suitable place for our observatory, but considering the difficulty and danger of carrying 
 the instruments up and down the steep mountain trails and the necessity of frequently comparing 
 the chronometers on the ship, we decided to locate our observatory on the sand spit at the lower 
 anchorage. This enabled us immediately to begin observations for time and latitude, and to finish 
 our magnetic observations before the day of the eclipse. On August 1 Mr. Carter, the carpenter 
 of the Mohican, put up our observatory on the sand spit, and our instruments and bedding were 
 transferred from the ship in Emma Harbor to the observatory, a distance of about six miles. On 
 unpacking the instruments we found them in good order, not one having been broken or injured on 
 the voyage. 
 
 We left Plover Bay at midnight, August 7, and reached San Francisco September 21, stopping, 
 on our return, at Esquimalt, Vancouver Island. 
 
 To Captain S. R. Franklin, United States Navy, and to the officers and men of the Mohican, we 
 are indebted for the successful termination of this long and difficult voyage, and we offer them our 
 hearty thanks for their uniform kindness to us. 
 
200 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HALL. 
 
 THE ECLIPSE. 
 
 The subjoined sketch of the country around Plover Bay shows the positions of our observing 
 
 stations and of the ship in Emma 
 Harbor. We thought it best to 
 observe the eclipse from different 
 stations, hoping that, in case of 
 cloudy weather, some of the ob- 
 servers might in this way obtain 
 observations. In order to ascer- 
 tain if it were practicable to take 
 instruments to the top of the 
 mountains near the coast, on Au- 
 gust 5 Mr. Eogers, accompanied 
 by Mr. liichard Baker, made an 
 excursion from the ship down the 
 valley to Lake Moore. They as- 
 cended Bald Head and went down 
 the west side of the mountain to 
 Plover Bay. I am indebted to 
 Captain P. S. Itedfield, of the 
 whaling brig Victoria, of San 
 Francisco, who furnished me with 
 a five-oared whale-boat, a crew of 
 five Indians, and Mr. W. E. AVhite 
 as boat-steerer. On the evening 
 of August 6 I went in this boat to 
 the Indian village on East Head, 
 remained there over night, and in 
 the morning ascended Bald Head, accompanied by Mr. White and ten Indians, who carried the 
 instruments. This mountain is the second peak from the sea, and is very nearly in the meridian 
 of our observatory on the sand spit, and about three miles south of the observatory. 
 
 During the night of August the sky was perfectly clear, and a cool wind from the north 
 promised a continuance of good weather. About an hour before the beginning of the eclipse low 
 cumulus clouds drifted rapidly from the west over the sky. As the clouds passed toward the east 
 the partial eclipse was occasionally seen through the openings. On the approach of the total 
 eclipse everything became hushed and still: the sea-birds stopped their Mights and the Indians 
 huddled together in awe. As the shadow passed over the mountain the effect was startling. In 
 the stillness and darkness of the moment it seemed as though all life had been swept from the 
 earth. The fearful gloom of total eclipse was increased by the desolate appearance of the country, 
 without tree or shrub, or anything pleasant to the eye. Near the horizon a belt of clear sky, fifteen 
 or twenty degrees in altitude, became of a ruddy color, like the evening sky after sunset in autumn. 
 At the same time the lower portions of the clouds toward the north and east were of a dull white 
 or ashy appearance. I could see nothing of the protuberances, and had only at times an indistinct 
 view of the corona. During the totality I was able to read the face of my chronometer without the 
 aid of the lamp. The clouds were apparently denser toward the sea-coast, and prevented me from 
 obtaining accurate observations of the times of contacts. Within an hour after the end of the 
 eclipse the clouds had entirely. disappeared, and all that long afternoon the sky was cloudless. 
 The times that I observed are the following: 
 
 /;. in. a. 
 
 Beginning of total eclipse 4 5 uncertain, 
 
 End of total eclipse 49 very doubtful, 
 
 with pocket chronometer Dent 7986. 
 the power employed was 42. 
 
 The telescope used by me has an aperture of 3 inches, and 
 
1869. 201 
 
 The following are the accounts of Mr. Eogers and Mr. Very, who observed on the sand spit in 
 Plover Bay : 
 
 DESCRIPTION OF THE ECLIPSE BY MR. ROGERS. 
 
 "The night before the eclipse was perfectly clear, and I continued to make observations for 
 time during the whole of the short period in which stars were visible with the small telescope of 
 the portable transit. An hour or two before the beginning of the eclipse clouds appeared in the 
 northwest, and rising rapidly soon obscured the sun. About this time Mr. S. W. Very, navigator 
 of the Mohican, arrived from the ship, bringing M. T. chronometer Negus 1097, from which the 
 times recorded below were taken. The observations were made at the observatory on the spit, 
 with the telescope loaned by the University of Pennsylvania. The smaller telescope belonging to 
 the United States Naval Observatory, and sidereal chronometer Negus 1276, were used by Mr. 
 Very a few yards distant from my position. 
 
 " At the predicted time of first contact the greater part of the sky was covered with clouds, and 
 the experience of the preceding week gave little reason to hope that they would be soon dispersed. 
 They were not quite continuous, however, nor dense enough to prevent the sun's position from being- 
 pretty plainly indicated even when it was quite invisible. 
 
 " When first seen through one of the openings, the moon's limb had already covered a consider- 
 able portion of its disk. It was several times visible for a few seconds during the partial phase, but 
 some time was necessarily lost in bringing it into the field of the telescope, and I was unable to 
 note the occultation of any of the spots. As the time of total phase approached the light gradu- 
 ally diminished. The sun appeared for an instant through the clouds as a slender wire-like crescent; 
 and a few seconds later its obscuration was evidently complete. Except a slight moaning of the 
 wind at intervals, there was no sound but that of the sea on the beach and the beat of the chro- 
 nometer; and the silence and gloom strongly resembled that which sometimes precedes a thunder- 
 storm. The sky in the southwest above the sea horizon was of a deep orange color, while in all 
 other directions the outlines of the mountains surrounding the bay were just discernible. 
 
 "The darkness was not so intense as I had anticipated ; but there was apparently much less light 
 than the twilight of the preceding midnight. I had taken the precaution to illuminate the face of 
 my chronometer by artificial light, and thought it would not have been possible to distinguish the 
 numerals on the dial without it. The progressive diminution of light appeared to cease at 9 h 17 m 
 30 s ; and at 9 h 20 m s a rapid increase of light began. This interval is less than the duration of 
 total phase, and seems to indicate a very plainly perceptible variation of the illumination during 
 totality; though it may have been partly owing to changes in the density of the clouds. 
 
 " At 9' 1 21 s the clouds parted for a few moments and showed the emerging limb of the sun as 
 
 a narrow crescent. Toward the end of the eclipse it was again 
 visible for a short time, during which I observed the complete 
 emersion of the umbra of a large spot near the eastern limb at 
 10 h 23"' 0".r>. The apparent position of this spot, as seen with 
 the telescope at ll h O m , is shown at S in the annexed diagram. 
 At 10 h 20"' 57 S .5 another glimpse of the disk was obtained, which 
 then presented an unbroken circular outline. 
 
 " The thermometer in the early part of the eclipse had indicated 
 46 Fahrenheit. During total obscuration it fell to 42, and 
 afterward rose gradually to 60 at the end of the eclipse. These 
 temperatures were noted by Mr. R. Barker, captain's clerk of the 
 Mohican. 
 
 , " The clouds which had already begun to disperse soon disap- 
 
 APPEARANCE OF THE SPOT AT 1 1 ' o " peared entirely, and the remainder of the day was clear and warm. 
 
 "JOSEPH A. ROGERS." 
 26* 
 
202 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HALL. 
 
 ME. VERY'S LETTEE. 
 
 " UNITED STATES STEAMER MOHICAN, (third rate,) 
 
 " Off Cape Tchukotski, Siberia, Aiji<xt 8, 1869. 
 
 " SIR : I was unable to make auy accurate observations of the total eclipse of the 7th iustiint. 
 The times of first contact and total phase were lost on account of the clouds, but the time of egress 
 I obtained within two seconds after it occurred. By chronometer Negus 1276, (sidereal,) it was 
 2 h 28 41 s . 
 
 " The following are the comparisons made during the day : 
 " About 5 a. in., before leaving the ship 
 
 " Chronometer Negus 1316, (standard,) 4 h 49 30 8 .0 50 00 8 .0 50 30 s .O (Mean time.) 
 
 " Chronometer Negus 1097, 4 h 50 m 23 8 .5 -50 53 8 .5 51 23 8 .5 (Mean time.) 
 
 " About 8 a. in. before observing 
 
 " Chronometer Negus 1097, 7 h 41 00 8 .0 43 m 30 8 -0 (Mean time.) 
 
 " Chronometer Negus 1276, ll h 43 52 8 .5 46 m 23 8 .0 (Sidereal.) 
 
 " About 11 a. m. after observing 
 
 " Chronometer Negus 1097, 10 h 30 09 S .5 33 m 09 8 .0 (Mean time.) 
 
 " Chronometer Negus 1276, 2 h 33 30 s .O 36 30 s .O (Sidereal.) 
 
 " Very respectfully, 
 
 "SAMUEL W. VEEY, 
 
 "Master and Navigator.'" 
 
 The telescope used by Mr. Very has an aperture of 2| inches. 
 
 I am indebted to Captain Franklin for the following account of the eclipse se'en from the ship 
 in Emma Harbor : 
 
 " UNITED STATES STEAMER MOHICAN, (third rate,) 
 
 " Plover Bay, Siberia, August 7, 1869. 
 
 "DEAR SIR: As you expressed a desire to get all the information possible in connection witli 
 the eclipse of the 7th of August, and wished me to give you the benefit of what came under my 
 observation at the time, it gives me much pleasure to furnish you with a copy of a few notes I 
 then made. 
 
 "The eclipse commenced about 8.40 a. m., local mean time, on the right upper edge of the sun ; 
 and although the weather was cloudy, we were enabled from time to time to get a glimpse of it 
 through the openings in the clouds, and thus mark its course as it advanced. 
 
 " At about 9.45 the darkness became very apparent, and before the sun was entirely obscured 
 the sea birds around us had gone to roost. The darkness came upon us very suddenly, the clouds 
 opposite the sun, from having been a light ashy color, became suddenly black as the blackest storm 
 clouds; those under the sun and in the direction of the Arctic Sea assumed a whitish hue, which 
 might have been produced by the reflection from the snow and ice of that region, while those to 
 seaward took up an orange and yellowish tint. The sea assumed the color of the deepest indigo, 
 and the whole scene, in its effects upon the sky, and sea, and surrounding hills, was sublime beyond 
 anything of which I can convey an idea ; nothing could present to the mind a picture of more 
 utter desolation. There was but one star* visible, owing to the overcast condition of the sky. The 
 flames of the sun were distinctly visible, and three fiery lumps could be observed on the edge of 
 the moon during the totality, resembling molten iron. The darkness, which continued for a few 
 moments, was not complete, and passed away as suddenly as it came, indeed, it seemed to me that 
 the transition from darkness to light was more rapid than that from light to darkness. Soon every 
 thing resumed the appearance it had before the totality, and the eclipse finished at 10 b 27 45 s by 
 standard chronometer. 
 
 " I am, very respectfully, your obedient servant, 
 
 "S. E. FRANKLIN, 
 " Commander United States Navy. 
 
 "Professor ASAPH HALL, United States Navy." 
 
 "Mercury. A. II. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 203 
 
 At the ship, Mr. Inch, chief engineer of the Mohican, and Mr. Wainwright, ensign United 
 States Navy, observed the times of beginning and end of the total eclipse, but unfortunately their 
 notes and comparisons with our chronometer were lost. Their observed duration of totality was 
 3'" s . 
 
 Collecting the times observed and applying the correction of the chronometers, we have the 
 following results : 
 
 Station. 
 
 Phase. 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Obs. Time. 
 
 Corr. Chron. 
 
 Local M. T. 
 
 Notes. 
 
 Obs'r. 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 
 
 Bald Head . . . 
 
 Bog. totality 
 
 Dent 7986 . 
 
 450. 
 
 - 6 21 15. 
 
 21 43 45.0 
 
 Uncertain . 
 
 H. 
 
 Sand Spit . . . 
 
 Beg. totality 
 
 Negus 1097 . 
 
 9 17 30. 
 
 11 32 49. 3 
 
 21 44 40. 7 
 
 Uncertain . 
 
 R. 
 
 Sand Spit . . . 
 
 Spot . . . 
 
 Negus 1097 . 
 
 10 23 fr. 5 
 
 11 32 49. 3 
 
 22 50 11. 5 
 
 Good . . 
 
 R. 
 
 Sand Spit . . . 
 
 . " . 
 
 Negus 1097 . 
 
 10 26 57. 5 
 
 - 11 32 49.3 
 
 22 54 8.2 
 
 . . . . 
 
 E. 
 
 Sand Spit . 
 
 Last contact 
 
 Negus 1276 . 
 
 2 28 41. 
 
 6 30 15. 3 
 
 22 52 32. 
 
 . . . . 
 
 V. 
 
 Ship . . . 
 
 Last contact 
 
 Negus 1316 . 
 
 10 27 45. 
 
 11 30 55.8 
 
 22 56 49.2 
 
 
 F. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Iii making these reductions I have assumed that Bald Head is in the meridian of the observa- 
 tory on the sand spit, and that the ship was one minute east of the observatory. The position of 
 the ship can be found from the triangulation of the bay made by Mr. Yery. 
 
 With regard to the eclipse, I most sincerely regret that we had no means of taking photo- 
 graphs. As the weather happened to be, this was the one thing most needful for us, and I hope 
 that our fortune in this respect may be a warning to future expeditions. 
 
 DETEKMINATION OF TIME, LATITUDE, AND LONGITUDE. 
 
 1. 
 
 The observations for time were made with a small portable transit instrument belonging to the 
 United States Coast Survey, and lent for the occasion by Professor Peirce, the Superintendent. This 
 instrument has an axis thirteen inches in length and an object-glass of 1 T 7 B inch aperture. The 
 magnifying power is 17. On first setting up the instrument we found a large error of collimation, 
 and in attempting to make the adjustment the head of one of the adjusting screws twisted off. To 
 supply the place of the screw a spring was inserted by Mr. Eogers and used throughout the obser- 
 vations. At Mare Island the transit was mounted in the small observatory erected for Captain 
 Brooke in 1859. The stone pier having been displaced, we reset it and bolted a two-inch oak plank 
 carrying the supports of the transit to this pier. The observations were made with the sidereal 
 chronometer Negus 1270, and by the eye and ear method. The instrument was reversed in each 
 series of observations. The level was read as often as once in twenty minutes. Before beginning 
 observations the errors of level and collimation were adjusted, if necessary, and then no further 
 adjustments made during the night. The observations have been reduced in the following manner. 
 The observed time of transit over each of the seven wires was reduced to the middle wire by means 
 of the equatorial intervals, and the corrections for level, daily aberration, and rate of chronometer 
 were applied to the mean of the seven reduced transits. A comparison with the Ephemeris gave an 
 approximate value of the correction of chronometer. A value of this correction was then assumed 
 and equations of condition formed in the usual manner. The solution of these equations gave the 
 azimuth and collimation errors and the final correction of the chronometer. The following are the 
 approximate values of the correction of the chronometer obtained from each star : 
 
204 
 
 EEPOET OF PROFESSOR HALL. 
 MARE ISLAND. 
 
 JUNE 17, 1869 .... Observer, Rogers. 
 
 JUNE 19, 1869 .... Observer, Rogers. 
 
 Star. 
 
 Approx. Corr. 
 
 Wires. 
 
 Circle. 
 
 Star. 
 
 Approx. Corr. 
 
 \Viiv*. 
 
 Circle. 
 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 
 
 
 ft. m. s. 
 
 
 
 Polaris, S. P. . . 
 
 3 4 0.87 
 
 3 
 
 W. 
 
 Polaris, S. P. . . 
 
 3 4 6.06 
 
 2 
 
 E. 
 
 a Virginis . . . 
 
 4 35.95 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 71 Bootis .... 
 
 4 40.81 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 )/ Ursa' Majoris . . 
 
 4 37.39 
 
 5 
 
 HE. 
 
 a Draconis . '. 
 
 4 42.30 
 
 5 
 
 K. 
 
 a Draconis ... 
 
 4 40.85 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 a Bootis * .... 
 
 4 40. 46 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 a Bootis .... 
 
 4 37.53 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 6 Bootis .... 
 
 4 40.39 
 
 3 
 
 E. 
 
 Bootis .... 
 
 4 38.32 
 
 6 
 
 E. 
 
 e Bootis .... 
 
 4 40.08 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 e Bootis .... 
 
 4 37.42 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 /? Ursae Miiioris . 
 
 4 41.73 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 a 2 Librae .... 
 
 4 37.60 
 
 6 
 
 E. 
 
 a 2 Libra? .... 
 
 4 41. 15 
 
 2 
 
 E. 
 
 /3 Ursoe Minoris 
 
 4 41. 49 
 
 5 
 
 E. 
 
 (3 Libra? .... 
 
 4 38.71 
 
 6 
 
 W. 
 
 /3 Librae .... 
 
 4 35.61 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 y 2 Ursa) Minoris . . 
 
 4 39.33 
 
 6 
 
 W. 
 
 y Ursas Minoris . 
 
 4 37.29 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 o Serpeutis . . . 
 
 4 40.10 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 a Coronas Borealis . 
 
 4 36.35 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 
 
 
 
 a Serpentis . . . 
 
 4 36.23 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 
 
 
 
 JUNE 18 ..... Observer, Hall. 
 
 JUNE 20- Obscmr, Hall. 
 
 Polaris, S. P. . . 
 
 34 29.04 
 
 3 
 
 E. 
 
 Polaris, S. P. . . 
 
 3 4 21.84 
 
 2 
 
 W. 
 
 o Virginis ... 
 
 4 39.53 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 a Virgiuis ... 
 
 4 41.25 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 T] Bootis .... 
 
 4 39.26 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 ri Bootis .... 
 
 4 42.97 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 a Draconis . . . 
 
 4 39.51 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 a Draconis . . . 
 
 4 43.44 
 
 2 
 
 W. 
 
 a Bootis .... 
 
 4 39.22 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 a Bootis .... 
 
 4 42.59 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 6 Bootis .... 
 
 4 40.69 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 e Bootis .... 
 
 4 41. 12 
 
 6 
 
 E. 
 
 e Bootis .... 
 
 4 39.48 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 Clouds. 
 
 
 
 
 a* Librae .... 
 
 4 39.50 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 
 
 
 
 /I Ursa? Minoris . . 
 
 4 38.74 
 
 6 
 
 W. 
 
 
 
 
 
 /? Librse .... 
 
 4 38.73 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 
 
 
 
 y 3 Ursa; Miuoris . 
 
 4 37.64 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 
 
 
 
 a Coronas Borealis . 
 
 4 38.52 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 
 
 
 
 a Serpentis . . . 
 
 4 38.31 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 
 
 
 
 SEPTEMBER 28 .... Observer, Hall. 
 
 SEPTEMBER 29 ... Observer, Rogers. 
 
 <5 Draconis 
 
 37 17.70 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 j8 Lyrao .... 
 
 3 7 19.58 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 S Aquilse .... 
 
 7 18.41 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 f Aquila? .... 
 
 7 18.38 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 K Aquilae .... 
 
 7 18.48 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 6 Draconis 
 
 7 16.37 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 y Aquilse .... 
 
 7 18.22 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 S Aquilae .... 
 
 7 19.14 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 a 'Aquilse .... 
 
 7 18.05 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 7 Aquilao .... 
 
 7 20. 47 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 (3 Aquilse .... 
 
 7 18.35 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 a Aquilse .... 
 
 7 20.39 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 v Capricorni . . . 
 
 7 17.29 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 f) Aquila? .... 
 
 7 20.65 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 K Cephei .... 
 
 7 11.45 
 
 1 
 
 E. 
 
 K Cephei .... 
 
 7 15.95 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 a Cygni .... 
 
 7 15.35 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 e Delphini . . . 
 
 7 20. 42 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 It Aquarii .... 
 
 7 17.05 
 
 6 
 
 E. 
 
 
 
 
 
 v Cygni .... 
 
 7 15.94 
 
 5 
 
 E. 
 
 
 
 
 
 At Plover Bay the transit instrument was mounted on a wooden pier filled with sand. A cover 
 for the pier was made of pine boards fastened together with wrought nails, and the o;ik plank was 
 secured to this cover by a bolt. The weather was so unfavorable that no observations could be 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 205 
 
 made before the night of August 5, when the sky suddenly became partially elear. A few obser- 
 vations were made, but before any could be made in the reversed position of the instrument the sky 
 became overcast. On examining the instrument the collimation error was found to be large, and 
 as there was no way of determining it, the observations of the 5th could not be reduced. On the 
 evening of the Oth the instrument was brought nearly into the plane of the meridian, the collima- 
 tion and level errors adjusted, and no further adjustments attempted during the night. The reduc- 
 tions have been made as before, save that here an approximate value of the azimuth correction was 
 determined, and this correction has been applied to the results given below. 
 
 PLOVEli BAY. 
 
 AUGUST 6, 1869 Olwrm; Rogers. 
 
 Star. 
 
 Approx. Corr. 
 
 Wires. 
 
 Circle. 
 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 
 
 y Draconis 
 
 6 30 14.82 
 
 6 
 
 W. 
 
 
 30 14 62 
 
 7 
 
 W 
 
 8 Lvr:i- 
 
 30 14 80 
 
 3 
 
 W 
 
 f AquiliD 
 
 30 13.96 
 
 6 
 
 W. 
 
 
 30 14 76 
 
 5 
 
 W 
 
 a Cy r !ii 
 
 30 14 24 
 
 7 
 
 W 
 
 a Cephei 
 
 30 16. 10 
 
 7 
 
 W. 
 
 
 30 13 99 
 
 6 
 
 E 
 
 a Aquarii 
 
 30 15 02 
 
 7 
 
 E 
 
 C IVjjasi 
 
 30 14. 93 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 a IVgasi 
 
 30 14. 44 
 
 7 
 
 E. 
 
 These observations give the following corrections of the chronometer Negus 1276 : 
 
 Mare Island, June 17, 
 18, 
 19, 
 20, 
 
 Mare Island, Sept. 28, 
 29, 
 
 Plover Bay, Aug. 6, 
 
 Sextant observations for time were made at Plover Bay on August 3d and 4th. These observa- 
 tions have been used only as a control, and I have preferred to depend on the transit observations 
 for time and longitude. The following are the results. The pocket chronometer Dent 7986 was 
 used in all the sextant observations. 
 
 Chron. 
 
 time. 
 
 h. 
 
 m. 
 
 S. 8. 
 
 Observer. 
 
 17>>. 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 37. 
 
 29 0.15 
 
 B. 
 
 17". 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 ' 4 
 
 39. 
 
 140.15 
 
 H. 
 
 17 h . 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 40. 
 
 100. 17 
 
 E. 
 
 17 U . 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 41. 
 
 92 0.20 
 
 H. 
 
 23\ 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 16. 
 
 98 0.05 
 
 H. 
 
 23 h . 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 19. 
 
 12 0.14 
 
 B. 
 
 3\ 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 30 
 
 14. 
 
 59 0.17 
 
 E. 
 
 Date. 
 
 Chron. Time. 
 
 Correction of Chron. 
 
 Interpolated Corr. 
 
 No. Alts. 
 
 Observer. 
 
 
 ft. 
 
 h. m. s. s. 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 
 
 Aug. 3, a. m. 
 
 2.63 
 
 - 6 21 52.3 1.37 
 
 6 21 53.6 
 
 12 
 
 H. 
 
 Aug. 4, a. m. 
 
 2.65 . 
 
 - 6 21 45.7 0.52 
 
 6 21 45.3 
 
 15 
 
 H. 
 
 Aug. 4, p. m. 
 
 8.92 
 
 - 6 21 40.6 1.29 
 
 6 21 41.8 
 
 15 
 
 R. 
 
 Aug. 4, p. m. 
 
 9.70 
 
 - 6 21 40.8 0.56 
 
 6 21 41.1 
 
 16 
 
 R. 
 
 The chronometer Dent 7986 was compared with the sidereal chronometer immediately before and 
 after observing, and" column 4 gives the correction deduced from these comparisons, the correction 
 of the sidereal chronometer having been found by means of its daily rate from the transit observa- 
 tions of August 6. 
 
 If we observe altitudes near the prime vertical, the difficulty of determining the time will increase 
 very nearly as the cosine of the latitude diminishes, and in high latitudes the determination becomes 
 
206 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HALL. 
 
 uncertain. Prom all the observations, 58 altitudes, I find the probable error of the time determined 
 by a single altitude to be 3 8 .40. As an example of our work, I give here the observation of August 
 4, a. in. : 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Double Alt. 
 
 Corr. Chron. 
 
 
 Ti. m. . 
 
 O I II 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 
 1 54 28.4 
 
 48 58 30 
 
 6 27 33. 3 
 
 (1) Index Corr = + 38.7 
 
 56 48.6 
 
 49 27 30 
 
 27 35.2 
 
 
 57 29.5 
 
 49 36 40 
 
 27 32.3 
 
 (2) Index Corr + 33. 8 
 
 Clouds. 
 
 A new series. 
 
 
 
 2 39 2.8 
 
 59 10 50 
 
 27 30.4 
 
 Adopted -f- 36 2 
 
 39 50.4 
 
 59 20 
 
 27 31. 6 
 
 o 
 
 40 19. 
 
 59 26 
 
 27 30.2 
 
 Thermometer . . . . 52. 5 
 
 40 58.8 
 
 58 30 40 
 
 27 40.0 
 
 Barometer 29 61 
 
 41 43.0 
 
 58 40 
 
 27 27.0 
 
 A. Thermometer . . . 52. 2 
 
 42 17. 6 
 
 58 46 10 
 
 27 30. 4 
 
 
 43 32.0 
 
 59 30 
 
 27 32.8 
 
 Reversed horizon. 
 
 44 23.2 
 
 59 11 10 
 
 27 29.0 
 
 
 44 58.5 
 
 59 17 50 
 
 27 30.5 
 
 
 46 0.5 
 
 60 32 40 
 
 27 32.9 
 
 
 46 40.8 
 
 60 41 
 
 27 30.8 
 
 
 47 20.8 
 
 60 48 40 
 
 27 31.5 
 
 
 
 Mean = 
 
 6 27 31. 86 
 
 
 2. 
 
 The observations for latitude were made with the Pistor & Martins patent sextant, No. 107. 
 This sextant belongs to the Naval Academy, and was procured for us by Professor Coffin. As both 
 of the observers were inexperienced in the use of a sextant, and being desirous to know the quality 
 of the work done by such an instrument in su<5h hands, I have computed the latitude from each 
 observed altitude. The observations were made in sets of twelve and sixteen altitudes, taken when 
 the sun was near the meridian. They were made symmetrical with respect to the limbs of the sun 
 and the cover of the horizon, although interruptions by clouds sometimes prevented this from being 
 done completely. 
 
 August 3. Observer, Rogers. August 3. Observer, Rogers. 
 
 23 47 
 
 21 59 
 
 22 23 
 22 30 
 22 23 
 22 26 
 22 30 
 22 18 
 22 20 
 22 24 
 22 25 
 22 16 
 22 28 
 22 18 
 22 24 
 22 24 
 
 = +64 22 14 
 22 17 
 22 27 
 22 20 
 22 20 
 22 23 
 22 22 
 22 17 
 22 19 
 22 28 
 22 10 
 22 35 
 22 4 
 22 47 
 clouds 
 
 64 22 22 1". 3 
 
 64 22 22 1". 9 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 207 
 
 I have rejected the first altitude measured in which there appears to be an error in reading the 
 chronometer or sextant. The probable error of the latitude from a single altitude is 6".l. 
 
 August 4. Observer, Hall. August 5. Observer, Hall. August 5, Observer, Hall. 
 
 o i if o / n o i ii 
 
 <f = +61 22 40 <f= +64 22 14 <p = +64 22 41 
 
 22 30 22 35 22 29 
 
 22 3 22 37 22 29 
 
 22 27 22 27 22 33 
 
 22 36 22 9 22 25 
 
 22 38 22 32 22 11 
 
 22 46 22 37 22 20. 
 
 22 40 22 31 21 55 
 
 22 26 22 20 22 5 
 
 22 27 22 28 22 1 
 
 22 39 22 38 22 24 
 
 22 50 22 21 22 21 
 22 18 
 22 38 
 22 20 
 22 39 
 22 32 
 
 64 22 33 1".9 64 22 27 1".9 64 22 20 2".7 
 
 The probable error of the latitude from a single altitude is 7".8. 
 
 Taking the mean of the several results without regard to the probable errors, the latitude given 
 by the sextant is <? = + 04 22' 25". 
 
 3. 
 
 For the determination of longitude ten chronometers were used. A box was fastened to the 
 floor of the ship's cabin, and in this the case for the chronometers was securely fixed. The chro- 
 nometers were wound and compared daily at about 9 o'clock a. m., and the temperature of the 
 box was observed generally three times a day, at 9Ja. m., 2J p. m., and at 9 p. m. The temper- 
 ature to which the chronometers were exposed was quite uniform, and until September 21 the 
 extremes of the observed temperatures are 44 and 64. After our return and while lying in the 
 harbor of San Francisco, the temperature rose to 75, anil this increase appeared to produce small 
 changes in the rates of some of the chronometers, but these changes are so small and occur so near 
 the end of the voyage that they will not, I think, seriously affect the determination of longitude. 
 The ship's 9-inch gun's and 24-pound howitzers were fired a few times on July C, and all of her 
 guns were fired repeatedly September 20. The firing of July 6 produced no change of rate that 
 could be detected, and neither did that of September 20, unless the small changes spoken of above 
 and ascribed to an increase of temperature were produced in this way. 
 
 Two excellent chronometers were furnished us by the Messrs. Negus, of New York, Nos. 1097 
 and 1316, of their own make, and No. 1316 was chosen as our standard chronometer with which the 
 others were compared. At Mare Island, through the kindness of Lieutenant Commander Merriman, 
 we procured seven additional chronometers. In the daily comparison the chronometers were com- 
 pared in the order in which they are placed below, beginning with Negus 1276, and ending with 
 Negus 1298, the interval between the comparison of two chronometers being one minute. As the 
 sidereal chronometer Negus 1276 was taken out of the ship for the purpose of observing, the times 
 of comparison are not so uniform with it as with the others. 
 
 The chronometers were Negus 1316 Negus 1097 Negus 599 Negus 1287 Negus 1317 
 
 Negus 1276 Dent 2118 Negus 772 Desilva 694 Negus 1298 
 
208 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HALL. 
 
 I 
 
 _fl 
 
 I 
 
 u 
 
 bo 
 
 a 
 "S 
 
 as 
 1 
 
 TH 
 
 I 
 a 
 
 o 
 a 
 o 
 
 rH 
 
 I 
 
 So 
 
 02 
 
 r? 
 
 I 
 
 PH 
 
 a 
 
 O 
 
 -r=> 
 
 3 
 
 a; 
 
 a 
 I 
 
 cs to 
 
 . 
 
 s a* 
 o a 
 
 , 
 
 8 
 
 rH 
 CO 
 
 r 
 
 i 
 
 s 
 
 S 
 
 S 
 
 r: 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 -T 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 in 
 
 S 
 
 ~- 
 
 Ml 
 
 to 
 
 S 
 
 rr. 
 
 s 
 
 S 
 
 to 
 
 fe to 
 
 rH 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 ^. 
 
 -r 
 
 -r 
 
 r- 
 
 m 
 
 ^ 
 
 to 
 
 TH 
 
 rH 
 
 o 
 
 to 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 OS 
 
 13 
 
 " ?? 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 s 
 
 
 SB 
 
 
 4r 
 
 -C 
 
 o 
 
 -* 
 
 m 
 
 S 
 
 rH 
 
 in 
 
 00 
 
 O 
 H 
 
 7) 
 rH 
 
 T-t 
 
 O3 
 
 7) 
 
 to 
 
 IN 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 t. 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 TH 
 
 GO 
 
 * 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 O 
 
 99 
 
 CO 
 
 t 
 
 cn 
 
 rH 
 
 JDent 2118 
 of 1316 
 
 S co 
 
 r IN 
 
 7' 
 
 3 
 
 -r 
 1C 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 1C 
 
 ,-: 
 
 -T 
 
 *r 
 
 s 
 fc 
 
 ~ 
 
 _ 
 
 -r 
 in 
 
 S 
 
 CD 
 rH 
 
 - 
 
 -r 
 
 E 
 
 o 
 
 -T 
 
 -T 
 
 
 J 
 
 <N 
 
 m 
 
 CO 
 
 -T 
 
 ; 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 to 
 to 
 
 S3S 
 
 to 
 
 IN 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 rH 
 
 o 
 
 I, 
 
 -r 
 
 -r 
 
 I- 
 
 CO 
 
 1C 
 
 te 
 
 O5 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 as 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 n 
 
 || 
 
 CO 
 
 S co 
 
 a 
 
 00 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 71 
 S 
 
 
 
 9? 
 
 9? 
 
 CN 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 g 
 
 7) 
 
 oo 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 rH 
 
 Si 
 
 71 
 
 
 in 
 
 7) 
 
 M 
 
 r: 
 
 -T 
 
 -r 
 
 
 
 T~ 
 
 m 
 
 rf 
 
 -r 
 
 T 
 
 1C 
 
 CO 
 
 ^=2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 gs 
 
 ^ 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 <jl 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 m 
 
 CM 
 
 _ 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 O 
 
 1C 
 
 to 
 
 CO 
 
 I, 
 
 00 
 
 OS 
 
 
 * in 
 
 -r 
 
 " 
 
 rH 
 
 H 
 
 9) 
 
 in 
 
 O( 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 r. 
 
 t 
 
 7> 
 
 
 00 
 
 S_t 
 
 17 
 
 CO 
 
 ~ 
 
 d 
 
 to 
 
 
 _. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 S ^ 
 
 8 
 
 7! 
 
 7'' 
 
 s 
 
 *} 
 
 SI 
 
 *} 
 
 c* 
 
 71 
 
 ri 
 
 7) 
 
 71 
 
 71 
 
 7.' 
 
 7) 
 
 71 
 
 <N 
 
 
 
 <N 
 
 
 
 feS 
 
 rH 
 
 rH 
 
 00 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 t. 
 
 to 
 
 t. 
 
 TH 
 
 00 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 <N 
 
 m 
 
 O 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 * 
 
 O 
 
 C3 
 
 TH TH 
 
 ^ 
 
 " S 
 
 S rH 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 00 
 
 rH 
 3> 
 
 7=, 
 99 
 
 fe 
 
 Oi 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 ?' 
 
 
 -T 
 
 00 
 
 CO 
 
 | 
 
 O 
 rH 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 -r 
 
 
 rH 
 
 H 
 
 y? 
 
 
 .7 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 '- 
 
 b 
 
 II 
 
 rS '"' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^53 
 
 US 
 
 to 
 
 00 
 
 (N 
 
 r. 
 
 0> 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 OS 
 
 (N 
 
 00 
 
 C 
 
 O 
 
 00 
 
 O> 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 00 
 
 CO 
 
 CjrH 
 
 in 
 
 IH 
 
 l> 
 
 t* 
 
 - 
 
 -r 
 
 00 
 
 7> 
 
 77 
 
 ffj 
 
 ~ 
 
 OS 
 
 C7 
 
 / 
 
 7> 
 
 -C 
 
 r 
 
 ^ 
 
 7t 
 
 00 
 
 00 
 
 S o 
 
 p* ^* 
 
 -r 
 
 -* 
 
 g 
 
 
 m 
 
 17 
 
 -T 
 
 g 
 
 --i 
 
 te 
 
 g 
 
 I- 
 
 ^ 
 
 i- 
 
 t* 
 
 j. 
 
 / 
 
 X 
 
 / 
 
 OS 
 
 ft I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 rH 
 
 IN 
 
 c* 
 
 <N 
 
 c-. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 CD 
 
 ~ 
 
 CO 
 
 m 
 
 (N 
 
 00 
 
 O 
 
 (N 
 
 o 
 
 = 
 
 CO 
 
 O5 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 TH TH 
 
 CO ' 
 
 ti 
 
 * 
 
 S' m 
 (N 
 
 -r 
 
 m 
 
 -.0 
 
 rH 
 
 S 
 
 IN 
 
 ' 
 
 S 
 
 if. 
 
 - 
 
 rH 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 2 
 
 CO 
 
 i? 
 
 CO 
 
 
 <N 
 
 $ 
 
 S 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 1C 
 
 op 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 w 
 
 IN 
 
 CO 
 
 I 
 
 o co 
 
 00 
 
 in 
 
 09 
 
 CO 
 
 in 
 
 rH 
 
 00 
 
 00 
 
 CO 
 
 TH 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 TH 
 
 <N 
 
 a 
 
 CO 
 
 m 
 
 OS 
 
 
 
 11 TH 
 
 O OS 
 
 m 
 
 SS rH 
 
 17 
 
 IN 
 
 17 
 IN 
 
 ^ 
 
 CO 
 
 Si 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 -t. 
 
 1 
 
 CO 
 
 m 
 m 
 
 ' 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 to 
 -r 
 
 m 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 TH 
 
 to 
 
 C7 
 
 to 
 
 s 
 
 IB 
 
 s 
 
 rH 
 
 I- 
 
 s? 
 
 
 1 
 IN 
 
 to 
 in 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 ~ 
 -r 
 CO 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 -r 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 00 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 i 
 
 00 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 Is 
 
 TH 
 
 s 
 
 1-3 
 
 -7 
 
 M 
 
 s 
 
 -T 
 r-l 
 
 5 
 
 1-5 
 
 X 
 
 CO 
 rH 
 
 00 
 rH 
 
 V 
 
 00 
 IN 
 
 (N 
 
 ii 
 
 
 7> 
 
 r. 
 
 rH 
 
 S 
 
 E5 
 
 rH 
 
 t 
 <2 
 
 
 T 1 
 
 T 
 
 -; 
 
 
 (N 
 
 , 
 
 coco 
 
 *^ 
 
 OS 
 
 to 
 
 in 
 
 (M 
 
 IN 
 
 
 
 1C 
 
 * 
 
 m 
 
 rH 
 
 o 
 
 IN 
 
 01 
 
 ^- 
 
 OS 
 
 m 
 
 t- 
 
 t> 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 rH rH 
 OJ<H 
 
 " in 
 g 9 
 -a 
 
 m 
 
 rH 
 
 % 
 
 rH 
 
 00 
 
 m 
 
 rH 
 
 09 
 
 "T 
 
 CO 
 (N 
 
 CO 
 71 
 
 (N 
 
 -r 
 
 in 
 
 CO 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 IN 
 
 CO 
 
 .7 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 77 
 <N 
 
 '.'. 
 
 ^T 
 CO 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 CO 
 
 m 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 M 
 
 CD 
 
 (N 
 
 CO 
 
 -r 
 to 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 00 
 
 1 
 
 CO 
 
 1 
 
 | 
 
 1 
 
 | 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 ^7 
 
 K 
 
 ^-~ 
 99 
 
 -r 
 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 9 
 
 i 
 
 7 
 
 s 
 
 e 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 -f 
 
 -* 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 TH 
 9 
 
 S 
 
 1-3 
 
 S 
 
 01 
 
 | 
 
 00 
 
 '.-. 
 
 /. 
 
 i~ 
 
 S 
 
 ir. 
 
 3 
 
 
 7> 
 
 T 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 02 
 
 to 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 " 
 
 s 
 
OBSERVATIONS OP THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 209 
 
 In the preceding- table the first column of dates gives the times of the comparisons of the sidereal 
 chronometer Negus 1276, the second column the times of the comparisons of Negus 1298. 
 
 I have now assumed a constant rate for each chronometer, and with these rates have computed 
 for each date the difference between the standard chronometer and each of the chronometers. 
 Subtracting the observed difference from the computed, I find a series of residuals, the mean of 
 which for each date is assumed to be the correction of the standard chronometer. Subtracting the 
 correction of the standard chronometer from the first residuals, we have the following table : 
 
 Negus 
 1276. 
 
 Negus 
 1097. 
 
 Dent 
 2118. 
 
 Negus 
 
 599. 
 
 Negus 
 772. 
 
 Negus 
 1287. 
 
 Desilva 
 694. 
 
 Negus 
 1317. 
 
 Negus 
 1298. 
 
 Negus 
 1316. 
 
 8. 
 
 8. 
 
 s. 
 
 a. 
 
 8. 
 
 8. 
 
 8. 
 
 8. 
 
 8. 
 
 8. 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 + 0.9 
 
 + 3.3 
 
 1.3 
 
 + 4.1 
 
 1.5 
 
 + 0.8 
 
 3.2 
 
 2.8 
 
 0.3 
 
 0.2 
 
 0.2 
 
 + 5.2 
 
 - 2.4 
 
 + 8.2 
 
 3.6 
 
 0.3 
 
 6.1 
 
 + 0.7 
 
 - 1.7 
 
 1.3 
 
 1.5 
 
 + 5.7 
 
 2.9 
 
 + 10.2 
 
 - 4.9 
 
 1.0 
 
 9.3 
 
 + 5.3 
 
 1.8 
 
 1.5 
 
 0.8 
 
 + 7.1 
 
 - 2.6 
 
 + 11.9 
 
 5.4 
 
 0.8 
 
 9.6 
 
 + 2.1 
 
 1.5 
 
 0.8 
 
 - 0.1 
 
 + 9.0 
 
 3.2 
 
 + 12.2 
 
 5.7 
 
 0.2 
 
 9.6 
 
 0.8 
 
 - 1.3 
 
 - 0.4 
 
 + 0.6 
 
 + 10.3 
 
 2.3 
 
 + 8.3 
 
 3.5 
 
 + 0.8 
 
 6.6 
 
 - 6.6 
 
 1.1 
 
 + 0.9 
 
 + 1.4 
 
 + 10.0 
 
 - 2.0 
 
 + 5.4 
 
 0.6 
 
 0.6 
 
 - 4.5 
 
 - 9.7 
 
 0.2 
 
 + 2.3 
 
 + 0.5 
 
 + 9.7 
 
 2.2 
 
 + 4.9 
 
 + 0.6 
 
 + 0.1 
 
 1.9 
 
 10.8 
 
 0.7 
 
 + 2.0 
 
 1.0 
 
 + 8.9 
 
 1.9 
 
 + 0.1 
 
 + 1.8 
 
 0.3 
 
 + 3.5 
 
 - 11.5 
 
 1.2 
 
 + 2.4 
 
 + 1.6 
 
 + 6.9 
 
 1.5 
 
 1.7 
 
 + 3.5 
 
 0.5 
 
 + 5.2 
 
 - 11.0 
 
 0.9 
 
 + 1.2 
 
 + 1.2 
 
 + 5.9 
 
 0.8 
 
 3.7 
 
 + 4.4 
 
 1.6 
 
 + 5.8 
 
 9.0 
 
 2.5 
 
 + 1.2 
 
 + 0.6 
 
 + 5.5 
 
 1.7 
 
 6.6 
 
 + 5.6 
 
 1.3 
 
 + 5.8 
 
 5.3 
 
 3.0 
 
 + 1.3 
 
 + 1.0 
 
 + 4.3 
 
 1.5 
 
 - 9.4 
 
 + 7.1 
 
 + 0.1 
 
 + 6.4 
 
 - 6.4 
 
 - 1.8 
 
 + 2.4 
 
 0.3 
 
 + . r >. :i 
 
 + 0.5 
 
 11.7 
 
 + 7.3 
 
 + 1.6 
 
 + 8.6 
 
 - 11.0 
 
 0.2 
 
 + 3.2 
 
 + 1.4 
 
 + 5.3 
 
 + 1.1 
 
 - 10.9 
 
 + 5.5 
 
 + 1.3 
 
 + 8.6 
 
 - 12.6 
 
 + 0.2 
 
 + 2.5 
 
 + 0.9 
 
 + 5.1 
 
 + 1.8 
 
 - 10.2 
 
 + 3.2 
 
 + 1.3 
 
 + 7.2 
 
 9.2 
 
 0.0 
 
 + 1.6 
 
 + 0.5 
 
 + 4.0 
 
 + 0.7 
 
 5.4 
 
 + 1.9 
 
 + 1.0 
 
 + 5.2 
 
 - 7.5 
 
 0.6 
 
 + 0.4 
 
 + 0.7 
 
 + 3.6 
 
 + 0.3 
 
 - 10.4 
 
 + 4.3 
 
 + 0.7 
 
 + 4.4 
 
 3.5 
 
 + 0.2 
 
 + 1.7 
 
 + 1.0 
 
 + 1.7 
 
 0.3 
 
 - 10.4 
 
 + 4.0 
 
 + 0.4 
 
 + 3.4 
 
 0.5 
 
 + 0.4 
 
 + 1.9 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 In order to determine the relative values of the longitudes given by the chronometers, it is 
 necessary to banish from these residuals all law of sign. Without attempting to do this rigorously, 
 or to introduce a coefficient depending directly on the temperature, it is sufficient for our purpose 
 to assume a simple function of the time. If, therefore, the whole interval of time be represented 
 by a semi-circle, I find the following expressions for the rates: 
 
 Negus 1316, daily rate 
 Negus 1276, daily rate 
 Negus 1097, daily rate 
 Dent 2118, daily rate 
 Negus 599, daily rate 
 Negus 772, daily rate 
 Negus 1287, daily rate 
 Desilva 694, daily rate 
 Negus 1317, daily rate 
 Negus 1298, daily rate 
 
 The probable errors are those of a single 
 
 27* 
 
 = 1.178 1.4 sin t 0.8 
 = +1.554 0.7 
 
 = _o.641 7.2 sin t 1.4 
 = +7.337+ 1.5 sin t 1.0 
 = +3.49211.6 sin 2 t 1.8 
 = 0.691+ 5.0 sin 2 t =t 1.7 
 = +5.062 0.6 
 
 = +1.746+ 9.0 sin 2 t 2.1 
 = +8.078+ 9.0 sin t 3.0 
 = +2.297+ 1.9 sin t 0.7 
 
 interpolated value. 
 
210 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HALL. 
 
 From the observations and comparisons at Mitre Island we have the following corrections of 
 the standard chronometer Negus 1316 : 
 
 It. m. s. Observer. 
 
 June 17.78C6 8 835.76 E. 
 
 18. 7689 35. 22 H. 
 
 19. 7735 33. 86 E. 
 
 20. 7189 32. 96 H. 
 
 Mean, June 
 
 September 
 
 19.2620 8 8 3445 
 
 28.6456 8 6 34.48 
 29.6336 34.31 
 
 H. 
 
 E. 
 
 Mean, September 29.1396 8 634.40 
 
 By means of the comparisons of the chronometers and the above values of the rates, we have 
 the following corrections on local time, and the values of the longitude of Plover Bay referred to 
 Mare Island : 
 
 Chronom- 
 eter. 
 
 Mare Island, 
 June 19. 2646. 
 
 Reduction for 
 rate. 
 
 Mare Island, 
 August 7. 9851. 
 
 Plover Bay, 
 August 7. 98)1. 
 
 Longitude. 
 
 
 Ti. m. s. 
 
 m. s. 
 
 Ik. m. s. 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 It. m. s. 
 
 1316 
 
 8 8 34. 4 
 
 + 1 0.0 
 
 8 7 34.4 
 
 11 31 55.7 
 
 + 3 24 21. 3 
 
 1276 
 
 3 4 39.7 
 
 1 17.3 
 
 3 5 57.0 
 
 6 30 16. 1 
 
 24 19.1 
 
 1097 
 
 8 9 7. 6 
 
 + 39. 1 
 
 8 8 28. 5 
 
 11 32 49. 8 
 
 24 21. 3 
 
 2118 
 
 10 41 8. 
 
 6 6.3 
 
 - 10 47 14. 3 
 
 14 11 35.3 
 
 24 21. 
 
 599 
 
 8 46 18. 1 
 
 2 53.6 
 
 8 49 11.7 
 
 12 13 34.4 
 
 24 22. 7 
 
 772 
 
 7 46 18.7 
 
 + 34. 4 
 
 7 45 44.3 
 
 11 10 6.5 
 
 24 22.2 
 
 1287 
 
 9 26 2. 6 
 
 4 11.7 
 
 9 30 14. 3 
 
 12 54 36. 8 
 
 24 22.5 
 
 694 
 
 8 52 59. 9 
 
 1 26.8 
 
 8 54 17. 7 
 
 12 18 42. 6 
 
 24 15.9 
 
 1317 
 
 10 33 34. 6 
 
 6 50.6 
 
 - 10 40 25. 2 
 
 14 4 48.2 
 
 24 23.0 
 
 1298 
 
 8 10 34.2 
 
 1 56.1 
 
 8 12 30. 3 
 
 11 36 51. 4 
 
 24 21. 1 
 
 Taking the mean of these determinations according to the weights indicated by the probable 
 errors, and considering the probable errors of the local times, we have 
 
 + 3h 24^ 2 i 8 .i (K36 
 
 as the longitude of our observatory at Plover Bay from Mare Island. The longitude of Mare 
 Island has been assumed as +8 h 9m 1 8 .0 from Greenwich, or +3 U O m 49.0 from Washington. The 
 longitudes of all points on our western coast are referred to San Francisco as a standard point, and 
 the longitude of San Francisco has been deduced from the observations of moon culminations. For 
 the present I take as the longitude of Plover Bay from Washington 
 
 +6 b 25m 10M 
 
 The following observations of latitude were made July 24 at Illiouliouk, on the Island Una- 
 laska. The observing station is at the sun-dial erected by the Eussian Fur Company, and is about 
 eighty yards very nearly north of the west end of the Greek church. The longitude has been 
 assumed to be 5 h 57 m 47 8 .4 west of Washington. 
 
 On account of cloudy weather, no observations could be made for time, and those for latitude 
 were made through light clouds. Each value of the latitude has been computed from the mean of 
 five observed contacts. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 211 
 
 HltouUouk. 
 
 Q I II 
 
 July 24, I860, <p= + 53 52 60 
 
 ,52 58 
 52 50 
 52 39 
 52 36 
 52 27 
 52 37 
 52 39 
 52 31 
 52 26 
 52 19 
 
 y, = + 53 52 382".7 
 
 At Esquimalt, Vancouver Island, sextant observations were made for time and latitude, and 
 through the kind permission of Captain Edye, li. N., our observing station was on Duntze 
 Head, the point to which the longitudes are referred in the elaborate survey, by the officers of the 
 English navy, of the waters around Vancouver Island. The following are the results obtained for 
 latitude, each value depending on a single altitude : 
 
 Duntze Head. 
 
 O 1 It 
 
 O ' " 
 
 September 4, 1869, y = + 48 25 47 
 
 September 8, 1869, <p = + 48 25 25 
 
 37 
 
 34 
 
 40 
 
 39 
 
 39 
 
 45 
 
 33 
 
 46 
 
 58 
 
 56 
 
 31 
 
 48 
 
 52 
 
 50 
 
 37 
 
 48 
 
 58 
 
 50 
 
 65 
 
 54 
 
 63 
 
 43 
 
 35 
 
 52 
 
 9 
 
 49 
 
 62 
 
 59 
 
 49 
 
 58 
 
 
 67 
 
 
 56 
 
 
 48 
 
 
 55 
 
 <p= + 48 25 452".o <p = + 48 25 491".3 
 
 Our observations for time give the following corrections of the standard chronometer, Negus 
 1316, on local mean time ; the date of the observations being expressed in the time of this chro- 
 nometer : 
 
 h m s 
 
 1869, Sept, 4.3417, 8 11 39.50.28by 16 altitudes of the sun. 
 1869, Sept. 4.3417, 8 11 39.20.38 by 12 altitudes of a Bootis. 
 
 Adopted, 8 11 39.4 0.24 
 
 A set of twelve altitudes of the sun observed with a Dollond sextant, owned by Mr. Very, the 
 navigator of the United States Steamer Mohican, give for this correction 
 
 8 h ll m 40 S .60 8 .35 
 
212 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HALL. 
 
 The comparisons and rates of the chronometers give the following values of the longitude of 
 Dnntze Head from Mare Island Navy Yard: 
 
 Chronometer. 
 
 Marti Island, 
 September 4. 3417. 
 
 Duutze i oad, 
 September 4. 3417. 
 
 Longitude. 
 
 Ncdis 1316 
 
 Ti m s 
 
 8724 
 
 k m 8 
 
 8 11 39 4 
 
 ll III 8 
 
 + 4 37 00 8 
 
 Negus 1276 
 
 3 6 39 5 
 
 3 11 17 5 
 
 _|_ 4 38 o-^o 7 
 
 Negus 1097 
 
 8 8 12 1 
 
 8 12 50 5 
 
 -(- 4 38 41 4 
 
 Dent 2118 
 
 10 50 34 8 
 
 10 55 97 
 
 _j_ 4 34 9^1 
 
 
 8 50 57 8 
 
 8 55 35 4 
 
 -f- 4 37 61 8 
 
 Negus 772 
 
 7 45 21.2 
 
 7 50 3 4 
 
 -f- 4 42 21 7 
 
 Ne^us 1287 
 
 9 32 32.8 
 
 9 37 9 4 
 
 -f 4 36 60 6 
 
 Desilva 694 
 
 8 55 6. 3 
 
 8 59 44 7 
 
 _|_ 4 38 4^2 1 
 
 Negus 1317 
 
 10 44 4.8 
 
 10 48 45 2 
 
 + 4 40 4'i 
 
 Negus 1298 
 
 8 13 32.8 
 
 8 18 9 2 
 
 + 4 36 40 7 
 
 
 
 
 
 Combining the several results according to their weights, the longitude of Duntze Head from 
 Mare Island is 
 
 + 4 m 37 B .l0 8 .40 
 
 The probable errors of the longitudes given by the single chronometers have been deduced by 
 comparing the rates of the chronometers among themselves, and serve only for a combination of 
 the various results. 
 
 The real probable error of the final result is no doubt greater than that given above ; but to 
 determine it would require an investigation of the temperature coefficients, and the stationary and 
 traveling rates of each chronometer. Assuming the longitude of our observing station on Mare 
 Island to be 8 h 9 m 1 8 .0 west of Greenwich, the longitude of Duutze Head is, by our observations, 
 
 8h 13 38 s .l 
 The position of Duntze Head given in the English survey is 
 
 Latitude = + 48 25' 49" 
 Longitude = + 8 U 13 m 47 8 .1 
 
 An increase of the longitude of Mare Island will probably result from the telegraphic determi- 
 nation of the longitude of San Francisco by the United States Coast Survey ; and this will bring 
 the preceding results for longitude into better agreement. 
 
 The sextant observations were made by Mr. Joseph A. Eogers and myself, both of us generally 
 taking part in the observation, one using the sextant and the other observing the time. 
 
 As our determinations of latitude depend on the Pistor & Martin's Patent Sextant No. 107, 1 
 have made a series of measurements of the distances between known stars in order to test the 
 work of this sextant. 
 
 The following table gives the results of these measurements : 
 
 Objects. 
 
 Distance. 
 
 Errors. 
 
 No. of measure- 
 ments. 
 
 a Arietis to /? Arietis 
 
 o 
 3.9 
 
 // // 
 + 9. 13.6 
 
 20 
 
 a Tanri to fi Tanri 
 
 16.8 
 
 + 2. 43. 1, 
 
 14 
 
 
 34 2 
 
 7. 34. 3 
 
 20 
 
 
 66 8 
 
 7.23.7 
 
 19 
 
 a Tauri to a UrsiE Minoris 
 
 72.8 
 93 3 
 
 + 1.02.7 
 10.03.0 
 
 12 
 15 
 
 
 115 2 
 
 1. 15.7 
 
 15 
 
 
 
 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 213 
 
 The resulting errors are so small and of such a character that I shall not make any correction 
 of the sextant observations. Prom the 115 measurements, the average probable error of a single 
 measured distance is 15". 1. 
 
 All the astronomical observations were recorded on loose sheets of paper, and soon after, gen- 
 erally the next day, they were copied into blank-books. The observations are deposited at the 
 Xaval Observatory and can be referred to at any time if need be. 
 
 MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 I- 
 
 The observations for magnetic declination at Plover Bay were made with a compass needle 6 
 inches in length. The compass circle is divided to 30'. A sharp, pointed rock off West Head, and 
 very near the sea horizon, was selected as the point of reference in azimuth. The azimuth of this 
 rock was determined by sextant observations, on August 4th and Oth. The azimuths deduced from 
 the observations are <>1 >0 0'.3 and 01 58'.5, counting from the south towards the west, and the mean 
 value 01 5!V.4 has been adopted. The declination was determined also by direct observations of 
 the sun on August 3, 4, and 5. The observation of August 4 was made through clouds, 
 but as it has the advantage of a different position of the sun, it has received the same weight as 
 the others. The following are the results obtained. 
 
 D;itc. 
 
 Object observed. 
 
 Declination. 
 
 Observer. 
 
 1869. 7i. m. 
 
 
 o / 
 
 
 Aug. 3. 6 55 j>. in. 
 
 Sun. 
 
 19 42. 2 East. 
 
 H. 
 
 4. fl l!4 a.m. 
 
 Sun. 
 
 19 54. 3 
 
 H. 
 
 5. 4 30 p. in. 
 
 Pinnacle. 
 
 19 30.0 
 
 H. 
 
 5. 50 p. HI. 
 
 Pinnacle. 
 
 19 34.6 
 
 H. 
 
 5. 6 7 p.m. 
 
 Sun. 
 
 19 39.0 
 
 H. 
 
 
 
 o / 
 
 
 
 Mean value 
 
 19 40. East. 
 
 
 The observations for dip and intensity were made with the Barrow dip circle No. 4, lent to us 
 by Professor Peirce, Superintendent of the Coast Survey. The vertical circle of this instrument 
 has a diameter of Di inches, and is divided to 10'. The instrument is furnished with two common 
 needles for observing the dip, and with two Lloyd needles for observing the relative intensity. In 
 observing, it was mounted on a tripod, and the observations were made in open air, without pro* 
 tection for the instrument. The instrument was first leveled, then the plane of the vertical circle 
 was made perpendicular to the magnetic meridian by using one of the needles, and finally brought 
 into that meridian by means of the horizontal circle. The readings and reversals were then made 
 in the usual manner. During an observation with a Lloyd needle, the thermometer, Fahrenheit, 
 was read four times, and the thermometer was placed so as to give the temperature of the needle 
 as nearly as the observer could judge. The Lloyd needle was used first without the weight, then 
 with the weight in the inner hole, then with the weight in the outer hole, and lastly, without the 
 weight. The mean of the first and last observations was taken as the dip of the unloaded needle. 
 The weights were inserted in the A ends of the needles, a weight having been provided for each 
 needle. The observations were recorded in convenient forms furnished by Professor Harkness. 
 
 In the following table of results and o 1 denote the dip of the needle with the weight in the 
 inner and outer holes: 
 
214 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HALL. 
 OBSERVATIONS OF MAGNETIC 1)11'. 
 
 Date. 
 
 Station. 
 
 Needle 1. 
 
 Net-die 2. 
 
 Temp. 
 
 Observer. 
 
 1869. h. m. 
 
 
 o / 
 
 / 
 
 o 
 
 
 May 15. 9 10 a. m. 
 
 Washington. 
 
 71 15. 
 
 71 23.4 
 
 69.0 
 
 H. 
 
 Dec. 1. 1 38 p.m. 
 
 Washington. 
 
 71 6.1 
 
 71 34.6 
 
 57.0 
 
 H. 
 
 2. m. 
 
 Washington. 
 
 71 6.5 
 
 71 52. 7 
 
 56.0 
 
 H. 
 
 Aug. 4. 9 30 a. in. 
 
 Plover Bay. 
 
 74 41.3 
 
 74 35.5 
 
 54.0 
 
 H. 
 
 4. 10 p. m. 
 
 Plover Bay. 
 
 74 36.6 
 
 74 34.7 
 
 55.0 
 
 R. 
 
 5. 10 a.m. 
 
 Plover Bay. 
 
 74 41.3 
 
 74 43. 4 
 
 49.0 
 
 H. 
 
 Sept. 6. 11 a.m. 
 
 Esquimalt Navy Yard. 
 
 70 46. 3 
 
 71 20. 
 
 72.0 
 
 H. 
 
 7. 12 p.m. 
 
 Esquimalt Church. 
 
 70 59. 8 
 
 70 55. 6 
 
 67.6 
 
 R. 
 
 9. 11 7 a.m. 
 
 Esquimalt Church. 
 
 71 17. 8 
 
 71 27.0 
 
 80.8 
 
 H. 
 
 23. 14 p.m. 
 
 Yerba Buena. 
 
 60 32.5 
 
 63 6.8 
 
 92.9 
 
 R. 
 
 24. 9 55 a, m. 
 
 Yerba Buena. 
 
 62 5.6 
 
 64 14. 7 
 
 81.5 
 
 H. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS WITH THE LLOYD NEEDLES. 
 
 Date. 
 
 Time. 
 
 Station. 
 
 Needle. 
 
 Dip. 
 
 9. 
 
 e i . 
 
 Temp. 
 
 Obs'r. 
 
 1869. 
 
 h. m. 
 
 
 
 o / 
 
 c / 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 
 May 15 
 
 10 15a.m. 
 
 Washington ... 
 
 1. 
 
 71 48.5 
 
 23 42. 4 
 
 50 23. 8 
 
 74.0 
 
 H. 
 
 
 10 45 a. m. 
 
 Washington ... 
 
 2. 
 
 70 55.6 
 
 37 23.2 
 
 56 23. 
 
 76.0 
 
 H. 
 
 Dec. 1 
 
 2 10p.m. 
 
 Washington ... 
 
 1. 
 
 72 29. 2 
 
 20 19.8 
 
 42 51. 9 
 
 50.2 
 
 H. 
 
 
 2 50 p. m. 
 
 Washington ... 
 
 2. 
 
 71 25.4 
 
 35 40. 8 
 
 55 9.2 
 
 47.2 
 
 H. 
 
 2 
 
 32 p. m. 
 
 Washington ... 
 
 1. 
 
 72 26. 8 
 
 14 6.7 
 
 39 20. 5 
 
 55.0 
 
 H. 
 
 
 54 p. m. 
 
 Washington ... 
 
 2. 
 
 71 25.6 
 
 34 59.5 
 
 54 58.5 
 
 49.6 
 
 H. 
 
 June 23 
 
 10 45a.m. 
 
 Yerba Buena ... 
 
 1. 
 
 63 5.8 
 
 35 35. 7 
 
 54 20. 2 
 
 70.1 
 
 H. 
 
 
 11 50a.m. 
 
 Yerba Buena 
 
 2. 
 
 63 39. 
 
 47 7.8 
 
 58 39. 
 
 76.7 
 
 H. 
 
 24 
 
 11 23 a. m. 
 
 Yerba Bnena - - - 
 
 1. 
 
 62 27.9 
 
 36 14.5 
 
 50 13.2 
 
 63.9 
 
 R. 
 
 
 7p.m. 
 
 Yerba Buena . . . 
 
 2. 
 
 61 12.4 
 
 45 59. 
 
 56 59.0 
 
 66.2 
 
 R. 
 
 Sept. 23 
 
 41 p.m. 
 
 Yerba Buena . . . 
 
 1. 
 
 63 49. 1 
 
 39 33.5 
 
 49 49. 
 
 92.5 
 
 R. 
 
 
 16p.m. 
 
 Yerba Buena . . . 
 
 2. 
 
 62 3.0 
 
 44 42. 5 
 
 56 40.5 
 
 92.9 
 
 R. 
 
 24 
 
 10 23 a. m. 
 
 Yerba Buena ... 
 
 1. 
 
 63 44. 8 
 
 33 30.7 
 
 49 4.2 
 
 80.0 
 
 H. 
 
 
 10 45a.m. 
 
 Yerba Buena ... 
 
 2. 
 
 62 15.0 
 
 44 3.8 
 
 56 51. 2 
 
 80.9 
 
 H. 
 
 Aug. 3 
 
 6 p. m. 
 
 Plover Bay .... 
 
 1. 
 
 74 54.3 
 
 37 45. 8 
 
 60 19.5 
 
 50.2 
 
 H. 
 
 
 6 30 p. m. 
 
 Plover Bay .... 
 
 2. 
 
 75 16.2 
 
 51 1.0 
 
 64 48.5 
 
 48.4 
 
 H. 
 
 4 
 
 11 30a.m. 
 
 Plover Bay .... 
 
 1. 
 
 76 16.4 
 
 37 21.5 
 
 57 34.0 
 
 59.5 
 
 R. 
 
 
 15p.m. 
 
 Plover Bay .... 
 
 2. 
 
 74 30.2 
 
 52 27. 8 
 
 67 1.0 
 
 63.1 
 
 R. 
 
 5 
 
 11 a. m. 
 
 Plover Bay .... 
 
 1. 
 
 75 35. 1 
 
 29 33.0 
 
 60 34. 8 
 
 51.8 
 
 H. 
 
 
 1 p. m. 
 
 Plover Bay .... 
 
 2. 
 
 74 46.5 
 
 51 54.5 
 
 65 50.0 
 
 50.0 
 
 H. 
 
 Sept. 4 
 
 1 23p.m. 
 
 Esquimalt Navy Yard 
 
 1. 
 
 72 59. 3 
 
 28 42. 
 
 49 19.0 
 
 64.3 
 
 H. 
 
 
 2 4p.m. 
 
 Esquimalt Navy Yard 
 
 2. 
 
 71 30.0 
 
 42 15.2 
 
 56 42. 8 
 
 67.0 
 
 H. 
 
 6 
 
 Om. 
 
 Esquimalt Navy Yard 
 
 1. 
 
 72 10.2 
 
 30 56. 5 
 
 45 45. 8 
 
 76.0 
 
 H. 
 
 
 40p.m. 
 
 Esquimalt Navy Yard 
 
 2. 
 
 71 45.4 
 
 41 55.0 
 
 57 23.8 
 
 74.5 
 
 H. 
 
 Sept. 7 
 
 11 10a.m. 
 
 Esquimalt Church . . 
 
 1. 
 
 73 1.6 
 
 29 50. 5 
 
 44 44.0 
 
 64.6 
 
 R. 
 
 
 11 40a.m. 
 
 Esquimalt Church . 
 
 2. 
 
 71 25. 
 
 41 26.7 
 
 58 7.5 
 
 67.0 
 
 R. 
 
 9 
 
 11 30a.m. 
 
 Esquimalt Church . 
 
 1. 
 
 73 9.3 
 
 27 55.2 
 
 50 11.0 
 
 75.5 
 
 H. 
 
 
 Om. 
 
 Esquimalt Church . 
 
 2. 
 
 71 28.1 
 
 41 31.2 
 
 58 11.5 
 
 70.2 
 
 H. 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OF AUGUST 7, 1869. 
 
 215 
 
 The temperature at Yerba Bueiia was observed in June with one of the ship's thermometers. 
 This thermometer had a graduation on the tube, and also a graduated scale attached. The two 
 graduations differed as much 15 in the higher temperatures. The graduation on the tube was 
 used in the observations; but a few days after, and before any comparison with our own thermome- 
 ters, this thermometer was broken. 
 
 In September the station at Yerba Buena was intensely hot. 
 
 The magnetic station at Washington is in Mr. Schott's garden on Capitol Hill; at Yerba 
 Buena, the station is on the beach at high-water mark, and 150 feet north of the government pier 
 on the eastern side of the island the same that was occupied by Professor Harkness in 1866; at 
 Plover Bay, near our observatory on the sand pit ; at Esquimault navy yard, about 40 feet west 
 of the entrance gate in the open yard north of the road ; and at Esquiiuault church. 50 feet west of 
 the English church, near the signal staff erected by the United States Coast Survey. The geograph- 
 ical positions of these places are as follows, the longitudes being reckoned from Greenwich: 
 
 Place. 
 
 Latitude. 
 
 Longitude. 
 
 Washington 
 Yerba Buena 
 
 o / 
 38 53. 1 north 
 37 48.8 " 
 64 22.4 " 
 
 o / 
 76 59. 9 west 
 122 20. 7 " 
 173 19.5 " 
 
 Egquimalt Navy Yard 
 Esquimau Church . . . 
 
 48 25. 8 " 
 48 25. " 
 
 123 26. 5 " 
 123 26. " 
 
 For the value of the magnetic dip to be used in computing the relative values of the magnetic 
 force, I have taken for each station the means of the values observed with the common needles. 
 The values of the dip given by these needles are as follows : 
 
 Washington - 71 19.2 
 
 Washington 71 24. 7 
 
 Plover Bay, Siberia 74 38. 8 
 
 Esquimalt, Vancouver Island 71 7. 7 
 
 Yerba Buena . 62 29.9 
 
 (May.) 
 (December.) 
 
 By comparing the above values of the dip with the values given by the Lloyd needles, the cor- 
 rections for these needles are, 
 
 Needle 1, s = 65'.6 ; Needle 2, c = 4'.5 
 
 The observations at Washington give the only means of estimating the effect of a change of 
 temperature on the values of the dip given by the Lloyd needles. . Hence we have 
 
 Needle 1, A5= I'M At-, Needle 2, A3 = I'M At. 
 
 The values of the coefficients have been found from a change of temperature of 25 ; but an 
 examination of the observations will show that disturbance from other sources, probably a slight 
 rusting of the needles, is so great that it is not worth while to apply any correction for temperature. 
 
 If if be the total magnetic force at a station, S the corrected dip of the Lloyd needle, and the 
 dip of the needle when loaded with a weight, and <p^ 3^ o l denoting similar quantities at another 
 station, we shall have by Dr. Lloyd's method 
 
 <f _cos . sin (<*i 0i) 
 >i~cos 0j. sin (S e)' 
 
216 
 
 REPORT OF PROFESSOR HALL. 
 
 Our observations give the following values of S and 0; two values of <> being observed with 
 each needle as the weight was inserted iu the hole nearest and farthest from the axis : 
 
 Station. 
 
 Needle. 
 
 <i 
 
 H 
 
 ' 
 
 Washington . . 
 
 1 
 
 O 1 
 
 71 2 6 
 
 o / 
 20 27 3 
 
 ' 
 
 36 21 6 
 
 Washington . 
 
 2 
 
 71 6 
 
 45 45 
 
 55 43 4 
 
 Yei'lja Buena. 
 
 1 
 
 62 9 3 
 
 36 13 6 
 
 45 28 3 
 
 Yerba Bueiia. . . 
 
 2 
 
 62 12 9 
 
 50 51 7 
 
 57 17 4 
 
 Plover Bay .... 
 
 1 
 
 74 29 7 
 
 34 53 4 
 
 51 47 8 
 
 Plover Bay 
 
 2 
 
 74 46 5 
 
 59 29 4 
 
 65 53 2 
 
 Ksquiiualt 
 
 1 
 
 71 44 5 
 
 29 21 
 
 41 47 1 
 
 Esquinialt 
 
 2 
 
 71 27 6 
 
 47 30 
 
 57 36 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Assuming that the force at Washington is expressed by the number 13.35, (in English units,) 
 the forces at the stations are found to be as follows : 
 
 Yerba Buena, force = 11. 61 
 11.64 
 11. 71 
 11.78 
 
 Mean = 11. 68 
 
 Plover Bay, force = 12. 38 
 11. 90 
 11.96 
 12.23 
 
 Mean = 12. 12 
 
 Esquinialt, force = 12. 65 
 12.83 
 13.22 
 13.09 
 
 Mean = 12. 95 
 
 After our return to Washington an examination of the needles shows that they have rusted a 
 little, a condition not surprising considering the long sea voyage. 
 
 I am very much indebted to Mr. C. A. Schott, of the United States Coast Survey, for instruc- 
 tion and advice in using the magnetic instruments. 
 
 BAEOMETER AND THEEMOMETEE. 
 
 The barometer used at Plover Bay is a mercurial ship barometer, made by Green, of New York. 
 We had no opportunity of comparing it with a standard barometer. The thermometers are No. 
 38 and No. 39, by Negretti and Zambra, of London. They were exposed so as to give the temper- 
 ature of the air in the shade. By comparison with the standard thermometer of the Naval Obser- 
 vatory Professor Eastman found that these thermometers require the correction respectively of 
 +0.2 and +0.3, and a comparison since our return shows that these corrections have not 
 changed. No corrections have been applied to the observations following: 
 
OBSERVATIONS OF THE ECLIPSE OP AUGUST 7, 1860. 
 
 217 
 
 Date. 
 
 Hour. 
 
 Barometer. 
 
 At. Ther. 
 
 Ther. No. 38. 
 
 Ther. No. 39. 
 
 
 li. m. 
 
 in. 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 1869. Aug. 1 
 
 7 p. m. 
 
 29. 74 
 
 50.0 
 
 50.2 
 
 50.0 
 
 2 
 
 10 a. in. 
 
 29.78 
 
 48.0 
 
 47.3 
 
 47.1 
 
 2 
 
 8 15 p. m. 
 
 29.79 
 
 48.7 
 
 48.3 
 
 48.5 
 
 3 
 
 8 15 a. in. 
 
 29.90 
 
 52.2 
 
 54-.0 
 
 53.8 
 
 3 
 
 3 p. m. 
 
 29.90 
 
 54.5 
 
 53.2 
 
 53.0 
 
 3 
 
 6 45 p. in. 
 
 29.86 
 
 50.8 
 
 47.3 
 
 47.2 
 
 4 
 
 7 15 a.m. 
 
 29. 61 
 
 52.2 
 
 52.7 
 
 52.4 
 
 4 
 
 1 15 p. m. 
 
 29.58 
 
 57.2 
 
 55.4 
 
 55.3 
 
 4 
 
 3 45 p. in. 
 
 29. 58 56. 
 
 56.6 
 
 56.4 
 
 4 
 
 7 45 p. in. 
 
 29.61 
 
 51.6 
 
 51.6 
 
 51.4 
 
 5 
 
 8 (1 a.m. 
 
 29. 55 46. 6 
 
 46.0 
 
 45. H 
 
 5 
 
 12 in. 
 
 29. 62 51. 7 
 
 49.9 
 
 49.7 ' 
 
 5 
 
 6 30 p. m. 
 
 29. 72 55. 3 
 
 47.5 
 
 47.2 
 
 6 
 
 8 45 a.m. 
 
 29. 56 46. 5 
 
 45. 2 
 
 45.0 
 
 6 
 
 3 45 p. in. 
 
 29. 49 56. 5 
 
 55.2 
 
 55. 4 
 
 6 
 
 11 p. m. 
 
 29. 65 46. 3 
 
 44.4 
 
 44.4 
 
 7 
 
 7 a.m. 
 
 29. 83 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 11 15 a. m. 
 
 29. 90 49. 4 
 
 55.0 
 
 55.1 
 
 When about leaving Washington I received from Mr. W. H. Ball a Smithsonian blank for a 
 comparative vocabulary of the natives at Plover Bay. This blank I filled up, and in doing this I 
 was assisted by Mr. William E. White, who has been engaged for several years in trading on that 
 coast. From Lieutenant Commander Louis Kernpff, United States Navy, I have a pretty full 
 vocabulary of the Indians of our northwestern coast and of Vancouver Island. 
 
 I am very much obliged to Professor Coffin, Superintendent of the Nautical Almanac, through 
 whose kindness we were provided with several instruments, and at whose request Professor B. Otis 
 Kendall procured from the University of Pennsylvania the telescope used by Mr. Rogers in observ- 
 ing the eclipse. I am also under obligations to Mr. John Downes, of the Nautical Almanac, who 
 computed the occultations of several stars visible at Plover Bay. 
 
 Finally, 1 tender my sincere thanks to Mr. Joseph A. Eogers, of the United States Hydro- 
 graphic Office, my companion in the expedition, who did everything possible to make our success 
 complete. 
 
 Very respectfully, your obedient servant, 
 
 ASAPH HALL, 
 
 Professor of Mathematics U. 8. Navy. 
 Connnodore B. F. SANDS, U. S. N., 
 
 Superintendent of the U. S. Naval Observatory, Washington, D. C. 
 
 28* 
 
 
 
X 
 4- 
 
 o 
 
 t- 
 
 o 
 
 x 
 
 ^ 
 W 
 
 : 
 -ce 
 
CD 
 *-J 
 
 cti 
 
 i I 
 
 PH 
 
 "C5 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 ce 
 
 0) 
 
 gg 
 
 IV 
 
 Q 
 
 ri 
 
 O 
 0< 
 
 W 
 
 & 
 
Plate HI. 
 
 miANGVLATION 
 
 CONNECTINGTHE 
 
 TEMPORARY OBSERVATORIES 
 
 AT 
 
 DES MOINKS,IOWA, 
 
 IN 
 
 AUGUST 1869. 
 
 Srale, 
 
 Naval <s ,-' 
 Observatory \^x 
 West Signal 
 
 North Base 
 
 East Signal 
 
 latohfield 
 O \i s ervHtory 
 
 O iOO 2OO tlOO -*OO .TOO ftOO 7OO Metres 
 
 2000 ajoo Feet . 
 
 IVoCWm Harkness.U.S.N.del. 
 
 J.Bien I. Hi 
 
Plate IV 
 
 THE SPECTROSCOPE 
 
 .l.Bien lith 
 
Plate V. 
 
 Sun 
 
 n 
 
 in. 
 
 IV 
 
 V. 
 
 Seal ( of Tin Is . 
 
 ./' .7 
 
 Spectra observed. 
 
 Pn.lMV Hnrklii-KS I' > \.,1,-1 
 
 KMorns clirinnohrti 
 
II ll 
 
 N'oon 
 
 -Mi. 
 
 PLATKim. 
 
 6JL. 
 
 r/er/ifm/ /rn 
 
 I'llVW 
 
 n/j.vtr\rffiijft.v>i-iffi the Photometer. 
 
 f 
 
 f'ntw 
 
 ran ober\-atianjsiv't}> the Actinontelt f Avff. 
 
 IO.O 
 
 0.0 
 
lix'ttKiinv ti/' ('(ii'iiiin mill / J ittfutiririnr<'.v irntnrtlititfty ajlrr 
 
 of CffT"ontt- etfj^ef Pt'otuliemn fe..v /rtst r/*W 
 of 7'otafity. 
 
 rnrt 
 
Plate X. 
 
 1)1. K. Ciii-lia. L'.S.A .ph'it". 
 
 TOTAL ECLIPSE OF THE SUN, AUGUST 77? 1869. 
 
 Appearance of Phenomena after comiiiciiceinem of Totality. 
 
 Fac- simile of Photograph N 62. 
 
Plate XI . 
 
 Dr.E. Curtis t'.S. A .photo. 
 
 .I.Bien lith. 
 
 TOTAL ECLIPSE OF THE SUN, AUGUST 7 1869. 
 
 Appearance of Phenomena near the close of Totality 
 
 Fac- simile of Photograph N 63. 
 
The Coiona of the Total Eclipse uf August 7.1869, as seenhythe aid 
 of a four inch tele sc OL P 
 

RETURN MAIN CIRCULATION 
 
 ALL BOOKS ARE SUBJECT TO RECALL 
 RENEW BOOKS BY CALLING 642-3405 
 
 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW 
 
 
 
 
 JUN 2 2 1994 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 FORM NO. DD6 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY 
 BERKELEY, CA 94720 
 
U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY